Quantum Data 802Bt Users Manual Ug

802BT to the manual f5df4673-df5d-48e7-8517-1bfea67e2818

2015-02-05

: Quantum-Data Quantum-Data-802Bt-Users-Manual-492762 quantum-data-802bt-users-manual-492762 quantum-data pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 744 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

User Guide

802BT/802R Video Test

Generator

User Guide

802BT/802R Video Test Generator, User Guide, Revision A.5 (12/22/04)

The information in this document is provided for use by our customers and may not be incorporated into other products or publications without the

expressed written consent of Quantum Data. Quantum Data reserves the right to make changes to its products to improve performance, reliability,

producibility, and (or) marketability. Information furnished by Quantum Data is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed

by Quantum Data for its use.

Updates to this manual are available at http://www.quantumdata.com/support/downloads/.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide i

Contents

Chapter 1 Getting Started

Product overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Standard features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Optional features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Physical controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Power switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Format knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Image knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Image Step key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

R, G, B Video Gate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

ACS, DCS, and DSS Sync Gate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Outputs Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Video interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

VGA interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

DVI-I interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

LVDS interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Special Sync (S/S) interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

S-Video interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Composite video BNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Component video BNC interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Computer interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

RS-232 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

GPIB interface (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

ii Contents

USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

PCMCIA interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Command interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Setting up a terminal connection with the generator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Changing the baud rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Sending commands interactively . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Sending commands from text files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Special operating modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Summary of special modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Special key operations summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

About Video Generator Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

VGM features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Installing VGM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Chapter 2 Testing Video Displays

General video display testing procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Making physical connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Setting the video output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Selecting video formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Selecting formats automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Selecting formats manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Understanding the format library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Organization of format library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Viewing format parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Selecting images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Testing analog computer (IT) CRTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Testing digital computer (IT) FPDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Testing analog composite video SDTV (CE) CRTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Testing analog component video SDTV (CE) CRTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Testing digital component video HDTV (CE) flat panel displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Chapter 3 Administrative Tasks

Displaying system information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Restoring factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Setting and restoring system parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide iii

Calibrating the generator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Calibrating frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Cloning generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Installing firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Memory management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Chapter 4 Working with Formats

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Format library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Format naming conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Composite television format names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Component television format names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Computer display format names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Aperture designators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Using legacy format names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Viewing the format library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Viewing format details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Creating custom formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Determining the signal specifications of the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Creating custom formats using the command line interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Creating a new format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Creating a format based on an existing format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Modifying existing formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Editing Format knob lists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Editing format knob list using internal editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Editing format knob list using command line interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Configuring DCS priority scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Creating format aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Chapter 5 Working with Images

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Viewing the image list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Creating custom images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Command file example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

iv Contents

Downloading bitmap images from a PCMCIA card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Looping through images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Editing Image knob list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Editing image knob list using internal editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Editing Image knob list using command line interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Creating image aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Chapter 6 Working with Test Sequences

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Creating a test sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Creating a test sequence using command line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Creating and editing test sequences using the internal editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Viewing the test sequence list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Viewing the test sequence list using the command line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Deleting a test sequence using the command line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Viewing test sequence using internal sequence editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Running a sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Running a test sequence using the command line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Running a test sequence using internal sequence editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Cancelling the start-up sequence mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Chapter 7 Using GPIB Interface

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Setting the GPIB port address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Queries and commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Sending commands and queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Sending multiple commands and queries per line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Completion handshake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Input buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Status queries and control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Status byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Requesting service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Bus commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide v

Remote/local operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Chapter 8 Analyzing Digital Sources and Cables

Getting started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

HDMI analyzer connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Monitoring HDMI analyzer signal input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

DVI analyzer connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Starting the Analyzer Setup Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Enabling and disabling analyzer images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Measuring timing of video signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Setting up analyzer to measure timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Measuring basic timing parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Measuring detailed timing parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Testing cables and distribution systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Testing accuracy of analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Measuring pixel errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Setting delta error patch parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Measuring pixel errors in patch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Testing InfoFrames (HDMI only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Testing HDMI transmit device InfoFrame capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Testing audio (HDMI only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Testing HDMI transmit device audio capability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Controlling analyzer using command-line interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Signal timing analysis commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Viewing signal timing parameters (on an HDMI/DVI monitor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Viewing specific timing parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Pseudo-random noise generation commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Generating pseudo-random noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Pseudo-random noise analysis commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Analyzing pseudo-random noise in a cable or distribution system . . . . . . . . . 133

Analyzing pseudo-random noise from an external source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Testing the analyzer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Analyzing pixel data (delta error patch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Generating pseudo-random noise from your device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

vi Contents

Implementing pseudo-random noise from your device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

lfsr.h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

lfsl.cpp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Sending pseudo-random noise to external device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Analyzing noise from an external device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Setting pseudo-random noise parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Chapter 9 Testing HDMI Sink Devices

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Getting started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

HDMI connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Setting up the generator for HDMI operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Testing HDMI video. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Testing HDMI video formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Testing HDMI video pixel repetition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Testing HDMI audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Testing 2-channel HDMI audio output from internal SPDIF source . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Testing 8-channel HDMI audio output from internal source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Testing HDMI audio using an external audio source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Testing HDMI InfoFrames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Viewing InfoFrame contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Testing with Active Format Description (AFD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Chapter 10 Testing EDID

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

EDID testing for source devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Testing response of source to EDID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

EDID testing for sink devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Viewing EDID from a display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Writing EDID data to a display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Testing EDID in HDMI sink device for HDMI compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Overview of HDMI compliance testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Testing HDMI sink devices for EDID compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Visual verification of formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide vii

Chapter 11 Testing HDCP

Testing DVI or HDMI receiver with HDCP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Testing HDCP between HDMI transmitter and DVI receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Testing HDCP with static images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Using command-line interface to control HDCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

HDCP? command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Troubleshooting HDCP errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Common problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Running HDCP test in step mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Running an HDCP self-test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Understanding the HDCP test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Chapter 12 Using Special Sync Output

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Operating special sync for probe pulse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Front panel controls and indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Probe coordinate numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Configuring the probe feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Setting sensitivity of knobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Controlling probe using generator controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Controlling probe using command line interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Configuring special sync for FS, LS or CS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Appendix A Command Reference

Commands by name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Appendix B Image Reference

Standard image descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604

Appendix C Error Messages

System errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708

Power-on self test messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708

Power fail message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709

Format errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710

Invalid data error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710

Corrupt data error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710

viii Contents

Error code descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711

2000-2999 Format errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711

3000-3999 Image errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722

4000-4999 Test sequence errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724

5000-5999 Directory errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725

6000-6999 Bitmap errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726

7000-7999 LUT errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726

8000-8999 Font errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727

9000-9999 System errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727

10000-10999 System errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 1

1Getting Started

Topics in this chapter:

•Product overview

•Operating the generator

•Video interfaces

•Command interfaces

•Special operating modes

•About Video Generator Manager

2 Chapter 1 Getting Started

Product overview

The generator enables you to test a broad range of video displays including composite or

component television video signals as well as computer video display terminals. The

generator enables you to quickly set the format appropriate for each display simply by

twisting a knob. The generator’s functions can be customized to support video display

testing in a variety of environments such as development, repair center, or production line.

Standard features

There are over 250 built-in video formats with the generator including VESA, ATSC,

EIA-770, SMPTE, NTSC, and PAL. The generator contains a library of over 250 test

images which enables comprehensive testing of color, size, linearity, convergence, focus,

persistence, and more. You can create custom formats and images, and create test

sequences to automatically progress through a list of formats and images for production

line environments. You can also configure the generator to continuously loop through the

test images.

The generator provides a hot sync feature through the VGA, DVI, or HDMI interface. This

feature simplifies format selection by filtering formats in accordance with the Extended

Display Identification Data (EDID) it receives and processes from the display.

A probe pulse feature is available on the Special Sync BNC connector. This enables you to

trigger an oscilloscope or to synchronize an inspection camera. You can position the

leading edge of the probe pulse anywhere within the video frame. This feature facilitates

troubleshooting by enabling you to focus on very specific video signal problems occurring

anywhere in the video signal. The probe BNC connector can also be configured to output

frame sync, line sync, composite sync, or a special probe pulse.

You can control the generator using the front panel knobs and keys, a command line

interface, or a Windows-based graphical application called Video Generator Manager

(VGM).

The generator supports custom data backup, automatic or on-demand calibration, and

downloadable firmware upgrades.

Optional features

Your generator may include one or more of the following options:

•Digital Visual Interface (Single Link and Dual Link). The generator can be equipped

with a single link or dual link Digital Visual Interface (DVI) transmitter. The DVI

transmitter enables testing of DVI compliant video displays. The DVI option includes

EDID parsing and a hot-plug, EDID-driven format list.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 3

•High Bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP). Generates HDCP encrypted

content for testing DDCP-compliant displays.

•DVI or HDMI Analyzer. Optional receiver, which measures pixel errors at different

frequencies, measures timing of external sources, and displays EDID from external

sources. Can also be used to test cables or distribution systems.

•High Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI). The HDMI feature helps manufacturers

increase the likelihood that their products will not only meet compliance standards, but

also flawlessly interoperate with other HDMI devices.

•General Purpose Interface Bus (IEEE-488). Use to operate the generator in an

automated environment.

•Component video BNC connectors. The generator can be equipped with R, G, B,

VS, and HS/CS BNC connectors.

4 Chapter 1 Getting Started

Operating the generator

This section describes basic operating procedures. There are four operational interfaces

for controlling the generator.

•Physical controls. Most of the generator’s features and functions are supported using

the front panel using the knobs and keys. Functions which are not supported using the

front panel include upgrading the firmware, creating and editing formats, creating and

editing images and reconfiguring the format and image knob lists.

•Command line. An ASCII command line interface, available through the RS-232 port,

allows you to send commands either interactively or as command files. All functions are

supported by the command line interface except upgrading firmware.

•Video Generator Manager (VGM). VGM is a Windows-based application that supports

most generator functions using a graphical user interface. When upgrading the

generator firmware, VGM must be used.

•GPIB Programmatic interface (optional). An IEEE-488 GPIB interface supports the

use of the 802 as a programmable video signal source in an automated test

evironment. All generator commands are supported through this interface.

Physical controls

The physical controls on the generator consists of the Format knob, Image knob, and eight

keys, arranged into four function groups: Image, Video Gate, Sync Gate, and Outputs. All

of the keys have built-in indicator lights. When illuminated, a key’s function is considered

on, or enabled.

Power switch

This rocker switch turns the power on and off. The power supply is auto switching and can

handle 110 or 220v.

Format knob

The Format knob is used to select a video signal format from a list of stored formats. A

format is a set of parameters that specifies the video and sync signal requirements of a

particular timing. Format parameters include timing, sync type, video type, display size,

and others. By turning the knob, you can scroll through a list of formats stored in

non-volatile memory. The list includes the factory default formats. The knob list can be

edited to add custom formats. If a format containing erroneous information is selected, the

generator turns off the outputs, and displays an error message.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 5

Image knob

The Image knob is used to select a test image from a list of stored images. The exact

behavior of the knob depends upon the status of the Image key. Turning the knob when

the light on the Image key is extinguished scrolls through the main list of test images.

Not all images are supported by all signal formats. Some images in the main image list

may be skipped while certain formats are selected. For example, the ColorBar image will

be skipped whenever a monochrome format is selected.If the currently selected image

cannot be drawn given a newly selected format, the Outline image is automatically drawn

after the new format has finished loading.

Some of the image names in the main list may refer to a sub-set of two or more different

images. The images in the sub-sets are selected by first selecting the name of the desired

sub-set from the main image list. If the sub-set consists of just two images, pressing the

Image key will toggle between the two images. The key is illuminated when the second

image is showing.

Image Step key

The Image Step key determines the behavior of the Image knob in normal operating mode

where it is used to select alternate versions of a given test image. The Step key will

illuminate only when you have selected an image with multiple versions. The following

procedure describes how to select image versions.

To select image versions:

1. Using the Image knob, select an image that has multiple versions.

2. Press the Step key. The key illuminates.

3. Turn the Image knob to step through the image versions. As you turn the knob, the

image name on the LCD will not change.

4. Press the Step key again. The light on the key extinguishes, and the Image knob

returns to normal operation.

6 Chapter 1 Getting Started

R, G, B Video Gate keys

The Video Gate keys activate (turn on) or deactivate (turn off) individual color elements

when the generator is in normal operating mode. They also control the addition of primary

color information to the NTSC / PAL video outputs on the generator. The following table

shows the function of the Video Gate keys, and commands for controlling the key function.

The master Outputs key overrides the settings of these keys when turned off.

ACS, DCS, and DSS Sync Gate keys

The Sync Gate keys are used to activate (turn on) or deactivate (turn off) sync signals

when the generator is in normal operating mode. With some formats, more than one type

of sync can be selected by pressing two keys together.

The generator selects a default sync type whenever you select a new format. Not all sync

types are available with all formats. For example, digital video formats will not allow analog

composite sync to be selected. If a key will not illuminate when pressed, then the

corresponding sync type is unavailable. Repeatedly pressing a sync gate key causes the

selected sync to be toggled on and off. When toggled off, no sync will be sent to the

display.

The master Outputs key overrides the settings of these keys when turned off.

Key Function Command

RTurns all of the red video outputs on and off.

REDG

GTurns all of the green video outputs on and off.

When a 2-bit digital monochrome (MDA) signal is

being generated, the G key turns the I (intensity)

signal of the video pair on and off.

GRNG

BTurns all of the blue video outputs on and off.

When a 1 or 2- bit digital monochrome signal is

being generated, the B key turns the V (video) sig-

nal on and off.

BLUG

Key Function Command

ACS Outputs analog composite sync on one or more of

the analog video outputs.

SSST 3; ALLU

DCS Outputs digital composite sync signal.

SSST 2; ALLU

DSS Outputs separate digital horizontal and vertical

sync signals.

SSST 1; ALLU

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 7

Outputs Key

The Outputs key turns all signal outputs on or off when the generator is in normal

operating mode. This is the master output signal control. When the master output control

is turned off, all of the signal outputs (video and sync) of the generator are disabled.

LCD

The generator displays format and image information on the LCD in either of these modes:

•Default display mode: This mode displays an index sequence number left of the

current format and current image. The image version number, which appears on the

display,represents a version of a image that has multiple versions associated with it.

•Status Display mode: This mode replaces the index numbers with codes, which

provide additional information about the active format. This mode is useful when

working with multiple video signal outputs and color encoding methods.

Video types:

• A for analog video

• D for DVI video

• H for HDMI video

Color depths:

• 4 for 4-bits per pixel depth

• 8 for 8-bits per pixel depth

Color space:

Key Function Command

ON Toggles on and off all video and sync.

OUTG

H32 150=DMT0660

V60 250=SMPTE133

Format index Format name

Image name

Image index

Horizontal rate

Vertical rate

H31 D8C=DMT0659

V60 0=SMPTE133

Video type Format name

Image name

Color depth

Color space

Image version

8 Chapter 1 Getting Started

• M for monochrome video

• C for RGB color video

• Y for YPrPb (analog) or YCrCb (digital) with 4:4:4 color sampling

• y for YCrCb (digital) with 4:2:2 color sampling

To use Status Display mode:

1. Turn off the generator.

2. Hold down the Step, G, and B keys while starting the generator, until status display

displays.

Alternatively, you can set the status display mode by entering the following command:

SROP 8; ALLU

Determining if the active format has been modified

If the active format has not been modified from the factory setting, then the index number

and format name are separated by an equal (=) character. If the active format has been

modified, then the index number and format name are separated by a blank space. The

blank space indicates that the active format has been modified from the default format

definition.

Special: keys

Status display

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 9

Video interfaces

This section describes the video interfaces available on the generator.

VGA interface

Use to output analog video for testing analog video displays. The following table describes

the VGA connector pinouts.

DVI-I interface

Use to output digital video for testing DVI-compliant video displays. Note that the DVI-I

connector also provides an analog output which can be used to test analog formats with a

VGA to DVI adapter when the generator is in analog friendly mode.

The DVI connector pinouts are shown in the following table.

Pi Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 Analog Red Video 6 Analog Red Video Ground 11 No Connection

2 Analog Green Video 7 Analog Green Video Ground 12 DDC/EDID Serial Data

3 Analog Blue Video 8 Analog Blue Video Ground 13 Horizontal Sync

4 No Connection 9 DDC/EDID +5 Vdc Out 14 Vertical Sync

5 Digital Ground 10 Digital Ground 15 DDC/EDID Data Clock

Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 TMDS D2- 9 TMDS D1- 17 TMDS D0- C1 Analog Red

2 TMDS D2+ 10 TMDS D1+ 18 TMDS D0+ C2 Analog Green

3 D2/4 Shield 11 D1/3 Shield 19 D0/5 Shield C3 Analog Blue

4 TMDS D4- 12 TMDS D3- 20 TMDS D5- C4 Horizontal Sync

5 TMDS D4+ 13 TMDS D3+ 21 TMDS D5+ C5 Analog Ground

6 DDC Clock 14 +5 Vdc 22 Clock Shield

7 DDC Data 15 Ground 23 TMDS Clock+

8 No Connection 16 Hot Plug Detect 24 TMDS Clock-

10 Chapter 1 Getting Started

LVDS interface

The LVDS connector is located on the front of the generator and is labeled “Digital.” It

emulates a digital host video source and is used for testing LVDS-compliant video

displays. The LVDS connector pinouts are shown in the following table.

HDMI interface

The HDMI connector is located on the front of the generator and is labeled “HDMI.” It

emulates an HDMI-compliant video display. The HDMI connector pinouts are shown in the

following table.

HDMI Type A Connector Pinouts (HDMI option only)

Special Sync (S/S) interface

Use the S/S connector to output frame sync, line sync, composite sync, or a special probe

pulse. For more information, see Chapter 12, “Using Special Sync Output.”

S-Video interface

If you have chosen the TV option your generator will have an S-Video connector on the

right side labeled “SVIDEO.” This is a miniDIN connector that emulates an S-Video

compliant source for outputting composite TV signal.

Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 A0M 10 DDC Clock 19 A0P 28 DDC Data

2 A1M 11 DDC +5 Vdc 20 A1P 29 USB Ground

3 A2M 12 USB+ 21 A2P 30 USB-

4 Clock 1M 13 USB +5 Vdc 22 Clock 1P 31 Shield Ground

5 A3M 14 A4M 23 A3P 32 A4P

6 Shield 15 A5M 24 No Connection 33 A5P

7 No Connection 16 A6M 25 No Connection 34 A6P

8 No Connection 17 A7M 26 No Connection 35 A7P

9 No Connection 18 Clock 2M 27 DDC Ground 36 Clock 2P

Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 TMDS Data 2+ 7 TMDS Data0+ 13 CEC

2 TMDS Data2 Shield 8 TMDS Data0 Shield 14 Reserved (N.C.)

3 TMDS Data2- 9 TMDS Data0- 15 SCL

4 TMDS Data1+ 10 TMDS Clock+ 16 SDA

5 TMDS Data1 Shield 11 TMDS Clock Shield 17 DDC/SEC Ground

6 TMDS Data1- 12 TMDS Clock- 18 +5 V Power

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 11

Composite video BNC

If your generator is equipped with the TV option, it will have a composite TV BNC

connector on the right side, labeled “TV.” This interface emulates an analog composite TV

source.

Component video BNC interface

Your generator can be optionally equipped with separate R. G, B, HS/CS, and VS BNC

connectors on the right side. These interfaces emulate component a analog video source.

12 Chapter 1 Getting Started

Computer interfaces

This section describes the RS-232, GPIB, and USB interfaces.

RS-232 interface

Each generator has a standard RS-232 serial connector, labeled “Serial.” This is a 9-pin

D-Sub male connector which enables you to connect the generator with a computer. A null

modem cable is provided to support this interface. You can communicate with the

generator either through the command line interface from a telnet session or from the

Video Generator Manager (VGM) application. The pinouts for the RS-232 connector are

shown in the following table.

GPIB interface (optional)

The GBIP interface allows you to use the generator as a programmable video signal

source in a larger automated test system. Generators that have the GPIB interface option

have two rotary switches for setting the GPIB address. These switches are accessible

through the ventilation slots. The GPIB connector pinouts are listed in the following table.

USB interface

Use the USB interface for downloading bitmap images from a computer. With VGM 4.0 or

later, the USB interface can be used in place of the serial interface.

Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 Data Carrier Detect 4 Data Terminal Ready 7 Request to Send

2 Received Data 5 Signal Ground 8 Clear to Send

3 Transmitted Data 6 Data Set Ready 9 Ring Indicator

Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 DIO1 7 NRFD 13 DIO5 19 Shield

2 DIO2 8 NDAC 14 DIO6 20 Shield

3 DIO3 9 IFC 15 DIO7 21 Shield

4 DIO4 10 SRQ 16 DIO8 22 Shield

5 EOI 11 ATN 17 REN 23 Shield

6 DAV 12 Shield 18 Shield 24 Signal Ground

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 13

PCMCIA interface

Use the PCMCIA card slot to back up your custom configurations, transfer configurations

and settings from one generator to another, and store bitmap images.

14 Chapter 1 Getting Started

Command interfaces

The common test applications can be accomplished through the physical controls or

through the command line interface. The generator supports an ASCII command and

query language that allows you to control the generator interactively or through batch

processing of command files. All generator functions are supported through this interface.

The command interface is available through two physical interfaces: the RS-232 interface

and the optional IEEE-488 GPIB interface.

The GPIB interface supports programmatic control in an automated test environment,

which is discussed in more detail in Chapter 7, “Using GPIB Interface.” This interface also

supports user interactive command sessions.

The procedures for using the RS-232 interface are explained in this section.

Setting up a terminal connection with the generator

The following procedures describe how to setup a terminal session with the generator

using the RS-232 interface.

To setup a terminal connection with the generator:

Whenever the generator is powered on, the baud rate returns to 2400 bps, no parity, 8

data bits, 1 stop bit, and no handshake.

1. Connect the RS-232 cable between your computer or terminal and the serial connector

on the generator.

2. Using a terminal emulator, such as HyperTerminal, establish a terminal connection with

the generator. Configure the terminal emulator to use the following parameters:

• 2400 baud rate

• 8 data bits

• 1 stop bit

• no parity

• no handshaking

• full duplex

3. Press the Enter key until the R:> prompt appears.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 15

Changing the baud rate

The RS-232 interface can be configured from the physical controls to support faster baud

rates and to supprort a remote keypad (optional accessory). The default configuration is

2400 baud. When the generator is powered on, the baud rate returns to the default

configuration.

To support file transfers, you can change the baud rate of the port to 38400 bps using the

command line interface or 9600 bps using the physical controls.

To increase the baud rate using the command line interface:

1. At the R:> prompt, enter the following command:

MODE 38400 n, 8, 1, h, n

After you press Enter, the terminal emulator will lose its connection with the generator,

which is now set at a different baud rate.

2. Close the terminal emulator session, change the baud rate to 38400, and then re-open

the session, specifying the baud rate as 38400.

To change the baud rate to 9600 using the front panel:

1. Turn off the generator.

2. Hold down the R and DCS keys while starting the generator. The serial port is now set

to 9600 bps. Restarting the generator again, without pressing any keys, will

Sending commands interactively

This procedure describes how to send commands through an interactive user session.

The generator parses command lines one at a time. Command lines must be terminated

with a carriage return (<cr>). The generator immediately echoes each character as it is

received and places it in a command line buffer. When sending multiple commands at

once, separate each command with a semi-colon. Commands are not case sensitive.

To send single commands to the generator:

1. Establish a terminal session with the generator (see page 14).

2. At the R:> prompt, enter commands or queries and terminate with a carriage return.

Command examples

• To display the name of the format currently in the format buffer, enter:

FMTL?

• To load a format, enter:

FMTL format_name

16 Chapter 1 Getting Started

• To apply the format to the generator hardware, enter:

FMTU

• To load an image, enter:

IMGL image_name

• To apply the image to the generator hardware, enter:

IMGU

To send multiple queries and commands to the generator:

1. Establish a terminal session with the generator (see page 14).

2. At the R:> prompt, enter the queries or commands, separating each with a semi-colon

and terminating the command line with a carriage return.

Command examples:

• To query the current format and then load a new format enter the following:

FMTL?; FMTL new_format; FMTL? FMTU

The generator will return the following in response to this command and query string:

current_format; new_format

• To change the format and image active in the generator enter:

FMTL 480p59; IMGL SMPTEbar; ALLU

This tells the generator to load the 480p59 format named “” into the format data buffer,

the image named “SMPTEbar” into the image data buffer, and then to “use” the

contents of both (“all”) buffers to drive the generator's output.

Sending commands from text files

When developing more complex, custom test sequences or formats, it is easiest to enter

commands in a text file, and then send the file to the generator. This approach allows you

to modify the file without entering the entire command script.

To send a text file to the generator:

1. Using a text editor, enter the commands that define a test sequence or format into a

text file, and save the text file using a *.txt extension.

2. Establish a terminal session with the generator (see page 14).

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 17

3. At the R:> prompt, transfer the text file to the generator. For example, to transfer a file

using HyperTerminal, do the following:

a. On the Transfer menu, click Send Text File. The Send Text File dialog box

appears.

b. Select the text file you want to send, and then click Open. HyperTerminal displays

the commands as they are sent.

c. Press Enter once to ensure that the last command is sent.

18 Chapter 1 Getting Started

Special operating modes

You can set the generator to operate in various modes to accomplish specific functions.

When any special operational mode is set, it persists (until overridden) throughout

subsequent power cycles, which may be performed to set other modes.

You can view the operational settings and special functions of the generator on a video

display by viewing the GenOps image. This image provides key sequences and the status

of special operating modes in the generator.

To determine the status of operating modes:

1. Connect the appropriate interface cable to the video display.

2. Using the Format knob, select a format suitable for the display.

3. Turn the Image knob to select the GenOps image.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 19

Summary of special modes

The following table describes the special operating modes, and how to configure the

modes using the physical controls or the command line interface.

Special mode Function Physical control Command

Initialize with factory

defaults Re-initializes generator to fac-

tory defaults. Removes all spe-

cial modes, deletes all custom

objects.

ACS, DSS

INIT

Calibrate Calibrates the generator. R, G, B

SCAL

SROP 32

Clone Copies configuration settings

from one generator to other

generators using a PCMCIA

card.

Step, Outputs Set: SROP 64

Rst: SROP 0 64

Old format library Displays old format names on

LCD.

G Set: SROP 1

Rst: SROP 0 1

Remove all modes Removes all special modes. ACS, DCS, DSS Set: SROP 0

Set GPIB address Sets the GPIB address. DCS Set: GPIB

addr

Rst: INIT

Set baud rate to 9600 Sets baud rate of RS-232 port

to 9600 bps.

R, DCS Set: SROP 256

Rst: SROP 0 256

Enable programmable

keypad

R, OUTPUT Set: SROP 512

Rst: SROP 0 512

Enable numeric key-

pad

Enables remote operation

through remote keypad.

R Set: SROP 128

Rst: SROP 0 128

Analog friendly mode Causes all digital formats to

output analog video signal.

R, B Set: SROP 4

Rst: SROP 0 4

Enable status display Provides additional information

on LCD (analog/digital and

color depth).

Step, G, B Set: SROP 8

Rst: SROP 0 8

DCS priority scheme Changes priority scheme for

putting CS on separate VS and

HS sync outputs when any dig-

ital composite sync (DCS) type

is selected

Step, DCS Set: SROP 4096

Rst: SROP 0 4096

Digital friendly mode Causes all analog formats out-

put digital signal

G, B Set: SROP 2

Rst: SROP 0 2

Color difference

friendly

Outputs digital YCbCr for tele-

vision formats.

B Set: SROP 2048

Rst: SROP 0 2048

Reset HDCP Rx gating

clock

Resets the receiver, and gates

off transmitter clock and data.

Outputs Set: SROP 16

Rst: SROP 0 16

20 Chapter 1 Getting Started

Special key operations summary

The following table describes modes that can be enabled while the generator is running,

and the physical controls and comands for using the modes.

HDCP tester mode Enables HDCP testing. G, ACS Set: SROP 8192

Rst: SROP 0 8192

Hot plug formats Auto-configures generator for-

mat knob list based on EDID in

response to hot plug.

R, ACS Set: SROP 16384

Rst: SROP 0 16384

DVI mode (disable

HDMI)

Outputs DVI on HDMI connec-

tor.

R, G Set: SROP 32768

Rst: SROP 0 32768

Hot plug bypass Bypasses hot plug detection

and auto-configuration of the

generator.

Step, R, ACS Set: SROP 65536

Rst: SROP 0 65536

Special mode Function Physical control Command

Mode Function

Physical control

(hold 1st & press

2nd) Command

Toggle analog/digital Outputs either digital or ana-

log.

G, B AVST x; DVST x

Rotate video type Outputs either RGB, color dif-

ference, or monochrome.

R, B

DDC-based auto-con-

figuration

Auto-configures generator for-

mat knob list based on EDID.

R, ACS

Toggle biLevel/triLevel Toggles between tri-level and

bi-level syncs for analog HDTV

formats with tri-level sync type.

B, ACS TSPG x

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 21

About Video Generator Manager

Video Generator Manager (VGM) is a Microsoft Windows-based program used to operate

the generator from a computer.

VGM features

VGM supports the following functions.

• Creating custom test sequences.

• Creating customized Image or Format knob lists.

• Creating custom formats or modifying existing formats.

• Creating custom images or modifying existing images.

• Archiving custom data.

• Upgrading the generator firmware.

• Re-initializing a generator.

• Calibrating a generator.

• Downloading a bitmap image to a generator.

22 Chapter 1 Getting Started

For information about using VGM, see the VGM online help.

Installing VGM

VGM is available on the Resource CD included with the generator, and from

http://www.quantumdata.com/support/downloads/.

To install VGM:

1. Log onto Windows with Administrator privileges.

2. Do one of the following:

• On the Resource CD, double-click the setup.exe file to begin the installation.

• On the Quantum Data Web site, click the setup.exe file to begin the installation.

3. Follow the on-screen instructions.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 23

2Testing Video Displays

Topics in this chapter:

•General video display testing procedure

•Testing analog computer (IT) CRTs

•Testing digital computer (IT) FPDs

•Testing analog composite video SDTV (CE) CRTs

•Testing analog component video SDTV (CE) CRTs

•Testing digital component video HDTV (CE) flat panel displays

24 Chapter 2 Testing Video Displays

General video display testing procedure

This section provides an overview of the video testing process, which involves connecting

the generator to the display under test, selecting a format appropriate for the display, and

then selecting images to exercise the display to ensure proper functioning.

Making physical connections

Use the following table to connect the generator with display under test.

Setting the video output mode

If the application involves testing similar displays with one type of video signal output for

extended periods of time (for example, in a production environment), use one of the

following modes:

•Digital Friendly mode – Digital formats are output without change, while analog

formats are temporarily switched to digital. This mode is available only if the generator

has a digital option (DVI, LVDS, or HDMI) installed.

•Analog Friendly mode – Analog formats are output without change, while the digital

formats are temporarily switched to analog.

For information about using these modes, see “Summary of special modes” on page 19.

When you need to test various video signal outputs and color encoding methods (for

example, in a repair center), disable all friendly modes, and enable the Status Display

mode (see “LCD” on page 7) so that you can determine the current configuration. Then,

Display type Signal type Cable

Information

Technology

(IT)

Computer - VESA (DMT,

CVT)

Analog component RGB VGA to VGA

Computer - VESA DDWG Digital component RGB DVI to DVI

Consumer

Equipment

(CE)

SDTV - ITU-470-6 base-

band

Analog composite CVBS BNC to RCA 75 Ohm

SDTV - ITU-470-6 base-

band

Analog composite S-Video S-Video (miniDin to

MiniDin)

SDTV - CEA-861B Analog component YPbPr VGA to RCA1

1. Optional cable available from Quantum Data.

HDTV - CEA-861B Digital component DVI

RGB

DVI to DVI, or HDMI to

DVI

HDTV - CEA-861B Digital component HDMI

RGB and YCbCr

HDMI to HDMI

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 25

hold down the G key while pressing and releasing the B key to switch between digital and

analog outputs. The table below shows the AVST and DVST command settings for analog

and digital outputs.

Selecting video formats

This section explains how to configure the generator to output video formats that are

supported by the device being tested.

Note: You can create your own formats. See “Creating custom formats” on page 63 for

details. Additionally, you can create your own Format knob lists. See “Editing Format knob

lists” on page 67 for details.

Selecting formats automatically

When testing EDID-compatible displays, the generator can automatically update the

Format knob list (list of format names shown on the LCD) to include only formats

supported by the display under test. Depending on the output used, the generator can do

this on demand, or automatically when a display is connected.

To update the Format knob list on demand:

1. Connect the display you want to test with the generator.

2. Hold down the R key, and then press and release the ACS key. This puts the generator

into either Analog Friendly or Digital Friendly mode based on the EDID that the

generator receives.

3. Turn the Format knob to choose a format. Only formats supported by the display are

listed.

Video Signal Interface AVST DVST

Analog YYY Grayscale 1 0

Analog RGB Color 2 0

CVBS or S-Video Grayscale 3 0

CVBS or S-Video Color 4 0

Analog YPbPr SDTV Color 6 0

Analog YPbPr HDTV Color 7 0

Digital YYY Grayscale 0 9

Digital RGB Color 0 10

Digital YCbCr SDTVColor 0 13

Digital YCbCr HDTV Color 0 14

26 Chapter 2 Testing Video Displays

To update the Format knob list automatically when a display is connected:

1. Connect the display you want to test with the DVI or HDMI connector on the generator.

(Analog outputs do not support this feature.)

2. Turn the generator off.

3. Hold down the R and ACS keys while starting the generator, until hot plug formats

displays on the LCD.

Note: The generator is now in Digital Friendly mode.

4. Turn the Format knob to choose a format. Only formats supported by the display are

listed.

5. Connect a different device to automatically update the Format knob list again.

Selecting formats manually

When testing a display that is not EDID-compliant, you must manually choose formats

from the generator that are supported by the display.

To do this:

• Identifing the type of display (composite television, component standard definition

television, component high definition television, computer equipment, or other specialty

display).

• Check the specifications of your display for supported formats.

• Learn how the format library is organized, and how formats are named (see below).

• Turn the Format knob to try formats from the appropriate format category. Try the

DMT0660 (VGA) format if you are not sure of which formats to use.

Understanding the format library

After connecting the generator with the display under test, turn generator on, and select a

video format.

This section describes how to choose a video format, from the list of formats built into the

generator, for the display you are testing. A format defines a set of video, timing and sync

parameters for a specific device or standard.

A summary of the format naming convention is provided. For a detailed description of the

naming conventions, see to “Format naming conventions” on page 56.

Organization of format library

The generator has several built-in formats to test a broad range of display types. These

formats are grouped in the following categories:

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 27

• Composite television formats

• Component standard definition television formats

• Component high definition television

• Computer display formats

• Military and medical display formats

• Miscellaneous formats

When you turn the Format knob, the formats are listed in the order shown above.

Composite television formats

Composite television formats are named by the standards defining them. The first three to

five characters of the format name indicate the color coding scheme. The first set of

characters refers to the standard. The next characters are optional and indicate

adjustments to the format. Examples of these formats are:

• NTSC (North American TV)

• PAL (European TV)

• NTSC-J - (where J refers to a Japan standard per NTSC without 7.5 IRE setup)

• PAL-N (where N indicates 3.58205625 MHz color sub-carrier)

• PAL# (where # indicates that the sampling rate is reduced to achieve square pixels)

Component standard definition television formats

Component SDTV formats are applicable in the case of RGB, YPbPr. These formats are

named by their vertical resolution, scanning method, and frame rate. The initial characters

indicating the resolution are followed by the scanning method. The two characters

following the scanning method indicate the frame rate. A typical example of component

standard or definition TV video format is:

• 480i2x30 (for a vertical resolution of 480 pixels with interlaced scanning and a 30 Hz

frame refresh rate; 2x indicates that the pixels are double-clocked for DVI compatibility).

Component high definition television formats

Component high definition television formats, like the standard definition television

formats, are named by their vertical resolution, scanning method, and frame rate. These

formats are applicable in the case of RGB, YPbPr, and YCbCr. These initial characters

indicating the resolution are followed by the scanning method. The two characters

following the scanning method indicate the frame rate. A typical example of component

high definition TV video format is:

• 1080i30 (for a vertical resolution of 1080 active vertical lines with interlaced scanning

and a 30 Hz frame refresh rate).

28 Chapter 2 Testing Video Displays

Computer display formats

Computer display formats are assumed to use progressive scanning. Computer format

names consist of four blocks. The initial three characters indicate the vendor ID using the

EISA ID (for example, IBM, SUN, and VSC) or the standard body or acronym (for example,

SMT, DMT, GTF, CEA, and EIA). The next two characters provide the first two digits of the

horizontal resolution in pixels. Following the horizontal resolution are two characters which

indicate the frame rate. The final character indicates the aperture, which is used only if the

aperture is not 1.33 (A). The following are examples of computer display formats:

• VSC1275 for Viewsonic 1280 by 1024 at 75 Hz

• DMT0685 for Discrete Monitor Timing with 680 by 480 at 85 Hz

Viewing format parameters

You can use the Format image or VGM to view detailed information about formats in the

generator.

To view formats parameters using VGM:

• Open each format in the Font Editor.

• Generate a detailed format listing.

Refer to the VGM online help for instructions.

Selecting images

Once you have determined the format or formats appropriate for testing the display you

will apply a series of images suitable for evaluating the display. Of primary importance is

determining what type of display you are testing (for example, CRT or digital flat panel

display). You must also determine if you are testing composite TV and use images

appropriate for these formats and video types.

Each image in the generator’s library is intended to test one or more attributes of a

particular display type and video type.

Note: You can create your own images. See “Creating custom images” on page 75 for

details. Additionally, you can create your own custom Image knob lists. See “Editing Image

knob list” on page 81 for details.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 29

The table below provides a summary of display characteristics and the images used to

evaluate them. For details on the images and display attributes, see Appendix B, “Image

Reference.”

Display type Display test Recommended images

Analog CRT Geometry (pin and barrel,

linearity)

Static images

Hatch (TVHatch, Hatch_16, Hatch_20), Cir-

clesL, Geom_1 - Geom_5, SMPTE133

Focus Focus_@6, Focus_@7, Focus_@8,

Focus_@9, Text_9, Text_9T, Text_11,

Text_12T, Text_16

Photometry (chrominance,

contrast, levels)

Flat, Flat07, Flat13, Flat20, Flat27, Flat33,

Flat40, Flat47, Flat53, Flat60, Flat67, Flat73,

Flat80, Flat87, Flat93, FlatGray, Flat_01,

Flat_02, Flat_03, Flat_04, Flat_05, Flat_06,

Flat_07, Flat_08, Flat_09, Flat_10, Flat_11,

Flat_12, Flat_13, Flat_14, Flat_15, Flat_16,

Ramp_B, Ramp_G, and Ramp_R,

ColorBar, SMPTEbar, TVBar100 & TVBar_75

(TV formats only)

Luminance SMPTE133 (grayscale), Grays5, Grays9,

Grays11, Grays16, Grays32, Grays64

Gamma correction SMPTE133 (checkerbox)

Resolution BurstTCE, Burst (TV formats only), Grill_11,

Grill_15, Grill_22, Grill_33, Grill_44

Pulse (CE SDTV) PulseBar

Centering Outline0, Outline1, Outline2, Outline3

Voltage Regulation Regulate

Electromagnetic Interfer-

ence

EMITest1, EMITest2, EMITest3, EMITest4,

EMITest5

30 Chapter 2 Testing Video Displays

Digital flat panel

(fixed pixel dis-

play)

Pixel anomalies (stuck pix-

els, misc sampling)

Flat, Raster, Ramp_B, Ramp_G, and Ramp_R,

Focus_@6, Focus_@7, Focus_@8,

Focus_@9, Text_9, Text_9T, Text_11,

Text_12T, Text_16

Photometry (chrominance,

contrast, levels)

Flat, Flat07, Flat13, Flat20, Flat27, Flat33,

Flat40, Flat47, Flat53, Flat60, Flat67, Flat73,

Flat80, Flat87, Flat93, FlatGray, Flat_01,

Flat_02, Flat_03, Flat_04, Flat_05, Flat_06,

Flat_07, Flat_08, Flat_09, Flat_10, Flat_11,

Flat_12, Flat_13, Flat_14, Flat_15, Flat_16,

Ramp_B, Ramp_G, and Ramp_R, ColorBar,

SMPTEbar, SMPTE133

Luminance SMPTE133 (grayscale), Grays5, Grays9,

Grays11, Grays16, Grays32, Grays64

Centering Outline0, Outline1, Outline2, Outline3

Resolution BurstTCE, Grill_11, Grill_15, Grill_22, Grill_33,

Grill_44

Persistence Animated images: Persist, Cubes, SlideX

Display type Display test Recommended images

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 31

Testing analog computer (IT) CRTs

This section describes how to test analog computer (IT) displays.

To test an analog computer CRT:

1. Use a standard VGA cable to connect the VGA connector on the generator with the

VGA connector on the display under test.

2. Calibrate the generator by holding down the R, G and B keys while starting the

generator. See “Calibrating the generator” on page 47.

You can also calibrate the generator by entering the following command:

SCAL

When calibrating the generator, if you load the analog outputs (as they will be loaded

when conducting testing) then the calibrations will be slightly more accurate. This is not

required however. Also, loading the unused outputs with 75 ohms will optimize signal

damping.

3. (Optional) Enable the Status Display mode and Analog Friendly mode (see “Special

operating modes” on page 18). The Analog Friendly mode ensures that the generator

will output an analog signal. The Status Display mode enables you to view the current

output characteristics on the LCD.

4. Determine the formats to test (see “Selecting formats automatically” on page 25).

5. (Optional) To view the EDID on the display, use the Image knob to select the EdidData

image and follow the directions on the display. You may wish to view the EDID data to

verify that the formats required for testing are specified in the EDID.

Alternatively, you can load the image with the following command:

IMGL EdidData; IMGU

6. Determine additional formats to test based on the resolution of the display. The VESA

formats are shown below:

Standard Quantum Data format name

VGA DMT06xx

SVGA DMT08xx

XGA DMT10xx

SXGA DMT12xx

UXGA DMT16xx

QXGA DMT20xx

QSXBA DMT25xx

32 Chapter 2 Testing Video Displays

Determine the images to test:

For analog CRTs you typically want to select images to test for geometry, focusing,

photometry, resolution, cross talk, EMI, and regulation characteristics. For more details on

what images test these specific display attributes, see “Selecting images” on page 28 or

Appendix B, “Image Reference.”

Verify the test set-up:

1. Using the Format knob, select one of the formats you have identified.

Alternatively, you can load the format with the following command:

FMTL format_name; FMTU

2. Using the Image knob, select a suitable image such as ColorBar. Verify that the display

is presenting the image to ensure that the generator is sending a valid signal to the

display.

Alternatively, you can load the image with the following command:

IMGL ColorBar; IMGU

Test the display:

1. Using the Format knob, select the first test format identified.

Alternatively, use these commands to load the format:

FMTL format_name; FMTU

2. Using the Image knob, select the first test image.

Alternatively, you can also load an image with the following command:

IMGL image_name; IMGU

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for all formats and test images. Use the following guidelines to

verify proper operation:

• When testing geometry with the Hatch images (for example, Hatch20) look for

distortion with concave or convex lines near the periphery of the display. Look for

irregular spacing on the cross hatch patterns.

• When testing photometry such as chrominance, use the ColorBar, SMPTE133, or

SMPTEbar images. Look for missing bars which may indicate a dead or

unconnected channel. Also, look at the transition between the bars; they should be

sharp and distinct. Each bar also should be uniform in color and intensity across its

entire width.

• To test luminance, you can use the SMPTE133 (grayscale portion) image. To test

gamma correction, you can use the SMPTE133 (checkerbox portion) image. The

detailed methods for verifying these parameters on the SMPTE133 image are

provided in Appendix B, “Image Reference.”

• When testing focus with the Focus or Text images, the characters in all areas of the

display should be well-formed and in focus.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 33

• When testing resolution with the Grill images, you should be able to see individual

and distinct stripes in all areas of the display at all four resolutions.

• When testing for centering use the Outline images. For detailed methods for

verifying centering with the Outline images, see Appendix B, “Image Reference.”

• When testing for high voltage regulation with the Regulate image, observe the

outline at the edges of the image. They should stay in place and not pull away from

the area of the large white blinking patch (when it appears).

Note: You can customize your generator to run through a specified set of formats and

images automatically or manually by creating test sequences. See to “Creating a test

sequence” on page 87 for details.

34 Chapter 2 Testing Video Displays

Testing digital computer (IT) FPDs

This section describes how to test digital computer (IT) displays.

To test a digital FPD:

1. Use a DVI-I cable to connect the DVI output on the generator with the DVI connector on

the display under test.

2. Place the generator in Digital Friendly mode by holding down the G and B keys while

starting the generator.

Alternatively, you can set the Digital Friendly mode by entering the following command:

SROP 2 4; ALLU

The Digital Friendly mode ensures that the generator will output a digital signal on the

DVI connector, when selecting analog formats from the format library.

3. Determine the formats to test. Auto-select the formats to test by enabling the

generator’s DDC-based auto configuration. See “Selecting formats automatically” on

page 25 for instructions.

4. (Optional) To view the EDID on the display, use the Image knob to select the EdidData

image and follow the directions on the display. Verify that the EDID specifies the formats

required for testing.

Alternatively, you can load the image with the following command:

IMGL EdidData; IMGU

5. Determine which images to test. For digital flat panel displays, you typically want to

select images to test for pixel anomalies, persistence, photometry and resolution

related problems. For more information, see “Selecting images” on page 28 or

Appendix B, “Image Reference.”

Verify the test set-up:

1. Using the Format knob, select one of the formats you have identified.

Alternatively, you can load the format with the following command:

FMTL format_name; FMTU

2. Using the Image knob, select a suitable image such as SMPTE133. Verify that the

display is presenting the image to ensure that the generator is sending a valid signal to

the display.

Alternatively, you can load the image with the following command:

IMGL SMPTE133; IMGU

Test the display:

1. Using the Format knob, select the first test format identified.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 35

2. Using the Image knob, select the first test image.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for all formats and test images. Use the following guidelines to

verify proper operation:

• When testing photometry such as chrominance, use the ColorBar, SMPTE133, or

SMPTEbar images. Look for missing bars which may indicate a dead or

unconnected channel. Also, look at the transition between the bars; they should be

sharp and distinct. Each bar also should be uniform in color and intensity across its

entire width.

• To test luminance, you can use the SMPTE133 (grayscale portion) image. To test

gamma correction, you can use the SMPTE133 (checkerbox portion) image. The

detailed methods for verifying these parameters on the SMPTE133 image are

provided in Appendix B, “Image Reference.”

• When testing for centering use the Outline images. The detailed methods for

verifying centering with the Outline images (Outline0, Outline1, Outline2, Outline3)

are provided in Appendix B, “Image Reference.”

• When testing resolution with the Grill images, you should be able to see individual

and distinct stripes in all areas of the display at all four resolutions.

• When testing for pixel anomalies use the Flat, Raster and Ramp images. Use the

Raster and Flat images to look for pixels that may be stuck On or Off, respectively.

The luminance should increase uniformly for the Ramp image. Also, look for

sparkles indicating problems with sampling.

• When testing for persistence with the animated images (for example, Cubes and

Persist), look for bleeding or trails in the wake of the moving object.

Note: You can customize your generator to run through a specified set of formats and

images automatically or manually by creating test sequences. See “Creating a test

sequence” on page 87 for details.

36 Chapter 2 Testing Video Displays

Testing analog composite video SDTV (CE) CRTs

This section describes how to test CRT composite televisions with analog composite video

inputs.

To test analog composite video SDTV:

1. Use a standard coax cable to connect the TV BNC connector on the generator with the

display under test.

Or, use an S-video cable to connect the SVIDEO connector on the generator with the

S-Video input on the display under test.

2. (Optional) Place the generator in Analog Friendly mode by holding down the R and B

keys while starting the generator (see “Special operating modes” on page 18).

The Analog Friendly mode ensures that the generator will output an analog signal.

3. Determine which composite television standard you need, such as NTSC or PAL, and

then select the formats compatible with the standard. Typically, you would test all the

formats in the family of formats for a standard.

4. Determine the images to test. For analog CRTs you typically want to select images to

test for geometry, focusing, photometry, resolution, cross talk, EMI, and regulation

characteristics. For more details on what images test these specific display attributes,

see “Selecting images” on page 28 or Appendix B, “Image Reference.”

Verify the test set-up:

1. Using the Format knob, select the first NTSC or PAL format.

Alternatively, you can load the format with the following command:

FMTL format_name; FMTU

2. Using the Image knob, select a suitable image such as SMPTEBar. Verify that the

generator is sending a valid signal to the display and that the display is presenting it.

Alternatively, you can load the image with the following command:

IMGL SMPTEBar; IMGU

Test the display:

1. Using the Format knob, select the first test format.

2. Using the Image knob, select the first test image.

Note: You can customize your generator to run through a specified set of formats and

images automatically or manually by creating test sequences. See “Creating a test

sequence” on page 87 for details.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for all formats and test images. Use the following guidelines to

verify proper operation:

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 37

• When testing geometry with the Hatch images (for example, TVHatch and

Hatch20) look for distortion with concave or convex lines near the periphery of the

display. Look for irregular spacing on the cross hatch patterns.

• When testing photometry such as chrominance, use the TVBar100 & TVBar_75

(TV formats only), TVSplBar, SMPTE133 or SMPTEbar images. Look for missing

bars which may indicate a dead or unconnected channel. Also, look at the transition

between the bars; they should be sharp and distinct. Each bar also should be

uniform in color and intensity across its entire width.

• When testing focus with the Focus images, the characters in all areas of the display

should be well-formed and in focus.

• When testing resolution with the Grill images, you should be able to see individual

and distinct stripes in all areas of the display at all four resolutions. When testing

for resolution with the Burst image, the peak intensities of the all of the bursts

should match the white reference level. The darkest portions between the peaks

should match the black reference level.

• When testing for centering, use the Outline and TVoutLin images. The detailed

methods for verifying centering with the Outline images (Outline0, Outline1,

Outline2, Outline3) are provided in Appendix B, “Image Reference.”

• When testing for high voltage regulation with the Regulate image, observe the

outline at the edges of the image. They should stay in place and not pull away from

the area of the large, white blinking patch (when it appears).

38 Chapter 2 Testing Video Displays

Testing analog component video SDTV (CE) CRTs

This section describes how to test CRT televisions with standard definition component

video inputs.

To test an analog component video SDTV display:

1. Use a VGA-to-RCA cable to connect the VGA connector on the generator with the

YPbPr inputs on the display under test.

Or, if your generator has optional component BNC connectors, use a BNC to RCA

cable to connect the BNCs on the generator with the RCA connectors on the display

under test.

2. Identify the component television formats to test. These formats are listed after the

composite television formats in the generator’s default Format knob list. Begin with the

first format in the range of standard definition component television formats (480i).

3. Determine additional formats to test based on the resolution of the television display.

The television specification sheet will provide information on what resolutions to test. It

is necessary to test only those resolutions with the supported scanning type (typically,

interlaced for a standard definition television).

4. Determine the images to test. For analog CRTs you typically want to select images to

test for geometry, focusing, photometry, resolution, cross talk, EMI, and regulation

characteristics. For more details on what images test these specific display attributes,

see “Selecting images” on page 28 or Appendix B, “Image Reference.”

Verify the test set-up:

1. Using the Format knob, select the first component video format (480i).

Alternatively, you can load the format with the following command:

FMTL 480i; FMTU

2. Using the Image knob, select a suitable image such as SMPTE133. Verify that the

generator is sending a valid signal to the display and that the display is presenting it.

Alternatively, you can load the image with the following command:

IMGL SMPTE133; IMGU

Test the display:

1. Using the Format knob, select the first test format.

2. Using the Image knob, select the first test image.

Note: You can customize your generator to run through a specified set of formats and

images automatically or manually by creating test sequences. See “Creating a test

sequence” on page 87 for details.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 39

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for all formats and test images. Use the following guidelines to

verify proper operation:

• When testing geometry with the Hatch images (for example, TVHatch and

Hatch20), look for distortion with concave or convex lines near the periphery of the

display. Look for irregular spacing on the cross hatch patterns.

• When testing photometry such as chrominence, use the TVBar100 & TVBar_75

(TV formats only), ColorBar, SMPTE133 or SMPTEbar images. Look for missing

bars which may indicate a dead or unconnected channel. Also, look at the transition

between the bars; they should be sharp and distinct. Each bar also should be

uniform in color and intensity across its entire width.

• To test luminance you can use the SMPTE133 (grayscale portion) image. To test

gamma correction you can use the SMPTE133 (checkerbox portion) image. The

detailed methods for verifying these parameters on the SMPTE133 image are

provided in Appendix B, “Image Reference.”

• When testing focus with the Focus or Text images, the characters in all areas of the

display should be well-formed and in focus.

• When testing resolution with the Grill images, you should be able to see individual

and distinct stripes in all areas of the display at all four resolutions.

• When testing for centering use the TVOutline and Outline images. The detailed

methods for verifying centering with the Outline images (Outline0, Outline1,

Outline2, Outline3) are provided in Appendix B, “Image Reference.”

• When testing for high voltage regulation with the Regulate image, observe the

outline at the edges of the image. They should stay in place and not pull away from

the area of the large white blinking patch (when it appears).

40 Chapter 2 Testing Video Displays

Testing digital component video HDTV (CE) flat panel

displays

This section describes how to test digital component video for HDTV flat panel displays.

To test a digital (DVI) component video HDTV display:

1. Use a standard DVI cable to the DVI connector on the generator and then to the DVI

connector on the television display under test.

Note: If the display under test has a DVI-D connector you will need a DVI-I to DVI-D

adaptor.

2. Place the generator in Digital Friendly mode by holding down the G and B keys while

starting the generator (see “Special operating modes” on page 18).

This mode ensures that the generator outputs a digital signal on the DVI connector,

even when selecting analog formats from the format library.

3. Identify the high definition component television formats to test. These formats are

listed after the composite television formats in the generator’s default Format knob list.

Begin with the first format (720p) in the range of high definition component television

formats. See “Selecting formats automatically” on page 25.

4. Determine additional formats to test based on the resolution of the television display.

The television product specification sheet will provide information on what resolutions

to test. It is necessary to test only those resolutions with the supported scanning type

(typically interlaced for a high definition television).

5. Determing which images to test. For digital television flat panel displays, you would

typically want to select images to test for pixel anomalies, persistence, photometry and

resolution related problems. For more details on which images test these specific

display attributes, see “Selecting images” on page 28 or Appendix B, “Image

Reference.”

Verify the test set up:

1. Using the Format knob, select the first HDTV video format (720p50).

Alternatively, you can load the format with the following command:

FMTL 720p50; FMTU

2. Using the Image knob, select a suitable image such as the SMPTE133 image. Verify

that the generator is sending a valid signal to the display and that the display is

presenting it.

Alternatively, you can load the image with the following command:

IMGL SMPTE133; IMGU

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 41

Test the display:

1. Using the Format knob, select the first test format.

2. Using the Image knob, select the first test image.

Note: You can customize your generator to run through a specified set of formats and

images automatically or manually by creating test sequences. See “Creating a test

sequence” on page 87 for details.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for all formats and test images. Use the following guidelines to

verify proper operation:

• When testing photometry such as chrominence, use the ColorBar, SMPTE133, or

SMPTEbar images. Look for missing bars which may indicate a dead or

unconnected channel. Also, look at the transition between the bars; they should be

sharp and distinct. Each bar also should be uniform in color and intensity across its

entire width.

• To test luminance, you can use the SMPTE133 (grayscale) images. To test gamma

correction, you can use the SMPTE133 (checkerbox) image. The detailed methods

for verifying these parameters on the SMPTE133 Image are provided in Appendix

B, “Image Reference.”

• When testing for centering, use the Outline images. The detailed methods for

verifying centering with the Outline images (Outline0, Outline1, Outline2, Outline3)

are provided in Appendix B, “Image Reference.”

• When testing resolution with the Grill images, you should be able to see individual

and distinct stripes in all areas of the display at all four resolutions.

• When testing for pixel anomalies, use the Flat, Raster, and Ramp images. Use the

Raster and Flat images to look for pixels that may be stuck On or Off, respectively.

The luminance should increase uniformly for the Ramp image. Also look for

sparkles indicating problems with sampling.

• When testing for persistence with the animated images (Cubes and Persist), look

for bleeding or trails in the wake of the moving object.

42 Chapter 2 Testing Video Displays

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 43

3Administrative Tasks

The chapter describes how to accomplish common administrative tasks. Most

administrative functions are supported through the front panel or command line interface.

However, upgrading firmware can only be achieved through VGM; it is not supported

through the front panel. Most administrative functions are supported through the VGM

application. See the VGM online help for information on performing these administrative

tasks through VGM.

Topics in this chapter:

•Displaying system information

•Restoring factory settings

•Calibrating the generator

•Cloning generators

•Installing firmware

•Memory management

44 Chapter 3 Administrative Tasks

Displaying system information

Use the GenStats image to display information about the generator, including revision

levels of FPGA software installed. This image also list installed options.

To display information about generator:

1. Connect the generator with a display.

2. Choose a format supported by the display.

3. Turn the Image knob to select the GenStats image.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 45

Restoring factory settings

This section describes how to set and restore the generator system parameters.

System Parameters

The following system parameters are stored in the 802’s non-volatile system memory:

• The reference rate calibration factor. The 802 uses a crystal controlled oscillator as the

reference for all timing signals. The crystal frequency has a maximum error of ±50 ppm.

The 802 hardware and firmware is capable of compensating for this small amount of

error by applying a user set calibration factor. The factory default setting is 1.000 for the

calibration factor. Use the

RATC

command to set the pixel calibration factors.

• The maximum pixel clock rate used for error checking formats. All 802 generators will

operate, to some extent, at pixel rates beyond their spec sheet limits. The maximum

rate can be set to a higher limit if it is known that a particular unit will work reliably at

the higher limit. Use the

JRAT

command to set the maximum pixel rate used for error

checking of analog formats.

• The gamma correction flag. This flag determines whether individual formats can control

the application of gamma correction or if gamma correction is disabled regardless of a

format’s setting. The factory default setting is to allow gamma correction to be

controlled by individual formats. Use the

GAMC

command to enable or disable the

gamma correction flag.

Setting and restoring system parameters

There are two ways of changing the settings of these parameters:

• They can be restored to their default factory settings as part of a user initiated system

reset. This will also restore the entire format storage memory to its factory default

contents.

• A suitably equipped computer or terminal connected to one of the communications

ports can be used to set the parameters to user defined settings.

When the generator is reinitialized, each format in the standard library is tested

(one-at-a-time), to determine if the format parameters are fully supported by the generator.

This algorithm is necessary because the standard format library is used across all

generators. If there are some limitation the generator applies a format justification

algorithm. In these cases the generator stores a modified version of the format under a

similar name. If the format is beyond what can be corrected the format is left out of the

generator’s list of formats.

WARNING: The initializing the generator permanently and irreversibly removes all

user-created formats, custom images, test sequences and directories from memory.

46 Chapter 3 Administrative Tasks

To re-initialize generator through system reset:

1. Hold down ACS and DSS while powering up the generator.

A confirmation message is displayed.

2. Press the Outputs key to continue, or press the Step key to cancel the operation.

To re-initialize and calibrate the generator using command interface:

1. Establish a terminal session with the generator (see page 14).

2. Enter the following command:

INIT

The generator then goes through a complete self-test and self-calibration procedure.

To re-initialize without calibrating the generator using the command line:

1. Establish a terminal session with the generator (see page 14).

2. Enter the following command:

BOIT

The generator is re-intialized.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 47

Calibrating the generator

The 802BT/R generator can calibrate itself. Once calibrated, the generator does not

require periodic calibration. There are no physical controls to adjust. All calibration is

electronic. Calibration factors are saved in non-volatile memory.

The calibration accuracy of the generator for analog video voltage swing is specified to be

±14mV (or ±2% for a nominal 700mV signal). Using a typical oscilloscope such as a

Tektronix VM700T, which might have a swing measurement accuracy of ±14mV, we

should expect readings between 674mV to 726mV.

You can also set the analog output calibration factors to values other than those set by the

generator's own self-calibration function. Each channel is calibrated using two

independent zero calibration points, and two independent slope calibration points.

Interpolation equations for the different video types are used to set the caldac values that

controls the output sync and voltage levels to the correct values.

Follow the procedures below to calibrate the generator.

To self-calibrate the generator using the front panel:

1. It is not necessary to load the outputs of a generator during self-calibration. However,

attaching a nominal load may yield a slight increase in accuracy.

2. Simultaneously depress all three R, G and B video gate keys and power cycle the

generator.

The LCD will display a special message indicating that it is about to do a

self-calibration.

3. Release the R, G and B video gate keys and the generator will begin its self-calibration

routine.

You will see calibration factors flash on the display. Observe the display for any error

messages that might occur. If an error message appears, make a note of it and call your

technical support representative for further assistance.

To self-calibrate the generator using the command interface:

1. Establish a terminal session with the generator. See “Setting up a terminal connection

with the generator” on page 14.

2. Enter the following command:

SCAL

The generator then goes through a complete calibration procedure.

To view analog calibration factors:

1. Enter the following commands to view the analog video Red, Green, Blue calibration

factors:

48 Chapter 3 Administrative Tasks

CALF?

The generator presents the following in response:

1089, 2589, 1993, 3223, 1148, 2633, 2059, 3279, 1000, 2505, 1990,

3219, 793, 787, 3382, 3509

Calibrating frequency

All frequencies associated with the generator are derived from a common frequency

reference, which can be calibrated using the rate calibration command RATC.

To reduce all frequency errors to zero:

1. Measure any convenient frequency from the generator using a very accurate frequency

counter.

For example, measure the horizontal TTL separate sync frequency with the DMT0660

format loaded and the horizontal rate temporarily set to 100KHz. Enter the following:

FMTL DMT0660; HRAT 100E3; ALLU

2. Measure the TTL horizontal sync frequency with the frequency counter.

3. Divide the frequency that you expect by the frequency that you measure on the

frequency counter and enter that ratio using the

RATC

command.

For example, if you measure 99.9955782499875 kHz, when you expect

100.000000000KHz, then divide 100.000000000KHz by 99.9950002499875kHz and

enter the following on the command line:

RATC 1.0000442194553987

This will raise all frequencies output by the generator and make them exact.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 49

Cloning generators

This section describes how to copy configuration settings from one generator to other

generators using a PCMCIA card. The entire block of battery backed user memory

(including video formats, custom test images and test sequences) is copied from one

generator to another using a suitable PCMCIA memory card.

The card you need is a Type 1, Battery Backed RAM PCMCIA card with at least 2 MB of

storage. These cards are available from synchrotech P/N PCM-SRW-AM002 2MB. Flash

or compact type memory cards will not work.

Note: See VGM online help for procedures for cloning generators using VGM.

To clone a generator using PCMCIA card:

1. Install the same firmware version on the source and target generators.

Note: This procedure can only be used when the firmware of the source and target

generators are the same. To verify the firmware version, load the GenStats image.

2. Insert PCMCIA card into the source generator.

3. Hold down the Step and Outputs keys while starting generator.

4. Choose WR (press Outputs key) to copy the generator configuration to the card.

The generator displays a Done message when it is done writing to the card.

5. Transfer the PCMCIA card to the second generator.

6. Hold down the Step and Output keys while starting generator.

7. Choose RD (press Step key) to copy the configuration data from the card to the

generator.

All user-created objects on the target generator will be deleted. To cancel the operation,

press the ACS key.

8. Hold down the ASC, DCS, and DSS keys while starting the generator to return the

generator to normal operating mode.

50 Chapter 3 Administrative Tasks

Installing firmware

Firmware upgrades are available at http://www.quantumdata.com/support/downloads/.

Important: Always backup any custom objects (formats, images) stored on the generator

before installing an upgrade. The firmware installation re-initializes the generator, which

deletes any custom objects. After installing the firmware, you can restore custom objects.

Firmware upgrades require the use of VGM. Please refer to the VGM online help for

procedures on upgrading the generator.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 51

Memory management

The generator includes commands to manage its internal memory resources. These

commands or useful if the generator exhibits degraded performance or other anomolies.

To verify and correct memory related anomolies:

1. Check the generator’s memory for corruption by running a memory self test:

MEMT // runs the memory self test

MEMT? // returns the results of the memory self test

1 // returned value from the memory self test

A value of “0” indicates no memory corruption or inconsistency was found. A value of

“1” indicates that there is a memory anomoly.

2. If the memory self test reveals a memory corruption, re-initialize the generator:

BOIT // re-initializes the generator

3. If the memory self test does not reveal a memory corruption, check to see if there is

enough free memory and contiguous memory:

MEMF? // queries for the free memory

808320 // returns the amount of free memory

MEML? // queries for the largest contiguous block of free memory

816568 // returns the largest contiguous block of free memory

If the amount of memory is low or the amount of contiguous memory is low the memory

should be compacted.

4. Compact the generators memory:

MEMC // compacts the memory

MEML? // queries for the largest contiguous block of free memory

818280 // should show larger block of contiguous free memory

52 Chapter 3 Administrative Tasks

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 53

4Working with Formats

Topics in this chapter:

•Overview

•Format library

•Format naming conventions

•Creating custom formats

•Editing Format knob lists

•Configuring DCS priority scheme

•Creating format aliases

54 Chapter 4 Working with Formats

Overview

The generators enable you to create your own formats and edit the Format knob list

through the Video Generator Manager (VGM) application and the command line interface.

Please refer to the VGM online help for details on procedures for these functions

performed through VGM. This chapter provides procedures for customizing formats

through the command line interface.

The following functions are provided:

•Creating formats. If the application environment requires constant switching between

video outputs, for example, you can build your own library of customized formats that

individually select which video output is driven via the proper setting of AVST and DVST

parameters.

•Editing the Format knob list. You can edit the Format knob list to include any

combination of built-in and user-defined formats. The default operating mode of the 802

uses the Format knob to select formats from a list of built in formats.

•Creating aliases. You can assign your own names to formats using aliases.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 55

Format library

The generator has a built-in library of formats. The same format library is used for all 802

models. The formats are stored in read-only memory (ROM) along with the generator’s

operating code.

Compatibility

Some formats are for displays and graphics systems that may not be compatible with a

specific generator model. Attempting to load an incompatible format will give you an error

message. If a format has too high of a pixel rate, a modified version of the format can be

created with reduced horizontal timing parameters that bring the pixel clock rate below the

limit of the generator. The horizontal and vertical rates however are correct. This lets you

light-up a display and verify most of its operation. These modified formats can be created

through the FMTJ command which references a global parameter (JRAT) that determines

the bandwidth of the generator.

56 Chapter 4 Working with Formats

Format naming conventions

The names used in the built-in format library have been updated for the generator. Many

format names on previous versions of the 802 generators have been renamed to more

closely match the naming conventions used in the display industry or in the appropriate

standards. There are three sets of naming conventions described in this section: 1)

Composite television formats, 2) Component television formats, and 3) Computer display

formats. In addition, several miscellaneous naming conventions are also described.

Composite television format names

Composite television formats apply to RF, D2, CVBS, and S-VIDEO signal interfaces.

Composite television format names consist of a three to five character color coding

scheme indicator followed by optional characters that indicate format adjustments.

Example

Color coding schemes

•NTSC

•PAL

• SECAM

Adjustments to the format

• 4x == sampling rate is four times the color sub-carrier frequency

• 44 == NTSC with color sub-carrier frequency of 4.43361875 MHz (as opposed to 3.58)

• # == sampling rate is reduced in order to make pixels square

• jp == NTSC-Japan (NTSC without 7.5 IRE setup)

• -M == PAL with 3.57561149 MHz color sub-carrier and M timing (M/PAL Brazil)

• -N == PAL with 3.58205625 MHz color sub-carrier (N/PAL Argentina, Paraguay,

Uruguay)

• -N == NTSC color encoding with N timing (NTSC-N)

• -60 == PAL format that allows NTSC tape playback on PAL TV (PAL-60)

• plusKKKK == Enhanced wide-screen PALplus TV transmission system

• p == progressive video game signal (for example, NTSCp or PALp)

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 57

Common composite TV formats with sub-carriers and their respective standards:

• NTSC - ITU-R BT.470-6

• NTSC# - SMPTE 170M

• NTSC#KA - SMPTE 170M

• PAL - ITU-R BT.470-6

• PAL# - ITU-R BT.470-6

• PAL#KA - ITU-R BT.470-6

• SECAM

Component television format names

Component television formats are named by their vertical resolution and scanning

method. These formats apply to RGB, YPbPr, YcbCr and HD-SDI video. In component

television format naming, the first three or four characters indicate the active vertical lines

in the format, the next characters indicate the frame tracing method, and the last two

optional characters indicate the frame rate.

Example:

Active vertical lines

• 480 (active lines with 525 total lines)

• 1035 (active lines with 1125 total lines)

Frame tracing methods

• p = progressive

• i = interlaced

• s = segmented frame interlace (e.g. 1080s24, where a 24p frame is segmented into two

interlaced fields occurring at twice the frame rate - scene changes only between field

pairs – also known as “48sF”)

• x = any – progressive, interlace, or segmented

Active

vertical

lines

Frame

tracing

method

Frame

rate

i2x480 29

Double

clocking

58 Chapter 4 Working with Formats

Double clocking

• i2x = double-clocked interlace (scene may change between fields) pixels are

double-clocked for DVI compatibility)

Frame rate

Frame rate is optional. If no frame rate is given, then the frame rates are assumed.

• 24 = 24 Hz

• 60 = 60 Hz

Common component TV formats

• 480pLH Component SDTV signal containing letterboxed 16x9 high-definition content

• 480pSH Component SDTV signal containing anamorphically under-sampled 16x9

content

Computer display format names

Computer display formats are assumed to use progressive scanning. In computer format

naming, the first three characters indicate the vendor ID using the EISA ID (for example,

IBM, SUN, VSC) or the display type, the next two characters indicate the approximate

horizontal resolution, the next two digits indicate the frame rate (which will be half the field

rate with interlace scanning), and the final character designates the aperture (used only

when the aperture is not A).

Example

Vendor ID (EISA)

• SMT for VESA (digital) Safe Mode Timing

• DMT for VESA Standard Discrete Monitor Timing

• GTF for VESA Generalized Timing Format standard

• CEA for Consumer Electronics Association

• EIA for Electronics Industries Association (CEA)

Approximate horizontal resolution examples

• 02 for 256 pixels

• 09 for 960 pixels

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 59

• 12 for 1200 pixels

• 30 for 3072 pixels

Frame rate examples (half the field rate with interlace scanning)

• 48 for 48Hz

• 60 for 60Hz

• 75 for 75Hz

Aperture (used only when the aperture is not A)

See “Aperture designators” on page 59.

Common computer display formats

• VSC1275 for Viewsonic 1280 by 1024 at 75 Hz

• DMT0685 for Discrete Monitor Timing with 680 by 480 at 85 Hz

Aperture designators

Format names may include one or two characters that describe the aperture of the display.

These are listed below.

Aspect ratio

• Q = 1.00:1 Quadrate - MIL, Radiology (square, 512x512, 1024x1024)

• G = 1.25:1 Graphics workstation (5x4, 1280x1024, 1600x1280)

• A = 1.33:1 Academy (4x3, 640x480, 800x600, 1024x768, 1280x960, 1600x1200)

• B = 1.44:1 Big (13x9, IMAX™)

• T = 1.50:1 Three halves (3x2, 1152x768 Apple Computer)

• V = 1.56:1 PALplus WWS case #2 (14x9, see ITU-R BT.1119)

• D = 1.60:1 VESA CVT proposed (16x10, 1728x1080, 1280x800)

• E = 1.67:1 European film (15x9 or 5x3, 1200x720, 1280x768, 1800x1080, a.k.a. “1.66”)

• H = 1.78:1 High-definition image (16x9, 1280x720,1920x1080)

• F = 1.85:1 US film (320x173, 1280x692, 1920x1038)

• U = 2.00:1 Univisum™ (2x1, 1280x640, 1920x960)

• C = 2.39:1 CinemaScope™ (160x67, 1280x536, 1920x804, a.k.a. “2.35”, was 2.35

before 1971)

Content fitting operators

• N = Natural (do nothing)

60 Chapter 4 Working with Formats

• L = Letterbox (linear scale to fit one axis, center w/black bars in other)

• Z = Zoom (blow- up to fill destination aperture with cropping, or LI )

• S = Scope (under-sample content horizontally)

• W = Widescreen (over-sample content horizontally)

• J = Justify (non- linear horizontal expand – more near edges)

• K = Keep safe (shrink to avoid cropping – provide safe title)

• P = Pan & Scan (truncate)

• M = Mirror (horizontally – rear projection)

Other Modifiers

• I = Inverse (undo operator; for example, S = Scope and SI = Inverse Scope)

• O = Orthogonally (rotate operator effect or aperture 90 degrees)

• X = Wildcard or special

Using legacy format names

You can configure the generator to display names using conventions from older generator

models.

Important: Configuring the generator to use legacy names will delete all user-defined

video formats currently stored in the generator. Therefore, it is important to back up the user

data files from the generator to disk and then restore them back to the generator. VGM can

be used to backup the generator.

To display legacy format names:

1. Turn the generator off.

2. Hold down the G key, and then power on the generator.

The following message appears on the front panel LCD.

3. Release the G key. This setting is retained throughout subsequent power cycles.

To re-assert the default format names you must reinitialize the generator:

1. Turn the generator off.

2. Hold down the ACS and DSS keys and then power on the generator.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 61

Viewing the format library

You can view the list of formats available in the generator using VGM or the command line

interface. Please refer to the VGM online help for instructions on using VGM to view the

format list.

To display the format list:

1. Establish a terminal session with the generator.

2. Load the default format directory (fmt) or custom format directory by entering the

following command:

DIRL fmt

3. List the contents of the format directory by entering the following command:

NAMQ? 1 200 // lists the formats from the first format through 200

Viewing format details

You can view the format parameters of any standard or custom format using VGM or the

command line interface. Please refer to the VGM online help for instructions on using VGM

to view format details. Use the following procedure to view the detailed format information

through the command line interface.

To view formats parameters using the Format image:

1. Connect the generator with a display.

62 Chapter 4 Working with Formats

2. Load the Format image.

Information about the current format is displays.

3. Press the Step key, then turn Image knob to view additional formats.

To display individual format parameters:

1. Establish a terminal session with the generator.

2. Load the format whose parameters you want to view by entering the following

command:

FMTL format; FMTU //specify a valid format name

3. Enter the format parameter(s) you want to view. For example, to view the horizontal

resolution, vertical resolution, horizontal period, and analog video sync type, enter the

following command:

HRES? VRES? HTOT? AVST?

The generator responds with the information in sequence as shown below:

640;480;800;2

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 63

Creating custom formats

You can create new signal formats for the generator and add them to non-volatile memory.

You can create formats through VGM or by using a command line interface (either the

RS-232 port or the IEEE-488 port). The recommended procedure for creating new formats

is to use VGM. VGM contains the algorithms for ensuring compatibility between format

parameters where there are dependencies in their respective values. Please refer to the

VGM online help for information about creating formats using VGM.

Determining the signal specifications of the display

Your custom format will be based on the specifications of the display under test. Typically,

you can find the information required for the format in the detailed specification sheet for

the display. At a basic level, you must determine if you are working with an analog or a

digital display. An analog display can show an endless range of colors or shades of gray.

Analog displays normally accept video signal levels in the 1 Vp-p range. Digital displays

are more limited and can display only a few gray levels or a limited number of pre-defined

colors. These displays normally accept TTL video signals in the 4 Vp-p range.

Creating custom formats using the command line interface

There are two methods for creating formats through the command line interface. The first

method is to use the FMTN command to set all format parameters in the format buffer to

their default values, and then modify each value. The second method is to select an

existing format to use as a template for the new format, and then modify only the values

needed to create the new format. When using this method, you can save the new format

under a new name or the existing name.

Independent of the method you choose, you can enter each command interactively or,

using your computer, create a text file containing all the commands you want to issue, and

then download the text file to the generator. For instructions on creating and downloading

text files, see “Sending commands from text files” on page 16.

Creating a new format

The FMTN command is used in creating a new format. This command sets all of the

format parameters to known, default values. For a list of the parameters and their default

values, see “FMTN” on page 331. Use the following procedure to create a new format

using interactive commands.

64 Chapter 4 Working with Formats

To create a new format:

1. Establish a terminal session with the generator. See “Setting up a terminal connection

with the generator” on page 14.

2. Enter the following commands to initialize all parameters to default values and begin a

format editing session:

FMTN // initializes all parameters to default values

FMTB // begins a format editing session

3. Enter the format parameter commands in sequence to set the values for the new

format.

HRES 654 // sets the horizontal resolution to 654 pixels

. // other format parameters

HTOT 720 // sets the horizontal total to 720 pixels

Note: You do not need to enter a parameter value if it matches the FMTN default

setting.

4. End the editing session and save the new format using the following commands:

FMTE // ends a format editing session

FMTA new_fmt_name // saves format as new specified name

5. Assign the format to the knob list using the following commands:

DIRL FMT // loads format directory into edit buffer

DIRB // begins a directory edit session

NAMI 20 new_fmt_name // assigns format to format knob list at 20

DIRE // ends a directory editing session

DIRS // saves contents of directory as current name

Creating a format based on an existing format

Use the following procedure to create a format based on an existing format using

interactive commands.

To create a custom format based on an existing format:

1. Determine the signal specifications of the display under test and select an existing

format in the generator’s format library whose parameter values are similar.

2. Connect the display to the generator.

3. Using the Format knob, select the format you want to use as a template for the new

format.

4. Using the Image knob, select the Format image to view the parameters of the selected

format.

5. Establish a terminal session with the generator.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 65

6. Enter the following commands to load and begin editing the existing format.

FMTL format_name // loads existing format into the format editor

FMTB // begins a format editing session

7. Enter the format parameter commands in sequence where the new values differ from

the existing format values. For example to modify the horizontal resolution enter the

following command:

HRES 654

Note: You do not need to enter parameter values if they match the existing format.

8. End the editing session and save the new format using the following commands:

FMTE // ends a format editing session

FMTA new_fmt_name // saves format as new specified name

9. Assign the format to the knob list using the following commands:

DIRL FMT // loads format directory into edit buffer

DIRB // begins a directory edit session

NAMI 20 new_fmt_name // assigns format to format knob list at 20

DIRE // ends a directory editing session

DIRS // saves contents of directory as current name

Modifying existing formats

The following procedure demonstrates how to modify the parameters of an existing format

using the command interface. This example changes an existing digital format from RGB

4:4:4 to YCbCr 4:2:2, and saves the format into the default format directory.

To edit an existing format:

1. Establish a terminal session with the generator.

2. Set the generator to digital friendly mode:

SROP 2 (or SROP 2 4) // sets generator to digital friendly mode

SROP 8 // sets generator to status display mode

3. Load and begin editing the format:

FMTL existing_format // loads existing format into format editor

FMTB // begins a format editing session

4. Enter the format parameter commands in sequence where the values differ from the

default values. For example to modify the component video type enter the following

command:

DVST 14 // changes the component color to YCbCr

DVSM 2 // changes component color make up to 4:2:2

ALLU // loads hardware and outputs new signal

5. End the editing session and save the format using the following commands:

FMTE // ends the format editing session

66 Chapter 4 Working with Formats

FMTA new_fmt_name // saves format as new specified name

6. Assign the format to the knob list using these commands:

DIRL FMT // loads format directory into edit buffer

DIRB // begins a directory edit session

NAMI 20 new_fmt_name // assigns new format to format knob list at 20

DIRE // ends a directory editing session

DIRS // saves contents of directory as current name

7. Load the new format using these commands:

FMTL new_fmt_name // loads new format in edit buffer

FMTU // applies new format to the generator

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 67

Editing Format knob lists

Stepping through all of the available formats using the Format knob can be time

consuming. This is particularly true if you regularly use only a few formats that may be

scattered throughout the list. You can set up the 802 to show only the formats you want, in

the order you want, when you turn the Format knob. The 802 maintains a list of these

formats in non-volatile memory, and you can edit the list to include formats you have

created and to remove any unneeded formats. You can edit the Format knob list using the

internal editor or the command line interface; however, the most convenient way to edit the

list and create custom knob lists is through VGM. Please refer to the VGM online help for

instructions on creating and editing format knob lists.

The default Format knob list is named fmt. In addition to editing this list, you can also

create new lists and name them to reflect their uses at your site.

Editing format knob list using internal editor

Use the following procedures to edit the format knob list using the internal format editor.

To edit the format knob list:

1. Power-up the generator while holding down the Image key until programmer is

displayed.

2. Select the FmtList image.

68 Chapter 4 Working with Formats

3. Press the Step key to start the Format List editor.

The left side of the screen shows the current contents of the format list. The formats

appear in the order that they are selected by the Format knob during normal operation.

The right side of the screen shows the available formats.

4. Use the Format and Image knobs to select formats in the lists. Use these commands

to edit the format list.

5. Press the Exit (Step) key to save the edited list and exit the editor.

Key Function

Insert (DCS) Inserts the format selected from the list of available files at the cursor

position in the format list.

Delete (B) Remove the selected format from the format list.

Move (R) Moves the selected format in the format list to another position in the list.

To move the selected format, press Move, use the Format knob to spec-

ify the target position, and then press the Move key again.

Remove (DSS) Deletes the format selected in the list of available formats. This will

erase the entire contents of the file from non-volatile memory. Since this

operation can destroy a lot of programming work, an on-screen mes-

sage will ask you to confirm the removal of the file. Pressing the Yes or

OK key will erase the file. Pressing the No or Cancel key will abort the

removal operation.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 69

Editing format knob list using command line interface

Use the following procedures to edit the format knob list and create new knob lists through

the command line interface.

To insert a format at a specific location in a format knob list:

1. Establish a terminal session with the generator.

2. Create a format and save it to the generator (see “Creating custom formats” on page

63.)

3. Enter the following commands:

DIRL fmt // loads default format list (fmt)

DIRB // begins a directory editing session

NAMI 257 MyFormat // inserts format named MyFormat at position 257

DIRE // ends the directory editing session

DIRS // saves contents of directory as current name

To remove a format from a specific location in the format knob list:

DIRL fmt // loads default format list (fmt)

DIRB // begins a directory editing session

NAMK MyFormat // deletes format named MyFormat

DIRE // ends the directory editing session

DIRS // saves contents of directory as current name

To create a new format knob list, enter the following commands:

DIRL fmt // loads default format list (fmt)

DIRB // begins a directory editing session

NAMK format_1 // deletes format_1

. // deletes other formats

NAMK format_x // deletes format_x

NAMI 1 new_format_1 // inserts new_format_1 at location 1

. // insert other formats

NAMI x new_format_x // inserts new_format_x at location x

DIRE // ends the directory editing session

DIRA new_fmt // saves new format list as new_fmt

To apply a new format knob list:

FMTP new_fmt // loads format list new_fmt

70 Chapter 4 Working with Formats

Configuring DCS priority scheme

There are two priority schemes for putting composite sync (CS) on the separate VS and

HS sync outputs when digital composite sync (DCS) is selected through types SSST = 2,

6, or 11. This applies to both the VS and HS pins of the VGA connector and to the analog

component BNC connectors.

• Legacy DSC priority scheme

• Default DSC priority scheme

The following table describes the legacy DCS priority scheme for horizontal sync.

The following table describes the legacy DCS priority scheme for vertical sync.

OUTG SSST HSPG VSPG HS Output HS Polarity

0 Do not care Do not care Do not care No signal Do not care

1 Do not care 0 Do not care No signal Do not care

Do not care 8 (DPMS –

OFF)

Do not care Do not care No signal Do not care

19 (DPMS –

SUSPEND)

Do not care Do not care Horizontal

Sync

HSPP

1 10 (DPMS –

STANDBY)

Do not care Do not care No signal Do not care

1 1, 3, 5, 7, or 11 1 Do not care Horizontal

Sync

HSPP

1 2, 6, or 11

(DCS)

1 Do not care Composite

Sync

HSPP

OUTG SSST HSPG VSPG VS Output VS Polarity

0 Do not care Do not care Do not care No signal Do not care

1 Do not care Do not care 0 No signal Do not care

Do not care 8 (DPMS –

OFF)

Do not care Do not care No signal Do not care

19 (DPMS –

SUSPEND)

Do not care Do not care No signal Do not care

1 10 (DPMS –

STANDBY)

Do not care Do not care Vertical Sync VSPP

1 1, 3, 5, 7, or 11 Do not care 1 Vertical Sync VSPP

1 2, 6, or 11

(DCS)

1 Do not care No signal Do not care

1 2, 6, or 11

(DCS)

01Composite

Sync

VSPP

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 71

The following table describe the default DCS priority scheme for horizontal sync.

The following table describe the default DCS priority scheme for vertical sync.

To enable the legacy DCS priority scheme:

1. Turn off the generator.

2. Hold down the Step and DCS keys while starting the generator.

The generator will remain in this mode through subsequent power cycles until the

generator is re-initialized or reset with the “No special modes” command (hold down

ACS+DCS+DSS while starting the generator).

OUTG SSST HSPG HS Output HS Polarity

0 Do not care Do not care No signal Do not care

1 Do not care 0 No signal Do not care

Do not care 8 (DPMS – OFF) Do not care No signal Do not care

1 9 (DPMS – SUS-

PEND)

Do not care Horizontal Sync HSPP

1 10 (DPMS –

STANDBY)

Do not care No signal Do not care

1 1, 3, 5, 7, or 11 1 Horizontal Sync HSPP

1 2, 6, or 11 (DCS) 1 Composite Sync CSPP

OUTG SSST VSPG VS Output VS Polarity

0 Do not care Do not care No signal Do not care

1 Do not care 0 No signal Do not care

Do not care 8 (DPMS – OFF) Do not care No signal Do not care

1 9 (DPMS – SUS-

PEND)

Do not care No signal Do not care

1 10 (DPMS –

STANDBY)

Do not care vertical Sync VSPP

1 1, 3, 5, 7, or 11 1 vertical Sync VSPP

1 2, 6, or 11 (DCS) 1 Composite Sync CSPP

72 Chapter 4 Working with Formats

Creating format aliases

You can create aliases for formats to suit the needs of your site. Use the following

procedure to create an alias for a format, save it to the format directory, and then use the

alias.

To create and use a format alias:

1. Establish a terminal session with the generator.

2. Enter the following commands:

ALIN your_alias format // assigns alias to format

DIRL FMT // loads default format list (fmt)

DIRB // begins a format editing session

NAMI 1 “your_alias” // assigns alias to format directory

DIRE // ends a format editing session

DIRA FMT // saves alias in default format directory

To delete a format alias, enter the following command:

ALIK your_alias // removes the alias

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 73

5Working with Images

Topics in this chapter:

•Overview

•Creating custom images

•Downloading bitmap images from a PCMCIA card

•Looping through images

•Editing Image knob list

•Creating image aliases

74 Chapter 5 Working with Images

Overview

The 802R/BT includes a library of 250 test images. In addition, you can create custom

images, which consist of one or more drawing primitives, including single pixel dots, lines,

rectangles, and ovals. You can select the grayscale and color tables used in the image and

save the images in non-volatile memory. Custom images can be added to the list of built-in

images that can be selected with the Image knob. You can create and edit test images and

edit the Image knob list using the Video Generator Manager (VGM) application or the

command line interface. Please refer to the VGM online help for details on creating custom

images using VGM.

The following functions are provided:

•Creating images. You can create your own custom images and add them to the image

library.

•Downloading bitmap images. You can also create your own images in other

applications and save them as bitmap files which can then be downloaded using a

terminal emulator or from a PCMCIA card.

•Editing the Image knob list. You can edit the Image knob list to include any

combination of built-in and custom images. The default operating mode of the 802 uses

the Image knob to select images from an internal list of built-in images.

•Setting up a looping image display. You can set up a continuous cycling mode that

draws images one-after-another in an infinite loop. Image looping can be used for

burn-in testing or for running single-mode displays at trade shows.

•Creating aliases. You can assign your own names to images using aliases.

Viewing the image list

You can view the list of images available in the generator using VGM or the command line

interface. Please refer to the VGM online help for details on viewing the image list using

VGM. Use the following procedure to view the image list using the command line interface.

To display the image list:

1. Establish a terminal session with the generator. See “Setting up a terminal connection

with the generator” on page 14.

2. Load the default image directory (img) or custom image directory by entering the

following command:

DIRL IMG

3. List the contents of the image directory by entering the following command:

NAMQ? 1 200 // lists the images from the first through 200

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 75

Creating custom images

This section describes how to create images and add them to the generator’s image

library, and how to customize the image list. The recommended method for creating

images is create a text file containing the commands for creating the image, and then

downloading the text file to the generator. Another method for creating images is to use

the Image Editor in VGM to create a basic image, save the basic image as a command file

in VGM, and then open and edit the command file to refine the image as needed.

To create custom images with a command file:

1. Using a text editor, open a text file (command file) on your computer and enter the

following commands.

OUTG 0 // gates all video and sync outputs off

IMGN new_image // creates a new image

IMGB // begin an image editing session

XRES 640 // sets the horizontal resolution

YRES 480 // sets the vertical resolution

. // other image parameters

IMGE // ends an image editing session

IMGA new_image // saves image as new_image

OUTG 1 // gates all video and sync outputs on

IMGU // draws the image

ALLU // applies the buffer to the generator hardware

2. Save the text file, using a *.txt extension.

3. Establish a terminal session with the generator. See “Setting up a terminal connection

with the generator” on page 14.

4. At the R:> prompt, transfer the text file to the generator. For example, to transfer a file

using HyperTerminal, do the following:

a. On the Transfer menu, click Send Text File. The Send Text File dialog box

appears.

b. Select the text file you want to send, and then click Open. HyperTerminal displays

the commands as they are sent.

c. Press Enter once to ensure that the last command is sent.

5. Assign the image to Image knob list by entering the following commands:

DIRL IMG // loads image directory into edit buffer

DIRB // begins a directory editing session

NAMI 20 new_image // assigns image to image knob list at 20

DIRE // ends a directory editing session

DIRS // saves contents of directory as current name

76 Chapter 5 Working with Images

Command file example

The following sample command file creates the image shown in the graphic below.

Commands used to draw image above:

IMGN

IMGB // begin an editing session

XRES 640 // set the horizontal resolution

YRES 480 // set the vertical resolution

HATO Foreground 24 18

OVAL Foreground 479 479 80 0 GrayPat0

CROS White

RECT White 205 154 770 77 GrayPat50

RECT Black 128 96 30 45 GrayPat100

RECT Black 128 96 482 45 GrayPat100

RECT Black 128 96 30 345 GrayPat100

RECT Black 128 96 482 345 GrayPat100

RECT Red 30 96 184 347 GrayPat100

RECT Blue 30 96 243 347 GrayPat100

RECT Yellow 30 96 273 347 GrayPat100

RECT Cyan 30 96 303 347 GrayPat100

RECT Magenta 30 96 333 347 GrayPat100

RECT Blue 30 96 363 347 GrayPat100

FORM White 271 78

RECT Green 30 96 213 347 GrayPat100

RECT Green 30 96 393 347 GrayPat100

RECT Red 30 96 423 347 GrayPat100

RECT White 128 96 30 45 GrayPat7

RECT White 128 96 482 45 GrayPat7

RECT White 128 96 30 345 GrayPat7

RECT White 128 96 482 345 GrayPat7

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 77

IMGE // end an editing session

IMGA MyImage // save image as MyImage

78 Chapter 5 Working with Images

Downloading bitmap images from a PCMCIA card

This section describes how to store a bitmap image on a standard PCMCIA memory card,

and then load the image as you would a built-in image. The generator can load only one

image from a card. Although you can download an image using VGM, loading an image

from a card is faster and easier.

This feature is supported on 802BT and 802R generators with video board FPGA 91 or

later, DVI daughter card FPGA 0xE3 or later, and firmware 7.3834000 or later (802BT) or

7.38180000 or later (802R). To determine your generator specifications, “Displaying

system information” on page 44.

To copy an image onto a card:

1. Save the image you want to store on the card as an 8-bit or 32-bit (24-bit TrueColor)

bitmap (.bmp) file on your computer using any file name.

2. Hold down the ACS, DCS, and DSS keys, and then cycle the power to the generator.

This removes any special modes and sets the baud rate of the serial port to 2400 bps.

3. Establish a terminal session with the generator and change the baud rate of the

generator to 38400 bps (see “Changing the baud rate” on page 15.)

4. Insert a PCMCIA card into the slot in the generator.

5. At the R:> prompt, enter the following command to initiate the YMODEM-BATCH

file-upload protocol:

YMDI

6. At the R:> prompt, transfer the file to the card. For example, to transfer a file using

HyperTerminal, do the following:

a. On the Transfer menu, click Send File. The Send File dialog box appears.

b. In the Filename box, click Browse and select the bitmap file you want to copy to

the generator.

c. In the Protocol box, click the down arrow and select Ymodem.

d. Click Send.

Note: You must send the image within about 15 seconds after sending the YMDI

command. If the R:> command prompt appears before you send the image, send the

YDMI command again, and then send the image again.

For descriptions of any error codes displayed, see Appendix C, “Error Messages.”

To view an image stored on a PCMCIA card:

1. Insert the card that contains the image you want to view.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 79

Note: The card you need is a Type 1, Battery Backed RAM PCMCIA card with at least

2 MB of storage. These cards are available from synchrotech P/N PCM-SRW-AM002

2MB. Flash or compact type memory cards will not work.

2. Use one of the following procedures to configure the generator to use a format with the

same pixel depth as the image:

• Select a built-in format with the appropriate pixel depth.

• Create a format with the appropriate pixel depth.

• Establish a terminal session with the generator and enter the following commands

to set the pixel depth to 32-bit (24-bit TrueColor) or 8-bit:

PELD 32; ALLU

PELD 8; ALLU

• Hold down the R key while pressing and releasing the G key to toggle the pixel

depth between 8 and 32-bit pixel depths.

3. Using the Image knob, select the CardBMP image, or enter this command:

IMGL CardBMP; ALLU

The image appears on the display.

4. To view an image from a different card, switch the cards, and then re-select the

CardBMP image.

80 Chapter 5 Working with Images

Looping through images

You can set up a continuous cycling mode that draws all images in the image knob

listone-after-another in an infinite loop. When activated, the message “Loop Enabled”

appears on the display under test.

To enable image looping:

1. Using the Format knob, select a format compatible with the display under test.

2. Turn the Image knob clockwise beyond the last image in the Image list about one turn.

The message “Loop Enabled” appears on the display under test. After a second or two,

the first image in the cycle appears and the generator continuously cycles through the

test image list using a given format in this mode.

To disable image looping:

1. Turn the Image knob counter-clockwise to stop image looping.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 81

Editing Image knob list

If your test environment requires only a subset of the available built-in images, you can

configure the 802 to show only the images you want, in the order you want, when the

Image knob is turned. The 802 maintains a list of these images in non-volatile memory.

You can edit this list to include images you have created and to remove unneeded images.

The Image knob list can be edited using the command line interface; however, the most

convenient way to edit the knob list and create custom knob lists is using VGM. Please

refer to the VGM online help for procedures on editing image knob lists.

The default Image knob list is named img. In addition to editing this list, you can also

create new lists and name them to reflect their uses at your site.

Editing image knob list using internal editor

Use the following procedures to edit the image knob list using the internal image editor.

To edit list of images:

1. Power-up the generator while holding down the Image key until programmer is

displayed.

2. Select the ImgList image.

3. Press the Step key to start the image list editor.

The left side of the screen shows the current contents of the image list. The images are

listed in the order that they are selected by the Image knob during normal operation.

The right side of the screen shows all of the available images. The built-in images are

at the top of the list, followed by a factory default custom image. This image is used as

starting point to creating you own custom images. Any user-defined images in

non-volatile memory are at the bottom of the list.

4. Use the Format and Image knobs to select images in the lists. Use these commands

to edit the image list.

Key Function

Insert (DCS) Inserts the image selected in the list of available files before the image

selected in the image list.

The current firmware does not allow entering a secondary version of a

built-in image to the list. The primary version will need to be first

selected during normal operation. Pressing the Image key will then

select the secondary version.

Delete (B) Remove the selected image from the image list.

82 Chapter 5 Working with Images

5. Press the Exit (Step) key to save the list and exit the editor.

Editing Image knob list using command line interface

Use the following procedures to edit the Image knob list and create new knob lists through

the command line interface.

To insert an image at a specific location in the default image knob list:

1. Establish a terminal session with the generator.

2. Create a custom image and save it to the generator. See “Creating custom images” on

page 75.

3. Enter the following commands:

DIRL img // loads default image list called img

DIRB // begins a directory editing session

NAMI 111 MyImage // inserts image named MyImage at position 111

DIRE // ends the directory editing session

DIRS // saves the contents of directory as current name

To remove an image from a specific location in the image knob list:

DIRL img // loads default image list called img

DIRB // begins a directory editing session

NAMK MyImage // deletes image named MyImage

DIRE // ends the directory editing session

DIRS // saves the contents of directory as current name

To create a new image knob list:

DIRL img // loads default image list called img

DIRB // begins a directory editing session

NAMK image_1 // deletes image named image_1

. // deletes other images

NAMK image_x // deletes image_x

NAMI 1 new_image_1 // inserts new_image_1 at location 1

. // inserts other images

NAMI x new_image_x // inserts new_image_x at location x

Move (R) Moves the image selected in the image list to another position in the list.

To move the selected image, press Move, use the Format knob to spec-

ify the new position, and then press the Move key again.

Remove (DSS) Deletes the selected user-defined image from the list of available files.

This will erase the entire contents of the file from non-volatile memory.

Standard images cannot be deleted.

Key Function

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 83

DIRE // ends the directory editing session

DIRA new_img // saves new image list as new_img

To apply a new image knob list:

IMGP new_img // loads image list new_img

84 Chapter 5 Working with Images

Creating image aliases

You can create image aliases to suit the needs of your site. Use the following procedure to

create an alias for an image, save it to the image directory, and then use the image.

To create and use an image alias:

1. Establish a terminal session with the generator.

2. Enter the following commands:

ALIN your_alias image // assigns alias to image

DIRL IMG // loads default image list (img)

DIRB // begins an image editing session

NAMI 1 “your_alias” // assigns alias to image directory

DIRE // ends an image editing session

DIRA IMG // saves alias in default image directory

To delete an image alias:

Enter the following command:

ALIK your_alias // removes the alias

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 85

6Working with Test

Sequences

Topics in this chapter:

•Overview

•Creating a test sequence

•Viewing the test sequence list

•Running a sequence

86 Chapter 6 Working with Test Sequences

Overview

When testing video displays, you typically select a format using the Format knob, and then

select an image using the Image knob. In a production environment, where there might be

a need to test several combinations of formats and images, you can create a test

sequence to automate the process of selecting formats and images. Test sequences

provide a way to progress through a pre-defined sequence of format and images, either

manually or automatically.

You can create test sequences using the command line interface, the internal sequence

editor or the Video Generator Manager (VGM) application. This section describes how to

create and run test sequences using the command line interface and internal sequence

editor. Please refer to the VGM online help for instructions on defining and running a test

sequence from VGM.

The following functions are provided:

• Create your own custom test sequences consisting of multiple steps. Each step

specifies the format and image to display as well as the duration of the step. You can

create multiple sequence files, which are stored in non-volatile memory.

• Program the 802R/BT generator to run in test-sequence mode on power-up. This mode

of operation is useful in a manufacturing test environment where the same test

procedure must be repeated on many identical displays. Multiple test sequences can

be stored in the generator and selected by the operator.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 87

Creating a test sequence

You can create a test sequence using the command line interface, the generator’s built-in

editor or VGM.

Creating a test sequence using command line

You can develop test sequences either by entering command interactively through a

terminal session or by entering a series of commands in a text file and then send them to

the generator through hyper terminal. When developing long test sequences, the

recommended procedure is to enter commands in a text file, and then send the file to the

generator. This approach enables you to change the test sequence without entering the

entire command script.

Use the following procedure to create a test sequence, save it to the sequence directory,

and then run it using the command line interface.

To create and save a test sequence interactively using the command line interface:

1. Establish a terminal session with the generator.

2. Enter the following commands to create a three-step sequence named MySeq.

SEQN // initializes the sequence edit buffer

SEQB // begins a sequence editing session

STEP 1 // selects a step to be edited

SDLY 5.0 // sets the delay for the current step to five seconds

FMTL 480p59 // loads a format

IMGL SMPTEbar // loads an image

STEP 2 // selects a step to be edited

SDLY 5.0 // sets the delay for the current step to five seconds

FMTL 720p60 // loads a second format (same image)

IMGL Outline1 // loads an image

STEP 3 // selects a step to be edited

SDLY 5.0 // sets the delay for the current step to five seconds

FMTL 1080i29 // loads a third format

IMGL Geom_4 // loads another image

SEQE // ends the sequence editing session

SEQA MySeq // saves the current contents of the sequence editor

To create and save a test sequence from a text file:

1. Using a text editor, open a text file (command file) on your computer and enter the

following commands to create a three-step sequence named MySeq.:

SEQN // initializes the sequence edit buffer

SEQB // begins a sequence editing session

STEP 1 // selects a step to be edited

SDLY 5.0 // sets the delay for the current step to five seconds

FMTL 480p59 // loads a format

88 Chapter 6 Working with Test Sequences

IMGL SMPTEbar // loads an image

STEP 2 // selects a step to be edited

SDLY 5.0 // sets the delay for the current step to five seconds

FMTL 720p60 // loads a second format (same image)

IMGL Outline1 // loads an image

STEP 3 // selects a step to be edited

SDLY 5.0 // sets the delay for the current step to five seconds

FMTL 1080i29 // loads a third format

IMGL Geom_4 // loads another image

SEQE // ends the sequence editing session

SEQA MySeq // saves the current contents of the sequence editor

2. Save the text file, using a *.txt extension.

3. Establish a terminal session with the generator.

4. Transfer the text file to the generator. For example, to transfer the file using

HyperTerminal, do the following:

a. On the Transfer menu, click Send Text File. The Send Text File dialog box

appears.

b. Select the text file you want to send, and then click Open. HyperTerminal displays

the commands as they are sent.

c. Press Enter once to ensure that the last command is sent.

To insert a sequence at a specific location in the sequence list:

1. Establish a terminal session with the generator.

2. Enter the following commands:

DIRL seq // loads sequence directory into edit buffer

DIRB // begins a directory editing session

NAMI 1 MySeq // assigns sequence to sequence list at 1

DIRE // ends the directory editing session

DIRS // saves contents of directory as current name

Creating and editing test sequences using the internal editor

You can use the generator’s internal Sequence Editor to create, edit and run test

sequences without using VGM. The 802 can be configured to allow an operator to run only

certain sequence files in the sequence mode. The 802 maintains a list of these accessible

sequences in non-volatile memory. You will need to edit the list if you wish to add

sequences you have created. The procedures for creating and editing the sequence file

list are provided below.

To create a test sequence using the internal sequence editor:

1. Turn on the generator while pressing the Image key until programmer is displayed.

2. Select the SeqList image.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 89

3. Press the Image key to start the Sequence List editor.

4. Use the Image knob to select a sequence file from the list of available files. NewSeq is

provided by default to serve as a template.

5. Press the Insert key (DCS) to insert the NewSeq file into the sequence list.

6. Use the Format knob to select the NewSeq file, and then press the Modify key.

7. Use the Format knob to select the field you want to edit. Use the Image knob to select

field values.

Press Change (Outputs) to apply the selected value.

Press Insert (ACS) to insert a new step.

Press Clear (G) to delete all steps.

Press Delete (B) to delete the selected step.

To move the selected step, press Move (R), then use the Format knob to select the

target position, and then press Move again.

8. Press Mode (DSS) to specify how the generator should run the sequence file when the

generator is started. If you have multiple sequence files, the file with the most recent

mode setting you make will apply upon startup. Setting the mode for a file will

90 Chapter 6 Working with Test Sequences

deactivate the mode status of all other sequence files. If a start-up mode is not set for

any sequence file, then the generator will start in the normal operating mode.

9. Press Save (DCS) to save the sequence file. Use the Format and Image knobs to

specify a name for the file by selecting the characters presented.

10. Press Exit (Image) to exit the Sequence Editor, and to return to the Sequence List

editor.

To edit the list of sequences that can be used:

1. Hold down the Image key while starting the generator, until programmer is displayed.

2. Select the SeqList image.

3. Press the Image key to start the Sequence List editor.

The Sequence List box shows a list of sequence files that can be selected with the

Format knob. The Available Files box shows all sequence files available.

Mode Display option Description

blank If no mode is specified the sequence is not started when the

generator is started.

step Use the Image knob to advance through sequence steps.

You cannot advance past the last step. However, rotating the

Image knob forward one revolution past the last step will

change the mode to automatic. Rotating the Image knob

backward one revolution changes the mode back to manual.

Step information is displayed on the LCD only.

step -s# Current step number is displayed with image on display

being tested.

step -display Complete step information (sequence name, format, image,

and step number) is displayed with image on display being

tested.

wrap Use Image knob to advance through sequence steps.

Advancing past the last step restarts at the first step.

Step information is displayed on the LCD only.

wrap -s# Current step number is displayed with image on display

being tested.

wrap -display Complete step information is displayed with image on dis-

play being tested.

auto Automatically and continuously cycles though sequence

steps, and displays step information on LCD only.

auto -s# Current step number is displayed with image on display

being tested.

auto -display Complete step information is displayed with image on dis-

play being tested.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 91

4. Use these controls to edit the list of sequence files.

5. Press Exit to save the list, and to exit the editor.

Control Description

Move Use the Format knob to select the file you want to move, press Move, then use

the Format knob to specify the target location, and then press Move again.

Delete Removes the selected sequence file from the sequence list.

Insert Inserts the sequence file selected from the list of available files into the

sequence list.

Remove Deletes the sequence file selected in the list of available files from non-volatile

memory.

Modify Opens the selected sequence file in the Sequence Editor.

92 Chapter 6 Working with Test Sequences

Viewing the test sequence list

You can view the list of test sequences stored in the generator using the command line

interface, the internal sequence editor or VGM.

Viewing the test sequence list using the command line

Use the following procedure to view the test sequence list using the command line

interface.

To view the sequence list using the command line interface:

1. Establish a terminal session with the generator.

2. Load the default test sequence directory (seq) or custom sequence directory using the

following command:

DIRL seq

3. List the contents of the sequence directory by entering the following command:

NAMQ? 1 4 // lists test sequences from the first through the fourth

Deleting a test sequence using the command line

Use the following procedure to delete a test sequence list using the command line

interface.

To delete a test sequence using the command line interface:

1. Establish a terminal session with the generator.

2. Load the default test sequence directory (seq) or custom sequence directory and begin

an editing session using the following commands:

DIRL seq

DIRB

3. Delete the sequence by entering the following command:

NAMK myseq

ALLU

4. End and save the sequence editing session using the following command:

DIRE

DIRS

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 93

Viewing test sequence using internal sequence editor

Use the following procedure to view the test sequence list using the internal sequence

editor.

To view the sequence list using the internal sequence editor:

1. Hold down the Image key while starting the generator, until programmer is displayed.

2. Select the SeqList image.

3. Press the Image key to start the Sequence List editor.

The Sequence List box shows a list of sequence files that can be selected with the

Format knob. The Available Files box shows all sequence files available.

94 Chapter 6 Working with Test Sequences

Running a sequence

Regardless of how you created a test sequence you can initiate it through the command

line, the built-in editor or VGM. For information on running a test sequence through VGM

refer to the VGM help. The instructions for running test sequences through the command

line or internal sequence editor are provided below.

Running a test sequence using the command line

A sequence can run in one of three modes:

• Step and stop mode, where the progression of the sequence is under user control, and

the sequence halts after the final step.

• Step and wrap mode, where the progression of the sequence is under user control, and

it continuously loops (repeats the sequence steps).

• Automatic mode, which enables automatic progression through the sequence list and

also continuous looping.

The following procedures describe how to use these modes:

To run a sequence in step and stop mode:

1. Establish a terminal session with the generator.

2. Enter the following commands:

SEQL MySeq // loads MySeq into sequence edit buffer

SMOD 1 // sets step mode to manual with stop after last step

SEQU // starts running the sequence

3. Turn the Image knob to progress through the sequence.

4. To stop the sequence, enter the following command:

SMOD 0; ALLU

To run a sequence in step and wrap mode:

1. Establish a terminal session with the generator.

2. Enter the following commands:

SEQL MySeq // loads MySeq into sequence edit buffer

SMOD 2 // sets step mode to manual with wrapping after last step

SEQU // starts running the sequence

3. Turn the Image knob to progress through the sequence.

4. To stop the sequence, enter the following command:

SMOD 0; ALLU

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 95

To run a sequence in automatic mode:

1. Establish a terminal session with the generator.

2. Enter the following commands:

SEQL MySeq // loads MySeq into sequence edit buffer

SMOD 3 // sets the sequence mode to run in auto mode

SEQU // starts running the MySeq sequence

3. To stop the sequence, hold down the ACS, DCS, and DSS keys, and then cycle the

power to the generator.

To run a sequence at power up:

1. Run the sequence in the desired mode.

2. Turn off the power to the generator.

3. Start the generator in normal operating mode (without holding down any keys).

4. Depending on the selected mode, the sequence will start automatically, or you can turn

the Image knob to move forward and backward though the sequence.

The format and image names for each step and the current step number will appear on

the LCD. Additional status information may appear before the step number, depending

on the mode. This will be S for step, W for wrap and A for automatic.

5. To stop the sequence, hold down the ACS, DCS, and DSS keys, and then cycle the

power to the generator.

To run a manual sequence continuously:

1. Rotate the Image knob a full turn clockwise beyond the last step. A message on the

LCD will confirm that the continuous cycle is running.

2. To stop the cycle, rotate the Image knob counter-clockwise. The generator will

remember if the sequence was in continuous cycle mode on power down. If so, it will

remain in continuous cycle mode when the generator is powered on.

Running a test sequence using internal sequence editor

To run a sequence, that was created using the internal sequence editor:

1. Configure one sequence file with a mode setting through the sequence editor (see

“Creating and editing test sequences using the internal editor” on page 88).

2. Start the generator in normal operating mode, without holding any keys down.

96 Chapter 6 Working with Test Sequences

3. Depending on the mode of the sequence, the sequence will start automatically, or you

need to turn the Image knob to move forward and backward though the sequence.

The LCD will display the format and image name for each step, and the current step

number. Additional status information may appear before the step number, depending

on the mode (manual, automatic, wrap).

A manual mode sequence can be set to continuously cycle through all the steps, by

rotating the bottom knob a full turn clockwise beyond the last step. A message on the

LCD will confirm that the continuous cycle is running. The cycle is stopped by rotating

the bottom knob counter-clockwise. The generator will remember if the sequence was

in continuous cycle on power down. If so, it will continuous cycle on power on.

If multiple sequences have been defined, use the Format knob to load other

sequences.

Note: When controlling the generator from a program, it is possible to make any

sequence the “Power-on” sequence without having it appear on the sequence knob

directory. In this case, the generator will power-up in the sequence mode with the

selected sequence, but loading a different sequence file with the Format knob, will not

allow you to get back to the original power-up sequence file.

Cancelling the start-up sequence mode

If the generator has been configured to run a sequence at start-up, and you want the

generator to start in normal operating mode, you need to power the generator up while

indicating “no special modes” (press and hold the ACS, DCS and DSS keys).

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 97

7Using GPIB Interface

Topics in this chapter:

•Overview

•Setting the GPIB port address

•Queries and commands

•Status queries and control

98 Chapter 7 Using GPIB Interface

Overview

You can operate and program the 802 generator from an external computer or terminal

using either the RS-232C serial port or optional IEEE-488 (GPIB) port. The GPIB port

enables the 802 to be used as a programmable video signal source for integration into

automated test systems that use IEEE-488 or GPIB communications between

instruments.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 99

Setting the GPIB port address

The default GPIB address is 15. You can specify a different address.

To set the address of the GPIB port directly on the generator:

1. Locate the rotary switches on the back of the generator between the RS-232 port and

the GPIB port. These are accessible through the ventilation slots. There are two rotary

switches: the one on the left configures the value of the tens digit and the one on the

right configures the value of the ones digit.

2. Set the rotary switches first the value of the tens switch and then the value of the ones

switch to the desired value.

3. Hold down the DCS key, and then cycle the power to the generator. The port is set to

the new address.

Note: A normal power cycle will not update the memory to the new switch settings.

To set the address of the GPIB port using the command line:

1. Establish a terminal session with the generator

2. (Optional) Enter the following command to check the current address:

GPIB?

3. Enter the following command:

GPIB address

When the address is changed with the GPIB command, the change takes place as

soon at the command is issued.

The new address setting will be maintained until 1) the address is changed with another

GPIB command, 2) the unit is re-initialized with an INIT command, or 3) the unit is

re-initialized because the power-up self test found corrupted data in battery-backed

system memory. In cases 2 and 3, the GPIB address will revert to the address set on

the GPIB address switches if the unit has them, or to 15 if the unit does not have GPIB

address switches.

100 Chapter 7 Using GPIB Interface

Queries and commands

The GPIB interface is an ASCII command line interface like the RS-232 command line

interface. The communications protocol is per IEEE-488.2 specification. Queries and

commands consist of four ASCII upper/lower case characters. Commands do not require

a response from the generator, while queries cause the 802 to respond with the required

data.

You can send multiple commands on the same line by separating the commands with a

semicolon (;) followed by a terminator. A terminator is defined as the NL character (ASCII

10), or EOI sent with the last byte of the command. The 802 will not parse any commands

received until a terminator is received. All commands are executed sequentially; that is,

when a command is parsed it is allowed to finish execution before the next command is

parsed, as illustrated in the following figure.

Commands

Commands instruct the 802 to set a parameter to the value given or perform some

function not requiring any additional data. Commands which have an asterisk (*) as their

first character are common commands as defined by the IEEE-488.2 standard and

generally operate the same in all instruments. All commands are listed and described in

Appendix A, “Command Reference.”

Commands which do not require any additional data from the controller are self-contained

and should be followed by either a message separator (;) or message terminator. Any

other characters (except whitespace characters) will cause a command error.

Commands which require numeric data must be followed by at least one separator

character (whitespace), and then the data. Numeric data sent with a command is in

decimal format. Numeric data can be represented in one of three methods: integer,

floating point, or scaled floating point.

Message Terminator

Separator ( ; )

Program Message Syntax

Command/Query

Header

Separator

( ; )

Data

Separator

(white space)

Message Unit Syntax

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 101

For example, the following number can be represented in three ways:

• Integer (42)

• Floating point (42.00)

• Scaled floating point (4.200E+01)

Queries

Queries are comprised of a header followed immediately by a question mark (?). If there

are any characters between the query header and the question mark character (including

whitespace), a command error will result. Queries, return a response message upon

completion of execution. A response message is comprised of the requested data

terminated with an NL (ASCII 10) character. For example the following text would be

returned in response to the HRAT? (horizontal rate query) message:

3.1500E+04<NL>

Note that the HRAT? query returns its parameter in exponential form. Possible returned

parameter forms are:

• Integer (3965)

• Exponential (+3.965E+03)

• String ("text string")

Output queue

When a query is executed, the resulting response message is placed in an output queue

where it can be read by the controller. The 802 has an output queue that is 255 bytes long.

When a message is present in the output buffer, the MAV (message available) bit in the

Status Byte register is set. This varies slightly from the 488.2 standard in that the MAV bit

will be set only when at least one complete response message is present in the output

queue. A complete response message consists of response message text and a message

terminator (NL).

Buffer deadlock

Buffer deadlock occurs when the 802 tries to put a response message in the output queue

when the output queue is full and the controller is held off while sending a new message

because the input buffer is full. If deadlock occurs, the 802 will clear its output queue, set

the query error (QYE) bit in the Event Status register and proceed to parse incoming

messages. If any additional queries are requested while in deadlock, those response

messages will be discarded.

The 802 will clear the buffer deadlock when it finishes parsing the current command/query.

The QYE bit will remain set until read with the *ESR? query or cleared with the *CLS

command.

102 Chapter 7 Using GPIB Interface

Sending commands and queries

The generator parses command lines one at a time. Command lines must be terminated

with a carriage return (<cr>).The generator immediately echoes each character as it is

received and places it in a command line buffer. This buffer currently has room for a total of

256 characters. If more than 256 characters are sent before sending a <cr>, then the

following response will be given:

Buffer overflow<cr><lf><cr><lf>R:\>

Upon receiving a carriage return, the generator immediately echoes the <cr> and follows it

with a line feed (<lf>). The generator then parses the command line and initiates whatever

processing is implied. The generator then responds with one of the following four

responses depending on the condition:

Command invalid<cr><lf><cr><lf>R:\>

Execution error: <nnnn><cr><lf><cr><lf>R:\>

R:\>

Where <cr> and <lf> are the carriage return and line feed characters, respectively.

Note: Handshaking routines should only look for > and not R:\>. In the future, the R:\ part

of the prompt may change (for example, may be expanded to indicate the current path).

Bench-top generators output the following prompt on their serial port after finishing the

power-on procedure.

R:\>

This feature allows ATE systems to know when the generator is ready.

Sending multiple commands and queries per line

You cans send multiple commands and queries per line by separating each command or

query with a semi-colon (;) character. For example:

HTOT 900; ALLU

The response to multiple queries will be a series of data elements separated by

semi-colons (;). For example, with the VGA_m3 format loaded, the following command

string will produce the response shown.

HRES?; VRES?; VTOT?

640;480;525

Normally, all of the commands on a command line associated with a single command

terminator are read as a single command message without regard for execution or

completion order. However, by inserting the *WAI command, you can force the generator

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 103

to wait for all preceding commands to be completed before the commands that follow *WAI

are processed. For example, sending the following command line causes a red rectangle

to be drawn and then overwritten by the colorbar image.

IMGL COLORBAR; IMGU; IMGE; RECT RED 200 200 0 0 GRAYPAT100

Note that the IMGU command merely requests that the current image be rendered

eventually, not necessarily right away nor in a single attempt. By inserting a *WAI

command after the IMGU, the generator is instructed to render the colorbar image first,

before rendering the red rectangle. This command ensures that the generator draws the

red rectangle on top of the colorbar image.

IMGL COLORBAR; IMGU; *WAI; IMGE; RECT RED 200 200 0 0 GRAYPAT100

The generator will wait until the colorbar image has been completely rendered before it

reads and executes the RECT command.

The

*WAI

command is required by the IEEE-488.2-1992 standard, but also works with

GPIB and RS-232 protocols as well.

Completion handshake

The generator returns a > prompt immediately after an FMTU, IMGU, ALLU, BOOT, INIT,

or SCAL command is received, even if these commands have not finished executing. If the

system controlling the generator must know when the process started by one of these

commands has been completed, then append *OPC? to the command string.

For example, the following command causes the generator to wait until all processes have

been completed before responding with the number 1 and sending the > prompt.

FMTL VGA_M3; IMGL FLAT; ALLU; *OPC?

The *OPC? command is required by the IEEE-488.2-1992 standard, but also works with

GPIB and RS-232 protocols as well.

Input buffer

Since some commands may take longer to execute, the 802 has an input buffer. This input

buffer is 255 characters long and can be written to by the host controller while the 802 is

busy executing or parsing previous messages. If the input buffer becomes full, the 802 will

hold off the controller until there is room in the buffer. For this reason, a program message

cannot be longer than 255 characters including terminator.

104 Chapter 7 Using GPIB Interface

Status queries and control

To create applications that control the generator using the GPIB port, it is sometimes

necessary to query the status of the generator and set or reset the status bits and bytes.

There are two sets of status registers: 1) the Event Status Register and Event Status

Enable Register and 2) the Status Byte Register and Service Request Enable Register.

These are described in the following paragraphs.

Status byte

The status byte used by the 802 is the same as that defined by the IEEE-488.2 standard

and does not use any other bits of the status byte. The status byte is one part of a

complete status reporting system shown in the figure on page 105. The status byte is read

by using the serial poll feature of your controller.

Requesting service

The GPIB provides a method for any device to interrupt the controller-in-charge and

request servicing of a condition. This service request function is handled with the status

byte. When the RQS bit of the status byte is true, the 802 is requesting service from the

controller. There are many conditions which may cause the 802 to request service. For

more information about these conditions, see the *SRE command description (page 212).

The table below lists the status commands and queries.

Status commands

and queries Definition

*ESE Sets the Event Status Enable register to the given mask value. When a bit

in the Event Status register goes high and the corresponding bit in the

Event Status Enable register is a 1, it is enabled and will cause the ESB bit

in the Status Byte register to go high.

*ESE? Returns the current value of the Event Status register. After this command

is executed, the Event Status register is cleared. This is the only way of

clearing any bit in the Event Status register except by the *CLS command.

*SRE Sets the Service Request Enable register to the mask value given. When a

bit in the Status Byte register goes true and the corresponding bit in the Ser-

vice Request Enable register is also true, the 802 will request service using

the GPIB.

*SRE? Returns the current value of the Service Request Enable register.

*STB? Returns the current value of the Status Byte register. The value stored in

the Status Byte register is not affected by reading it.

*CLS Clears the Event Status register, the Status Byte and the output buffer.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 105

The following figure illustrates IEEE-488 status reporting.

Status byte bit Definition

MAV Message available. Indicates that at least one complete response is present in

the output buffer.

ESB Event status bit. Indicates that one of the enabled conditions in the Standard

Event Status register is set.

MSS Master summary status. Indicates that the 802 has a reason for requesting ser-

vice.

RQS Request service. This bit is read only by executing a serial poll of the 802.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Logical OR

7 6 ESB MAV 210

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

RQS

MSS

Service

Request

Generation

76543210

Logical OR

Power On

User Request

Command Error

Execution Error

Device Dependent Error

Query Error

Request Control

Operation Complete

Queue

Not-Empty

Output Queue

Standard

Event Status Register

Standard

Event Status Enable

Status Byte Register

Service Request

Enable Register

106 Chapter 7 Using GPIB Interface

Bus commands

The IEEE-488.1 standard defines bus commands, which are sent to the 802 with ATN

true. The following table lists bus commands supported by the generator. For more

detailed descriptions of these commands, see the IEEE-488.1 and 488.2 standards.

Remote/local operation

The 802 has complete remote/local operation as defined by the IEEE-488.1 standard. All

four remote/local states (REMS, LOCS, RWLS and LWLS) are supported.

In the remote state (REMS), the 802 is under remote control and messages are processed

as received. The generator enters the remote with lockout state (RWLS) if the controller

issues the local lockout (LLO) message to the 802. The generator enters the local state

(LOCS) when the REN line goes false or the controller issues the go to local (GTL)

message to the generator, or a front panel control is actuated.

Event Status bit Definition

OPC Operation complete. Indicates that all operations have been completed.

RQC Request control. Indicates that a device is requesting control. The generator will

never request control, so this bit will always be 0.

QYE Query error. Indicates that a query request was made while the generator was in

deadlock.

DDE Device dependent error. Indicates that the generator encountered an error exe-

cuting a command.

EXE Execution error. Indicates that there was an error parsing a parameter.

CME Command error. Indicates that there was an unrecognizable command.

URQ User request. Indicates that a front panel key has been pressed or that the front

panel knob has been turned.

PON Power on. Indicates that power has been turned off and on. This bit will always

be 0 in the generator.

Command Description

DCL Device clear. Clears the input buffer and output queue, and stops parsing any

commands.

SDC Selected device clear. Same as DCL.

GTL Go to local. Enters the local state. See “Remote/local operation” on page 106.

LLO Local lockout. Enters the lockout state. See “Remote/local operation” on page

106.

SPE Serial poll enable. Enables transmission of the Status Byte.

SPD Serial poll disable. Exits the serial poll state.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 107

In the remote with lockout state (RWLS), the generator is under complete remote control

and front panel controls are disabled. The generator enters the RWLS state when the

controller issues the local lockout (LLO) message to the generator. Front panel access is

re-enabled when the controller issues the go to local (GTL) message to the generator.

In the local state (LOCS), the generator is under local control and all front panel controls

are enabled. Any remote messages received are stored for processing when the

generator enters the remote state again. The generator enters the remote state (REMS) if

the REN line is true and the generator is addressed to listen.

In the local with lockout state (LWLS), the generator is under local control, and all front

panel controls are enabled. Any remote messages received are stored for processing

when the generator enters the remote state again. The generator enters the remote with

lockout state (RWLS) if it is addressed to listen.

108 Chapter 7 Using GPIB Interface

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 109

8Analyzing Digital Sources

and Cables

Topics in this chapter:

•Getting started

•Measuring timing of video signal

•Testing cables and distribution systems

•Measuring pixel errors

•Testing InfoFrames (HDMI only)

•Testing audio (HDMI only)

•Controlling analyzer using command-line interface

•Generating pseudo-random noise from your device

110 Chapter 8 Analyzing Digital Sources and Cables

Getting started

The HDMI and DVI Analyzer options provide the 802 video test generator with the ability to

test and verify the quality of an HDMI or DVI video signal, respectively. Having both a

transmitter and receiver, the 802 generator with the Analyzer feature can be used to:

•View timing of an HDMI/DVI video signal. Connect an HDMI/DVI source to the

HDMI/DVI Rx connector to measure and analyze the timing parameters of the signal.

•Generate pseudo-random noise test pattern. Connect an HDMI/DVI host to the

HDMI/DVI Tx connector to receive pseudo-random noise for testing purposes.

•Analyze pixel data at different frequencies. Examine the quality of HDMI/DVI pixel

transmission (including source, cables and distribution systems) for data errors and

flickering pixels.

•View InfoFrame packets from an HDMI signal. Display and validate InfoFrame

packets transmitted from an HDMI source

This chapter provides procedures for testing with the analyzer through the front panel and

through the command line. Front panel instructions are provided initially for each test. For

procedures using the command line refer to “Controlling analyzer using command-line

interface” on page 130.

HDMI analyzer connections

Monitoring HDMI analyzer signal input

With the HDMI analyzer option, you can externally monitor the video and/or audio content

of an incoming HDMI signal. This feature lets you view and hear HDMI content that is

received at the HDMI Rx connector while analysis and testing functions are performed by

the analyzer.

SS AVRx Tx VGA

HDMI transmitterHDMI receiver

Audio/Video connector

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 111

To monitor HDMI input:

• Use the VGA-to-RCA cable (part 30-00148) to connect the AV connector with a YPbPr

display, and the audio connections, as shown below.

A VGA-to-RCA (3) cable is available from Quantum Data (part 99-00503), which

requires a female-to-female HD15 adapter, which is also available from Quantum Data

(part 09-00251).

• Use the VGA-to-RCA cable (part 30-00148) to connect the AV connector with an

analog VGA display, and the audio connections as shown below.

DVI analyzer connections

The 802 generator with the DVI analyzer option is equipped with two digital DVI

connectors. In addition to a DVI Tx (output) connector that emulates a DVI transmit device,

a DVI Rx (input) connector is provided that allows a high-quality DVI display to be

emulated.

White

To audio source

To AV

connector

To audio player

Red

To VGA-to

RCA cable

White

To audio source

To AV

connector

To audio player

Red

To analog

display

VGARxTxSS

Transmitter Receiver

112 Chapter 8 Analyzing Digital Sources and Cables

Starting the Analyzer Setup Utility

Use the Analyzer Setup Utility to view or modify the configuration of the analyzer.

To start the Analyzer Setup Utility:

1. Start the generator in Digital-Friendly mode (see page 18).

2. Connect a digital display with the DVI or HDMI transmitter on the generator.

3. Select a format supported by the display (see “Selecting formats automatically” on

page 25).

4. Select the Analzyer image.

The Analyzer Setup Utility appears on the connected display.

Note: The Report Setup feature is not implemented.

Enabling and disabling analyzer images

Certain analyzer tasks require images to be displayed on an HDMI/DVI display.

To enable or disable display of analyzer images:

1. Start the Analyzer Setup Utility (see page 112).

2. Press and release the Step key.

The Step key illuminates and the Analyzer Images field is highlighted.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 113

3. Using the Image knob, toggle between ON (to enable analyzer images) and OFF (to

disable analyzer images) setting.

4. Press and release the Step key to save the currently displayed parameters.

The light on the Step key extinguishes, and the new settings are implemented for

Analyzer mode operation.

Starting the analyzer

The analyzer functions as a special operating mode within the 802 generator. You must

place the generator into this mode to perform any analyzer tasks.

To put the generator in the analyzer mode:

1. Start the generator in Digital-Friendly mode (see page 18).

2. Press and release the Outputs key. The light on the key extinguishes.

3. While holding down the G key, press and release the Outputs key.

The Outputs key illuminates and the following message appears on the LCD. This

indicates that the generator is in analyzer mode (example shows DVI analyzer).

To take the generator out of the analyzer mode:

1. Press and release the Outputs key.

The generator is returned to the normal mode as a signal source. The LCD shows the

format and image currently active.

114 Chapter 8 Analyzing Digital Sources and Cables

Measuring timing of video signal

The analyzer provides the ability to analyze signal timing information of an external

HDMI/DVI source device. This feature allows you to test a transmitted HDMI/DVI signal for

anomalies and verify that the proper timing is output by the HDMI/DVI transmitter for a

given signal format.

The procedures below provide instructions for configuring the analyzer through the front

panel. Note that you can also measure timing with the analyzer through the command line.

For procedures using the command line refer to “Signal timing analysis commands” on

page 130.

The analyzer provides two measurement methods:

•Basic timing measurement – Displays limited measurements on LCD.

•Detailed timing measurement – Displays detailed measurements on a display

connected with the generator.

The procedures below provide instructions for configuring the analyzer through the front

panel. Note that you can also measure timing with the analyzer through the command line.

For procedures using the command line refer to “Signal timing analysis commands” on

page 130.

Setting up analyzer to measure timing

To operate the analyzer, you must select the desired HDMI/DVI signal source and set

signal format settings and parameters.

To set HDMI/DVI signal source parameters:

1. Start the Analyzer Setup Utility (see page 112).

2. Press and release the Step key.

The Step key illuminates and the Analyzer Images field is highlighted.

3. Using the Format knob, select the Auto Based On field.

4. If using the HDMI/DVI signal originating internally from the generator, follow these

steps:

a. Using the Image knob, select CURRENT in the highlighted field.

b. Using the Format knob, select the Format field.

c. Select the desired signal format number using the cursor (displayed under a digit

in the field) as follows:

• To move the cursor between digits, press the R and G keys.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 115

• To select a number for a digit, turn the Image knob.

As the number in the Format field changes, the appropriate timing parameters for the

selection appear in the box under the Format Parameters field.

5. If using an HDMI/DVI signal originating externally from the generator, follow these

steps:

a. Select MEASURED in the highlighted field.

b. Select the Format Parameters field using the Format knob.

c. Capture the external signal’s timing parameters by pressing and releasing the B

key.

d. Configure the HDMI/DVI transmit device to output an HDMI/DVI signal.

After a few seconds, the external signal’s timing parameters are displayed in the box

under Format Parameters and in the Run Length(Hex) field.

Important: If the external source signal’s timing parameters change (or the field

selection is changed), the signal timing parameters must be recaptured.

6. Press and release the Step key to save the currently displayed parameters.

The light on the Step key extinguishes, and the new settings are implemented for

analyzer mode operation.

Measuring basic timing parameters

To view basic timing information of an external HDMI/DVI source signal:

1. Connect the HDMI/DVI transmit device to the HDMI/DVI Rx connector on the generator.

2. If necessary, set the proper HDMI/DVI signal source parameters within the generator.

•See “Starting the Analyzer Setup Utility” on page 112 for steps on viewing the

current analyzer configuration.

• To edit HDMI/DVI signal source parameters, see “Setting up analyzer to measure

timing” on page 114.

3. If desired, monitor the video signal received on the HDMI Rx connector (see page 110).

4. Start the analyzer (see “Starting the analyzer” on page 113).

5. Press and release the R key to display the horizontal and vertical frequencies of the

HDMI/DVI signal on the LCD (see example below).

HS rate VS rate

48076 72.188

116 Chapter 8 Analyzing Digital Sources and Cables

6. Press the G key to display the following format parameters on the LCD.

Measuring detailed timing parameters

The analyzer can analyze detailed HDMI/DVI signal timing information. The timing

information is displayed on an HDMI/DVI display connected to the generator.

To view detailed timing information of an external HDMI/DVI source signal:

1. Connect the HDMI/DVI transmit device to the HDMI/DVI Rx connector on the generator.

2. Connect an HDMI/DVI display to the HDMI/DVI Tx connector on the generator.

3. If necessary, set the proper HDMI/DVI signal source parameters within the generator.

•See “Starting the Analyzer Setup Utility” on page 112 for steps on viewing the

current analyzer configuration.

• To edit HDMI/DVI signal source parameters, see “Setting up analyzer to measure

timing” on page 114.

4. If desired, monitor the video signal received on the HDMI Rx connector (see page 110).

5. Using the Format knob, select an appropriate format for the connected HDMI/DVI

display.

Note: To automatically configure the Format knob list based on the EDID structure of

a DDC-compliant display, hold down the R key, then press and release the ACS key.

1040 800 56 120

666 600 37 6

Horizontal period (pixels)

Vertical period (lines)

Active pixels per line

Active lines

Vertical pulse delay (pixels)

Horizontal pulse delay (pixels)

Horizontal pulse width (pixels)

Vertical pulse width (pixels)

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 117

6. Using the Image knob, select the FormatRx image.

Detailed timing information of the HDMI/DVI signal is displayed on the HDMI/DVI

display (as shown in the example below).

118 Chapter 8 Analyzing Digital Sources and Cables

Testing cables and distribution systems

This section describes how to test HDMI or DVI cables, and distribution systems using

pseudo-random noise. Using different signal formats, the HDMI/DVI cable can be tested

over a wide range of frequencies.

The procedures below provide instructions for testing cable and distribution systems with

the analyzer through the front panel. Note that you can also perform these procedures

through the command line. For procedures using the command line refer to “Analyzing

pseudo-random noise in a cable or distribution system” on page 133.

To test a cable or distribution system:

1. Connect the HDMI/DVI cable to be tested between the HDMI/DVI Tx and Rx connectors

on the generator.

Note: If you are testing a fiber optic cable, plug the fiber optic cable connector marked

“transmitter” to the HDMI/DVI Tx connector on the generator, and plug the connector

marked “receiver” to the HDMI/DVI Rx connector on the generator. Use a 5 Vdc power

supply adapter at the receiver side of the cable.

2. If necessary, set the proper HDMI/DVI signal source and pseudo-random noise

parameters within the generator.

•See “Starting the Analyzer Setup Utility” on page 112 for steps on viewing the

current analyzer configuration.

• You will have to configure the analyzer for an internal source. To edit HDMI/DVI

signal source parameters, see “Setting up analyzer to measure timing” on page

114.

Note: The HDMI/DVI signal source must be set to internal (Auto Based On field set

to CURRENT) for this procedure.

• For information on what values to set the pseudo-random noise parameters as well

as instructions on how to set them, see “Setting pseudo-random noise parameters”

on page 142.

3. (HDMI only) If desired, monitor the video signal received on the HDMI Rx connector

(see “Monitoring HDMI analyzer signal input” on page 110).

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 119

4. Using the Format knob, select the signal format you want to use.

Any built-in formats may be used for this test. However, we recommend using several

formats spread over a wide range of frequencies. For example, the Test165 format is

commonly used to test at the maximum pixel frequency (165 MHz), while the DMT0660

format can be used to test at a very low frequency (25.175 MHz).Use the following

formats to test single-link DVI over a range of frequencies:

5. Start the analyzer (see “Starting the analyzer” on page 113).

Format Pixel rate (Mhz)

TEST165 165.000

DMT1660 162.000

DMT1285G 157.500

DMT1285A 148.500

DMT1648 135.000

DMT1275A 129.600

DMT1185 121.500

DMT1260G 108.000

DMT1085 94.500

DMT1170 94.200

DMT1075 78.750

DMT1070 75.000

720p60 74.250

DMT1060 65.000

DMT0885 56.250

DMT0872 50.000

DMT0875 49.500

DMT1043 44.900

DMT0860 40.000

DMT0685 36.000

DMT0785H 35.500

DMT0675 31.500

SMT0760V 28.322

DMT0660 25.175

120 Chapter 8 Analyzing Digital Sources and Cables

6. Press and release the B key to analyze the number of pixel errors detected per color

component of the received HDMI/DVI signal on the LCD (see example below).

To stop the analysis, press and release the B key again. The light on the key

extinguishes and the analysis stops.

7. Press and release the ACS key to analyze pixel error rate (in errors per billion) and

number of pixels measured (in billions) in the received HDMI/DVI signal on the LCD

(see example below).

Note: When the number of pixel errors becomes very large, the text “Very high” is

displayed in the bottom row of the LCD (replacing the numbers).

To stop the analysis, press and release the ACS key again. The light on the key

extinguishes and the analysis stops.

8. Press and release the DCS key to view the expected and measured values for the first

pixel error detected from the received HDMI/DVI signal (see example below).

To stop the analysis, press and release the DCS key again. The light on the key

extinguishes and the analysis stops.

9. To test the cable at a different frequency, return to step 4.

Testing accuracy of analyzer

You can verify the analyzer’s ability to correctly analyze pseudo-random noise.

The procedures below provide instructions for testing the accuracy of the analyzer through

the front panel. Note that you can also perform these procedures through the command

line. For procedures using the command line refer to “Testing the analyzer” on page 134.

To verify the analyzer’s pseudo-random noise analysis capability:

1. Connect the HDMI/DVI Tx connector to an HDMI/DVI display.

2. Using the Format knob, select an appropriate format for the connected HDMI/DVI

display.

R: G: B:

0 21 0

PER: pels/billion

4.255 0.88

original: 40018C

1st error: FFFFFF

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 121

Note: To automatically configure the Format knob list based on the EDID structure of

a DDC-compliant display, hold down the R key, and then press and release the ACS

key.

3. If necessary, set the proper HDMI/DVI signal source parameters within the generator.

•See “Starting the Analyzer Setup Utility” on page 112 for steps on viewing the

current analyzer configuration.

• You will have to configure the analyzer for an internal source. To edit HDMI/DVI

signal source parameters, see “Setting up analyzer to measure timing” on page

114.

4. Configure pseudo-random noise parameters to implement a single pseudo-random

noise test sequence. This requires setting the Procedure field to SINGLE SHOT.

• To edit pseudo-random noise parameters, see “Setting pseudo-random noise

parameters” on page 142.

5. Disconnect the HDMI/DVI Tx connector from the HDMI/DVI display.

6. Connect an HDMI/DVI cable between the HDMI/DVI Tx and Rx connectors on the

generator.

7. Using the Format knob, select the signal format you want to use.

• Any of the pre-defined formats can be used for this test for DVI. However, we

recommend using the Test165 format to test DVI at the maximum pixel frequency

(165MHz). For HDMI the Test81 format should be used.

Note: In order to access the test formats such as Test165, you may have to re-invoke

the default format list by applying pressing and holding the R key and then pressing and

releasing the ACS key.

8. Using the Image knob, select either the PRN_5 or PRN_9 image.

9. Start the analyzer (see “Starting the analyzer” on page 113).

10. Press and release the B key to analyze number of pixel errors detected per color

component of the received HDMI/DVI signal on the LCD (see example below).

• If you selected the PRN_5 image, the following should be displayed (5 errors in

each color component).

• If you selected the PRN_9 image, the following should be displayed (9 errors in

each color component).

R: G: B:

5 5 5

R: G: B:

9 9 9

122 Chapter 8 Analyzing Digital Sources and Cables

11. To verify accuracy using a different frequency, halt the analyzer mode and return to step

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 123

Measuring pixel errors

In cases where the external HDMI/DVI device cannot generate pseudo-random noise, a

“delta error” testing capability is provided that allows analysis for flickering pixels in a

still-frame test image. With the video signal connected to the analyzer input, signal quality

can be measured blindly and test results delivered in simple numeric terms.

The procedures below provide instructions through the front panel. Note that you can also

configure the analyzer to measure pixel errors through the command line. For procedures

using the command line refer to “Pseudo-random noise generation commands” on page

132.

Setting delta error patch parameters

To enable and configure delta error patch testing by the analyzer, you must set certain

analyzer parameters properly. Use the procedure to configure the analyzer to test for delta

error patch testing.

To set delta error patch testing parameters:

1. Start the Analyzer Setup Utility (see page 112).

2. If necessary, see “Setting up analyzer to measure timing” on page 114 for steps to

configure the appropriate HDMI/DVI signal source and timing parameters.

3. Press and release the Step key.

The Step key illuminates and the Analyzer Images field is highlighted.

4. Using the Format knob, select the Delta Error Patch Setup field.

5. Using the Image knob, specify whether to enable (ON) or disable (OFF) delta error

patch.

If set to OFF, delta error patch is disabled and all associated fields are disabled.

6. Using the Format knob, select the Travel field.

7. Using the Image knob, specify how you want the patch to move across the display as

follows:

• Select Zig Zag to move over the active video in a zig zag fashion.

• Select FIXED to move over the active video in a fixed position.

8. Using the Format knob, select the Parameters field.

9. Using the Image knob, specify how you want the delta error patch implemented as

follows:

• Select AUTO to allow the generator to automatically set the patch settings. The

patch width and height are calculated based on size of the active video area.

124 Chapter 8 Analyzing Digital Sources and Cables

• Select MANUAL to define specific patch settings.

10. To define specific settings for delta error patch (width, height, and position), follow these

steps:

a. Using the Format knob, select the Width, Height, X, or Y field.

Note: If you selected AUTO in the Parameters field and the HDMI/DVI signal source is

internal (Auto Based On field set to CURRENT), the Width and Height fields are not

selectable. Similarly, if you selected AUTO in the Parameters field and the HDMI/DVI

signal source is external (Auto Based On field set to MEASURE), the Width and Height

fields are set when measuring the external signal’s timing parameters (see “Setting up

analyzer to measure timing” on page 114).

b. Set the parameter (in decimal) using the cursor (displayed under a digit in the field)

to select the appropriate value as follows:

• To move the cursor between digits, press the R and G keys.

• To select a number for a digit, turn the Image knob.

c. Repeat these steps until each parameter is defined.

11. Using the Format knob, select the Reference Frame field.

12. Using the Image knob, specify the method used to compare the patch within different

frames as follows:

• Select FIRST to use the first field as the reference for comparison with other

patches in other frames.

• Select PAIRS to set the comparison to be performed in each two successive

frames.

13. Using the Format knob, select the Frames Compared field.

14. Specify the number of frames to be compared with the patch dimensions using the

cursor (displayed under a digit in the field) to select the appropriate value as follows:

• To move the cursor between digits, press the R and G keys.

• To select a number for a digit, turn the Image knob.

15. Press and release the Step key to save the currently displayed parameters.

The light on the Step key extinguishes, and the settings are implemented for Analyzer

mode operation.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 125

Measuring pixel errors in patch

The analyzer can test and analyze the transmission quality of an external HDMI/DVI

transmit device using a delta error patch pattern. The analyzer captures all or a portion of

an external image (patch pattern) and verifies that all pixels match over a number of

frames. The results are output to an HDMI/DVI display using a special image.

To test an external HDMI/DVI signal using delta error patch pattern:

1. Connect the HDMI/DVI transmit device to the HDMI/DVI Rx connector on the generator.

2. Connect an HDMI/DVI display to the HDMI/DVI Tx connector on the generator.

3. If necessary, set the proper HDMI/DVI signal source and delta error patch parameters

within the generator.

•See “Starting the Analyzer Setup Utility” on page 112 for steps on viewing the

current analyzer configuration.

• To edit HDMI/DVI signal source parameters, see “Setting up analyzer to measure

timing” on page 114.

• To edit delta error patch parameters, see “Setting delta error patch parameters” on

page 123.

4. (HDMI only) If desired, monitor the video signal received on the HDMI Rx connector

(see “Monitoring HDMI analyzer signal input” on page 110).

5. Generate a static image from the HDMI/DVI transmit device.

6. Using the Format knob, select an appropriate format for the connected HDMI/DVI

display.

Note: To automatically configure the Format knob list based on the EDID structure of

a DDC-compliant display, hold down the R key, then press and release the ACS key.

126 Chapter 8 Analyzing Digital Sources and Cables

7. Using the Image knob, select the DeltaErr image.

The DeltaErr image appears on the connected HDMI/DVI display. As shown in the

example below, errors are presented in the area in which they are found by color

component.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 127

Testing InfoFrames (HDMI only)

The HDMI analyzer can analyze InfoFrame data from an incoming HDMI signal. With this

capability, an HDMI transmit device can be tested for its ability to transmit InfoFrame

packets correctly.

Testing HDMI transmit device InfoFrame capability

The 802 generator can monitor the InfoFrame content of the received HDMI signal.

To view current HDMI InfoFrame contents received from an HDMI transmitter:

1. Connect an HDMIdisplay to the HDMI Tx connector on the generator.

2. Connect the HDMI source to the HDMI Rx connector on the generator.

3. Setup the generator for HDMI output (see page 147).

4. If desired, monitor the video signal received on the HDMI Rx connector (see

“Monitoring HDMI analyzer signal input” on page 110).

5. Using the Format knob, select an appropriate format for the connected HDMI/DVI

display.

Note: To automatically configure the Format knob list based on the EDID structure of

a DDC-compliant display, hold down the R key, then press and release the ACS key.

128 Chapter 8 Analyzing Digital Sources and Cables

6. Using the Image knob, select the PacketRx image.

The PacketRx image appears on the connected HDMI display. Shown in the image are

the current settings for the AVI InfoFrame input.

7. Press and release the Step key.

The Step key illuminates.

8. Using the Image knob, select the appropriate InfoFrame type.

The contents of the appropriate InfoFrame input are displayed on the HDMI display.

9. When finished, press and release the Step key.

The light on the Step key extinguishes.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 129

Testing audio (HDMI only)

The HDMI analyzer can process audio data from an incoming HDMI signal. With this

capability, an HDMI source can be tested for its ability to successfully transmit audio

packets.

Testing HDMI transmit device audio capability

The 802 generator can monitor the audio content of the received HDMI signal.

To monitor audio content received from an HDMI transmitter:

1. Connect the HDMI transmit device to the HDMI Rx connector on the generator.

2. If necessary, set up the generator for HDMI output (see “Setting up the generator for

HDMI operation” on page 147).

3. Monitor the audio signal received on the HDMI Rx connector using an external audio

device (see “Monitoring HDMI analyzer signal input” on page 110.

130 Chapter 8 Analyzing Digital Sources and Cables

Controlling analyzer using command-line interface

You can operate the Analyzer using the 802 generator’s command line interface. This

section describes Analyzer functions and commands and provides examples of command

sequences you can use to perform Analyzer tasks.

For command descriptions, see Appendix A, “Command Reference.”

Signal timing analysis commands

This section provides command line procedures for viewing signal timing parameters.

Viewing signal timing parameters (on an HDMI/DVI monitor)

This example displays timing and allows you to view real-time, detailed HDMI/DVI signal

timing information from a connected HDMI/DVI transmit device.

To view basic timing information of an external HDMI/DVI source signal:

1. Connect the HDMI/DVI transmit device to the HDMI/DVI Rx connector on the generator.

2. If desired, monitor the video signal received on the HDMI/DVI Rx connector (see page

110).

3. Using a terminal emulator, establish a terminal connection with the generator. Refer to

“Setting up a terminal connection with the generator” on page 14.

4. Enter the following commands to configure the generator to output a digital signal

(HDMI or DVI):

SROP 2 4

This removes analog friendly mode and configures the generator to output either a DVI

or HDMI signal depending on the interface hardware the generator is equipped with

(DVI or HDMI).

5. (optional) Enter the following command to set the status display mode:

SROP 8

6. Enter the following commands to initiate the measurement of timing parameters.

ANIG 1 // enables analyzer images to be displayed

IMGL FormatRx // loads the FormatRX image into the edit buffer

IMGU // applies the FormatRX image to the generator/analyzer

Viewing specific timing parameters

The following is an example of using commands to view the total number of horizontal

pixels and horizontal frequency of the HDMI/DVI signal.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 131

To view specific timing information of an external HDMI/DVI source signal:

1. Connect the HDMI/DVI transmit device to the HDMI/DVI Rx connector on the generator.

2. Using a terminal emulator, establish a terminal connection with the generator. Refer to

“Setting up a terminal connection with the generator” on page 14.

3. Enter the following commands to configure the generator to output a digital signal

(HDMI or DVI):

SROP 2 4

This removes analog friendly mode and configures the generator to output either a DVI

or HDMI signal depending on the interface hardware the generator is equipped with

(DVI or HDMI).

4. (optional) Enter the following command to set the status display mode:

SROP 8

5. Enter the following commands to initiate the measurement of timing parameters.

PNSF 1 // selects the source of timing information as “Measured”

TMAU // initiates measurement of timing from external source

HTOT? // queries for the horizontal total pixels

HRES? // queries for the horizontal active pixels

See page 548 for additional parameters you can query.

132 Chapter 8 Analyzing Digital Sources and Cables

Pseudo-random noise generation commands

This section provides command line procedures for generating pseudo-random noise.

Generating pseudo-random noise

The following is an example of using commands to first configure and then generate

pseudo-random noise.

To generate pseudo-random noise:

1. Using a terminal emulator, establish a terminal connection with the generator. Refer to

“Setting up a terminal connection with the generator” on page 14.

2. Enter the following commands to configure the generator to output a digital signal

(HDMI or DVI):

SROP 2 4

This removes analog friendly mode and configures the generator to output either a DVI

or HDMI signal depending on the interface hardware the generator is equipped with

(DVI or HDMI).

3. (optional) Enter the following command to set the status display mode:

SROP 8

4. Enter the following commands to generate pseudo-random noise.

PNSF 0 // selects internal timing source for pseudo-random noise

PNST 1 // specifies QDI-BCM algorithm

PNSA 1 // sets pseudo random noise to be calculated each pixel clock

PNSM 0 // sets pseudo random noise test to run in auto mode

PNSP 0 // sets procedure for pseudo-random noise test to “continuous”

PNSG 1 // enables the pseudo-random noise test

PNGU // turns on the pseudo-random noise test

<CR> // a carriage return halts the continuous test

5. Enter the following commands to stop pseudo-random noise generation.

PNSG 0

PNGU

Pseudo-random noise analysis commands

This section provides command line procedures for generating pseudo-random noise and

analyzing the received data.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 133

Analyzing pseudo-random noise in a cable or distribution

system

The following example uses commands to test a connected HDMI/DVI cable or distribution

system.

To analyze pseudo-random noise in a cable or distribution system:

1. Connect the DVI or HDMI cable between the transmit and receive connectors on the

generator.

If you are testing a distribution system connect an access cable to the distribution

center to the transmit connector on the generator and a second access cable to the

receive connector on the generator.

2. Using a terminal emulator, establish a terminal connection with the generator. Refer to

“Setting up a terminal connection with the generator” on page 14.

3. Enter the following commands to configure the generator to output a digital signal

(HDMI or DVI):

SROP 2 4

This removes analog friendly mode and configures the generator to output either a DVI

or HDMI signal depending on the interface hardware the generator is equipped with

(DVI or HDMI).

4. (optional) Enter the following commands to set the status display mode:

SROP 8

5. Enter the following commands to analyze pseudo-random noise in a cable or

distribution system.

FMTL TEST165 // loads the TEST165 format for testing DVI

Note: For HDMI testing load the TEST81 format.

FMTU // applies the TEST165 or TEST81 format to the generator

6. Enter the following commands to configure the pseudo-random noise parameters.

PNSF 0 // selects internal timing source for pseudo-random noise

PNST 1 // specifies QDI-BCM algorithm

PNSA 1 // sets pseudo random noise to be calculated each pixel

PNSM 0 // sets pseudo random noise test to run in auto mode

PNSP 100 // sets pseudo-random noise for 100 “multi-shots”

PNAU // loads the generator with pseudo-random noise settings

Note: The test will stop automatically if configured to run in the single or multi-shot

mode. If you initiate the test in the continuous mode, you will have to enter a carriage

return to halt the test after PNAU is invoked.

7. Enter the following commands to view the results of the test.

134 Chapter 8 Analyzing Digital Sources and Cables

GPER? // returns the pixel error rate in errors per billion

GNPT? // returns the number of pixels measured in billions

GCET? // returns the number of bad pixels for R, G, B components

GFED? // returns information about the first error encountered

Analyzing pseudo-random noise from an external source

The following example tests an HDMI/DVI transmit device’s pixel data using

pseudo-random noise generated by an external source.

To analyze pseudo-random noise from an external source:

1. Connect the DVI or HDMI cable between the receive connector on the generator and

the output interface on the device under test.

2. Using a terminal emulator, establish a terminal connection with the generator. Refer to

“Setting up a terminal connection with the generator” on page 14.

3. Enter the following commands to configure the generator to output a digital signal

(HDMI or DVI):

SROP 2 4

This removes analog friendly mode and configures the generator to output either a DVI

or HDMI signal depending on the interface hardware the generator is equipped with

(DVI or HDMI).

4. (optional) Enter the following commands to set the status display mode:

SROP 8

5. Enter the following commands to configure the pseudo-random noise parameters.

PNSF 1 // selects external timing source for pseudo-random noise

PNST 1 // specifies QDI-BCM algorithm

TMAU // initiates measurement of timing from external source

PNSA 1 // sets pseudo random noise to be calculated each pixel

PNSM 0 // sets pseudo random noise test to run in auto mode

PNSP 100 // sets pseudo-random noise for 100 “multi-shots”

PNAU // loads the generator with the pseudo-random noise settings

Note: The test will stop automatically if configured to run in the single or multi-shot

mode. If you initiate the test in the continuous mode, you will have to enter a carriage

return to halt the test after PNAU is invoked.

6. Enter the following commands to view the results of the test.

GPER? // returns the pixel error rate in errors per billion

GNPT? // returns the number of pixels measured in billions

GCET? // returns the number of bad pixels for R, G, B components

GFED? // returns information about the first error encountered

Testing the analyzer

The following example verifies the analyzer’s pseudo-random noise analysis capability.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 135

To verify the analyzer’s pseudo-random noise analysis capability:

1. Using a terminal emulator, establish a terminal connection with the generator. Refer to

“Setting up a terminal connection with the generator” on page 14.

2. Enter the following commands to configure the generator to output a digital signal

(HDMI or DVI):

SROP 2 4

This removes analog friendly mode and configures the generator to output either a DVI

or HDMI signal depending on the interface hardware the generator is equipped with

(DVI or HDMI).

3. (optional) Enter the following commands to set the status display mode:

SROP 8

4. Connect an HDMI/DVI cable between the HDMI/DVI Tx and Rx connectors on the

generator.

5. Enter the following commands to select the signal format and image.

FMTL TEST165 // loads the TEST165 format

Note: For HDMI testing load the TEST81 format.

FMTU // applies the TEST165 or TEST81 format to the generator

IMGL PRN_9 // loads the PRN_9 image

IMGU // activates the image in the generator

6. Enter the following commands to set the pseudo-random noise parameters.

PNSF 0 // selects internal timing source for pseudo-random noise

PNST 1 // specifies QDI-BCM algorithm

PNSA 1 // sets pseudo random noise to be calculated each pixel

PNSM 0 // sets pseudo-random noise test to “single-shot”

PNAU // loads the generator with pseudo-random noise settings

Note: The test will stop automatically if configured to run in the single or multi-shot

mode. If you initiate the test in the continuous mode, you will have to enter a carriage

return to halt the test after PNAU is invoked.

7. Enter the following commands to view the results of the test.

GPER? // returns the pixel error rate in errors per billion

GNPT? // returns the number of pixels measured in billions

GCET? // returns the number of bad pixels for R, G, B components

GFED? // returns information about the first error encountered

Analyzing pixel data (delta error patch)

The following is an example of using commands to test an HDMI/DVI transmit device’s

pixel data using a delta error patch test.

136 Chapter 8 Analyzing Digital Sources and Cables

To set delta error patch testing parameters:

1. Using a terminal emulator, establish a terminal connection with the generator. Refer to

“Setting up a terminal connection with the generator” on page 14.

2. Enter the following commands to configure the generator to output a digital signal

(HDMI or DVI):

SROP 2 4

This removes analog friendly mode and configures the generator to output either a DVI

or HDMI signal depending on the interface hardware the generator is equipped with

(DVI or HDMI).

3. (optional) Enter the following commands to set the status display mode:

SROP 8

4. Connect the HDMI/DVI transmit device to the HDMI/DVI Rx connector on the generator.

5. Connect an HDMI/DVI display to the HDMI/DVI Tx connector on the generator.

6. Enter the following commands to load a suitable format for the display under test.

FMTL DMT0660 // loads the DMT0660 format for testing

FMTU // applies the DMT0660 format to the generator

7. Enter the following commands to load a suitable static image.

IMGL FLAT // loads the static image for testing

IMGU // applies the image to the generator

8. Enter the following commands to configure the delta patch parameters.

PDSX 128 // sets patch starting at x-pixel 128

PDSY 256 // sets patch starting at y-pixel 256

PDSH 64 // sets patch height at 64 pixel

PDSW 96 // sets patch width at 90 pixels

10. Enter the following commands to run the delta patch test.

PDAU // captures patch of image

ANIG 1 // enables analyzer images

IMGL DeltaErr // loads the DeltaErr image

IMGU // activates the image in the generator

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 137

Generating pseudo-random noise from your device

This section explains how to implement pseudo-random noise is your own device.

Implementing pseudo-random noise from your device

The analyzer can test and analyze pixel data received from an HDMI/DVI source. To

accomplish this, a pseudo-random noise pattern is used that provides a sequence of

highly dynamic pixel values.

To maximize your ability to analyze pixel data generated by set-top boxes, you must be

able to generate pseudo-random noise. To facilitate this, you can use the lfsr.h and lfsl.cpp

source code files from

http://www.quantumdata.com/support/resources/pr_noise/QDI-BCM_PseudoNoise.ZIP,

which enable you to generate QDI-BCM pseudo-random noise from your device.

Once implemented, you can verify that the code is implemented correctly by using the

Dump10K() function to write the first 10,000 pixel values to a file. This result should match

the contents of the PN_31_24.txt reference file included in

http://www.quantumdata.com/support/resources/pr_noise/QDI-BCM_PseudoNoise.ZIP.

lfsr.h

The following source code is provided for the lfdr.h file.

// LFSR.h: interface for the CLFSR class.

#if !defined(AFX_LFSR_H__5947F6F9_1DBE_4E6E_9AFB_77D5D8857A10__INCLUDED_)

#define AFX_LFSR_H__5947F6F9_1DBE_4E6E_9AFB_77D5D8857A10__INCLUDED_

#if _MSC_VER > 1000

#pragma once

#endif // _MSC_VER > 1000

class CLFSR

{

public:

void Dump10K();

unsigned long GetPixel();

void Reset();

CLFSR();

virtual ~CLFSR();

protected:

int state;

unsigned long seed;

};

138 Chapter 8 Analyzing Digital Sources and Cables

#endif //

!defined(AFX_LFSR_H__5947F6F9_1DBE_4E6E_9AFB_77D5D8857A10__INCLUDED_)

lfsl.cpp

The following source code is provided for the tfsl.cpp file.

// Implementation of the CLFSR class

#include “LFSR.h”

#include <stdio.h>

#ifdef _DEBUG

#undef THIS_FILE

static char THIS_FILE[]=__FILE__;

#define new DEBUG_NEW

#endif

// enable this to light up pixels 1,2,3 as red,green,blue

// in horizontal order

// Pixel 1 represents the top left corner of the screen

// when this is enabled, all other pixels are black

//#define RGB_TEST

// Construction/Destruction

unsigned long pixelvalue;

CLFSR::CLFSR()

{

}

CLFSR::~CLFSR()

{

}

void CLFSR::Reset()

{

state=0;

seed=0x08000001;

}

// Pixel 1 should be 0x000000

// Pixel 2 should be 0x00 (7-bits) , Opcode(10-bits), SeedHigh(7 bits)

// Pixel 3 should be SeedLow (24 bits)

// All other pixels are then set based on the results of the LFSR

calculations.

// The 10-bit Opcode is custom per Quantum Data’s request and it will be

set to ‘00,0000,0111’.

unsigned long CLFSR::GetPixel()

{

unsigned long temp;

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 139

// states 0 to 2 are specific for QuantumData

switch (state)

{

// pixel 1

case 0:

pixelvalue=seed;

state++;

#ifdef RGB_TEST

return (0xff0000); // red

#else

return(0);

#endif

break;

// pixel 2

case 1:

temp=((0x007<<7) | (( seed &0x7f000000)>>24)) & 0xffffff;

state++;

#ifdef RGB_TEST

return (0x00ff00); // green

#else

return(temp);

#endif

break;

// pixel 3

case 2:

temp=seed &0x00ffffff;

state++;

#ifdef RGB_TEST

return (0x0000ff); // blue

#else

return(temp);

#endif

break;

default:

pixelvalue= ((pixelvalue & 0x7f)<<24) | ( ((pixelvalue>>4)

& 0xffffff) ^ ((pixelvalue>>7) & 0xffffff) );

#ifdef RGB_TEST

return (0x0); // blank

#else

return(pixelvalue & 0xffffff);

#endif

break;

}

140 Chapter 8 Analyzing Digital Sources and Cables

}

void CLFSR::Dump10K()

{

int i;

FILE* f;

char s[100];

f=fopen(“c:\\temp\\noise.txt”,”w”);

Reset();

for (i=0;i<10000;i++)

{

sprintf(s,”%.6lx”,GetPixel());

fprintf(f,”%s\r\n”,s);

}

// AfxMessageBox(“See c:\\temp\\noise.txt”);

fclose(f);

Sending pseudo-random noise to external device

The analyzer can be the source for a pseudo-random noise test pattern. HDMI/DVI

displays can use this test pattern for testing and analysis purposes.

To generate a pseudo-random noise test pattern:

1. Connect the HDMI/DVI receiver device to the HDMI/DVI Tx connector on the generator.

2. If necessary, set the proper pseudo-random noise parameters within the generator.

•See “Starting the Analyzer Setup Utility” on page 112 for steps on viewing the

current analyzer configuration.

• To edit pseudo-random noise parameters, see “Setting pseudo-random noise

parameters” on page 142.

3. Place the generator in HDMI/DVI analyzer mode.

•See “Starting the analyzer” on page 113 for steps on launching analyzer mode.

4. Press and release the Step key to generate pseudo-random noise to be transmitted.

The key illuminates and pseudo-random noise is transmitted from the HDMI/DVI Tx

connector. The following message appears on the LCD:

5. To stop pseudo-random noise generation, press and release the Step key.

The light on the key extinguishes and pseudo-random noise is no longer transmitted.

Generating Psudo

Random Noise

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 141

Analyzing noise from an external device

The analyzer can test and analyze the transmission quality of an external HDMI/DVI

transmit device using pseudo-random noise.

Important: To perform this test, the external HDMI/DVI transmit device must be able to

generate pseudo-random noise using the QDI-BCM format.

Note: Before performing this test, you may first want to test the cables and distribution

equipment used to transport the HDMI/DVI signal between the external device and

generator. For more information, see “Testing cables and distribution systems” on page

118.

To test an external HDMI/DVI signal using pseudo-random noise:

1. Connect the HDMI/DVI transmit device to the HDMI/DVI Rx connector on the generator.

2. If necessary, set the proper HDMI/DVI signal source and pseudo-random noise

parameters within the generator.

•See “Starting the Analyzer Setup Utility” on page 112 for steps on viewing the

current analyzer configuration.

• To edit HDMI/DVI signal source parameters, see “Setting up analyzer to measure

timing” on page 114.

Note: The HDMI/DVI signal source must be set to external (Auto Based On field set

to MEASURED) for this procedure.

• To edit pseudo-random noise parameters, see “Setting pseudo-random noise

parameters” on page 142.

3. If desired, monitor the video/audio signal received on the HDMI Rx connector (see

“Monitoring HDMI analyzer signal input” on page 110).

4. Start the analyzer (see page 113).

5. Generate pseudo-random noise from the HDMI/DVI transmit device.

6. Press and release the B key to analyze the number of pixel errors detected per color

component of the received HDMI/DVI signal (see example below).

To stop the analysis, press and release the B key again. The light on the key

extinguishes and the analysis stops.

R: G: B:

0 21 0

142 Chapter 8 Analyzing Digital Sources and Cables

7. Press and release the ACS key to analyze pixel error rate (in errors per billion) and

number of pixels measured (in billions) in the received HDMI/DVI signal on the LCD

(see example below).

Note: When the number of pixel errors becomes very large, the text “Very high” is

displayed in the bottom row of the LCD (replacing the numbers).

To stop the analysis, press and release the ACS key again. The light on the key

extinguishes and the analysis stops.

8. Press and release the DCS key to analyze the expected and reported values for the

first pixel error detected from the received HDMI/DVI signal on the LCD (see example

below).

To stop the analysis, press and release the DCS key again. The light on the key

extinguishes and the analysis stops.

Setting pseudo-random noise parameters

This section describes how to modify the pseudo-random noise output by the generator.

To set pseudo-random noise parameters:

1. Start the Analyzer Setup Utility (see “Starting the Analyzer Setup Utility” on page 112).

2. If necessary, see “Setting up analyzer to measure timing” on page 114 for steps to

configure the appropriate HDMI/DVI signal source and timing parameters.

3. Press and release the Step key.

The Step key illuminates and the Analyzer Images field is highlighted.

4. Using the Format knob, select the Pseudo Random Noise Setup field.

5. Using the Image knob, specify whether to enable (ON) or disable (OFF)

pseudo-random noise.

If set to OFF, pseudo-random noise is disabled and all associated fields are disabled.

6. Using the Format knob, select the Advance after Every field.

7. Using the Image knob, specify how you want pseudo-random noise generated, as

follows:

PER: pels/billion

4.255 0.88

original: 40018C

1st error: FFFFFF

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 143

• Select PIXEL to generate and receive pseudo-random noise at every pixel within

the whole frame.

• Select ACTIVE PIXEL to generate and receive pseudo-random noise only at active

pixels within the frame.

8. Using the Format knob, select the Parameters field.

9. Using the Image knob, specify how you want the pseudo-random noise seed and

sequence length implemented, as follows:

• Select AUTO to use the default seed value and sequence length. The default

settings ensure a stable, pseudo-random noise image. If you select this setting,

proceed to step 11.

• Select MANUAL to define specific seed value and sequence length settings. If you

select this setting, proceed to step 10.

Note: If the HDMI/DVI signal source is external (Auto Based On field set to

MEASURED), you cannot manually define these settings. The Parameters and Seed

Value(Hex) fields appear dimmed, and the Run Length(Hex) field is set when

measuring the external signal’s timing parameters (see “Setting up analyzer to

measure timing” on page 114).

10. If you set the Parameters field to MANUAL, define specific settings for pseudo-random

noise seed and sequence length by following these steps:

a. Using the Format knob, select the Seed Value(Hex) field.

b. Specify the desired seed value using the cursor (displayed under a digit in the field)

to select the appropriate value as follows:

• To move the cursor between digits, press the R and G keys.

• To select a number for a digit, turn the Image knob.

c. Using the Format knob, select either the Run-Length(Hex) or Run-Length(Dec)

field.

d. Specify the desired sequence length value in hexidecimal (if Run-Length(Hex)

field is highlighted) or decimal (if Run-Length(Dec) field is highlighted) using the

cursor (displayed under a digit in the field) to select the appropriate value as

follows:

• To move the cursor between digits, use the R and G keys.

• To select a number for a digit, use the Image knob.

11. Using the Format knob, select the Procedure field.

12. Using the Image knob, select the sequence type for pseudo-random noise to be

generated and tested as follows:

• Select CONTINUOUS to run the pseudo-random noise sequence continuously.

• Select SINGLE SHOT to run one sequence of pseudo-random noise.

144 Chapter 8 Analyzing Digital Sources and Cables

• Select MULTI SHOT to define a specific number of sequences to run. Define the

number of sequences to run in the field next to the Procedure field.

13. Press and release the Step key to save the currently displayed parameters.

The light on the Step key extinguishes, and the settings are implemented for analyzer

mode operation.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 145

9Testing HDMI Sink Devices

Topics in the chapter:

•Overview

•HDMI connections

•Getting started

•Testing HDMI video

•Testing HDMI audio

•Testing HDMI InfoFrames

146 Chapter 9 Testing HDMI Sink Devices

Overview

The HDMI option enables the generator to test HDMI-compliant sink devices. With the

HDMI option, the generator outputs HDMI-compatible TMDS video and data packets

containing audio and auxiliary information.

The HDMI option includes the following features:

• Advanced E-EDID parsing

• Generation of all EIA/CEA-861-B formats below 165 MHz (with all possible variations)

• Pixel repetition test capabilities

• Internal sine wave generator and external SPDIF audio input for audio testing

• AFD test capabilities

• Automatic and manual InfoFrame configuration

Note: This chapter refers to the EIA/CEA-861B standard, which may be purchased from

http://global.ihs.com/

For HDMI compliance testing procedures, see “Testing EDID in HDMI sink device for

HDMI compliance” on page 173.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 147

Getting started

This section provides basic information on how to operate the 802 generator using the

HDMI option.

HDMI connections

The generator with the HDMI option has two connectors. In addition to an HDMI Tx

(output) connector that emulates an HDMI source device, an AV connector allows external

SPDIF audio to be input to the HDMI signal. To use the AV port, an RCA-to-VGA cable is

included with the generator.

The following figure shows the location of these connectors on a model 802 generator with

the HDMI option.

Setting up the generator for HDMI operation

To perform testing using the HDMI option, you must ensure that the generator is

configured to output HDMI signals:

To set up the generator to perform HDMI testing:

1. Hold down the G and B keys, and then power on the generator.

The following message appears on the front panel LCD.

2. Release the G and B keys.

The generator is placed in Digital Friendly mode.

SS AVTx VGA

HDMI transmitterAudio/Video connector

Special: keys

Digital friendly

148 Chapter 9 Testing HDMI Sink Devices

3. Hold down the R and ACS keys, and then cycle the power to the generator.

The following message appears on the front panel LCD.

4. Release the R and ACS keys.

The generator is placed in Hot-Plug Format mode. This loads the Format knob list with

formats supported by the connected HDMI display (hot-plug formats read via EDID

structure of attached display).

Note: To toggle between the factory default and hot-plug Format knob lists, press and

release the R and ACS keys. Using the factory default Format knob list will disable the

generator’s ability to automatically select the appropriate output signal protocol (HDMI

or DVI) as performed in step 6. In this case, you must manually select the proper TMDS

output signal via Toggle DVI/HDMI key operation (R and G keys).

5. Hold down the Step, G, and B keys while starting the genertor, until Status display

appears on the LCD.

6. Release the Step, G, and B keys to enable status display on the generator (see

example below).

The format status on the LCD will indicate whether the unit is outputting HDMI or DVI

signal protocol from the Tx connector. An “H” in the format status (H8C in the example

above) indicates HDMI output; a “D” in the format status indicates DVI output.

Note: With the compliant Hot-plug Formats mode active and a hot-plug detected, the

generator automatically selects the appropriate TMDS output signal protocol (HDMI or

DVI) for the attached display (via EDID read).

7. If the output signal protocol is DVI, toggle to HDMI protocol by holding down the R key,

then pressing and releasing the G key.

The format status changes to “H” (from “D”) on the LCD.

Special: keys

hot-plug formats

H31 D8C=DMT0659

V60 0=SMPTE133

Video type Format name

Image name

Color depth

Color space

Image version

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 149

Testing HDMI video

This section provides steps on how to test handling of HDMI video signals by an HDMI

display. To support HDMI, the generator provides pre-defined formats for every video

format specified in the EIA/CEA-861-B standard. These pre-defined formats support all

aspects of the HDMI signal (video, audio, and auxiliary data).

The following table lists the generator formats used to test support for HDMI

(EIA/CEA-861-B) formats.

EIA/CEA-861-B Video

Identification Code Quantum Data format

1 DMT0659, DMT0660

2 480p59, 480p60, 480p59LH, 480p60LH

3 480p59SH, 480p60SH

4 720p59, 720p60

5 1080i29, 1080i30

6 480i2x29, 480i2x30, 480i2xL1, 480i2xL2

7 480i2xS1, 480i2xS2

8 240p2x_1, 240p2x_2, 240p2x_3, 240p2x_4,

240p2xL1, 240p2xL2, 240p2xL3, 240p2xL4

9 240p2xS1, 240p2xS4, 240p2xS3, 240p2xS4

10 480i4x29, 480i4x30, 480i4xL1, 480i4xL2

11 480i4xS1, 480i4xS2

12 240p4x_1, 240p4x_2, 240p4x_3, 240p4x_4,

240p4xL1, 240p4xL2, 240p4xL3, 240p4xL4

13 240p4xS1, 240p4xS2, 240p4xS3, 240p4xS4

14 480p2x59, 480p2x60, 480p2xL1, 480p2xL2

15 480p2xS1, 480p2xS2

16 1080p59, 1080p60

17 576p50, 576p50LH

18 576p50SH

19 720p50

20 1080i25

21 576i2x25, 576i2xLH

22 576i2xSH

23 288p2x_1, 288p2x_2, 288p2x_3, 288p2xL1,

288p2xL2, 288p2xL3

150 Chapter 9 Testing HDMI Sink Devices

Testing HDMI video formats

Basic testing requires verifying proper handling of those video formats supported by the

HDMI display. Using the table above as a guide, you can verify your display’s support for

one or more EIA/CEA-861-B formats.

To test an HDMI display using supported HDMI formats:

1. Connect an HDMI display to the Tx connector on the generator.

2. If necessary, set up the generator for HDMI output.

•See “Setting up the generator for HDMI operation” on page 147 for steps on setting

up the generator for HDMI operation.

3. Using the Format knob, specify the HDMI video format you want to test.

24 288p2xS1, 288p2xS2, 288p2xS3

25 576i4x25, 576i4xLH

26 576i4xSH

27 288p4x_1, 288p4x_2, 288p4x_3, 288p4xL1,

288p4xL2, 288p4xL3

28 288p4xS1, 288p4xS2, 288p4xS3

29 576p2x50, 576p2xLH

30 576p2xSH

31 1080p50

32 1080p23, 1080p24

33 1080p25

34 1080p29, 1080p30

EIA/CEA-861-B Video

Identification Code Quantum Data format

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 151

4. Using the Image knob, select the Master image.

The Master image appears on the connected HDMI display (as shown below).

5. To verify proper handling of the selected HDMI video format, check for the following in

the image on the HDMI display:

• scrambled raster

• jitter

• centering

• scaling anomalies

• resolution patches (for clarity)

• sparkling or missing pixels

152 Chapter 9 Testing HDMI Sink Devices

6. Using the Image knob, select the Ramp image.

The Ramp image appears on the connected HDMI display (as shown below).

7. To verify proper handling of the selected HDMI video format, check for glitches in the

image on the HDMI display.

8. Using the Image knob, select additional images (as desired) to verify proper handling

of the selected HDMI video format.

9. To test another HDMI format, return to step 3.

Testing HDMI video pixel repetition

The EIA/CEA-861-B standard defines a number of progressively-scanned gaming formats

which support variable horizontal resolution. These formats maintain a fixed 2880-pixel

format timing and use pixel repetition to provide 10 different effective horizontal

resolutions. A special blanking scheme further reduces the number of active pixels (to

those listed in the table below), thereby providing a horizontal safe area that insures that

all of the pixels in a game will be visible on overscanned HDMI displays.

To support HDMI gaming format and pixel repetition testing, the generator allows you to

sequentially apply pixel repetition (up to 10 times) to a unique image. As the pixel

repetition factor is increased, the horizontal resolution of the displayed image will decrease

as shown the table below.

Pixel repetition factor

(image version) Horizontal resolution

0 2880 pixels/line

1 2560 pixels/line

2 1280 pixels/line

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 153

To test an HDMI display using HDMI pixel repetition:

1. Connect an HDMI display to the Tx connector on the generator.

2. If necessary, set up the generator for HDMI output.

•See “Setting up the generator for HDMI operation” on page 147 for steps on setting

up the generator for HDMI operation.

3. Using the Format knob, select the HDMI gaming format you want to test.

Note: Gaming formats on the generator have the characters "4x" in their names (such

as “480i4x29” or “576i4x25”). For a listing of all HDMI formats, see the table on page

149.

4. Using the Image knob, select the PixelRep image.

The PixelRep image appears on the connected HDMI display (as shown below).

5. Press and release the Step key.

The Step key illuminates.

3 853 pixels/line

4 640 pixels/line

5 512 pixels/line

6 427 pixels/line

7 366 pixels/line

8 320 pixels/line

9 284 pixels/line

10 256 pixels/line

Pixel repetition factor

(image version) Horizontal resolution

154 Chapter 9 Testing HDMI Sink Devices

6. Using the Image knob, select the appropriate image version number (1-10).

Note: The image version number correlates with the pixel repetition factor.

The pixel repetition factor appears in the center of the image.

7. To verify proper handling of the selected HDMI gaming format, check the following in

the image on the HDMI display:

• The horizontal active area is resized to the appropriate number of clocked pixels

using vertical bars to the left and right of the default (2880 pixel) image.

• The white vertical borders and circles in the active area appear thicker.

• The white text in the center of the active area appears stretched and bigger.

8. Using the Image knob, select additional pixel repetition factors (as desired) to verify

proper handling of the selected HDMI gaming format using variable horizontal

resolutions.

9. When finished, press and release the Step key.

The light on the Step key extinguishes.

10. To test another HDMI gaming format, return to step 3.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 155

Testing HDMI audio

This section provides steps on how to test handling of audio packets by an HDMI display.

Testing can be performed using audio originating from both internal (generator) and

external sources. The generator supports both 2-channel SPDIF audio from internal

source and external source and up to 8-channel audio from an internal audio source.

There are seperate sets of images for testing 2-channel SPDIF audio and 8-channel

audio.

Testing 2-channel HDMI audio output from internal SPDIF source

To support testing of HDMI audio, the 802 generator provides two-channel LPCM audio

(using an internally-generated sinewave) at the highest audio sampling rate (48 kHz).

Multiple scenarios are provided that allow you to test one or both audio channels at

different amplitudes and frequencies, as well as test using the different supported

sampling rates.

The following table lists the images used to perform HDMI audio testing using an internal

audio source.

To test an HDMI display using HDMI audio from the generator:

1. Connect an HDMI display to the Tx connector on the generator.

2. If necessary, set up the generator for HDMI output.

•See “Setting up the generator for HDMI operation” on page 147 for steps on setting

up the generator for HDMI operation.

3. Using the Format knob, select either the DMT0660 or 480i2x29 format.

Image Description

AudioLR Left and right audio channel output with adjustable amplitude.

AudioLRf Left and right audio channel output with adjustable frequency.

AudioRAT Left and right audio channel output with adjustable sampling rate.

Audio_L Left audio channel output with adjustable amplitude.

Audio_Lf Left audio channel output with adjustable frequency.

Audio_R Right audio channel output with adjustable amplitude.

Audio_Rf Right audio channel output with adjustable frequency.

156 Chapter 9 Testing HDMI Sink Devices

4. Using the Image knob, select the appropriate image (see table above).

The image appears on the connected HDMI display. The image shows the current

settings for the HDMI audio output. For example, the AudioLR image is shown below.

5. Press and release the Step key.

The Step key illuminates.

6. Using the Image knob, adjust the amplitude, frequency, or sampling rate (based on the

selected image) of the HDMI audio output.

7. To verify proper HDMI audio handling, check the following on the HDMI display:

• Audio is output from the proper channels (left, right, or both).

• When amplitude is adjusted, the volume is subsequently changed.

• When frequency is adjusted, the pitch is subsequently changed.

8. When finished, press and release the Step key.

The light on the Step key extinguishes.

9. To test another HDMI audio output type, return to step 4.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 157

Testing 8-channel HDMI audio output from internal source

To support testing of HDMI audio, the 802 generator provides 8-channel LPCM audio

(using an internally-generated sinewave) at the highest audio sampling rate (192 kHz).

Multiple scenarios are provided that allow you to test one or both audio channels at

different amplitudes and frequencies, as well as test using the different supported

sampling rates.

The following table lists the images used to perform HDMI audio testing using an internal

audio source.

To test an HDMI display using HDMI 8-channel audio from the generator:

1. Connect an HDMI display to the Tx connector on the generator.

2. If necessary, set up the generator for HDMI output.

•See “Setting up the generator for HDMI operation” on page 147 for steps on setting

up the generator for HDMI operation.

3. Using the Format knob, select either the DMT0660 or 480i2x29 format.

Image Description

Audio_1 Channel 1 output with adjustable amplitude.

Audio_1f Channel 1 output with adjustable frequency.

Audio_2 Channel 2 output with adjustable amplitude.

Audio_2f Channel 2 output with adjustable frequency.

Audio_3 Channel 3 output with adjustable amplitude.

Audio_3f Channel 3 output with adjustable frequency.

Audio_4 Channel 4 output with adjustable amplitude.

Audio_4f Channel 4 output with adjustable frequency.

Audio_5 Channel 5 output with adjustable amplitude.

Audio_5f Channel 5 output with adjustable frequency.

Audio_6 Channel 6 output with adjustable amplitude.

Audio_6f Channel 6 output with adjustable frequency.

Audio_7 Channel 7 output with adjustable amplitude.

Audio_7f Channel 7 output with adjustable frequency.

Audio_8 Channel 8 output with adjustable amplitude.

Audio_8f Channel 8 output with adjustable frequency.

158 Chapter 9 Testing HDMI Sink Devices

4. Using the Image knob, select the appropriate image (see table above).

The image appears on the connected HDMI display. The image shows the current

settings for the HDMI audio output. For example, the Audio_1 image is shown below.

5. Press and release the Step key.

The Step key illuminates.

6. Using the Image knob, adjust the amplitude or frequency (based on the selected

image) of the HDMI audio output.

7. To verify proper HDMI audio handling, check the following on the HDMI display:

• Audio is output from the proper channels.

• When amplitude is adjusted, the volume is subsequently changed.

• When frequency is adjusted, the pitch is subsequently changed.

8. When finished, press and release the Step key.

The light on the Step key extinguishes.

9. To test another HDMI audio output type, return to step 4.

Testing HDMI audio using an external audio source

The generator provides basic, two-channel LPCM audio signals. However, it can encode

multichannel audio signals from an external SPDIF source (such as a DVD player) with the

HDMI content stream.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 159

To test an HDMI display using HDMI audio from an external source:

1. Connect an HDMI display to the Tx connector on the generator.

2. Connect the external audio source to the AV connector on the generator using the

RCA-to-VGA cable (part 30-00148) provided with the generator, as shown below:

3. If necessary, set up the generator for HDMI output.

•See “Setting up the generator for HDMI operation” on page 147 for steps on setting

up the generator for HDMI operation.

4. Using the Format knob, select an appropriate format for the connected HDMI display.

5. Using the Image knob, select any desired image.

6. Using a terminal emulator, establish a terminal connection with the generator.

7. Configure the generator to use an external audio source by entering the following

command:

SDMG 2

FMTU

8. Set the sample frequency to match the frequency of the external source by entering the

following command:

ARAT 44.1E3 (example only)

Alternatively configure the generator to detect the audio sampling rate from the channel

header of the incoming digital audio.

ARAT 0.0

Note: The default frequency is 48 kHz (which is used by DVD players). However, if the

external source is an audio CD played on a DVD player, the player will output S/PDIF

with a sampling rate of 44.1 KHz (not 48 KHz). In this case, set the sampling frequency

to 44.1 kHz (or reload the format, which will detect the sampling frequency

automatically).

9. Turn on the external audio source.

The external audio signal will be encoded into the HDMI signal.

Note: The generator cannot independently control external source channels. You must

use the device generating the audio signal to control the channels.

To audio source

Red

White

To AV

connector

160 Chapter 9 Testing HDMI Sink Devices

10. To verify proper HDMI audio handling, check the following on the HDMI display:

• Audio is output from the proper channels (left, right, or both).

• When the volume is adjusted at the external source, the volume is subsequently

changed.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 161

Testing HDMI InfoFrames

This section provides steps on how to test handling of auxiliary (InfoFrame) packets by an

HDMI display. The generator loads and sends default Auxiliary Video Information (XAVI),

Audio (XAUD), and Source Product Description (XSPD) InfoFrame packet buffers to the

display for each format (see table on page 149 for a listing of HDMI formats). The XAVI

and the XAUD InfoFrame packets are sent at every frame (repeated mode), while the

XSPD is sent only once. The XMPG and XGIF InfoFrames are gated off and not enabled.

Viewing InfoFrame contents

The 802 generator provides a convenient method for monitoring the InfoFrame content of

the transmitted HDMI signal.

To view current HDMI InfoFrame contents transmitted from the generator:

1. Connect an HDMI display to the Tx connector on the generator.

2. If necessary, set up the generator for HDMI output.

•See “Setting up the generator for HDMI operation” on page 147 for steps on setting

up the generator for HDMI operation.

3. Using the Format knob, select the HDMI format you want to test.

4. Using the Image knob, select the PacketTx image.

The PacketTx image appears on the connected HDMI display. The image shows the

current settings for the AVI InfoFrame output.

162 Chapter 9 Testing HDMI Sink Devices

5. Press and release the Step key.

The Step key illuminates.

6. Using the Image knob, select the appropriate InfoFrame type.

The contents of the appropriate InfoFrame output appears on the HDMI display.

7. When finished, press and release the Step key.

The light on the Step key extinguishes.

Testing with Active Format Description (AFD)

When transporting HDMI video images from a source to a display, different formats may

be used between the content, transmission signal, and display. To provide compatibility

between the different formats, Active Format Description (AFD) is used.

AFD describes the portion of the coded video frame that is "of interest" (or “active”). The

appropriate AFD information is transmitted with the video to the HDMI display as part of

AVI InfoFrame packets. Using AFD information, the display is able to present the image

optimally.

For AFD testing, the generator allows you to apply different AFD cases using the AFDtest

image, which provides 12 different cases (as image versions) for both 4:3 and 16:9

displays. As each image version appears, the appropriate AFD information is sent with the

video to the display.

The following table lists the AFD cases (as specified in the ETSI TR 101 154 v.1.4.1

standard) that are provided by the generator.

AFD case

Image

Version

(4:3 Format)

Image

Version

(16:9 Format) Aspect Ratio of Active Area

2 8 7 box 16:9 (top)

3 5 4 box 14:9 (top)

4 9-12 9-12 box > 16:9 (center)

8 0 6 Same as the signal format

9 1 1 4:3 (center)

10 7 8 16:9 (center)

11 4 3 14:9 (centered)

13 3 5 4:3 (with shoot and protect 14:9 center)

14 6 2 16:9 (with shoot and protect 14:9 center)

15 2 0 16:9 (with shoot and protect 4:3 center)

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 163

To test an HDMI display’s ability to support AFD:

1. Connect an HDMI display to the Tx connector on the generator.

2. If necessary, set up the generator for HDMI output. See “Setting up the generator for

HDMI operation” on page 147.

3. Using the Format knob, select an appropriate video signal format. See the table on

page 149 for a listing of HDMI formats.

4. Using the Image knob, select the AFDtest image.

The AFDtest image appears on the connected HDMI display (as shown below).

5. Press the Step key.

The Step key illuminates, and the following image appears.

6. Using the Image knob, select an AFD scenario by selecting the appropriate image

version number (1-12).

Note: The image version number corresponds with the AFD case (or code). See the

table on page 162 for a listing of the image numbers that correspond with each AFD

case.

164 Chapter 9 Testing HDMI Sink Devices

The image appears on the HDMI display. For example, the image representing AFD

case 11 (image version 4) on a 4:3 display is shown in the example below.

7. Using the selected AFD scenario, verify that the HDMI display presents the image

correctly.

Note: Displays use the AFD information to determine how to present an image.

Different displays may present HDMI video with the same AFD differently.

8. Using the Image knob, select additional AFD cases (as desired).

9. When finished, press and release the Step key.

The light on the Step key extinguishes.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 165

10 Testing EDID

Topics in this chapter:

•Overview

•EDID testing for source devices

•EDID testing for sink devices

166 Chapter 10 Testing EDID

Overview

This chapter provides procedures for testing EDID generation and handling. The

generator can be configured to emulate an HDMI/DVI source when testing HDMI/DVI sink

(display) devices or it can be configured to emulate an HDMI/DVI sink (display) device

when testing an HDMI/DVI source device.

Some of the EDID tests require the analyzer option. These include testing the EDID

handling capabilities of a source device and the HDMI compliance EDID testing for a sink

(display) device. Viewing EDID of a display and writing to a display is a generator function

and does not require the analyzer option.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 167

EDID testing for source devices

The generator can emulate an HDMI/DVI sink (display) in order to test HDMI source

devices.

Testing response of source to EDID

The analyzer can emulate different HDMI/DVI displays using a built-in, configurable EDID

structure. With this capability an HDMI/DVI source device can be tested for its ability to

handle an EDID structure received from virtually any DDC-compatible display. You first

have to configure the generator to support the HDMI/DVI signal source and enable

measuring of internal signals. You then configure the EDID in accordance with a particular

display. Use the following procedures.

To set up the generator to perform HDMI/DVI testing:

1. Hold down the G and B keys, and then power on the generator.

The following message appears on the front panel LCD.

2. Release the G and B keys.

The generator is placed in Digital Friendly mode.

3. Hold down the R and ACS keys, and then cycle the power to the generator.

The following message appears on the front panel LCD.

4. Hold down the Step, G, and B keys while starting the genertor, until Status display

appears on the LCD.

Special: keys

Digital friendly

Special: keys

hot-plug formats

168 Chapter 10 Testing EDID

5. Release the Step, G, and B keys to enable status display on the generator (see

example below).

The format status on the LCD will indicate whether the unit is outputting HDMI or DVI

signal protocol from the Tx connector. An “H” in the format status (H8C in the example

above) indicates HDMI output; a “D” in the format status indicates DVI output.

Note: With the compliant Hot-plug Formats mode active and a hot-plug detected, the

generator automatically selects the appropriate TMDS output signal protocol (HDMI or

DVI) for the attached display (via EDID read).

To configure the analyzer for internal measurements:

1. Connect a digital display with the DVI or HDMI transmitter on the generator.

2. Select the Analzyer image.

The Analyzer Setup Utility appears on the connected display.

3. Press and release the Step key.

The Step key illuminates and the Analyzer Images field is highlighted.

H31 D8C=DMT0659

V60 0=SMPTE133

Video type Format name

Image name

Color depth

Color space

Image version

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 169

4. Using the Image knob, select the ON setting to enable analyzer images.

5. Using the Format knob, select the Auto Based On field.

6. Using the Image knob, select CURRENT in the highlighted field to measure the

HDMI/DVI signal originating internally from the generator.

7. Press and release the Step key to save the currently displayed parameters.

The light on the Step key extinguishes, and the new settings are implemented for

analyzer mode operation.

To configure the analyzer to emulate the EDID structure of a display:

1. Determine the HDMI/DVI display you wish to emulate and if possible obtain a text file

of its EDID.

Note: This can be obtained from the manufacturer or by reading the EDID using the

HDMI/DVI generator. For procedures on reading the EDID of a display with the

generator, please refer to “Viewing EDID from a display” on page 171.

2. Connect an HDMI/DVI cable between the HDMI/DVI Tx and Rx connectors on the

generator.

3. Using a terminal emulator, establish a terminal session with the generator (see page

14).

4. Modify the EDID structure in the generator using the XDID and DIDU commands.

For example, to change the color characteristics of the EDID structure (a total of 10

bytes starting at byte 19), you could use the following command strings:

XDID 19 A E88A82A0564796240F48

DIDU

To program multiple segments (or the entire EDID structure) at once, create a text file

containing the EDID. Then send the text file to the generator using your terminal

emulator’s file transfer feature.

The following commands write the entire EDID block 0:

XDID 0 80 00FFFFFFFFFFFF005A63118F01010101130D010380221B782A4706A55C47

9C251E4F54BFEF008180310A010101010101010101010101302A009851002A40307013

00520E1100001E000000FF004132333033313931353335390A000000FD00324B1E530E

000A202020202020000000FC0056583730302D330A20202020200095

DIDU

5. To verify the EDID structure, use the EDID? query. This command will display the entire

EDID structure in ASCII hex format.

To view a specific segment of EDID, use the I2CR? query. This command will display

the requested EDID in ASCII hex format.

6. If desired, use the STRG command to stretch the SCL low signal for 5 ms in the

analyzer’s receiver.

170 Chapter 10 Testing EDID

To test the source device’s handling of the EDID:

1. Connect the HDMI/DVI source device to the HDMI/DVI Rx connector on the generator.

Upon receiving the HDMI/DVI signal at the HDMI/DVI Rx connector, the generator

sends the EDID structure to the source device.

2. At the HDMI/DVI source device, compare the processed EDID information with the

EDID structure defined in the generator.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 171

EDID testing for sink devices

The generator can emulate an HDMI, DVI or VGA source device in order to test HDMI, DVI

or VGA displays. This includes viewing EDID from a display and writing EDID data to a

display. The generator can test an HDMI display device’s EDID structure and transmission

in accordance with the HDMI Compliance Test Specification 1.0.

Viewing EDID from a display

You can use the generator to view EDID from a DDC-compliant VGA, HDMI or DVI display

connected with the generator.

To view EDID information from an HDMI, DVI or VGA display:

1. Connect an HDMI, DVI or VGA device to the HDMI, DVI or VGA Tx connector on the

generator.

2. Using the Format knob, select an appropriate format for the HDMI, DVI or VGA display

connected to the HDMI, DVI or VGA Tx connector.

Alternatively, to automatically configure the Format knob list based on the EDID of the

display, hold down the R key, and then press and release the ACS key.

3. Using the Image knob, select the EdidData image.

The EdidData image displays the first block of data.

4. Press the Step key, turn the Image knob to the first EDID block.

172 Chapter 10 Testing EDID

5. To view parsed EDID information, press and release the Step key, and then turn the

Image knob to view additional blocks and parsed data.

To query EDID information from an HDMI, DVI or VGA display via the command line:

1. Using a terminal emulator, establish a terminal session with the generator (see page

14).

2. To view the current EDID in ASCII hex format, use the EDID? command.

To view a specific segment of EDID, use the I2CR? command.

Querying the EDID from the command line enables you to create a text file with the

EDID in order to configure the analyzer to emulate the display device.

Writing EDID data to a display

You can modify the EDID in the connected display, if the EEPROM in the display is

writable.

To modify the EDID in a display:

1. Connect the display to be modified to the HDMI, DVI or VGA Tx connector on the

generator.

2. Using a terminal emulator, establish a terminal session with the generator (see page

14).

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 173

3. Use the I2CW command to modify the EDID structure in the connected display.

For example, to change the color characteristics of the EDID structure (a total of 10

bytes starting at byte 19), you could use the following command string:

i2cw eprom1 a0 25 A E88A82A0564796240F48

4. To program multiple segments or a complete EDID structure, use a text editor to enter

the commands in a text file, and then download the file to the generator from a terminal

emulator program such as HyperTerminal.

Testing EDID in HDMI sink device for HDMI compliance

The analyzer supports the following EDID and video HDMI compliance tests in

accordance with the HDMI Compliance Test Specification 1.0 (CTS):

• Test ID 8-1: EDID Readable

• Test ID 8-2: EDID VESA Structure

• Test ID 8-3: CEA Timing Extension Structure

• Test ID 8-17: 861B Format Support Requirements

• Test ID 8-18: HDMI Format Support Requirements

• Test ID 8-19: Pixel Encoding Requirements

• Test ID 8-20: Video Format Timing

These tests are intended for in-house testing of products before submission to an HDMI

ATC for full certification testing.

Overview of HDMI compliance testing

HDMI compliance testing is conducted through the generator’s transmit HDMI connector.

A standard HDMI-to-HDMI cable is used between the device under test and the generator.

The generator must be placed in the digital friendly mode and set to output HDMI signals,

which is the default configuration for HDMI equipped generators.

After making the physical connections you need to specify the capabilities of the sink

display under test. This enables the generator to compare the expected results with the

actual results measured from the display. Use the CDF_Sink image, which is based on the

Capabilities Declaration Form (Appendix 3) of the Compliance Test Specification, to

specify the display capabilities.

To test the sink device, load the EdidHDMI image, and turn the image knob to advance

through each test listed above in sequence.

174 Chapter 10 Testing EDID

Testing HDMI sink devices for EDID compliance

The procedures for EDID and video testing of HDMI sink devices in accordance with the

HDMI Compliance Test Specification 1.0 are provided below.

Note: The EDID and video tests should be performed in sequence as a single test series.

Each test is dependent on successful completion of the previous test.

To set up the generator for HDMI compliance testing:

1. Hold down the G and B keys, and then power on the generator.

The following message appears on the front panel LCD.

2. Release the G and B keys.

The generator is placed in Digital Friendly mode.

3. Select and apply a valid HDMI format such as DMT0660 either by turning the Format

knob or entering the following command:

FMTL DMT0660; FMTU

4. Load the GenOps image to verify that the generator is configured to output HDMI (that

it is not in DVI-only mode).

The generator’s default configuration is to output HDMI. Note that the display status

mode will indicate that the generator is in HDMI mode with an “H” character. You can

also verify that the generator is putting out an HDMI signal by issuing the following

command:

HDMI?

The returned value should be 1 indicating HDMI output.

Special: keys

Digital friendly

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 175

To specify the capabilities of the sink device:

1. Load the CDF_Sink image, which is shown below.

2. Press and release the Step key to enable selection of each field. Use the Format knob

to position the cursor. Use the Image knob to choose values.

For example, if your display supports both 4:3 and 16:9 aspect ratios, set the

Sink_PrimaryAR field to Both.

3. Press the Step (Exit) key to save the settings. The settings are stored until you change

them, and are kept if the generator is restarted.

To initiate the compliance testing:

1. Load the EdidHDMI image.

2. Press and release the STEP key, then turn the Image knob to progress through the

tests in the sequence below.

176 Chapter 10 Testing EDID

Testing EDID readability (Test ID 8-1) - This test verifies that the EDID can be read

properly. The screens are shown below.

(

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 177

Testing EDID VESA structure (Test ID 8-2) - This test verifies that the data in the base

EDID 1.3 block and basic EDID Extension handling is correct and meets all aspects of the

relevant specifications.

178 Chapter 10 Testing EDID

Testing CEA timing extension structure (Test ID 8-3) - This test verifies that the data in any

CEA Timing Extension present in EDID is formatted properly and meets all aspects of the

relevant specifications.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 179

Testing 861B Format Support Requirements (Test ID 8-17) - This test verifies that no

861B-defined video format is declared only in a Detailed Timing Descriptor.

180 Chapter 10 Testing EDID

Testing HDMI Format Support Requirements (Test ID 8-18) - This test verifies that Sink

DUT indicates support for all required video formats in its EDID.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 181

Testing Pixel Encoding Requirements (Test ID 8-19) - Verifies that the Sink supports

YCpCr pixel encoding when required.

To create a knob list of all formats supported by the display:

1. Press and release the STEP key to return to the initial compliance testing screen.

The STEP key should be extinguished.

182 Chapter 10 Testing EDID

2. Press and hold the R key and then press and release the ACS key. Alternatively power

off the generator, press and hold both the R and ACS keys then power up the generator

to configure the generator knob list with the hot plug formats.

The initial compliance test screen re-appears and the Format knob list includes only

those formats in the display EDID.

Visual verification of formats

Additional visual inspection of Tests 8-19 and 8-20 is necessary to ensure that each

format can be loaded and displayed at each pixel encoding and at its minimum and

maximum pixel rate.

Test ID 8-19 involves testing each format with different YCbCr pixel encoding: 4:4:4 pixel

sampling and 4:2:2 sampling. Test ID 8-20 requires that each format listed in the EDID be

be tested at two different pixel clock frequencies. The two different frequencies shall be the

minimum and maximum permitted by a Source. For 50Hz formats, these values are

49.75Hz and 50.25Hz (50Hz ± 0.5%). For 59.94Hz or 60Hz formats, these frequencies are

59.64Hz (59.94Hz – 0.5%) and 60.3Hz (60Hz + 0.5%). The tested pixel clock frequency

accuracy shall be ±0.05%.

A separate listing of the formats is provided on the Format knob list to support this visual

inspection testing. The nomenclature for visual inspection testing of maximum and

minimum pixel rate is of the form shown in the example below:

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 183

Example

•SVD – Short Video Descriptor.

•01 – EIA/CEA-861-B Format Video Identification Code (for example 01, 02, 06, etc.

listed on page 149)

•Y2 – Y indicates color difference. 2 = 4:2:2 pixel sample encoding. 4 = 4:4:4.

•1 – Represents DMT0659 format, which is first format (index 1) listed under video

identification code 01 in table on page 149.

The nomenclature for visual inspection testing for pixel encoding is of the form shown in

the example below:

•SVD – Short Video Descriptor.

•01 – EIA/CEA-861-B Format Video Identification Code (for example 01, 02, 06, etc.

listed on page 149)

•H – Indicates that format is using maximum (H = High) or minimum (L = Low)

frequency required by compliance test.

•01 – Index of format as listed under video identification code onpage 149.

To visually validate the formats in the knob list for pixel encodings and pixel rate:

1. Select an image suitable for testing the display type by turning the Image knob or

entering the appropriate command. For example to display the Master image enter:

IMGL Master; IMGU

2. Turn the format knob to display each of the formats in the knob list that begin with SVD.

Each format should display properly.

3. Turn the format knob to display each of the formats in the knob list.

Each format should display properly.

Short

Video

Descriptor

VIC Format

Index

01 YSVD 2

Component

color

sampling

Short

Video

Descriptor

VIC Format

Index

01 HSVD 0

Frequency

(High / Low)

184 Chapter 10 Testing EDID

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 185

11 Testing HDCP

You can use the generator, with the High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP)

option installed, to test HDCP 1.0 and 1.1 compliant devices.

For more information about HDCP, see http://www.digital-cp.com/.

Topics in this chapter:

•Testing DVI or HDMI receiver with HDCP

•Testing HDCP between HDMI transmitter and DVI receiver

•Testing HDCP with static images

•Using command-line interface to control HDCP

•Troubleshooting HDCP errors

186 Chapter 11 Testing HDCP

Testing DVI or HDMI receiver with HDCP

This section describes how to test DVI and HDMI receivers with HDCP.

All DVI and HDMI options, including analyzer options, support HDCP production keys if

the HDCP option is installed. Some DVI options support both production and public keys.

To determine which HDCP keys your generator supports:

1. Load the GenStats image.

2. Verify that HDCP is listed under the Options heading, which indicates that the HDCP

option is installed, and that production keys are available.

3. If the following image names are listed on the LCD, then HDCP public (test) keys are

installed.

• HdcpA1B1

• HdcpA1B2

• HdcpA2B1

• HdcpA2B2

Note: With older firmware installed, you may be able to select these images, but an

“Image is not available” message is displayed on the display connected with the

generator. This message indicates that public keys are not installed.

To test HDCP with a DVI device:

1. Hold down the G and B key while starting the generator put the generator in digital

friendly mode.

Alternatively, enter the following command:

SROP 2

2. Connect the DVI transmitter on the generator to the device’s DVI receiver.

3. Select an appropriate HDCP test image.

If you are testing a device with a production key, select the HdcpProd(uction) image.

The HdcpProd image assumes that both the HDCP transmitter and receiver have a

production key.

If your generator supports public keys, select the appropriate image below. For

example, if the receiver has pubic key B2, and you want to use public key A1 in the

transmitter, then select the HdcpA1B2 image.

• HdcpA1B1

• HdcpA1B2

• HdcpA2B1

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 187

• HdcpA2B

The image will indicate if the test passed or failed. If the test fails, see “Troubleshooting

HDCP errors” on page 191.

4. To test another device, connect the cable to the new device.

The HDCP test starts automatically.

To test HDCP with an HDMI device:

1. Hold down the G and B key while starting the generator put the generator in digital

friendly mode.

Alternatively, enter the following command:

SROP 2

2. Connect the HDMI transmitter on the generator to the device’s HDMI receiver.

3. Select the HdcpProd(uction) image.

The image will indicate if the test passed or failed. If the test fails, see “Troubleshooting

HDCP errors” on page 191.

188 Chapter 11 Testing HDCP

Testing HDCP between HDMI transmitter and DVI receiver

HDCP 1.1-compliant devices must interoperate with HDCP 1.0 compliant devices using

the DVI protocol. Generators with an HDMI transmitter can be used to test HDCP with

devices that have an DVI receiver.

To test HDMI Tx with DVI Rx:

1. Hold down the G and B key while starting the generator put the generator in digital

friendly mode.

Alternatively, enter the following command:

SROP 2

2. Establish a command terminal connection with the generator, using HyperTerminal or

VGM.

3. At the R:> prompt, enter the following to set the HDMI transmitter into DVI mode, which

disables audio:

HDMI 0

ALLU

The DVI mode setting is saved until you change it.

4. Use an HDMI-to-DVI cable (provided with HDMI generator) to connect the HDMI

transmitter to the DVI receiver.

5. Load the HdcpProd image. This image assumes that both the transmitter and receiver

are using production keys.

The image will indicate if the test passed or failed. If the test fails, see “Troubleshooting

HDCP errors” on page 191.

To change HDMI transmitter from DVI to HDMI mode:

1. Establish a command terminal connection with the generator, using HyperTerminal or

VGM.

2. At the R:> prompt enter the following to invoke the HDMI mode:

HDMI 1

ALLU

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 189

Testing HDCP with static images

The standard HDCP test images have color bars in the background. A special mode is

available for testing HDCP with any static background image you specify.

To test HDCP with a different background image:

1. Turn on the generator while holding down the G and ACS keys until hdcp tester is

displayed.

Alternatively, enter the following command:

SROP 8192

2. Select a format that is supported by the display, and then load any static image.

The HDCP test begins automatically when you connect the display.

If the HDCP test passed, the generator displays the image you specified. If the test

failed, the display will remain blank. See “Troubleshooting HDCP errors” on page 191.

190 Chapter 11 Testing HDCP

Using command-line interface to control HDCP

The command interface can control HDCP tests in automated testing environments.

To run HDCP test from command prompt:

1. Establish a command terminal connection with the generator using VGM or

HyperTerminal.

2. Connect the device to be tested to the transmitter on the generator.

3. At the R:> prompt, enter the following command to run the HDCP test:

HDCP?

HDCP? command

The HDCP? command is the only command used to control HDCP tests.

Syntax HDCP? [ A1 | A2 ] [ B1 | B2 ] [frames]

Where frames is the number of frames to be tested. The default number of frames is 512.

Example These examples demonstrate how to specify which test to run.

Error codes These errors may occur when using the HDCP? command.

Command Result

hdcp? Runs test with production keys for 512 (default) frames, and then returns 0 if

the test passed, or an error number if the test failed.

hdcp? 2000 Run test with production keys for 2000 frames.

hdcp? a1 b1 Runs test with public keys A1 and B1 for 512 frames.

hdcp? a2 b1 2000 Runs test with public keys A2 and B1 for 2000 frames.

Code Meaning

9520 HDCP key combination is not supported. Valid combinations are A1/B1,

A2/B1, A1/B2, and A1/B2.

9521 Test started successfully, but failed during test.

9522 Test did not start.

9508 Specified keys are not present.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 191

Troubleshooting HDCP errors

Common problems

This table describes possible solutions to problems that may occur during HDCP testing.

Running HDCP test in step mode

The generator normally runs the steps in the HDCP test automatically. If the test fails, the

test is restarted after a few seconds, which makes it difficult to read values at the step

where the test failed. Run any HDCP test in manual mode to pause the test after each

step.

To run the HDCP test in step mode:

1. At any step during an HDCP test, press the Step key.

2. Turn the Image knob to advance to the next step. If you are using an PCI-based

generator, use the commands displayed on the screen to advance to the next step.

3. Press the Step key again to return to automatic mode.

Running an HDCP self-test

An HDCP self-test checks that HDCP authentication is working properly between the

transmitter and receiver on the analyzer. This test can also be used to confirm that a cable

is not interfering with HDCP authentication, and that the DDC clock and DDC data pins,

which the I2C buss uses, are working correctly.

Problem Solution

Test fails at step 3 Transmitter could not read Bksv from the receiver, Bksv was read cor-

rectly but is a wrong value, or an I2C error occurred.

If the EdidData image loads, the I2C communication is working properly.

Verify that the Bksv value is 5 bytes (that is, 40 bits of which 20 zeros

and 20 ones) by reading the value from the test image.

HdcpProd image flashes

repeatedly at step 9

Restart the generator while holding down the Outputs key, or use the

SROP 16 command, which starts the generator in “Reset HDCP Rx by

gating clock” mode.

HdcpProd image is

unavailable

The HdcpProd image requires the HDCP production key option to be

installed in the generator. To determine if this option is installed, view

the GenStats image. The HDCP option will be listed under the Options

heading if it is present.

192 Chapter 11 Testing HDCP

To run an HDCP self-test:

1. Hold down the G and B key while starting the generator put the generator in digital

friendly mode.

Alternatively, enter the following command:

SROP 2

2. Connect your cable to the Rx and Tx on the analyzer.

3. Select the HdcpProd image.

When testing a display, the HDCP test results are displayed on the display being tested.

When testing a cable, where no display is connected to the transmitter, test results are

displayed by the LCD display on the generator. If HDCP authentication is working

correctly, the name of the HdcpProd image on the LCD will be updated with Ri values

every 2 seconds. If HDCP is not working, the LDC display will remain static.

Understanding the HDCP test

Understanding what the generator does during an HDCP test can help you determine why

an HDCP test failed.

To determine which hardware is installed:

1. Load the GenStats image.

2. Compare the following table with the GenStats image to determine which hardware is

installed.

Test sequence for Broadcom transmitters:

1. The generator resets the transmitter and its HDCP engine.

GenStats information Hardware

DVI (SiI) (under Options) and DVI FPGA less

than F1 (under Generator Information)

Silicon Image

DVI (under Options) Broadcom

DVI Analyzer (under Options) Silicon Image

DVI II (under Options) and DVI FPGA F1 or

later (under Generator Information)

Silicon Image

DVI II (under Options) and DVI FPGA is earlier

than F1 (under Generator Information)

Broadcom

HDMI (under Options) Silicon Image

HDMI Analyzer (under Options) Silicon Image

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 193

2. If the “Reset HDCP Rx by gating clock” mode is enabled, the generator resets the

receiver, and gates off transmitter clock and data for 400 mS. Otherwise, the receiver

is not reset.

3. The transmitter reads the Bksv (HDCP receiver KSV), over the I2C bus, and verifies

that it has 20 zeros and 20 ones.

This step is the first interaction between the transmitter and receiver.

4. Receiver writes the receiver KSV to the transmitter.

5. Transmitter generates An (session random number).

6. Transmitter writes An to the receiver, using the I2C bus.

7. Transmitter writes the transmitter KSV to the receiver, using the I2C bus.

8. Load the transmitter keys.

9. The transmitter reads the Ri value (link verification response) from the receiver and

compares it with its own generated Ri value. They should match to proceed. If this step

fails, the test returns to step 1.

10. Generate authentication.

11. Transmitting encrypted data.

Test sequence for Silicon Image transmitters:

1. Reset the transmitter.

2. If the “Reset HDCP Rx by gating clock” mode is enabled, the generator initializes the

transmitter. Otherwise, do not initialize the transmitter.

3. Transmitter generates An (session random number).

4. Transmitter writes An to the receiver, using the I2C bus.

This step is the first interaction between the transmitter and receiver. The transmitter

reads the Bksv, over the I2C bus, and verifies that it has 20 zeros and 20 ones.

5. Write the transmitter KSV to the receiver.

6. Read and verify the receiver KSV.

7. Write receiver KSV to transmitter.

8. Ri ready at transmitter.

9. The transmitter reads the Ri value from the receiver and compares it with its own

generated Ri value. They should match to proceed. If this step fails, the test returns to

step 1.

10. Generate authentication.

11. Transmitting encrypted data.

194 Chapter 11 Testing HDCP

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 195

12 Using Special Sync Output

Topics in this chapter:

•Operating special sync for probe pulse

•Configuring special sync for FS, LS or CS

196 Chapter 12 Using Special Sync Output

Overview

The generator is equipped with a Special Sync BNC connector labeled S/S on the front

right side. You can configure the output of this video interface to output frame sync, line

sync, composite sync or a special probe pulse.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 197

Operating special sync for probe pulse

The probe feature is used in connection with a programmable probe pulse that is available

on the S/S BNC. This pulse is most often used to trigger an oscilloscope or synchronize an

inspection camera. The probe feature allows you to position the leading edge of the probe

pulse anywhere within the video frame. This feature greatly facilitates troubleshooting by

enabling you to focus on specific video signal problems occurring anywhere in the video

signal.

Configuring the probe feature involves positioning the probe pulse in the desired location

on the video frame. You can do this either through the front panel or the command line

interface. The front panel display is most convenient if you are near the generator and not

using a computer or terminal. You can control the generator through the command line

interface either locally or remotely through the serial connection.

Front panel controls and indicators

To use the probe feature begin by first activating the probe feature through the generator

keys, and then positioning the pulse in the desired location by turning the Format knob

(horizontal position) and the Image knob (vertical position). The current position of the

pulse is shown on the LCD.

Probe coordinate numbering

Unlike ITU and SMPTE standards, Quantum Data standards count pixels, lines, and

coordinates beginning with the number zero (not one) to improve the mapping between

video signal specifications and modern computer graphics coordinates. The television

standards are accounted for by suppressing any half-active line that appears in an

equalizing interval and lengthening (to a full line) any half-active line that begins in the

active portion of a field. Vertical counting always begins with the leading edge of blanking

of the first field (not vertical sync). The first field is always defined as the field that includes

the top line of the displayed picture (Y:0). This definition is always true whether the total

number of active lines is odd or even.

With interlaced scanning, lines continue to be numbered sequentially throughout the

frame, beginning with the leading edge of blanking of the first field. Therefore, the first two

lines of blanking in the first field are numbered L:0 followed by L:1. If you have 525 total

lines and 486 of those are active, for example, the first two (blank) lines of the second field

would be numbered L:262 and L:263. The Y position continues to follow the visual order of

lines going from the top to the bottom of the screen. If the last line of blanking in the first

field is L:18, then L:19 corresponds to Y:0, L:20 to Y:2, L:21 to Y:4 and so on. In the

second field, L:282 would correspond to Y:1, L:283 to Y:3, L:284 to Y:5 and so on.

198 Chapter 12 Using Special Sync Output

Configuring the probe feature

This section describes how to configure the probe feature.

To enable the probe feature:

1. Deactivate the signal outputs of the generator by pressing the Outputs key. The light

on the Outputs key extinguishes.

2. Hold down the Step key, and then press and release the Outputs key. The LCD

displays a Probe feature message, and then the following screen.

3. Release the Step key.

Setting sensitivity of knobs

You can control the amount of distance traveled with each click of the Format and Image

knobs by using the ACS, DCS, and DSS keys. If neither ACS, DCS, nor DSS is selected,

then the amount of movement is increased exponentially as you move farther in a particular

direction and is reset when you change direction.

To set the sensitivity of the Format and Image knobs:

1. Press the appropriate key:

Controlling probe using generator controls

This section procedures for controlling the special sync probe through the front panel keys

and knobs.

To position the probe pulse in a specific location in the video signal:

1. Turn the Format knob to set the horizontal position of the probe pulse to the desired

pixel relative to the leading edge of the horizontal sync.

The horizontal position of the probe is simultaneously displayed in two different ways:

• The horizontal position P:nnnn is given in pixels relative to the leading edge of the

horizontal sync.

• If the leading edge of the probe is within the active portion of a line, an alternate

horizontal position X:nnnn is also displayed, indicating the number of pixels

Sensitivity Procedure

100 pixels/lines per knob click Press the ACS key. The key illuminates.

10 pixels/lines per knob click Press the DCS key. The key illuminates.

1 pixel/line per knob click Press the DSS key. The key illuminates.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 199

between the start of active video (X:0) and the leading edge of the probe pulse in

the horizontal direction.

2. Set the vertical position by turning the Image knob.

The vertical position of the probe is simultaneously displayed in two different ways:

• The vertical position L:nnnn is given in whole scan lines relative to the leading edge

of blanking of the frame or first field.

• If the probe is within the active portion of the frame, an alternate vertical position

Y:nnnn is also displayed, indicating the number of lines between the start of active

(Y:0) and the leading edge of the probe in the vertical direction.

To position and activate the probe pulse:

1. Press the Step key. The cursor appears. You may have to turn the Format and Image

knobs to move the cursor into the active video. This feature allows you to visually move

the probe to an area of interest (within the active portion of the frame) without using

numerical coordinates.

2. Turn the Format knob to move the cursor horizontally. Turn the Image knob to move

the cursor vertically.

3. Activate the probe pulse.

Controlling probe using command line interface

Using the command line interface to control the probe provides more control, enables you

to change the polarity and width, and to change the format and image while maintaining

the probe pulse parameters.

To configure the probe feature:

1. Enable the probe feature by entering the following commands:

FSPG 0 // disable the frame sync on special sync output

PSPG 1 // enable the probe pulse

PSPP 1 // Set the probe pulse polarity (0 for low or 1 for high)

PSPW 10 // set pulse width to 10 pixels (range:

1 pixel to

HTOT

- 1

)

Action Procedure

Activate the probe pulse on the specified

scan line

Press the R and G keys. The light on the

keys extinguish.

Activate the probe pulse on all active scan

lines at the same horizontal position

Press the R key. The light on the key

illuminates.

Activate the probe pulse on all scan lines,

whether active or not at the same

horizontal position

Press the G key. The light on the key

illuminates.

200 Chapter 12 Using Special Sync Output

PSHD 100 // set pulse horizontal position at 100 pixels from leading

edge of horiztonal sync pulse, in range from

0 <=

PSHD

HTOT

PSPW

- 1)

PSVD 50 // set the pulse vertical position at 50 lines from leadinig

edge of vertical blanking, in range from 0<=PSVD<(VTOT-1)

ALLU // apply the settings

To set the lines on which the probe pulse occurs:

1. Send the appropriate command:

2. Send the ALLU

command to apply the setting.

Set the probe pulse to occur Command

Once per frame

PSPM 0

Once every active line

PSPM 1

Once every line

PSPM 3

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 201

Configuring special sync for FS, LS or CS

The special sync output can provide frame sync, line sync, or composite sync signals. The

output is controlled by setting parameters of these signals through the command line

interface. The following commands are used to set the special sync signal:

•

FSPG

- Frame sync

•

PSPG

- Probe signal

•

LSPG

- Line sync

•

CSPG

- Composite sync

Note: The special sync output is disabled whenever these parameters are set to zero.

A frame pulse can be generated and output at the beginning of each frame. In the case of

interlaced video, the frame pulse is output at the beginning of the blanking interval (of the

first field) that immediately precedes the top line of active video.

To configure frame sync on the special sync output:

1. Enable the frame sync by entering the following command:

FSPG 1

The values of the other parameters (

LSPG and CSPG

) do not matter once FSPG is

enabled.

2. Set the frame pulse polarity (either 0 for low or 1 for high) by entering the following

command:

FSPP 1

FSPG=1, FSPP=0

FSPG=1, FSPP=1

FSPW (pixels)

FSPD (lines)

ActiveBlank Blank Active

Field 0 Field 1

VSPD (lines)

VID

202 Chapter 12 Using Special Sync Output

3. Set the frame pulse pixel width (in the range from 1 pixel to

HTOT

- 1) by entering the

following command:

FSPW 100

4. Set the frame pulse delay (in the range from 0 <=

FSPD

< (

VTOT

FSPW

- 1) [default =

0]) by entering the following command:

FSPD 10

5. Save these settings by entering the following command:

ALLU

To configure line sync on the special sync output:

1. Enable the line sync signal by entering the following commands:

FSPG 0

PSPG 0

LSPG 1

ALLU

The value of composite sync

CSPG

does not matter once these are set.

2. Set the line sync pulse polarity by entering the following command:

LSPP 1 // 1 = high (default)

ALLU

To configure composite sync on the special sync output:

1. Enable digital composite sync by entering the following command:

SSST 2 (or 6,11)

Alternatively, you can press the DCS key on the front panel.

2. Enable the composite sync signal by entering the following commands:

FSPG 0

PSPG 0

LSPG 0

CSPG 1

ALLU

3. Set the composite sync pulse polarity by entering the following commands:

CSPP 1 // 1 = high (default)

ALLU

Video Test Generator User Guide 203

ACommand Reference

Topics in this appendix:

•Commands by name

204 Appendix A Command Reference

Commands by name

Video Test Generator User Guide 205

*CLS Clear Status

Class GPIB

Description Clears the Event Status Register, the Status Byte and the output buffer.

Command syntax *CLS

Related commands *ESR?, *STB

206 Appendix A Command Reference

*DDT Delay Device Trigger

Class Trigger

Description Specifies a command or command string to be executed when the generator is “triggered”

with the *TRG command. Only one *DDT command can be pending at a time. The

command or query arguments must be enclosed in quotes.

Command syntax *DDT “command_1; command_2 ... command_n”

Example

*DDT “imgl flat; imgu”

*TRG // to invoke the command line in quotes from the *DDT command

Related commands *TRG

Video Test Generator User Guide 207

*ESE Event Status Enable

Class GPIB

Description Sets the Event Status Enable register to the given mask value. The bits in the Event Status

Enable register function as enable bits for each corresponding bit in the Event Status

bit in the Event Status Enable register is a 1, it is enabled and will cause the ESB bit in the

Status Byte register to go high.

The *ESE? query returns the current value of the Event Status Enable register.

Command syntax *ESE mask

mask

0 - 255

Example *ESE 8

Query syntax *ESE?

Query response mask NL

Where mask is in integer NR1 form.

See also: *CLS, *ESR?

208 Appendix A Command Reference

*ESR? Event Status Register

Class GPIB

Description Returns the current value of the Event Status register. After this command is executed, the

Event Status register is cleared. This is the only way of clearing any bit in the Event Status

Query syntax *ESR?

Returns registerValue NL

Where registerValue is in integer NR1 form.

Related commands *CLS, *ESE

Video Test Generator User Guide 209

*IDN? IDeNtification

Class GPIB

Description Returns an equipment identification string formatted per IEEE-488.2 standards.

Query syntax *IDN?

Returns Company,Model,SerialNumber,FirmwareVersion

Company

Always QuantumData.

Model

Product model description.

SerialNumber

Serial number of nonvolatile SRAM module (Dallas chip) in generator.

FirmwareVersion

Version number of currently installed firmware.

Example

R:\*idn?

QuantumData,802BT-DVI-AN,7514191,7.38380000

210 Appendix A Command Reference

*OPC OPeration Complete

Class GPIB

Description Causes the 882 to set the OPC bit in the Event Status register when all operations have

been completed. Since there are no overlapping commands, the *OPC command will set

the OPC bit immediately when executed.

The *OPC query will put a 1 in the output buffer when all operations are complete.

Command syntax *OPC

Query syntax *OPC?

Returns NL

Video Test Generator User Guide 211

*RST ReSet

Class GPIB

Description Performs a device reset. This places the 882 into a known condition. These conditions

are:

• IEEE-488 address set to 15

• Status Byte cleared

• Input queue empty

• Output queue empty

Command syntax *RST

Related commands *CLS

212 Appendix A Command Reference

*SRE Service Request Enable

Class GPIB

Description Sets the Service Request Enable register to the mask value given. The bits in the Service

Request Enable register function as enable bits for each corresponding bit in the Status

Byte register to enable a condition to request service from the system controller. That is,

when a bit in the Status Byte register goes true, and the corresponding bit in the Service

Request Enable register is also true, the 882 will request service through the GPIB. The

*SRE query returns the current value of the Service Request Enable register.

Command syntax *SRE mask

mask

0 - 255

Example *SRE 16

Query syntax *SRE?

Returns mask NL

Where mask is in integer NR1 form.

Related commands *STB, *ESE

Video Test Generator User Guide 213

*STB STatus Byte

Class GPIB

Description Returns the current value of the Status Byte register. The value stored in the Status Byte

Query syntax *STB?

Returns statusByte<NL>

Where statusByte is in integer NR1 form.

Related commands *SRE, *ESR?, *CLS

214 Appendix A Command Reference

*TRG TRiGger

Class GPIB port control

Description Triggers the generator programmatically. The *TRG command is used to trigger a

command or command string entered with the *TRG command.

Command syntax *TRG

Example

*DDT “imgl flat;imgu”

*TRG // Invoke the command line in quotes from the *DDT command

Related commands *DDT

Video Test Generator User Guide 215

*TST self TeST

Class GPIB port control

Definition: Causes the 882 to perform a self-test and report the results in a response message. If the

self-test fails, an ASCII "1" is placed in the output buffer; otherwise, an ASCII "0" is placed

in the output buffer.

Query syntax *TST?

Returns result<NL>

Where result is in integer NR1 form.

216 Appendix A Command Reference

*WAI WAIt for completion suffix

Class GPIB port control

Description Causes the generator to wait until all processes have been completed before sending the

prompt. Normally, the generator returns a prompt immediately after either an FMTU,

IMGU, ALLU, BOOT, INIT, or SCAL command is received, even before these commands

have finished executing. If the system controlling the generator must know when a

command has finished executing, use a semicolon to append the suffix … ;*WAI. .

Command syntax command; *WAI

command

FMTU, IMGU, ALLU, BOOT, INIT, or SCAL

Example

FMTL vga_m3 // Load a format from memory to buffer

IMGL SMPTE133 // Load the SMPTE RP-133 image to buffer

ALLU; *WAI // Update hardware to current buffer contents and delay

// prompt until all done

Video Test Generator User Guide 217

ADDR memory ADDRess

Class Direct processor control

Description Sets the pointer register that is used in connection with the PUTR command and GETR?

query. The ADDR? query returns the current contents of the pointer register.

Note: This command is used only with custom applications and command files created by

Quantum Data.

Command syntax ADDR address

address

0 to 4,294,967,295 (BASE = 10)

-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 (BASE = -10)

to FFFFFFFF (BASE = 16)

-80000000 to 7FFFFFFF (BASE = -16)

Query syntax ADDR?

Query response address

Other required

commands ADDR and ADDR? expect and return parameters formatted according to the current radix

set by the BASE command.

218 Appendix A Command Reference

ADOT draw A single pixel DOT

Class Custom image primitive

Description Draws a single pixel dot. A dot is the smallest graphic element that can be drawn. It uses

three parameters: the color and the X and Y coordinates.

Command syntax ADOT color x y

color

available colors

positive integer number

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU command

updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.

Example

ADOT White 200 300 // Draw white dot at X = 200 Y = 300

ALLU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

Video Test Generator User Guide 219

ALIK ALIas Kill

Class Alias

Description Removes an existing alias name.

Command syntax ALIK alias

Example

ALIK MYDMTFMT // removes alias format name MYDMTFMT

Related commands ALIQ? to query alias names.

ALIN to create an alias name.

220 Appendix A Command Reference

ALIN create ALIas New

Class Alias

Description Creates an alias for an object such as a format, image or test sequence. You can create

more than one alias name for an object.

Command syntax ALIN alias object

Example

ALIN MYDMTFMT DMT0675 // creates alias format for format DMT0675

Related commands Use ALIQ? to query alias names.

Use ALIK to remove an alias name.

Video Test Generator User Guide 221

ALIQ? ALIas Query

Class Alias

Description Lists alias names.

Query syntax ALIQ? start count

Example

ALIQ? 1 20 // show alias names from first alias name through 20th alias

Related commands ALIK to remove an alias name.

ALIN to create an alias name.

222 Appendix A Command Reference

ALLE end ALL Editor sessions

Class Directory, format, image and sequence editor control

Description Same as entering all of the DIRE, FMTE, IMGE and SEQE commands.

Command syntax ALLE

Video Test Generator User Guide 223

ALLU ALL Use

Class System control

Description Checks the current contents of the format buffer for errors. If no errors are found, it

reconfigures the signal generating hardware in accordance with the contents. Next, the

current test image is re-rendered using the latest system and format parameter data.

Command syntax ALLU

Other required

commands This command updates the generator after using the FMTL, IMGL and SEQL commands

to load new files from memory. This command also can be used to see the results of work

when using commands to edit formats or custom images.

Example

FMTL vga_m3 // Load a format from memory to buffer

ALLU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

224 Appendix A Command Reference

AMAP

render A pixel MAP

Class Bitmap image control

Description Renders (copies) a pixel map stored in the generator as name to the frame buffer. The

bitmap will be placed so that the top left corner will be at the given x, y location in the

frame buffer.

Command syntax AMAP x y name

x, y

location

name

a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)

Query syntax AMAP?

Example

AMAP 0 0 myicon // Renders a pixel map called “myicon”

// in the top left corner of active video

Video Test Generator User Guide 225

ANIG

ANalyzer Image Gate

Class DVI signal analyzer

Description Activates or deactivates the FormatRx and DeltaErr analyzer images.

Command syntax ANIG gate

gate

0 = analyzer images are not activated

1 = analyzer images are activated

Query syntax ANIG?

Query response 0 or 1

Example

ANIG 1 // activates analyzer images

IMGL FormatRx; IMGU //outputs FormatRx image

226 Appendix A Command Reference

ANIM? current test image has ANIMation

Class Image editor control

Description Returns a flag indicating if the image currently being displayed is animated.

Query syntax ANIM? imageName

Query response 0 = Not animated (static image) or the image was not found.

1 = Animated.

Example

ANIM? cubes // to determine if the “cubes” image has animation

1 // response indicates that “cubes” is an animated image

Video Test Generator User Guide 227

ANTI ANTI-alias

Class Image drawing primitives

Description Causes other primitives to be drawn using anti-aliasing on diagonal edges when

appearing anywhere in a custom image. This command affects only television formats on

801GX generators. It causes the leading and trailing edges of rectangles to have

controlled rise and fall times.

Command syntax ANTI

Other required

commands The IMGU or ALLU command must be used to redraw the custom image using

anti-aliased primitives.

228 Appendix A Command Reference

ARAT Audio sampling RATe

Class Format parameter setting - Audio signal

Description Sets the sampling rate of the audio stream output from the generator. This sets the CT

parameter of the Audio InfoFrame (as specified in EIA/CEA-861-B, table 20).

Command syntax ARAT rate

rate

192.0E3

176.4E3

96.0E3

88.2E3

48.0E3 (default)

44.1E3

32.0E3

Example

ARAT 48.0E3

IFGU

Related commands XAUD (SF parameter)

Video Test Generator User Guide 229

AROW

render A ROW of pixels

Class Bitmap image control

Description Renders (copies) binary stored as a hexstring to the frame buffer. The bitmap will be

placed so that the top left corner will be at the given x, y location in the frame buffer.

Command syntax AROW x y bpp hexstring

Query syntax AROW?

Example

AROW 5 5 4 02D // render hex data “02D” directly into frame

// buffer at location 5, 5 at a depth of

// 4 bits-per-pixel

230 Appendix A Command Reference

ASBG Analog Sync on Blue Gating

Class Format parameter setting - Analog video signal

Description Enables and disables adding composite sync to the blue analog video outputs when

analog sync is selected (see SSST command) and an analog video signal is being

generated (see AVST command). The ASBG? query returns the current setting of ASBG.

See the ASSG command description for information on simultaneously controlling red,

green and blue sync gating.

Command syntax ASBG mode

mode

0 = OFF

1 = ON

Query syntax ASBG?

Query response mode

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU command

updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.

Example

ASBG 1 // Enable comp sync on blue in buffer

FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

Video Test Generator User Guide 231

ASCT Analog Sync Composite Type

Class Format parameter setting - Analog video signal

Description Sets the kind of composite sync added to the analog video outputs when analog sync is

enabled (see SSST command) and an analog video signal is being generated (see AVST

command). The ASCT? query returns the current setting of ASCT. A setting of zero (0)

indicates that the ACS sync selection cannot be activated by the operator.

Command syntax ASCT type

type

0 = none

1 = American HDTV ORed

2 = American ORed

3 = American w/serr

4 = American w/serr & eq

5 = European HDTV ORed

6 = European ORed

7 = European w/serr

8 = European w/serr & eq

9 = American HDTV w/serr

10 = American HDTV w/serr & eq

11 = European HDTV w/serr

12 = European HDTV w/serr & eq

13 = Japanese HDTV ORed

14 = Japanese HDTV w/serr

15 = Japanese HDTV w/serr & eq

Query syntax ASCT?

Query response type

232 Appendix A Command Reference

Other required

commands The SSST mode must be set to 4, 5, 6, or 7 and the AVST type must be set to 1, 2 or 5 in

order for the ASCT setting to have any affect on the generator's hardware outputs. The

FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU command

updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.

Example

ASCT 2 // Enable Amer ORed comp sync in buffer

SSST 4 // Enable ACS

AVST 2 // Select analog RGB as video type

FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

Video Test Generator User Guide 233

ASGG Analog Sync on Green Gating

Class (Obsolete) Format parameter

Description Enables and disables adding composite sync to the green analog video outputs when

analog sync is selected (see SSST command) and an analog video signal is being

generated (see AVST command). The ASGG? query returns the current setting of ASGG.

See the ASSG command description for information on simultaneously controlling red,

green and green sync gating.

Command syntax ASGG mode

mode

0 = OFF

1 = ON

Query syntax ASGG?

Query response mode

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU command

updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.

Example

ASGG 1 // Enable comp sync on green in buffer

FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

234 Appendix A Command Reference

ASRG Analog Sync on Red Gating

Class (Obsolete) Format parameter

Description Enables and disables adding composite sync to the red analog video outputs when analog

sync is selected (see SSST command) and an analog video signal is being generated

(see AVST command). The ASRG? query returns the current setting of ASRG.

See the ASSG command description for information on simultaneously controlling red,

green and red sync gating.

Command syntax ASRG mode

mode

0 = OFF

1 = ON

Query syntax ASRG?

Query response mode

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU command

updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.

Example

ASRG 1 // Enable comp sync on red in buffer

FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

Video Test Generator User Guide 235

ASSC Analog Sync Swing Calibration factor

Class System calibration settings

Description Sets the analog video calibration (or scaling) factor that's used to adjust the level set by

ASSS. Issuing the command with a single factor sets all three analog video channels to

the same value. Issuing the command with three factors sets each of the analog video

channels to each of the given values. The actual peak-to-peak swing of the analog

composite sync signals at the output connectors equals the product of ASSS multiplied by

ASSC. The ASSC? query returns the current settings of ASSC. The default factory setting

is 1.000 for this parameter.

Note: The ASSC parameter is a system level parameter that affects the analog video

swing of all formats that are recalled. The ASSC value is retained when the generator is

powered down and back up again. Query the current setting of ASSC if you are

experiencing problems with low or missing analog composite sync levels. Reinitializing the

generator's memory restores the setting to factory default values of 1.000.

Command syntax ASSC red_factor, green_factor, blue_factor

ASSC common_factor

factor

min = 0.000 (floating point accepted)

max = 1.000 (floating point accepted)

Query syntax ASSC?

Query response red_factor, green_factor, blue_factor

Example

ASSC .995 .998 1.00 // Reduce red and green sync levels

FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

236 Appendix A Command Reference

ASSG Analog Sync Signal Gate

Class Format parameter setting - Analog video signal

Description Enables and disables adding composite sync to all three analog video outputs when

analog sync is selected (see SSST command) and an analog video signal is being

generated (see AVST command). This command can take the place of sending all three of

the individual ASRG, ASGG, ASBG commands. The ASSG? query returns the current

settings of the ASSG?

Command syntax ASSG red_mode, green_mode, blue_mode

ASSG common_mode

mode

0 = OFF

1 = ON

(0, 0, 0 or 0, 1, 0 only choices on 801GC-ISA)

Query syntax ASSG?

Query response red_mode, green_mode, blue_mode

Other required

commands The SSST type must be 4, 5, 6 or 7 to output analog sync. The FMTU command instructs

the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU command updates hardware to the new

setting and redraws the test image.

Example

ASSG 0,1,0 // Enable composite sync on green in buffer

FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

Video Test Generator User Guide 237

ASSS Analog Sync Signal Swing

Class Format parameter setting - Analog video signal

Description Sets the maximum peak-to-peak swing for any composite sync that is added to any of the

three analog video channels. The actual peak-to-peak swing of the analog sync signals at

the output connectors equals the product of ASSS multiplied by ASSC. The ASSS? query

returns the current setting of ASSS.

Command syntax ASSS level

level

min = 0.000 volts (floating point accepted)

max = 0.400 volts (floating point accepted)

Query syntax ASSS?

Query response level

Other required

commands One or more ASSG modes must be set to ON and the SSST type must be 4, 5, 6 or 7 to

output analog sync. The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting.

The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.

Example

ASSS 0.286 // Set sync swing to 286 mV in buffer

FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

238 Appendix A Command Reference

AVCM Analog Video Calibration Method

Class System calibration setting

Description Determines how the generator tests and calibrates its analog video outputs. The AVCM?

query returns the current setting of AVCM.

Command syntax AVCM type

type

0 = Interpolate

1 = Measure Interpolate

2 = Measure Set Absolute

3 = Test Levels

Query syntax AVCM?

Query response type

Example

AVCM 1 // Select Measure Interpolate

// type of self cal

Video Test Generator User Guide 239

AVCO Analog Video COnfiguration

Class Format parameter setting - Analog video signal

Description Sets the mapping of the analog video colors to the video output connections. The AVCO?

query returns the current setting of AVCO.

Command syntax AVCO type

type

0 = RGB - R to R, G to G, B to B (Normal)

1 = RBG - R to R, B to G, G to B

2 = GRB - G to R, R to G, B to B

3 = GBR - G to R, B to G, R to B

4 = BRG - B to R, R to G, G to B

5 = BGR - B to R, G to G, R to B

Query syntax AVCO?

Query response type

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU command

updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.

Example

AVCO 5 // Output blue on red chan and red on blue chan

FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

240 Appendix A Command Reference

AVCS Analog Video Color subcarrier Selection

Class Format parameter setting - Analog video signal

Description Sets the color subcarrier type used for the television outputs on generator models that

have television outputs available. The AVCS? query returns the current setting of AVCS.

Command syntax AVCS type

type

0 = No subcarrier

1 = NTSC-M, 3.579545 MHz (American)

2 = NTSC-44, 4.43361875 MHz (conversion format without phase alternation)

3 = PAL, 4.43361875 MHz (with phase alternation)

4 = PAL-Nc, 3.58205625 MHz (Argentina)

Query syntax AVCS?

Query response type

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU command

updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.

Example

AVCS 1 // Select standard American NTSC encoding

FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

Video Test Generator User Guide 241

AVPG Analog Video Pedestal Gate

Class Format parameter setting - Analog video signal

Description Enables and disables the analog video set-up pedestal. The AVPG? query returns the

current setting of AVPG.

Command syntax AVPG mode

mode

0 = OFF

1 = ON

Query syntax AVPG?

Query response mode

Other required

commands Analog video must be enabled with the AVST command in order to output an analog video

signal. The pedestal level is set with the AVPS command. The FMTU command instructs

the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU command updates hardware to the new

setting and redraws the test image.

Example

AVPG 1 // Enable use of a black level pedestal

AVPS 7.5 // Set pedestal level to 7.5 IRE

FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

242 Appendix A Command Reference

AVPS Analog Video Pedestal Swing

Class Format parameter setting - Analog video signal

Description Sets a black pedestal level between the blanking level (0.0 I.R.E.) and the peak video

level (100.0 I.R.E.). The AVPS? query returns the current setting of AVPS.

Command syntax AVPS level

level

min = 0.0 I.R.E.

max = 100.0 I.R.E.

Query syntax AVPS?

Query response level

Other required

commands AVPG must be set to ON to enable the use of the pedestal. The FMTU command instructs

the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU command updates hardware to the new

setting and redraws the test image.

Example

AVPG 1 // Enable use of a black level pedestal

AVPS 7.5 // Set pedestal level to 7.5 IRE

FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

Video Test Generator User Guide 243

AVSS Analog Video Signal Swing

Class Format parameter setting - Analog video signal

Description Sets the maximum peak-to-peak swing for all three analog video channels. The actual

peak-to-peak swing of the analog video signals at the output connectors equals the

product of AVSS multiplied by AVSC. The AVSS? query returns the current setting of

AVSS.

Command syntax AVSS level

level

0.000 to 1.000 volts (floating point accepted)

Query syntax AVSS?

Query response level

Other required

commands Analog video must be enabled with the AVST command in order to output an analog video

signal. The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU

command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.

Example 1 This example uses the AVSS command changes the output level of the NTSC format from

714mV to 500mV, and adds the revised format to the format knob list.

FMTL NTSC

FMTB

AVSS 0.5

FMTE

FMTA NTSC_1

DIRL fmt

DIRB

NAMI 1 NTSC_01

DIRE

DIRS

Example 2 This example enables analog video, and sets the video swing.

AVST 2 // Select RGB component color video in buffer

AVSS 0.714 // Set to 714 mV in buffer

FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

244 Appendix A Command Reference

Example 3 This example changes the sync level from 286mV to 200mV, and sets the video output

level at 500mV.

FMTL NTSC

FMTB

ASSS 0.2

AVSS 0.7

FMTE

FMTA NTSC_1

Video Test Generator User Guide 245

AVST Analog Video Signal Type

Class Format parameter setting - Analog video signal

Description Establishes the type of signal that appears on the analog video outputs of the generator.

The AVST? query returns the current setting of AVST.

Command syntax AVST type

type

0 = none

1 = Analog Y (grayscale)

2 = Analog RGB (color)

3 = CVBS or S-Video grayscale

4 = CVBS or S-Video color

5 = Analog YPrPb (old SMPTE 240M HDTV)

6 = Analog YCrCb ITU BT.601 (ANSI/SMPTE 170M TV)

7 = Analog YPrPb SMPTE RP177 HDTV

8 = YPrPb ITU-R BT.709 HDTV

Query syntax AVST?

Query response type

Other required

commands DVST must be set to zero when analog video is used. The FMTU command instructs the

generator to use the new setting. The ALLU command updates hardware to the new

setting and redraws the test image.

Example

DVST 0 // Disable digital video

AVST 2 // Select RGB component color video

ALLU // Update hardware and redraw test image

246 Appendix A Command Reference

BALG dc BALancing Gate

Class Format parameter setting - Digital video signal

Description Enables and disables adding DC balancing to the Open LVDI digital outputs on generators

that support LVDI outputs. FPD-Link compatible displays use unbalanced (BALG 0), while

OpenLDI displays use balanced (BALG 1).

The BALG? query returns the current setting of BALG.

Command syntax BALG mode

mode

0 = OFF

1 = ON

Query syntax BALG?

Query response

mode

Other required

commands FMTU or ALLU

Video Test Generator User Guide 247

BASE number BASE

Class Direct processor control

Description Establishes the radix of address and data parameters passed to or returned from the

ADDR, GETA, GETR, PUTA, PUTR, and CALL commands. If a negative radix is specified,

then parameters passed to (or returned from) these functions are assumed to be signed.

For example, if BASE= -16, then the value -1 communicates the value FFFFFFFF hex.

The BASE? query returns the current setting of BASE. The radix radix always is passed

and returned in base 10, regardless of the setting of BASE. BASE is preset to -10 each

time the generator is powered on. Base -10 is the preferred radix. The BASE? query

returns the current setting of BASE.

Note: This command is used only with custom applications and command files created by

Quantum Data.

Command syntax BASE radix

radix

-36 to -2 or 2 to 36

Query syntax BASE?

Query response radix

248 Appendix A Command Reference

BLUG BLUe Gate

Class Video Gate

Description Toggles the blue video signal gate.

Command syntax BLUG mode

mode

0 disable

1 enable

Query syntax BLUG?

Query response 0 or 1

Other required

commands ALLU to invoke the command.

Related commands GRNG, REDG

Example

BLUG 0; ALLU // disable blue video component

Video Test Generator User Guide 249

BOIT BOot and IniTialize

Class System control

Description Initializes the generator without going through a self-calibration.

Command syntax BOIT

250 Appendix A Command Reference

BOOT warm BOOT

Class System control

Description Causes the generator to go through its standard power-up procedure. Self-calibration is

not performed. The procedure checks all RAM storage locations for corrupt data. This

command is equivalent to turning the generator off and then on.

Command syntax BOOT

Video Test Generator User Guide 251

BRAT Bit RATe

Class Format parameter setting - Digital audio signal

Description Sets the bit rate (in Hz) for an external compressed audio source. This sets the MBR

parameter of the Audio InfoFrame (as specified in EIA/CEA-861-B).

The BRAT? query returns the current compressed digital audio bit rate

Command syntax BRAT rate

rate

0.0 (audio is not compressed)

8000, 16000, 24000 (or higher multiple of 8,000)

Query syntax BRAT?

Example

BRAT 32000

IFGU

Related commands XAUD (MBR parameter)

252 Appendix A Command Reference

CACH

instruction CACHe enable

Class System parameter settings

Description Enables and disables the use of the instruction cache. The CACH? query returns the

current setting of CACH.

Command syntax CACH mode

mode

0 = OFF

1 = ON

Query syntax CACH?

Query response 0 or 1

Example

CACH 0 // Disable the use of the instruction cache

Video Test Generator User Guide 253

CALF analog video CALibration Factors

Class System calibration settings

Description Sets the analog output calibration factors to values other than those set by the generator's

own self-calibration function. Each channel is calibrated using two independent zero

calibration points, and two independent slope calibration points. Interpolation equations for

the different video types are used to set the caldac values that controls the output sync

and voltage levels to the correct values.

TV calibration uses two factors for NTSC output, and two factors for PAL output.

Note: Sending bad calibration factors to the generator via the CALF command can hang

the generator. If the generator hangs it will have to be reinitialized.

Command syntax CALF zero500R, zero50R, slope1500R, slope1000R, zero500G, zero50G, slope1500G,

slope1000R, zero500B, zero50B, slope1500B, slope1000B, ntsc714, pal700, ntsc_blank,

pal_blank

zero500R

Red calibration factor from 0 (most negative) to 4095 (least negative) at -1.0V.

zero50R

Red calibration factor from 0 (most negative) to 4095 (least negative) at -100mV.

slope1500R

Red calibration factor from 0 (maximum swing) to 4095 (minimum swing) at 2.0V.

slope1000R

Red calibration factor from 0 (maximum swing) to 4095 (minimum swing) at 1.4V.

zero500G, zero50G, slope1500G, slope1000R

Green calibration factors.

zero500B, zero50B, slope1500B, slope1000B

Blue calibration factors.

ntsc714

Factor from 0 (maximum swing) to 4095 (minimum swing) for NTSC output level at

714mV. The ntsc714 and ntsc_blank values are interrelated.

pal700

Factor from 0 (maximum swing) to 4095 (minimum swing) for PAL output level at

700mV.

ntsc_blank

Factor from 0 (least negative) to 4095 (most negative) used to set the zero level of the

NTSC output at 0.0 IRE.

254 Appendix A Command Reference

pal_blank

Factor from 0 (least negative) to 4095 (most negative) used to set the zero level of the

PAL output at 0.0 IRE.

Query syntax CALF?

Related commands The AVSC command matches the levels for the three analog video channels. The ALLU

command updates the signal generating hardware to the new settings and redraws the

test image.

Example

CALF 1090, 2590, 1992, 3223, 1149, 2634, 2059, 3278, 1001, 2506, 1993,

3221, 781, 780, 3387, 3513 // Set new factors

ALLU // Use new factors

Video Test Generator User Guide 255

CALL CALL internal function

Class Direct processor control

Description Calls internal C functions. Address address is the entry point of the C function to be called.

Parameter passed indicates the number of parameters to be passed. If passed is not zero,

then parameters being passed p(1) through p(n) immediately follow the passed parameter

on the command line.

The CALL? query is similar to the CALL command except that returned parameters are

expected. Here, a third parameter returned is added to indicate the number of parameters

returned by the function. If BASE= -10 or -16 and a returned value of -1 is given

(4,294,967,295 if BASE=10 or FFFFFFFF if BASE=16), then a single value is read from

that return a single parameter return their single parameter in this way. Returned

parameters are space-delimited and formatted according to the current radix (see BASE

command). All parameters passed to the CALL and CALL? must be formatted according

to the current radix. This includes the parameters passed and returned.

Note: This command is used only with custom applications and command files created by

Quantum Data. Indiscriminate use of this command can cause the generator to stop

operating or loss of stored data in non-volatile RAM.

Command syntax CALL address passed [ p(1) [ p(2) [ p(3) …[ p(18) ]…]]]

address

0 to 4,294,967,295 (BASE = 10)

-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 (BASE = -10)

0 to FFFFFFFF (BASE = 16)

-80000000 to 7FFFFFFF (BASE = -16)

passed

0 to 18 (BASE = -10 or 10)

0 to 12 (BASE = -16 or 16)

p(n)

0 to 4,294,967,295 (BASE = 10)

-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 (BASE = -10)

0 to FFFFFFFF (BASE = 16)

-80000000 to 7FFFFFFF (BASE = -16)

Query syntax CALL? address passed returned [ p(1) [ p(2) [ p(3) …[ p(17) ]…]]]

256 Appendix A Command Reference

address

0 to 4,294,967,295 (BASE = 10)

-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 (BASE = -10)

0 to FFFFFFFF (BASE = 16)

-80000000 to 7FFFFFFF (BASE = -16)

passed

0 to 18 (BASE = -10 or 10)

0 to 12 (BASE = -16 or 16)

returned

4,294,967,295 and 0 to 20 (BASE = 10)

-1 to 20 (BASE = -10)

FFFFFFFF and 0 to 14 (BASE = 16)

-1 to 14 (BASE = -16 query only)

p(n)

0 to 4,294,967,295 (BASE = 10)

-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 (BASE = -10)

0 to FFFFFFFF (BASE = 16)

-80000000 to 7FFFFFFF (BASE = -16)

Query response ret(1) [ ret(2) [ ret(3) … [ ret(20) ]…]]

Other required

commands CALL and CALL? expect and return parameters formatted according to the current radix

set by the BASE command.

Video Test Generator User Guide 257

CENT draw video CENTering markers

Class Custom image primitive

Description Draws a small cross in the center of active video. If the format has an even number of

active pixels, the vertical line is 2 pixels thick. The horizontal line is 2 pixels thick if the

format has an even number of active lines. The primitive uses a single parameter, the

color of the cross.

Command syntax CENT color

color

available colors

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU command

updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.

Example

CENT red // Draw a small red cross in center of active video

ALLU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

258 Appendix A Command Reference

CROS draw a centered CROSs

Class Custom image primitive

Description Draws a large centered cross that fills the active video area. The vertical line is 2 pixels

thick if the format has an even number of active pixels. The horizontal line is 2 pixels thick

if the format has an even number of active lines. The primitive uses a single parameter,

the color of the cross.

Command syntax CROS color

color

available colors

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU command

updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.

Example

CROS magenta // Draw a large cross in the center of the active video

ALLU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

Video Test Generator User Guide 259

CSPG Composite Sync Pulse Gate

Class Format parameter setting - Synchronization

Description Enables and disables all of the digital composite sync outputs when digital composite sync

is selected via the SSST command (SSST = 3). The CSPG? query returns the current

setting of CSPG.

Command syntax CSPG mode

mode

0 = OFF

1 = ON

Query syntax CSPG?

Query response 0 or 1

Other required

commands In order to use digital composite sync, it must be selected with the SSST command. The

FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU command

updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.

Example

CSPG 1 // Enable dig comp sync in buffer

SSST 2 // Choose digital comp sync type in buffer

FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

260 Appendix A Command Reference

CSPP Composite Sync Pulse Polarity

Class Format parameter setting - Synchronization

Description Establishes the logic sense of the digital composite sync output. The CSPP? query returns

the current setting of CSPP.

Command syntax CSPP polarity

polarity

0 = active-low (negative going pulse)

1 = active-high (positive going pulse)

Query syntax CSPP?

Query response 0 or 1

Other required

commands In order to use digital composite sync, it must be gated on with the CSPG command and

selected with the SSST command. The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the

new setting. The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the

test image.

Example

CSPG 1 // Enable dig comp sync in buffer

CSPP 1 // Select active hi in buffer

SSST 2 // Choose digital comp sync type in buffer

FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

Video Test Generator User Guide 261

CTLM ConTroL Mask

Class Format parameter setting - Digital video signal

Description Sets the masked control bits for the LVDS output. The control bits are not always required

by receivers. There are two bits that can be set: CTL00 and CTL01.

Command syntax CTLM mask

mask

0 = sets bit low

1 = sets bit high

Query syntax CTLM?

Example

CTLM 2 // the 2 in hex sets the CTL01 bit to 1.

CTLM 3 // the 3in hex ets the CTL00 and CTL01 bits to 1.

Related commands RCTL

262 Appendix A Command Reference

CXAR Content Aspect Ratio

Class Format parameter setting - HDMI Active Video

Description Sets the aspect ratio of the source image content.

Command syntax CXAR aspect_ratio

aspect_ratio

0.75 to ˜2.39

The following table provides a listing of established aspect ratios.

Aspect Ratio Symbol Description Examples

0.750 OT or T90 Television Portrait 3x4, 480x640, 600x800, 768x1024,

960x1280, 1200x1600

0.800 OG or G90 Workstation Graphics

Portrait 4x5, 1024x1280, 1280x1600

1.000 Q Quadrate, "Square” 1x1, 512x512, 1024x1024

1.250 G Workstation Graphics 5x4, 1280x1024, 1600x1280

1.333… T (A)1

1. The letters in parenthesis are the letters that we used to use, before we updated our aspect ratio symbols for compatibiliity

with existing film industry standards (i.e. the symbols defined in SMPTE RP40).

SDTV / Silent Film 4x3, 640x480, 800x600, 1024x768,

1280x960, 1600x1200

˜1.37 C (B)1Academy2 “Classic”

with sound

2. In 1932, the shape of film was changed from 1.33:1 to 1.37:1 in order to better accommodate the new optical soundtrack that

was added a few years earlier. This slightly wider shape is the true aspect ratio of “classic” film. The aperture is commonly

referred to as “Academy” and was the shape of the vast majority of U.S. films produced until the 1950s.

˜4x3, 0.825x0.602 SMPTE RP40 35mm "C"

1.444… I IMAX™ 13x9, IMAX™

1.500 V (T)1Vista Vision™ 3x2, 1152x768 Apple Computer

(uncropped) Vista Vision™

1.555… M (V)1Mid 14x9, AFD Shoot and Protect (half-way

between 4x3 and 16x9)

1.600 D 16 Decimal 16x10, 1728x1080, 1280x800, see VESA

CVT 1.0

1.666… E European Film, "1.66 5x3, 1200x720, 1280x768, 1800x1080

1.750 Z Old Film 7x4, Old Metro-Goldwyn-Mayer and Disney

Films

1.777… H HDTV 16x9, 1280x720,1920x1080

˜1.85 A (F)1Film Standard (USA) ˜13x7, 1280x692, 1920x1038, 0.825x0.446

SMPTE RP40 35mm "A"

2.000 U Univisum™ 2x1, 1280x640, 1920x960

˜2.20 F (M)1“Flat”, MPEG "20x9” "˜11x5, 1280x582, 1920x874, 1.912x0.870

SMPTE RP91 70mm

˜2.39 B (C)1Anamorphic Cinema,

“2.35”3

3. Sometimes called “2.35”, which was the aspect ratio before it was changed to 2.39:1 in 1971 to keep splices from showing up

in the projected image.

˜12x5, 1280x536, 1920x804, 1.650x0.690

SMPTE RP40 35mm "B"

Video Test Generator User Guide 263

Related commands EXAR, SXAR

Example

CXAR 1.33 //Sets 4:3 picture aspect ratio for source content

FMTU

264 Appendix A Command Reference

DACA Digital Audio Channels Available

Class Format parameter setting - Audio signal

Description Specifies which audio channels are active.

Command syntax DACA mask

mask

0 to 3, based on following table.

Normally, each type of audio content is assigned to a particular channel and is always

output on that channel when present. There is one exception to this rule: rear center (RC)

content is switched from channel 5 to 7 whenever rear left (RL) content is simultaneously

present. To simplify this, RC content is thus treated as if it were two different types of

content: RC5 and RC7. When RL content is not present, RC content is output on channel

5 as RC5 content. When RL content is present, RC content is output on channel 7 as RC7

content.

Setting DACA will automatically set DAXA and XAUD:CA parameters to a corresponding

value (see table below).

Note: If DACA is set to a value not found in the table above, then other parameters will not

be automatically set and an error will be generated if the format is loaded while this

condition exists.

mask

0 to 255 (based on the value in the table below).Notes:

• Setting DACA will automatically set DAXA and XAUD:CA parameters to a

corresponding value (see table below). However, in the case of DACA values 243, 247,

251, and 255, two sets of DAXA and XAUD:CA values are possible. In this case, DAXA

and XAUD:CA settings will be based on those highlighted (in grey) in the table.

• If DACA is set to a value not found in the table above, then other parameters will not

be automatically set and an error will be generated if the format is loaded while this

condition exists.

Channel 1 2

Bit 0 1

Value 1 2

DACA 3

DAXA 3

XAUD:CA 0

Video Test Generator User Guide 265

Example

DACA 3 //specifies audio channels 1 and 2

DACG 3 //gates audio channels 1 and 2

FMTU

Related commands DACG

266 Appendix A Command Reference

DACG Digital Audio Channel Gate

Class Format parameter setting - Audio signal

Description Specifies which audio channels are gated (on).

Command syntax DACG mask

mask

0 to 3 (based on the value in the table below).

Example

DACA 3 //specifies audio channels 1 and 2

DACG 3 //gates audio channels 1 and 2

FMTU

Related commands DACA

Channel 1 2

Bit 0 1

Value 1 2

Video Test Generator User Guide 267

DADG Digital Audio Down-mix Gate

Class Format parameter setting - Audio signal

Description Enables or disables downmixing of an audio signal. This sets the DM_I parameter of the

Audio InfoFrame (as specified in EIA/CEA-861-B, table 24).

Command syntax DADG mode

mode

1 = enable

0 = disable

Example

DADG 1

FMTU

IFGU

Related commands XAUD (DMI parameter), DALS

268 Appendix A Command Reference

DALS Digital Audio Level Shift Value

Class Format parameter setting - Audio signal

Description Sets the level shift value (in decibels) for downmixing of the audio signal. This sets the

LSV parameter of the Audio InfoFrame (as specified in EIA/CEA-861-B, table 23).

Command syntax DALS x

0 - 15 (dB)

Example

DALS 5

FMTU

IFGU

Related commands XAUD (LSV parameter), DADG

Video Test Generator User Guide 269

DASI Digital Audio Signal Interface

Class Format parameter setting - Audio signal

Description Sets the digital audio signal interface.

Command syntax DASI interface

interface

0 = none

1 = SPDIF

Example

DASI 1

IFGU

270 Appendix A Command Reference

DAST Digital Audio Signal Type

Class Format parameter setting - Audio signal

Description Sets the digital audio signal type for an audio signal. This sets the CT parameter of the

Audio InfoFrame (as specified in EIA/CEA-861-B, table 19).

Command syntax DAST type

type

0 = void

1 = IEC 60958-3 Consumer LPCM

Example

DAST 1

IFGU

Related commands XAUD (CT parameter)

Video Test Generator User Guide 271

DAXA Digital Audio Content Available

Class Format parameter setting - Audio signal

Description Specifies which speaker locations are available (present).

Command syntax DAXA mask

mask

0 to 3 (based on the value in the table below).

Normally, each type of audio content is assigned to a particular channel and is always

output on that channel when present. There is one exception to this rule: rear center (RC)

content is switched from channel 5 to 7 whenever rear left (RL) content is simultaneously

present. To simplify this, RC content is thus treated as if it were two different types of

content: RC5 and RC7. When RL content is not present, RC content is output on channel

5 as RC5 content. When RL content is present, RC content is output on channel 7 as RC7

content.

Setting DAXA will automatically set DACA and XAUD:CA parameters to a corresponding

value (see table below). However, this method should not be used to gate channels.

Instead, DAXG should be used after all of the available channels have been selected.

Note: If DAXA is set to a value not found in the table above, then other parameters will not

be automatically set and an error will be generated if the format is loaded while this

condition exists.

Example

DAXA 3 //specifies FR and FL as having audio content

DAXG 3 //gates FR and FL content

FMTU

Related commands DAXG

Content FR FL

Bit 1 0

Value 2 1

DAXA 3

DACA 3

XAUD:CA 0

272 Appendix A Command Reference

DAXG Digital Audio Content Gate

Class Format parameter setting - Audio signal

Description Specifies which speaker locations are gated (on).

Command syntax DAXG mask

mask

0 to 3 (based on the value in the table below).

Example

DAXA 3 //specifies FR and FL as having audio content

DAXG 3 //gates FR and FL content

FMTU

Related commands DAXA

Content FR FL

Bit 1 0

Value 2 1

Video Test Generator User Guide 273

DCBM Display Code Bit Mask

Class Direct processor control

Description Sets the 4-bit binary bit mask used by the DCRD? query. The mask is entered as the

decimal equivalent of a 4-bit binary number. The binary number represents the masking of

the individual sense lines from M3 (MSB) to M0 (LSB). The DCBM? query returns the

current setting of DCBM.

Command syntax DCBM mask

mask

0 = 0 0 0 0 8 = 1 0 0 0

1 = 0 0 0 1 9 = 1 0 0 1

2 = 0 0 1 0 10 = 1 0 1 0

3 = 0 0 1 1 11 = 1 0 1 1

4 = 0 1 0 0 12 = 1 1 0 0

5 = 0 1 0 1 13 = 1 1 0 1

6 = 0 1 1 0 14 = 1 1 1 0

7 = 0 1 1 1 15 = 1 1 1 1

Query syntax DCBM?

Query response mask

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU command

updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.

Example

DCBM 7 // Set mask to read sense lines 0, 1 and 2 only

FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

274 Appendix A Command Reference

DCEX Display Code EXpected

Class Format parameter settings

Description Sets up the display code that is expected from a display connected to the generator. The

code is determined by one or more sense lines being connected to ground by the display.

Many video controller cards for the Apple Macintosh II and VGA type cards for the IBM-PC

sample the status of the display code sense lines. The information then sets up one of

several different operating modes to match a particular display. An improper display code

may make the controller card or display appear to malfunction.

The DCEX? query first performs a logical AND operation with the display code bit mask

and the actual display code that's sensed. The decimal equivalent of the result then is

returned. The mask is set with the DCEX command.

The expected setting and the actual result are both shown in the Format test image. They

have no effect how a given format generates a set of test signals.

Command syntax DCEX code

code

0 = 0 0 0 0 8 = 1 0 0 0

1 = 0 0 0 1 9 = 1 0 0 1

2 = 0 0 1 0 10 = 1 0 1 0

3 = 0 0 1 1 11 = 1 0 1 1

4 = 0 1 0 0 12 = 1 1 0 0

5 = 0 1 0 1 13 = 1 1 0 1

6 = 0 1 1 0 14 = 1 1 1 0

7 = 0 1 1 1 15 = 1 1 1 1

Query syntax DCEX?

Query response code

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU command

updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.

Example

DCBM 7 // Set mask to read sense lines 0, 1 and 2 only

DCEX 5 // Only lines 0 and 1 should be grounded

FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

Video Test Generator User Guide 275

DCPG Data Channel Power Gate

Class EDID and DDC control

Description Enables and disables the +5V power signal used by the DDC channel.

Command syntax DCPG option

option

0 = disable +5V power

1 = enable +5V power

Example

DCPG 0

Related commands DCPX?

276 Appendix A Command Reference

DCPX? Data Channel Power Overcurrent

Class EDID and DDC control

Description Queries the status of the 5V display data channel (DDC) power level.

Query syntax DCPX?

Returns 0 or 1

0 = OK

1 = overcurrent (for example, shorted)

Example

DCPX?

Related commands DCPG

Video Test Generator User Guide 277

DCRD? Display Code ReaD

Class Direct processor control

Description Returns the display code detected on the monitor sense lines as filtered through the

display code bit mask. Converting the returned decimal number to a 4-bit binary number

shows the status of the individual sense lines from M3 (MSB) to M0 (LSB).

Query syntax DCRD?

Query response code

code

0 = 0 0 0 0 8 = 1 0 0 0

1 = 0 0 0 1 9 = 1 0 0 1

2 = 0 0 1 0 10 = 1 0 1 0

3 = 0 0 1 1 11 = 1 0 1 1

4 = 0 1 0 0 12 = 1 1 0 0

5 = 0 1 0 1 13 = 1 1 0 1

6 = 0 1 1 0 14 = 1 1 1 0

7 = 0 1 1 1 15 = 1 1 1 1

Other required

commands DCBM sets the mask used for reading the display code.

Example

DCRD? // Return current sense lines reading

278 Appendix A Command Reference

DDCV? DDC Version supported

Class EDID and DDC control

Description The DDCV? query returns a status flag indicating if the generator hardware supports

VESA DDC communications.

Query syntax DDCV?

Query response 0 or 1

0 = no DDC support

1 = DDC supported

Example

DDCV? // Return DDC support information

Video Test Generator User Guide 279

DELX slider image DELta X

Class Image editor control

Description Sets the amount of horizontal shift that occurs for each step of the SlideG and SlideRGB

built-in images. The command is also used to set the horizontal size of the white patch

used in the Regulate image. The DELX? Query returns the current DELX setting.

Command syntax DELX delta_x

delta_x

horizontal distance in pixels

Query syntax DELX?

Query response

delta_x

Example

DELX 8 // Set H shift to 8 pixels per step

DELY 3 // Set V shift to 3 pixels per step

DWEL 2 // Display each step for 2 frames

IMGL “SlideG” // Select Image that uses DELX and DELY

IMGU // Draw the Image

280 Appendix A Command Reference

DELY slider image DELta Y

Class Image editor control

Description Sets the amount of vertical shift that occurs for each step of the SlideG and SlideRGB

built-in images. The command is also used to set the vertical size of the white patch used

in the Regulate image. The DELY? Query returns the current DELY setting.

Command syntax DELY delta_y

delta_y

vertical distance in pixels

Query syntax DELY?

Query response delta_y

Example

DELX 8 // Set H shift to 8 pixels per step

DELY 3 // Set V shift to 3 pixels per step

DWEL 2 // Display each step for 2 frames

IMGL “SlideG” // Select Image that uses DELX and DELY

IMGU // Draw the Image

Description Updates hardware with new EDID contents.

Command syntax DIDU

Example

XDID 8 3 DE33FF

DIDU

Related commands XDID

Video Test Generator User Guide 281

DIRA DIRectory save As

Class Directory memory management

Description Saves the current contents of the directory edit buffer using the given name.

Command syntax DIRA name

name

a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)

Example

DIRA MY_DIR // Save with the name "MY_DIR"

282 Appendix A Command Reference

DIRB DIRectory editing Begin

Class Directory memory management

Description Marks the beginning of a directory editing session. This command does nothing in the

current firmware version, but is used for compatibility with future versions of firmware.

Command syntax DIRB

Other required

commands Use either a DIRL command to load an existing directory or a DIRN command to create a

new directory. Use DIRE when ending the editing session.

Example

DIRN // Initialize directory edit buffer

DIRB // Start directory editing session

// One or more directory editing commands ...

DIRE // End directory editing session

Video Test Generator User Guide 283

DIRE DIRectory editing End

Class Directory memory management

Description Marks the end of a directory editing session. This command does nothing in the current

firmware version, but is used for compatibility with future versions of firmware.

Command syntax DIRE

Other required

commands Use DIRB when starting the editing session. Use EDID and DDC controlDIRA or DIRS to

save changes.

Example

DIRB // Start directory editing session

// One or more directory editing commands ...

DIRA MYDIR_02 // Save edited directory as MYDIR_02

DIRE // End directory editing session

284 Appendix A Command Reference

DIRK DIRectory Kill

Class Directory memory management

Description Deletes a directory by name. The query returns a one if the named directory can be

deleted. If directory is read-only or nonexistent, the query returns a zero.

Command syntax DIRK name

name

a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)

Query syntax DIRK? name

name

a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)

Query response 0 or 1

Example

DIRK MY_DIR // Delete directory called "MY_DIR"

Video Test Generator User Guide 285

DIRL DIRectory Load

Class Directory memory management

Description Copies the directory having a name equal to name from directory memory into the

directory edit buffer. The query returns a one if the named directory can be loaded;

otherwise, a zero is returned.

Note: Use the FMTP, IMGP and SEQP commands to select which directory is used for the

format, image, and sequence selection lists.

Command syntax DIRL name

name

a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)

Query syntax DIRL? name

name

a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)

Query response 0 or 1

Example

DIRL MY_DIR // Load "MY_DIR" directory in edit buffer

286 Appendix A Command Reference

DIRN DIRectory New

Class Directory memory management

Description Initializes the directory edit buffer. The name name is assigned as the directory's name.

The query will return the name that has been assigned as the directory's name.

Command syntax DIRN name

name

optional valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)

Query syntax DIRN?

Example

DIRN // Init edit buffer without assigning a new name

DIRN MY_DIR // Init edit buffer with name of "MY_DIR"

Video Test Generator User Guide 287

DIRP DIRectory Path

Class Directory memory management

Description Sets the current directory path name. The query will return the current directory path

name.

Command syntax DIRP name

name

a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)

Query syntax DIRP?

Query response name

Example

DIRP DIRPTH01 // Set directory path to DIRPTH01

288 Appendix A Command Reference

DIRQ? DIRectory Query pointer

Class Directory memory management

Description Returns the number directory names from the list of all the directory names stored in

directory memory beginning at index. The directories are kept in alphanumeric order.

Query syntax DIRQ? index number

index

positive integer number

number

positive integer number

Query response List of specified directory names

Example

DIRQ? 1 5 // List the first five directories in memory

DIRQ? 1 9999 // List all directories in memory

Video Test Generator User Guide 289

DIRS DIRectory Save

Class Directory memory management

Description Saves the current directory edit buffer contents into directory memory using the current

name of the directory in the edit buffer.

Example

DIRN fmtnew // creates a new format directory (knob list) name

DIRB // begins a directory editing session

NAMI 1 myfmt1 // adds myfmt1 to directory (knob list)

. // add other formats to directory (knob list)

NAMI n myfmtn // adds myfmtn to directory (knob list)

DIRE // ends the directory editing session

DIRS // saves the directory

290 Appendix A Command Reference

DMAP

Dimension bitMAP

Class Bitmap image control

Description Defines the size of a rectangular bitmap array in the edit buffer. The width and height, in

pixels is set by the width and height parameters. The number of data bits per pixel is set

by the bpp parameter.

Command syntax DMAP width height bpp

width

min =

max =

height

min =

max =

bpp

1, 2 or 4

Query syntax DMAP?

Query response width height bpp

Example

DMAP 32 20 4 // Set bitmap array to 32 pixels wide by 20 pixels high

// and a depth of 4 bits-per-pixel

Video Test Generator User Guide 291

DNUM Display sequence step NUMbers

Class Sequence editor commands

Description Enables and disables the addition of the sequence step number to the displayed test

image when running a sequence.

Command syntax DNUM mode

mode

0, 1 or 2

Query syntax DNUM?

Query response mode

Example

DNUM 1 // Enable the displaying of the sequence step #

292 Appendix A Command Reference

DPGU Data Island Packet Generator Use

Class Data packet generator

Description Updates the hardware with content of the current Data Island packet.

Command syntax DPGU

Related Commands DPTG

Example 1 Turn mute on:

XGCP 1 0

DPTG 7

DPTR 1

DPGU

Example 2 Read mute status:

R:MUTE?

R:1

Example 3 Turn mute off:

XGCP 0 1

DPTG 7

DPTR 1

DPGU

Example 4 Read mute status:

R:MUTE?

R:0

Example 5 Change the N value to 6000, and let hardware determine CTS value:

XACR 6000

DTPG 7

DPGU

// You can read N and CTS value at the reciever for verification.

Example 6 Change the N value to 6000, and CTS to 8000:

XACR 6000 8000

DTPG 7

DPGU

// You can read N and CTS value at the reciever for verification.

Video Test Generator User Guide 293

Example 7 Turn audio off:

DPTG 3

DPGU

Example 8 Turn audio on:

DPTG 7

DPGU

294 Appendix A Command Reference

DPTG Data Island Packet Type Gate

Class Data packet generator

Description Gates on or off the assigned packet type (Audio Sample, Audio Clock Regeneration, or

General Control Packet) to be updated by the hardware and sent to the receiver.

Gating Audio Sample packets on and off also enables and disables the audio output from

the transmitter. The mask value is a value ORed with the current setting.

Command syntax DPTG mask

mask

1 = General Control Packet (GCP)

2 = Audio Clock Regeneration (ACR)

4 = Audio Sample

8 = Generic Data Packet (GDP)

Related commands DPGU, DPTR

Example This example gates off the audio (the current value is 7):

DPTG 3; DPGU

See DPGU for other examples.

Video Test Generator User Guide 295

DPTR Data Island Packet Type Repeat Mask

Class Data packet generator

Description Specifies if a General Control packet is sent with every frame or sent once.

Note: Audio Sample and ACR packets are always enabled (and thus cannot be changed).

Command syntax DPTR mask

mask

1 = General Control Packet (GCP)

8 = Generic Data Packet (GDP)

Example See DPGU for examples.

296 Appendix A Command Reference

DSCT Digital Sync Composite Type

Class Format parameter setting - Digital video signal

Description Establishes the type of composite sync that appears at the digital composite sync outputs

when digital composite sync is selected via the SSST command. The DSCT? query

returns the current setting of DSCT. A setting of zero (0) indicates that digital composite

sync cannot be activated by the operator.

Command syntax DSCT type

type

0 = none

10 = American HDTV w/serr & eq

11 = European HDTV w/serr

12 = European HDTV w/serr & eq

13 = Japanese HDTV ORed

14 = Japanese HDTV w/serr

15 = Japanese HDTV w/serr & eq

Query syntax DSCT?

Query response type

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU command

updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.

Example

DSCT 2 // Select simple Amer ORed in buffer

FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

Video Test Generator User Guide 297

DSST Digital Sync Separate Type

Class Format parameter setting - Digital video signal

Description Establishes the type of digital separate sync that appears at the digital HS and VS outputs

of the generator when digital composite sync is selected via the SSST command and the

outputs are gated on via the HSPG and VSPG commands. The only difference between

EIA and CCIR digital separate syncs is that, in the case of CCIR, the width of the vertical

sync pulse is 0.5 line shorter than the width specified via the VSPW command. In the EIA

case, the width of the vertical sync pulse is as programmed.

After sending the DSST command, send the FMTU or ALLU command.

Command syntax DSST type

type

0 = none

1 = American separate

2 = American HDTV separate

3 = European HDTV separate

4 = Japanese HDTV separate

5 = European separate

Query syntax DSST?

Query response Returns the current setting of DSST. A setting of zero (0) indicates that separate digital

H&V sync cannot be activated by the operator.

Example

DSST 1

FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

298 Appendix A Command Reference

DVIC Digital Video Identification Code

Class InfoFrame Generator (IFG) parameter

Description Writes the specified Video Identification Code (VIC) into the AVI InfoFrame.

Command syntax DVIC code

code

0 = unestablished format

1 - 34 = DVIC code corresponding to a format defined in EIA/CEA-861-B standard

(Section 4). See table below for DVIC codes.

Note: For detailed information about these timings, refer to the Quantum Data Web site at:

http://www.quantumdata.com/support/downloads/802bt/hdmi/TimingsEIA-861-B.pdf.

DVIC Format Name NCPP1SXAR2SXEX2CXAR2TUNE3HRES4VTOT5

1 DMT0659 1 A N0A 1 640 525

1 DMT0660 1 A N0A 0 640 525

2 480p59 1 A N0A 1 720 525

2 480p60 1 A N0A 0 720 525

2 480p59LH 1 A Lcbb H 1 720 525

2 480p60LH 1 A Lcbb H 0 720 525

3 480p59SH 1 A S H 1 720 525

3 480p60SH 1 A S H 0 720 525

4 720p59 1 H N0H 1 1280 750

4 720p60 1 H N0H 0 1280 750

5 1080i29 1 H N0H 1 1920 1125

5 1080i30 1 H N0H 0 1920 1125

6 480i2x29 2 A N0A 1 720 525

6 480i2x30 2 A N0A 0 720 525

6 480i2xL1 2 A Lcbb H 1 720 525

6 480i2xL2 2 A Lcbb H 0 720 525

7 480i2xS1 2 A S H 1 720 525

7 480i2xS2 2 A S H 0 720 525

8 240p2x_1 2 A N0A 1 720 262

8 240p2x_2 2 A N0A 0 720 262

8 240p2x_3 2 A N0A 1 720 263

8 240p2x_4 2 A N0A 0 720 263

8 240p2xL1 2 A Lcbb H 1 720 262

8 240p2xL2 2 A Lcbb H 0 720 262

8 240p2xL3 2 A Lcbb H 1 720 263

8 240p2xL4 2 A Lcbb H 0 720 263

9 240p2xS1 2 A S H 1 720 262

9 240p2xS2 2 A S H 0 720 262

9 240p2xS3 2 A S H 1 720 263

9 240p2xS4 2 A S H 0 720 263

10 480i4x29 1 A N0A 1 2880 525

Video Test Generator User Guide 299

10 480i4x30 1 A N0A 0 2880 525

10 480i4xL1 1 A Lcbb H 1 2880 525

10 480i4xL2 1 A Lcbb H 0 2880 525

11 480i4xS1 1 A S H 1 2880 525

11 480i4xS2 1 A S H 0 2880 525

12 240p4x_1 1 A N0A 1 2880 262

12 240p4x_2 1 A N0A 0 2880 262

12 240p4x_3 1 A N0A 1 2880 263

12 240p4x_4 1 A N0A 0 2880 263

12 240p4xL1 1 A Lcbb H 1 2880 262

12 240p4xL2 1 A Lcbb H 0 2880 262

12 240p4xL3 1 A Lcbb H 1 2880 263

12 240p4xL4 1 A Lcbb H 0 2880 263

13 240p4xS1 1 A S H 1 2880 262

13 240p4xS2 1 A S H 0 2880 262

13 240p4xS3 1 A S H 1 2880 263

13 240p4xS4 1 A S H 0 2880 263

14 480p2x59 2 A N0A 1 720 525

14 480p2x60 2 A N0A 0 720 525

14 480p2xL1 2 A Lcbb H 1 720 525

14 480p2xL2 2 A Lcbb H 0 720 525

15 480p2xS1 2 A S H 1 720 525

15 480p2xS2 2 A S H 0 720 525

16 1080p59 1 H N0H 1 1920 1125

16 1080p60 1 H N0H 0 1920 1125

17 576p50 1 A N0A 0 720 625

17 576p50LH 1 A Lcbb H 0 720 625

18 576p50SH 1 A S H 0 720 625

19 720p50 1 H N0H 0 720 750

20 1080i25 1 H N0H 0 1920 1125

21 576i2x25 2 A N0A 0 720 625

21 576i2xLH 2 A Lcbb H 0 720 625

22 576i2xSH 2 A S H 0 720 625

23 288p2x_1 2 A N0A 0 720 312

23 288p2x_2 2 A N0A 0 720 313

23 288p2x_3 2 A N0A 0 720 314

23 288p2xL1 2 A Lcbb H 0 720 312

23 288p2xL2 2 A Lcbb H 0 720 313

23 288p2xL3 2 A Lcbb H 0 720 314

24 288p2xS1 2 A S H 0 720 312

24 288p2xS2 2 A S H 0 720 313

24 288p2xS3 2 A S H 0 720 314

25 576i4x25 1 A N0A 0 2880 625

25 576i4xLH 1 A Lcbb H 0 2880 625

26 576i4xSH 1 A S H 0 2880 625

27 288p4x_1 1 A N0A 0 2880 312

27 288p4x_2 1 A N0A 0 2880 313

27 288p4x_3 1 A N0A 0 2880 314

27 288p4xL1 1 A Lcbb H 0 2880 312

27 288p4xL2 1 A Lcbb H 0 2880 313

27 288p4xL3 1 A Lcbb H 0 2880 314

28 288p4xS1 1 A S H 0 2880 312

DVIC Format Name NCPP1SXAR2SXEX2CXAR2TUNE3HRES4VTOT5

300 Appendix A Command Reference

Related commands XAVI (see VIC parameter),

Example

DVIC 23

FMTU

28 288p4xS2 1 A S H 0 2880 313

28 288p4xS3 1 A S H 0 2880 314

29 576p2x50 1 A N0A 0 720 625

29 576p2xLH 2 A Lcbb H 0 720 625

30 576p2xSH 2 A S H 0 720 625

31 1080p50 1 H N0H 0 1920 1125

32 1080p23 1 H N0H 1 1920 1125

32 1080p24 1 H N0H 0 1920 1125

33 1080p25 1 H N0H 0 1920 1125

34 1080p29 1 H N0H 1 1920 1125

34 1080p30 1 H N0H 0 1920 1125

1. The generator treats double-clocking and pixel repetition as two totally separate items. NCPP controls the number of clocks

per pixel, while NPPP controls pixel repetition factor. All library formats set pixel repetition factor NPPP to zero (i.e. OFF) by

default. Double-clocking and pixel repetition cannot be applied simultaneously due to AVI:RP field constraints. Therefore, dou-

ble-clocked formats do not support pixel repetition. Pixel repetition is only applicable to the "4x" formats, where HRES remains

at 2880-pixels as the pixel repetition factor NPPP is varied between 1 and 10 - thereby varying the effective resolution.

2. EXCX and EXAR are not listed here, because all library formats set EXCX and EXAR equal to N0 and CXAR, respectively.

These values may be subsequently changed by rendering a special test image called "AFDtest", after the base format has

finished loading, in order to evaluate different AFD cases.

3. TUNE is a flag that indicates whether the frequencies of a format have been detuned or not. A value of one indicates that all

of the frequencies of a format have been tuned by a factor of 1/1.001 for NTSC compatibility. A value of zero, on the other

hand, indicates that the format has not been so tuned.

4. Double-clocked formats have the same horizontal resolution as single-clocked formats - the horizontal active (as we define it),

is not doubled in the double-clocked case. Some formats are distinguished by a horizontal active that is 4-times the normal

value of 720. Here, pixel repetition may be applied, by a special "PixelRep" test image, after the format has loaded. The "Pix-

elRep" test image allows the number of pixels-per-pixel (NPPP) to be varied and an image with repeated pixels to be rendered

for test purposes.

5. Some formats are distinguished by having a slightly different vertical line total.

DVIC Format Name NCPP1SXAR2SXEX2CXAR2TUNE3HRES4VTOT5

Video Test Generator User Guide 301

DVPT Digital Video Protocol Type

Class Format parameter setting - Digital video signal

Description Controls the output protocol. Setting the DVPT parameter to 2 and issuing a FMTU (or

ALLU) command causes the output signal protocol to switch to HDMI, while setting DVPT

to 1 causes a DVI compatible protocol to be output. All of the formats in the format library

set DVPT to 0. This is a default setting, which lets the output protocol be determined, on a

global basis, by the type of hardware that is present.

Command syntax DVPT type

type

0 = default (based on hardware present)

1 = DVI 1.0

2 = HDMI 1.0

Example

DVPT 2

FTMU

302 Appendix A Command Reference

DVQM Digital Video Quantization Mode

Class Format parameter setting - Digital video signal

Description Controls the gamut of digital signals per the EIA/CEA-861-B standard.

The DVQM? query returns the current DVQM mode.

Command syntax DVQM mode

mode

Use the following table to determine the proper mode (0, 1, or 2).

Notes:

• Computer (for example, DMT and CVT) formats set DVQM=0 for full gamut.

• DVQM can be set to 1 to test the undershoot/overshoot signal code margins (for

example, see SMPTE 296M section 7.12).

• Television formats (for example, 1080i29) set DVQM=2 for reduced gamut required by

various television standards (for example, EIA/CEA-861-B).

Query syntax DVQM?

Example

DVQM 1

FMTU

Related commands LMIN, LMAX, NBPC

DVQ

Mode Components NBPC=8 gamuts NBPC=10 gamuts NBPC=12 gamuts

LMIN LMAX LMIN LMAX LMIN LMAX

0 RGB 0 255 0 1023 0 4095

YCbCr0 255 0 1023 0 4095

1 RGB 1 254 4 1019 16 4079

YCbCr1 254 4 1019 16 4079

2 RGB 16 235 64 940 256 3760

YCbCr16 240 64 960 256 3840

Video Test Generator User Guide 303

DVSC Digital Video Swing Calibration factor

Class System calibration setting

Description Sets the TMDS differential swing calibration factor for the digital video signal (HDMI and

DVI). The DVSC query returns the current value.

Command syntax DVSC factor

factor

0.0 to 1.1

Query syntax DVSC?

Related commands DVSS

Examples

DVSC 0.9 // sets the digital video swing calibration to 0.9

ALLU

304 Appendix A Command Reference

DVSI

Digital Video Signal Interface

Class Format parameter setting - Digital video signal

Description Determines which of the three interfaces on the 802R-PCI-D generator the digital output is

applied. There are three digital interfaces on this PCI generator: LVDS, TTL and DVI.

Command syntax DVSI interface

interface

1 = TTL

2 = LVDS

3 = DVI

Query syntax DVSI?

Example

DVSI 3 // Puts the generator digital output on the DVI interface

ALLU // Applies the setting to the generator

Video Test Generator User Guide 305

DVSM Digital Video Sampling Mode

Class Format parameter setting - Digital video signal

Description Controls how the color difference components (CbCr) are sampled when YCbCr signal

type is selected. Set DVST to a signal type that supports the sampling mode specified by

DVSM.

Command syntax DVSM mode

mode

0 = RGB 4:4:4 (default)

2 = 4:2:2 (color difference components are sampled at half the pixel rate; luminance is

sampled at full pixel rate)

4 = 4:4:4 (both luminance and color difference components are sampled at the pixel

rate)

Related commands NBPC, DVST

Examples

DVST 10

DVSM 0

FMTU

DVST 13

DVSM 2

FMTU

306 Appendix A Command Reference

DVSP Digital Video Signal Polarity

Class Format parameter setting - Digital video signal

Description Establishes the logic sense of the digital video outputs. The DVSP? query returns the

current setting of DVSP.

Command syntax DVSP polarity

polarity

0 = active-low (negative going video)

1 = active-high (positive going video)

Query syntax DVSP?

Query response polarity

Other required

commands To use the digital video outputs, digital video must be enabled with the DVST command.

The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU command

updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.

Example

AVST 0 // Deselect analog video in buffer

DVST 5 // Select 3 bit color in buffer

DVSP 1 // Select active high video in buffer

FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

Video Test Generator User Guide 307

DVSS Digital Video Signal Swing

Class Format parameter setting - Digital video signal

Description Sets the TMDS differential swing voltage for the digital video signal. The DVSS query

returns the current value.

The DV_Swing image can also be used to adjust the digital swing.

Command syntax DVSS voltage

voltage

0.0 to 2.0 volts differential peak-to-peak (nominally 1.000, 0.150 to 1.560 range

guaranteed)

Query syntax DVSS?

Related commands DVST, DVSC

Examples

DVSS 1.25 // sets the digital video signal swing voltage to 1.25 volts

ALLU

308 Appendix A Command Reference

DVST Digital Video Signal Type

Class Format parameter setting - Digital video signal

Description Establishes the kind of video signal that exits the digital video signal outputs of the

generator.

The DVST? query returns the current setting of DVST.

Command syntax DVST type

type

0 = none

10 = RGB

13 = YCbCr (per SMPTE 260M-1999, Table 1)

14 = YCbCr (per ITU-R BT.601-5 Table 3, Item 7)

15 = YCbCr (per ITU-R BT.709-5 Part 1, Section 6.10)

Query syntax DVST?

Related commands AVST must be set to zero when digital video is used. Use the ALLU or FMTU command,

after the DVST command, to update the hardware with the new settings.

Example

AVST 0 // Deselect analog video in buffer

DVST 10 // Select digital RGB

FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

Video Test Generator User Guide 309

DWEL slider image DWELl time

Class Image Control – System Level

Description Sets the how long each step of the SlideG and SlideRGB built-in images is displayed

before the image is updated. The delay is based on the number of vertical frame refreshes

that must occur for the currently loaded video format. The command is also used to set

how long each step of the Regulate image is displayed. The DWEL? query returns the

current DWELL setting.

Command syntax DWEL delay

delay

integer representing number of video frames

Query syntax DWEL?

Query response delay

Example

DELX 8 // Set H shift to 8 pixels per step

DELY 3 // Set V shift to 3 pixels per step

DWEL 2 // Display each step for 2 frames

IMGL “SlideG” // Select Image that uses DELX and DELY

IMGU // Draw the Image

310 Appendix A Command Reference

EDID? EDID read

Class EDID and DDC control

Description Reads all bytes in the base EDID and up to seven extensions from a DDC compliant

display connected to the transmitter on the generator. The data is returned in raw ASCII

hex format.

Query syntax EDID?

Query response ASCII hex test string

Related commands I2CR?

Example This example reads a four block E-EDID.

R:\edid?

00FFFFFFFFFFFF004489B200050000000D0C010380502D780A0DC9A05747982712484C200

00001010101010101010101010101010101011D8018711C1620582C2500C48E2100009E8C

0AD08A20E02D10103E9600138E21000018000000FC0048444D492054560A2020202020000

000FD003B3D0F2E08000A2020202020200306F00202000000000000000000000000000000

0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000

C02031CF149850408020106141216230907078301000065030C001000011D007251D01E20

6E285500C48E2100001ED60980A020E02D1010602200128E210000188C0AD090204031200

C405500C48E21000018011D80D0721C1620102C2580C48E2100009E8C0AA01451F0160026

7C4300138E21000098000000000000000000A4020308F1431113158C0AD090204031200C4

05500138E21000018011D00BC52D01E20B8285540C48E2100001E8C0AA02051201810187E

2300C48E21000098000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000

0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000

Video Test Generator User Guide 311

EQUA EQUalization interval After vertical sync pulse

Class Format parameter setting - synchronization

Description Establishes the width of the equalization interval after the vertical sync pulse in each field

whenever a serrated and equalized sync type is selected via either ASCT or DSCT

commands and selected via the SSST command. If the type specified for the selected

sync signal is one of the CCIR types, then the actual equalization interval output by the

generator will be 0.5 lines shorter than the whole number specified. The EQUA? query

returns the current setting of EQUA.

Command syntax EQUA lines

lines

min = 0

max = number of lines after vertical sync before video

Query syntax EQUA?

Query response lines

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU command

updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.

Example

EQUA 3 // Set post-equalization to 3 lines in buffer

FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

312 Appendix A Command Reference

EQUB EQUalization interval Before vertical sync pulse

Class Format parameter setting - synchronization

Description Establishes the width of the equalization interval before the vertical sync pulse in each

field whenever a serrated and equalized sync type is selected via either ASCT or DSCT

commands and selected via the SSST command. If the type specified for the selected

sync signal is one of the CCIR types, then the actual equalization interval output by the

generator will be 0.5 lines shorter than the whole number specified. The EQUB? query

returns the current setting of EQUB.

Command syntax EQUB lines

lines

min = 0

max = number of lines after video and before vertical sync

Query syntax EQUB?

Query response lines

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU command

updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.

Example

EQUB 3 // Set pre-equalization to 3 lines in buffer

FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

Video Test Generator User Guide 313

EQUF EQUalization Flatten

Class Format parameter setting - synchronization

Description Determines if composite sync will have all equalization pulses removed in the vertical sync

front porch (delay) period as required by certain military HOBO and Maverik video formats.

The EQUF? query returns the current setting of EQUF.

Command syntax EQUF mode

mode

0 = OFF

1 = ON

Query syntax EQUF?

Query response mode

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU command

updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.

Example

EQUF 0; ALLU // This is the default

314 Appendix A Command Reference

ERRC ERRor queue Clear

Class System error control

Description Clears all errors waiting to be reported in the error queue.

Command syntax ERRC

Video Test Generator User Guide 315

ERRQ? ERRor Queue

Class System error control

Description Returns number errors from the list of all errors in the error queue beginning at index. The

ERRQ? query does not remove the errors from the queue.

Command syntax ERRQ? index number

index

Positive integer number

number

Positive integer number

Query response List of specified range of errors in the error queue.

Examples:

ERRQ? 1 5 // List the first five errors in the queue

ERRQ? 1 9999 // List all errors in the queue

316 Appendix A Command Reference

ERRY? Yank ERRor from queue

Class Format parameter setting - synchronization

Description Returns the most recent error added to the error queue and removes it from the queue.

Query syntax ERRY?

Query response Error

Video Test Generator User Guide 317

EXAR EXtended Aspect Ratio

Class Format parameter setting - HDMI active video

Description Sets the aspect ratio of the extended image content.

Note: If the source image content was shot for a single screen shape, then this parameter

will be the same as the CXAR parameter. Alternatively, if the source image content was

shot for two different shaped screens (using a “shoot and protect” technique), then this

parameter will be different than the CXAR parameter.

Command syntax EXAR aspect_ratio

aspect_ratio

0.75 to ˜2.39

Note: For a listing of established aspect ratios, see the table on page 262 (CXAR

command).

Related commands CXAR, SXAR

Example

EXAR 1.77 // Sets 16:9 picture aspect ratio for extended image content

FMTU

318 Appendix A Command Reference

EXCX Extended-From-Content Aperture Map

Class Format parameter setting - HDMI active video

Description Maps CXAR-shaped image content into the extended EXAR-shaped aperture.

Command syntax EXCX code

code

0 to 131071 (in decimal)

The mapping code is made up of three binary field codes as follows:

• Bits 0-2 are the Squeeze/Stretch (“S”) field code

• Bits 3-9 are the Letterbox/Pillar (“L”) field code

• Bits 10-16 are the Safe Area (“K”) field code

To determine the proper mapping code, follow these steps:

1. Using the table below, determine the proper “S” field code for bits 0-2.

Squeeze/Stretch Method

“S” Field Code

Symbol

Undo Non-Linear Squeeze

Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Disabled (scaling is uniform) 0 0 0

Linear Squeeze (anamorphise) 0 0 1 S

Video Test Generator User Guide 319

2. Using the table below, determine the proper “L” field code for bits 3-9.

3. Use the following table to determine the proper “K” field code for bits 10-16.

Letterbox/Pillar Mode

“L” Field Code

Symbol

Undo Bars BarContents Position Shrink

Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 71

1. Bits 6 and 7 are used to sequence redundant AFD codes.

In the case of pixel repetition (NPPP not equal to 0), the color of the (extended) bars

on the left and right sides of the image are filled in accordance with the settings of bits

6 and 7—even when the letterbox/pillar fitting method is disabled (bit 3 = 0).

Bit 61Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3

Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Centered shrink w/black bars

top & bottom 0100001Lcbb

Centered shrink w/gray bars

top & bottom 0101001Lcgb

Centered shrink w/white bars

top & bottom 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 Lcwb

Centered protected shrink

w/shot surround 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Lcsp

Top shrink w/single black bar at

bottom 01 0001 1 Ltbb

Top shrink w/single gray bar at

bottom 01 0101 1 Ltgb

Top shrink w/white bar at bot-

tom 01 1001 1 Ltwb

(Keep) Safe Area Mode

“K” Field Code

Symbol

Undo Bars BarContents Source Save Area

Bit 16 Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10

None (w/safe area markers) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Shrink coded frame to action area with opaque

black bar surround 0100 0 01Kabb

Shrink coded frame to action area with opaque

gray bar surround 0101 0 01Kagb

Shrink coded frame to action area with opaque

white bar surround 0110 0 01Kawb

Coded frame has shot-protected action area with-

out graticules or bars 0000 0 01Kasp

Coded frame has shot-protected action area with

action graticules without bars 0001 0 01Kaspa

Coded frame has shot-protected action area with

title graticules without bars 0010 0 01Kaspt

Coded frame has shot-protected action area with

action and title graticules without bars 0011 0 01Kaspb

Shrink coded frame to title area with opaque black

bar surround 0100 0 10Ktbb

Shrink coded frame to title area with opaque gray

bar surround 0101 0 10Ktgb

320 Appendix A Command Reference

Shrink coded frame to title area with opaque white

bar surround 0110 0 10Ktwb

Coded frame has shot-protected title area without

graticules or bars 0000 0 10Ktsp

Coded frame has shot-protected title area with

action graticules without bars 0001 0 10Ktspa

Coded frame has shot-protected title area with title

graticules without bars 0010 0 10Ktspt

Coded frame has shot-protected title area with

action and title graticules without bars 0011 0 10Ktspb

Coded frame has shot-protected custom area with-

out graticules or border 0000 0 11Kcsp

Coded frame has shot-protected custom area with

action graticules without border 0001 0 11Kcspa

Coded frame has shot-protected custom area with

title graticules without border 0010 0 11Kcspt

(Keep) Safe Area Mode

“K” Field Code

Symbol

Undo Bars BarContents Source Save Area

Bit 16 Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10

Video Test Generator User Guide 321

The following table provides mapping codes used by AFD (see XAFD).

Related commands CXAR, EXAR, SXCX, SXEX

Example

EXCX 8 // Use centered protected shrink w/shot surround mode

FMTU

Method Binary Field Code Decimal Code Symbol

Natural aspect ratio 00000000000000000 0 N0

00000000000010000 16 N1

00000000000100000 32 N2

Squeeze (anamorphise) 00000000000000001 1 S

Centered protected shrink with shot surround 00000000000001000 8 Lcsp

Centered shrink with black bars top and bottom 00000000100001000 264 Lcbb

Top shrink with single black bar at bottom 00000000100011000 280 Ltbb

Shrink coded frame to title area w/ opaque black bar surround 01000100000000000 34816 Ktbb

322 Appendix A Command Reference

FDTA Font DaTA

Class

Description Writes font data. It takes as arguments table (the table from which to read), index (the

index of the item within the table), and value (the data to be written to the table).

The FDTA? query reads font data. It takes as arguments table (the table from which to

read) and index (the index of the item within the table). It returns value (the data to be

written to the table).

The table argument must be one of the following:

• 0 = The header, treated as an uint16[ ].

• 1 = The character pattern, an uint32[ ].

• 2 = The location table, an uint16[ ].

• 3 = The offset/width table, an uint16[ ].

• 4 = The image width table, an uint8[ ].

Note: The index range for table #0 must be: 0 = index 13. The index range for the other

tables depends on the font size.

Command syntax FDTA table index value

table

positive integer number

index

positive integer number

value

positive integer number

Query syntax FDTA? table index

table

positive integer number

index

positive integer number

Related commands FDTA

Video Test Generator User Guide 323

FLSH FLaSH new firmware via GPIB

Class System Level

Description Changes the firmware in the generator’s flash EPROM via the GPIB port. This is

accomplished by sending an IEEE 488.2 standard arbitrary block program data to the

generator. The generator temporarily places the block in picture memory and, if received

intact, eventually transfers the binary image to flash memory by internally executing the

VTOF function. Note that one does not have to send VTOF after a FLSH transfer.

FLSH initiates the data transfer. An arbitrary_block_program_data argument containing

either 512K or 2M bytes of binary data should follow this command per standard

IEEE-448.2 section 7.7.6 GPIB data transfer methods.

Command syntax FLSH arbitrary_block_program_data

arbitrary_block_program_data

IEEE-488.2 arbitrary block program data per standard IEEE-448.2 section 7.7.6 GPIB

data transfer method. The maximum number of bytes sent depends on the generator:

801requires a maximum of 524288 bytes, while 802 requires a maximum of 2097152

bytes.

Related commands YMDI, VTOF

Example

FLSH #6524288 …EPROM data bytes…

324 Appendix A Command Reference

FMTA ForMaT save As

Class Format memory management

Description Saves the current contents of the format edit buffer using the given name

Command syntax FMTA name

name

a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)

Example

FMTA MY_FMT // Save with the name "MY_FMT"

Video Test Generator User Guide 325

FMTB ForMaT editing Begin

Class Format editor control

Description Marks the beginning of a format editing session.

Command syntax FMTB

Other required

commands Use either an FMTL command to load an existing image or an FMTN command to create

a new format. Use FMTE when ending the editing session.

Example

FMTN // Initialize format edit buffer

FMTB // Start format editing session

// One or more format editing commands ...

FMTE // End format editing session

326 Appendix A Command Reference

FMTE ForMaT editing End

Class Format editor control

Description Marks the end of a format editing session.

Command syntax FMTE

Other required

commands Use FMTB when starting the editing session. Use FMTA or FMTS to save changes.

Example

FMTB // Start format editing session

// One or more format editing commands ...

FMTA My_fmt1 // Save edited format as My_fmt1

FMTE // End format editing session

Video Test Generator User Guide 327

FMTG? ForMaT in buffer Good

Class Format memory management

Description Tests the format in the format buffer for errors. If no errors are found, FMTG? returns zero.

Otherwise, if one or more errors exist, the number of the first error encountered is

returned. To test formats residing in format memory, use the FMTT? query.

Query syntax FMTG?

Query response Returns 0 if no errors are found; otherwise, returns the number of the first error

encountered.

Example

FMTG? // Return format error status

328 Appendix A Command Reference

FMTJ ForMaT Justify

Class Format memory management

Description Corrects some types of timing errors for the current data in the format buffer. The following

errors are corrected:

• Pixel Rate errors 2071 and 2072

• Video Memory Size error 2550

• Horizontal Blanking errors 2140, 2141, 2150 and 2155

• Horizontal Total errors 2090 and 2091

• Horizontal Sync Pulse Width errors 2181 and 2201

The justification routine tries to keep the format close to your original specifications.

However, the format should be reviewed after it is justified to make sure it still meets your

timing requirements.

Command syntax FMTJ

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings. The ALLU command

updates hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image. The FMTG? query can

be used to see if any errors remain.

Example

FMTJ

FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

Video Test Generator User Guide 329

FMTK ForMaT Kill from memory by name

Class Format memory management

Description Erases the named format from memory. The FMTK? query checks to see if the named

format can be erased. The RAM location number is returned if it can be erased.

Otherwise, a zero is returned.

Command syntax FMTK name

name

a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)

Query syntax FMTK? name

name

valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)

Query response 0 or location

Example

FMTK my_fmt1 // Erase format called my_fmt1

330 Appendix A Command Reference

FMTL ForMaT Load from memory by name

Class Format memory management

Description Assigns a format to the current step of a sequence while between a set of SEQB and

SEQE commands. The FMTL command is context sensitive. The FMTL? query returns

the name of the format currently assigned to the step.

Outside of the sequence editor, the FMTL command reads the format having a name

equal to name from format memory (or EPROM) into the format. FMTL does not

reconfigure the signal generating hardware. This feature allows you to work on the

contents of any format memory location, while continuing to output a signal based on a

previously used format (see FMTU command). The FMTL? query returns the location

location in which a format having a name equal to name is found. If multiple formats exist

having name name, then the lowest numbered location containing a format with a

matching name name is returned. The format memory (RAM) is always searched first. If a

format with name name cannot be found anywhere in the format memory, then the

industry-standard formats located in EPROM (negative locations) are searched next.

The FMTL? query returns zero if a format with a name equal to name cannot be found in

either format space.

Command syntax FMTL name

name

a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)

Query syntax FMTL? name

Query response location (returns 0 if not found)

Other required

commands The ALLU command updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test

image.

Example

FMTL VGA_m3 // Load format called VGA_m3

ALLU // Update hardware and redraw image

Video Test Generator User Guide 331

FMTN ForMaT New

Class Format memory management

Description Initializes the format editing buffer. Sending this one command is equivalent to sending all

of the following commands:

This should be the first command sent to the generator when creating a new format. The

command only resets to a known state. The command does not create a usable format.

The FMTN? query returns the current name of the format in the buffer.

Command syntax FMTN name

name

a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)

Query syntax FMTN?

ASBG 0 GAMA 2.2

ASCT 1 GAMC 0

ASGG 1 HRAT 0

ASSG 0, 1, 0 HRES 0

ASSS 0.286 HSIZ 280

AVPG 0 HSPD 0

AVPS 0.0 HSPG 1

AVSB 0.0 HSPP 0

AVSS 0.714 HSPW 0

AVST 0 HTOT 0

XVSG 1, 1, 1 SCAN 1

CSPG 1 SSST 1

CSPP 0 USIZ 2

DCBM 0 VRES 0

DSEX 0 VSIZ 210

DSST 1 VSPD 0

DVSP 0 VSPG 1

DVST 0 VSPP 0

EQUA 0 VSPW 0

EQUB 0 VTOT 0

332 Appendix A Command Reference

Query response name

Example

FMTN // Initialize format buffer

FMTN Narf // Initialize format buffer and name the format "Narf"

Video Test Generator User Guide 333

FMTP ForMaT Path

Class Format memory management

Description Sets the current format path name to a given directory. The query will return the current

format path name.

Command syntax FMTP name

name

a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)

Query syntax FMTP?

Query response name

Example

DIRQ? // List directory objects

FMT

IMG

VGA_FMTS

SEQ

FMTP VGA_FMTS // Load a custom format knob list

FMTP FMT // Load the default format knob list

334 Appendix A Command Reference

FMTQ? ForMaT Query pointer

Class Format memory management

Description Returns number format names from the list of all the formats stored in format memory

beginning at index. The formats are kept in alphanumeric order. The generator maintains

internal variables for the current index and number values. The value of index is

automatically incremented by number after the query is executed. Sending the query with

just an index parameter returns the same number of names as the last time, starting at the

given index. Sending the query with no parameters, returns the next set of names.

Query syntax FMTQ? [index [number]]

index

positive integer number

number

positive integer number

Query response List of specified format names

Example

FMTQ? 1 9999 // List all formats in memory

FMTQ? 1 10 // List the first ten formats in memory

FMTQ? 21 // List the 21st through the 30th FMTes in memory

FMTQ? // List the 31st through the 40th FMTes in memory

Video Test Generator User Guide 335

FMTR ForMaT Read from memory location (by number)

Class Format memory management

Description Reads format from the format memory location into the format buffer. The FMTR

command does not reconfigure the signal generating hardware. The FMTR? query returns

the name of the format stored in location location. FMTR? returns the string EMPTY if the

format memory location location is empty.

Command syntax FMTR location

location

1 through 300 (RAM)

-1 through -24 (EPROM)

Query syntax FMTR? location

Query response name

Other required

commands The ALLU command updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test

image.

Example

FMTR -5 // Load format from ROM location 5

ALLU // Update hardware and redraw image

336 Appendix A Command Reference

FMTS ForMaT Save

Class Format memory management

Description Saves the current format edit buffer contents into format memory using the current name

of the format in the edit buffer.

Command syntax FMTS

Example

FMTL DMT0660 // Loads a format for editing

FMTB // Begins and editing session

HRES 654 // Sets the horizontal resolution to 654 pixels

. // other format parameters

HTOT 720 // Sets the horizontal total to 720 pixels

FMTE // Ends the format editing session

FMTS // Saves format

Video Test Generator User Guide 337

FMTU ForMaT Use

Class Format memory management

Description Checks the current contents of the format buffer for errors; if no errors are found, it

reconfigures the signal generating hardware in accordance with the contents. It does not

redraw the previously displayed test image. In some cases this may distort the old image.

The FMTU? query returns either a format memory location location or zero. If the signal

format currently being output by the signal generating hardware matches that originally

loaded (using the FMTL command) or read (using the FMTR command) from a format

memory location, then the matching format memory location location is returned.

Otherwise, if the format contents have been used to update the signal generating

hardware since either an FMTR or FMTL command has been issued, then FMTU? query

returns zero.

Command syntax FMTU

Query syntax FMTU?

Query response location or 0

338 Appendix A Command Reference

FMTZ ForMat Zap

Class Format memory management

Description Clears format storage memory starting at first and ending at last. The cleared locations are

then tagged as being empty. If no last parameter is given, only the first location is cleared.

The FMTZ? query is used to determine if a location contains a format or is empty.

Command syntax FMTZ first last

Query syntax FMTZ? location

Video Test Generator User Guide 339

FORM draw FORMat data block

Class Custom image primitive

Description Displays basic information about the format driving the display. The first line shows the

number of horizontal active pixels and vertical active lines. The last number on the line is

the number of fields per frame (1 for non-interlaced and 2 for interlaced). The second and

third lines show the horizontal and vertical rates, respectively. Text is on a black

rectangular background with a single pixel border.

FORM uses three (3) parameters. The first is the color of the text and border. The next two

are the X and Y coordinates for the top left corner of the block of text.

Command syntax FORM color x y

color

available colors

positive integer number

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU command

updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.

Example

FORM blue 30 200 // Display format information

// in blue beginning at X=30, Y=200

ALLU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

340 Appendix A Command Reference

FRAT? Frame RATe Query

Class Format parameter setting - Video resolution

Description Returns the current frame (vertical) rate setting.

Query syntax FRAT?

Query response frame rate

Example

FRAT?

25.0000

Related commands TMAU

Video Test Generator User Guide 341

FRGB Foreground Red, Green and Blue levels

Class System parameter settings

Description Temporarily sets the portions of an image drawn with a color selection of foreground to the

given red, green and blue values. All three colors can be set to the same level using a

single parameter. The color selection for one or more primitives in a custom image must

be set to foreground in order to see the affect of this command on a custom image. The

setting is not global and is not saved. The FRGB? query returns the current red, green and

blue settings of FRGB.

Command syntax FRGB red_level green_level blue_level

FRGB common_gray_level

level

min = 0 (full off)

max = 255 (full on)

Query syntax FRGB?

Query response red_level green_level blue_level

Example

FRGB 255 128 0 // Set foreground color to orange

FRGB 128 // Set foreground color to a mid-gray level

342 Appendix A Command Reference

FSPD Frame Sync Pulse Delay

Class Format parameter setting - Synchronization

Description Sets the delay of the frame sync pulse relative to the last line of active video in the current

format. The FSPD? query returns the current FSPD setting.

Command syntax FSPD delay

delay

min = 0 lines

max = (VTOT/SCAN) line

Query syntax FSPD?

Query response delay

Other required

commands To get a pulse, frame sync must first be enabled with the FSPG command. The FMTU

command instructs the generator to use the new settings. The ALLU command updates

the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.

Example

FSPG 1 // Enable Frame Sync

FSPP 1 // Set for positive going pulse

FSPW 20 // Make the pulse 20 pixels wide

FSPG 300 // Pulse to occur 300 lines after

// the last line of active video

FMTU // Update hardware to new settings

Video Test Generator User Guide 343

FSPG Frame Sync Pulse Gate

Class Format parameter setting - Synchronization

Description Enables and disables the digital horizontal sync output. The FSPG? query returns the

current FSPG mode.

Command syntax FSPG mode

mode

0 = OFF

1 = ON

Query syntax FSPG?

Query response 0 or 1

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings. The ALLU command

updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.

Example

FSPG 1 // Enable Frame Sync

FMTU // Update hardware to new settings

344 Appendix A Command Reference

FSPP Frame Sync Pulse Polarity

Class Format parameter setting - Synchronization

Description Establishes the logic sense of the digital frame sync output. Setting polarity to one (1)

causes the leading edge of frame sync to be a low-to-high transition. Setting polarity to

zero (0) causes the leading edge of frame sync to be a high-to-low transition. The FSPP?

query returns the current polarity of FSPP.

Command syntax FSPP polarity

polarity

0 = active-low (negative going pulse)

1 = active-high (positive going pulse)

Query syntax FSPP?

Query response 0 or 1

Other required

commands To get a pulse, frame sync must first be enabled with the FSPG command. The FMTU

command instructs the generator to use the new settings. The ALLU command updates

the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.

Example

FSPG 1 // Enable Frame Sync

FSPP 1 // Set for positive going pulse

FSPW 20 // Make the pulse 20 pixels wide

FSPG 300 // Pulse to occur 300 lines after

// the last line of active video

FMTU // Update hardware to new settings

Video Test Generator User Guide 345

FSPW Frame Sync Pulse Width

Class Format parameter setting - Synchronization

Description Establishes the width of the frame sync pulse. The FSPW? query returns the current

setting of FSPW.

Command syntax FSPW pixels

pixels

min = 1

max = HTOT - 1

Query syntax FSPW?

Query response pixels

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings. The ALLU command

updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.

Example

FSPG 1 // Enable Frame Sync

FSPP 1 // Set for positive going pulse

FSPW 20 // Make the pulse 20 pixels wide

FSPG 300 // Pulse to occur 300 lines after the last line of active video

FMTU // Update hardware to new settings

346 Appendix A Command Reference

GAMA GAMmA correction factor

Class Format parameter setting - Digital video signal

Description Establishes the current video gamma correction factor. The GAMA? query returns the

current setting of the gamma correction factor.

Command syntax GAMA factor

factor

min = 0.1 (floating point accepted)

max = 10.0 (floating point accepted)

For HDMI video signals GAMA is always 2.222

Query syntax GAMA?

Query response factor

Other required

commands Gamma correction must be enabled with the GAMC command in order to use the gamma

correction factor. The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting. The

ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.

Example

GAMC 1 // Enable gamma correction in buffer

GAMA 2.2 // Set correction factor in buffer

FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

Video Test Generator User Guide 347

GAMC GAMma Correction mode

Class Format parameter setting - Digital video signal

Description Enables or disables application of the video gamma correction factor. The GAMC? query

can be used to determine if the gamma correction factor is currently being applied.

Command syntax GAMC mode

mode

0 = disable (don't correct)

1 = enable (correct)

Query syntax GAMC?

Query response 0 or 1

Other required

commands The value used for gamma correction is set with the GAMA command. The FMTU

command instructs the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU command updates

hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.

Example

GAMC 1 // Enable gamma correction in buffer

GAMA 2.2 // Set correction factor in buffer

FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

348 Appendix A Command Reference

GCET?

Get Component Error Tallies

Class DVI signal analyzer

Description Reads the number of errors in the red, green, and blue components along with the total

number of bad pixels.

Query syntax GCET?

Query response R, G, B, and bad pixels

Example

PNAU //Pseudo-random noise generated

CR //Stop pseudo-random noise

GCET?

0,21,0,21 //Returns 21 Green pixel errors and a total of 21 bad pixels

Related commands PNAU

Video Test Generator User Guide 349

GETA?

GET data from Absolute memory location

Class Direct processor control

Description Returns the value of the data stored at the memory address specified. Up to 32 bits can be

read with this query (see SIZE command). The returned value value is formatted

according to the current setting of BASE (see the BASE command).

Note: This command is used only with custom applications and command files created by

Quantum Data.

Query syntax GETA? address

address

0 to 4,294,967,295 (BASE = 10)

-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 (BASE = -10)

0 to FFFFFFFF (BASE = 16)

-80000000 to 7FFFFFFF (BASE = -16)

Query response value

Other required

commands GETAand GETA? expect and return parameters formatted according to the current radix

set by the BASE command.

350 Appendix A Command Reference

GETR?

GET data from Relative memory location

Class Direct processor control

Description Returns the value of the data stored at the memory location currently pointed to by the

address register (see ADDR command). Up to 32 bits can be read with this query (see

SIZE command). The returned value value is formatted according to the current setting of

BASE (see the BASE command). The address register is automatically incremented by

SIZE bits after the current location has been read.

Note: This command is used only with custom applications and command files created by

Quantum Data.

Query syntax GETR?

Query response value

Other required

commands GETR and GETR? expect and return parameters formatted according to the current radix

set by the BASE command.

Video Test Generator User Guide 351

GFED?

Get First Error Data

Class DVI signal analyzer

Description Returns information about the first error encountered.

Query syntax GFED?

Query response expected value followed by the errant value (in hex)

Example

PNAU //Pseudo-random noise generated

CR //Stop pseudo-random noise

GFED? //Returns expected (40018C) and errant (FFFFFF) value of first

errored pixel

40018C,FFFFFF

Related commands PNAU

352 Appendix A Command Reference

GLUT

Get LUT from hardware

Class Lookup Table Memory Management

Description Copies the current values from the hardware lookup table to the lookup table edit buffer.

Command syntax GLUT

Video Test Generator User Guide 353

GMAP

Get pixel MAP from frame buffer

Class Bitmap image control

Description The GMAP command

Command syntax GMAP width height x y name

width

height

name

Other required

commands The contents of the temporary buffer can not be edited directly. The MAPL command must

be used to copy the temporary buffer contents to the edit buffer.

Example

GMAP 3 3 5 5 thismap // get a new map named thismap from frame buffer

MAPL mymap // load bitmap mymap into edit buffer

MAPB // begin map editing context

354 Appendix A Command Reference

GNPT?

Get Number of Pixel Tested

Class Signal analyzer - Pixel data

Description Returns the number of pixels being measured in billions after a pseudo noise

measurement has finished execution (that is, completed the PNAU command).

Query syntax GNPT?

Query response number of pixels

Example

PNAU //Pseudo-random noise generated

CR //Stop pseudo-random noise

GNPT? //Returns 4.255 billion pixels

4.255

Related commands PNAU

Video Test Generator User Guide 355

GPEL?

Get PixEL color components

Class Signal analyzer - Pixel data

Description Takes the (x, y) coordinates address of a pixel and returns the red, green, and blue color

components of the pixel at that address.

Query syntax GPEL? x y

Query response R, G, B

Possible errors Should this info be integrated into the Query response area, instead of creating a new

label?The GPEL? query may respond back with one of the following errors in case of a

parameter is not set correctly (or in case the setup is not correct).

Example

PDSX 128 //sets patch starting at x-pixel 128

PDSY 256 //sets patch starting at y-pixel 256

PDSH 64 //sets patch height at 64 pixels

PDSW 96 //sets patch width at 90 pixels

PDAU //captures patch of image

GPEL? 128 256 //read RGB color components at pixel address 128,256

0,255,0

Related commands PDAU

PNSeedExceedsLimit 2800

PNLengthExceedsLimit 2801

PNNotSupported 2802

NoInputSupported 2803

XcoordOutOfRange 2804

YcoordOutOfRange 2805

356 Appendix A Command Reference

GPER?

Get Pixel Error Rate

Class Signal analyzer - Pixel data

Description Returns the pixel error rate in errors per billion after a pseudo noise measurement has

finished execution (that is, completed the PNAU command).

Query syntax GPER?

Query response pixel error rate

Example

PNAU //Pseudo-random noise generated

CR //Stop pseudo-random noise

GPER? //Returns 0.88 billion pixel errors

0.88

Related commands PNAU

Video Test Generator User Guide 357

GPIB GPIB address

Class GPIB port control

Description Sets the address of the generator on the GPIB port. The address change takes affect as

soon as the command is issued. The new address setting will be maintained until 1) the

address is changed another GPIB command, 2) the unit is re-initialized with an INIT

command or 3) the unit is re-initialized because the power-up self-test found corrupted

data in battery backed system memory. In cases 2 and 3, the GPIB address will revert to

the address set on the GPIB address switches, if the unit has them. The address reverts to

15 if the unit does not have GPIB address switches. The GPIB? query returns the current

GPIB address of the unit.

Command syntax GPIB address

address

integer, 0-30

Query syntax GPIB?

Query response address

Example

GPIB 5 // Set GPIB address to 5

358 Appendix A Command Reference

GRID draw a centered GRID

Class Custom image primitive

Description Draws a crosshatch of a given color and forms a given number of boxes in each direction.

All lines are 1 pixel thick. All of the lines in a given direction are equally spaced. Any

remaining pixels are distributed as equally as possible around the perimeter of the grid.

This may cause the first and last lines in each direction not to be at the very edges of

video.

Command syntax GRID color horizontal_boxes vertical_boxes

color

available colors

horizontal_boxes

number of horizontal boxes (half of number of pixels)

vertical_boxes

number of vertical boxes (half of number of lines)

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings. The ALLU command

updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.

Example

GRID gray75 14 10 // Draw a gray75 grid with 14 horizontal

// and 10 vertical boxes

ALLU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

Video Test Generator User Guide 359

GRIH draw a GRIll pattern of Horizontal lines

Class Custom image primitive

Description Draws equally spaced horizontal lines that form a grill over the entire active video area.

The primitive uses three parameters. The first is the color of the lines, the second is the

thickness of the lines, and the third is the thickness of the space between the lines.

Command syntax GRIH color line_width space_width

color

available colors

line_width

number of pixels in line

space_width

number of pixels in space

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings. The ALLU command

updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.

Example

GRIH green 4 6 // Draw green grid with 4-pixel lines and 6-pixel spaces

ALLU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

360 Appendix A Command Reference

GRIV draw a GRIll pattern of Vertical lines

Class Custom image primitive

Description Draws equally spaced vertical lines that form a grill over the entire active video area. The

gaps are not touched and will show any previously drawn primitives. The primitive uses

three parameters. The first is the color of the lines, the second is the thickness of the lines,

and the third is the thickness of the space between the lines.

Command syntax GRIV color line_width space_width

color

available colors

line_width

number of pixels in line

space_width

number of pixels in space

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings. The ALLU command

updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.

Example

GRIV cyan 16 16 // Draw cyan grill with 16-pixel lines

// and 16-pixel spaces

ALLU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

Video Test Generator User Guide 361

GRNG GRNe Gate

Class Video Gate

Description Toggles the green video signal gate.

Command syntax GRNG mode

mode

0 = disable

1 = enable

Query syntax GRNG?

Query response 0 or 1

Other required

commands ALLU to invoke the command.

Related commands BLUG, REDG

Example

GRNG 0; ALLU // disable green video component

362 Appendix A Command Reference

GTLS Go To Local State

Class System Control

Description Enables the use of the front panel keys and knobs (local operation) on the unit that may

have been previously disabled with the LLOS command. The GTLS? query returns the

current state of local operation.

Command syntax GTLS

Query syntax GTLS?

Query response 0 or 1

0 = local state disabled (local lockout enabled)

1 = local state enabled (local lockout disabled)

Video Test Generator User Guide 363

HATI draw a centered crossHATch from the Inside out

Class Custom image primitive

Description Draws a crosshatch from the inside-out of a given color and forms a given number of

boxes in each direction. The primitive has center lines that divide the active video exactly

in half in each direction. The vertical center line is 2 pixels thick if the format has an even

number of active pixels. The horizontal center line is 2 pixels thick if the format has an

even number of active lines. All other lines are 1 pixel thick. If you enter an odd number of

boxes, a half box is placed at each end of the crosshatch. All lines in a given direction are

spaced equally. Any remaining pixels are distributed as equally as possible around the

perimeter of the grid. This may cause the first and last lines in each direction not to be at

the very edges of video. In turn, this may cause any half boxes to be slightly larger.

Command syntax HATI color horizontal_boxes vertical_boxes

color

available colors

horizontal_boxes

number of horizontal boxes (half of number of pixels)

vertical_boxes

number of vertical boxes (half of number of lines)

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings. The ALLU command

updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.

Example

HATI green 15 9 // Draw a green grid with 15 horizontal

// and 9 vertical boxes

ALLU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

364 Appendix A Command Reference

HATO draw a centered crossHATch from the Outside in

Class Custom image primitive

Description Draws a crosshatch from the outside-in of a given color and forms a given number of

boxes in each direction. All lines are 1 pixel thick. The first and last lines in each direction

are at the very edges of active video. All the lines in a given direction are spaced equally.

Any remaining pixels are added to the boxes along the horizontal and vertical centers of

the image.

Command syntax HATO color horizontal_boxes vertical_boxes

color

available colors

horizontal_boxes

number of horizontal boxes (half of number of pixels)

vertical_boxes

number of vertical boxes (half of number of lines)

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings. The ALLU command

updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.

Example

HATO yellow 15 9 // Draw a yellow grid with 15 horizontal

// and 9 vertical boxes

ALLU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

Video Test Generator User Guide 365

HDCP? HDCP

Class HDCP

Description: The HDCP query is used to control HDCP tests.

Query syntax HDCP? [A1 | A2] [B1 | B2] [frames]

runs the test with public keys A1

runs the test with public keys A2

runs the test with public keys B1

runs the test with public keys B2

frames

The number of frames to be tested. The default is 512.

Example

HDCP? 2000 // run test with production keys for 2000 frames

HDCP? a2 b1 2000 // run test with public keys a2, b1 for 2000 frames

For additional examples, see “Using command-line interface to control HDCP” on page

190.

366 Appendix A Command Reference

HDMI

High-Definition Multimedia Interface protocol

Class Digital video signal control

Description Sets the current digital protocol. Restarting the generator does not change this setting.

The HDMI? query returns the current mode.

Command syntax HDMI mode

mode

0 to disable HDMI (use alternative protocol such as DVI 1.0)

1 to enable HDMI (default)

This command affects the DVPT parameter as shown below:

Query syntax HDMI?

Query response 0 or 1

Example

HDMI 0

ALLU

Interface hardware used HDMI setting DVPT setting

DVI only 0 0

HDMI 0 1

Video Test Generator User Guide 367

HRAT Horizontal RATe

Class Format parameter setting - Video resolution

Description Sets the line frequency. Pixel rate is equal to HTOT multiplied by HRAT. Frame rate is

equal to HRAT divided by VTOT. Field rate is equal to SCAN multiplied by the frame rate.

The HRAT? query returns the current horizontal frequency setting.

Command syntax HRAT frequency

frequency

typical min = 1000 Hz (floating point accepted)

typical max = 130000 Hz (floating point accepted)

Query syntax HRAT?

Query response frequency in Hz (floating point returned)

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings. The ALLU command

updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.

Example

HRAT 32768 // Set 32.768 kHz rate in buffer

FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

HRAT 32.768E3 // Set a 32.768 kHz rate

FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

368 Appendix A Command Reference

HRES Horizontal RESolution

Class Format parameter setting - Video resolution

Description Establishes the number of active pixels per line. The HRES? query returns the current

setting of HRES.

Command syntax HRES pixels

pixels

min = 16

max depends on VRES and model of generator

Query syntax HRES?

Query response pixels

Other required

commands The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.

Example

HRES 480 // Set 480 active pixels line in buffer

ALLU // Configure hardware and redraw image

Video Test Generator User Guide 369

HSIZ Horizontal SIZe

Class Format parameter setting - Video resolution

Description Establishes the horizontal physical size of the image on the display. Units expected (or

returned) vary according to the last mode set with USIZ command. The HSIZ command is

context sensitive and must appear between begin and end commands FMTB and FMTE.

The HSIZ? query returns the current setting of HSIZ.

Note: Make sure that the USIZ parameter is properly set before using the HSIZ command.

Changing the USIZ setting after entering HSIZ will convert the size to match the new unit

of measure.

Command syntax HSIZ physical_size

physical_size

positive value (floating point accepted)

Query syntax HSIZ?

Query response Returns physical size (floating point returned)

Other required

commands The units of measure must be properly set by USIZ before entering HSIZ. The ALLU

command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image, taking the

new size into account.

Example

FMTB // Begin editing session One or more format editing commands

// ...

USIZ 1 // Select inches as unit of measure in buffer

HSIZ 10.4 // Set width to 10.4 in buffer

VSIZ 7.8 // Set height to 7.8 in buffer

ALLU // Test the new settings

// more format editing commands

// ...

FMTE // End of editing session

370 Appendix A Command Reference

HSPD Horizontal Sync Pulse Delay

Class Format parameter setting - Synchronization

Description Establishes the delay between the leading edge of blanking and the leading edge of the

horizontal sync pulse. The HSPD? query returns the current setting of HSPD.

Command syntax HSPD pixels

pixels

min = 1

max = HTOT - HRES - HSPW

Query syntax HSPD?

Query response pixels

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings. The ALLU command

updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.

Example

HSPD 16 // Set 16 pixel pulse delay in buffer

FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

Video Test Generator User Guide 371

HSPG Horizontal Sync Pulse Gate

Class Format parameter setting - Synchronization

Description Enables and disables the digital horizontal sync output. The HSPG? query returns the

current HSPG mode.

Command syntax HSPG mode

mode

0 = OFF

1 = ON

Query syntax HSPG?

Query response 0 or 1

Other required

commands To use digital horizontal sync, digital separate H and V sync must be selected with the

SSST command. The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings.

The ALLU command updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test

image.

Example

HSPG 1 // Enable H sync output in buffer

FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

372 Appendix A Command Reference

HSPP Horizontal Sync Pulse Polarity

Class Format parameter setting - Synchronization

Description Establishes the logic sense of the digital horizontal sync outputs. Setting polarity to 1

causes the leading edge of horizontal sync to be a low-to-high transition. Setting polarity to

0 causes the leading edge of horizontal sync to be a high-to-low transition. The HSPP?

query returns the current polarity of HSPP.

Command syntax HSPP polarity

polarity

0 = active-low (negative going pulse)

1 = active-high (positive going pulse)

Query syntax HSPP?

Query response 0 or 1

Other required

commands To use digital horizontal sync, it must be gated on with the HSPG command and digital

separate H and V sync must be selected with the SSST command. The FMTU command

instructs the generator to use the new settings. The ALLU command updates the

hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.

Example

HSPP 0 // Set active low H sync in buffer

HSPG 1 // Enable H sync output in buffer

SSST 1 // Select H&V sync type in buffer

FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

Video Test Generator User Guide 373

HSPW Horizontal Sync Pulse Width

Class Format parameter setting - Synchronization

Description Establishes the width of the horizontal sync pulse. The HSPW? query returns the current

setting of HSPW.

Command syntax HSPW pixels

pixels

min = 1

max = HTOT - HRES - HSPD

Query syntax HSPW?

Query response pixels

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings. The ALLU command

updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.

Example

HSPW 32 // Set pulse width to 32 pixels in buffer

FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

374 Appendix A Command Reference

HSRS Horizontal Sync Rate Shift

Class System parameter settings

801GC, 801GC-ISA, 801GF, 801GF-ISA and 801GX only

Description Temporarily shifts the horizontal sync frequency of the generator. The first parameter

controls the amount of shift (in Hz) and the second parameter controls the approximate

length of time (in seconds) that the frequency is shifted, before returning to nominal. Both

parameters can be entered as floating point numbers.

Command syntax HSRS shift_factor shift_period

shift_factor

should not exceed ±10% of normal horizontal rate to ensure stable operation of the

generator

shift_period

non-negative

Example

HSRS -100 2.5 // Shifts the horizontal rate of the currently running

// format down by 100 Hz for about 2.5 sec.

Video Test Generator User Guide 375

HSSC Horizontal Sync Skew Calibration

Class System Level Parameter

Description Skews the horizontal pulse delay by the given number of pixels on all formats loaded after

issuing the command. The skew is added to the HSPD value of the format that is loaded.

The HSSC? query returns the current HSSC setting. Used for correcting HSPD errors on

the 801GC, 801GC-ISA and 801GX generators.

Command syntax HSSC skew

skew

min=-10 (integer)

max=+10 (integer)

Query syntax HSSC?

Query response skew

Example

HSSC 2

376 Appendix A Command Reference

HTOT Horizontal TOTal pixels per line

Class Format parameter setting - Video resolution

Description Establishes the total number of pixels per horizontal line. The HTOT? query returns the

current setting of HTOT.

The pixel rate is equal to HRAT multiplied by HTOT.

Note: The current version of the firmware does not allow you to directly enter a specific

pixel rate when setting up a format. If your test specifications call for a specific pixel or dot

clock rate, enter suitable values for HRAT and HTOT to give you the desired pixel rate.

Command syntax HTOT pixels

pixels

min:

801GP = 2

801GC, GF, GX = 144

801GC-ISA, GF-ISA = 144

max:

801GP = 2048

801GC, GX = 4096

801GC-ISA = 4096

801GF, 801GF-ISA = 65,536

Query syntax HTOT?

Query response pixels

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings. The ALLU command

updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.

Example

HTOT 800 // Set total to 800

FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

Video Test Generator User Guide 377

HVPD? Horizontal Vertical Sync Pulse Delay

Class Format Parameter Setting - Synchronization

Description Returns the pixel delay between the horizontal and vertical sync pulses.

Query syntax HVPD?

Query response number of pixels

Example

HVPD? // read pixel delay between HSYNC and VSYNC pulses

1 // one pixel delay

Related commands None

378 Appendix A Command Reference

HVSA Horizontal Vertical Sync Adjustment

Class Format parameter setting - Synchronization

Description Lengthens the serration period a given number of pixels from the format’s nominal default

value as required by certain military STANAG video formats. The HVSA? query returns the

current setting of HVSA.

Command syntax HVSA pixels

pixels

integer, 0 and less than HSPW

Query syntax HVSA?

Query response pixels

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings. The ALLU command

updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.

Example

HVSA 30;

ALLU

Video Test Generator User Guide 379

I2CR? I2C port Read

Class EDID and DDC control

Description Automatically reads data using a specified I2C protocol. This command reads data from

the DDC port (if equipped), EDID, enhanced DDC (E-DDC) data, and VESA DDC/CI

(DDC2Bi) data using the I2C bus. All numeric parameters are given in ASCII HEX.

Note: EDID-compatible receivers use EPROMs with single-byte or double-byte

addresses. The I2CR? query uses different parameters depending on the EPROM

type. To determine which EPROM type is used, try both syntaxes until you can read

data from the EPROM.

Query syntax

(EPROM with

single-byte

addresses)

I2CR? eprom i2c_address offset #_of_bytes

Query syntax

(EPROM with

double-byte

addresses)

I2CR? eprom1 i2c_address offset #_of_bytes

Query syntax

(DDC/CI protocol) I2CR? ddcci dst_address #_of_bytes

Query syntax

(E-DDC protocol) I2CR? e_ddc ddc_pointer_addr segment# i2c_address offset #_of_bytes

i2c_address (hex)

i2c bus address (A0, A1,...)

offset (hex)

address offset (in bytes)

#_of_bytes (hex)

number of bytes

dst_address (hex)

destination address

ddc_pointer_addr (hex)

segment pointer address

segment# (hex)

segment pointer number

380 Appendix A Command Reference

Example 1 This example reads a four page E-EDID, using the I2C e_ddc protocol, one page at a

time.

R:\>i2cr? e_ddc 60 0 a0 0 80

00FFFFFFFFFFFF004489B200050000000D0C010380502D780A0DC9A05747982712484C200

00001010101010101010101010101010101011D8018711C1620582C2500C48E2100009E8C

0AD08A20E02D10103E9600138E21000018000000FC0048444D492054560A2020202020000

000FD003B3D0F2E08000A2020202020200306

R:\>i2cr? e_ddc 60 0 a0 80 80

F002020000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000

0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000

000000000000000000000000000000000000C

R:\>i2cr? e_ddc 60 1 a0 0 80

02031CF149850408020106141216230907078301000065030C001000011D007251D01E206

E285500C48E2100001ED60980A020E02D1010602200128E210000188C0AD090204031200C

405500C48E21000018011D80D0721C1620102C2580C48E2100009E8C0AA01451F01600267

C4300138E21000098000000000000000000A4

R:\>i2cr? e_ddc 60 1 a0 80 80

020308F1431113158C0AD090204031200C405500138E21000018011D00BC52D01E20B8285

540C48E2100001E8C0AA02051201810187E2300C48E210000980000000000000000000000

0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000

0000000000000000000000000000000000071

Example 2 This command returns 128 bytes of EDID from the connected device.

i2cr? e_ddc 60 0 a0 0 80

Related commands EDID?, I2CW

Video Test Generator User Guide 381

I2CW I2C port Write

Class EDID and DDC control

Description Writes raw binary data from the DDC port (if equipped), EDID, and VESA DDC/CI

(DDC2Bi) data using the I2C bus.

Note: EDID-compatible receivers use EPROMs with single-byte or double-byte

addresses. The I2CW command uses different parameters depending on the EPROM type.

Command syntax

(EPROM with

single-byte

addresses)

I2CW eprom i2c_address offset #_of_bytes data

Command syntax

(EPROM with

double-byte

addresses)

I2CW eprom1 i2c_address offset #_of_bytes data

Command syntax

(DDC/CI protocol) I2CW ddcci dst_address src_address length [command+data+checksum]

i2c_address (hex)

i2c bus address (A0, A1,...)

offset (hex)

address offset (in bytes)

#_of_bytes (hex)

number of bytes

data (hex)

data

command (hex)

command

checksum (hex)

checksum

382 Appendix A Command Reference

Example 1 This command writes the first 8 bytes of EDID to the EPROM.

Note: Always confirm that you can successfully read an address (using the I2CR? query)

before writing to that address.

i2cw eprom a0 0 8 00FFFFFFFFFFFF00

Example 2 This command reads the EDID from a specified address.

i2cr? eprom a0 0 80

Example 3 This command writes DDC2Bi data.

i2cw ddcci 6E 51 81 B10F

Example 4 This commands reads the DDC2Bi data.

i2cr? ddcci 6F 5

Related commands EDID?, I2CR?

Video Test Generator User Guide 383

IDET Initialization DETect

Class System Parameter

Description Stores the integer flag value in non-volatile memory. The value is not changed except by

1) another IDET command, 2) re-initializing the unit with an INIT command, or 3) the

system firmware because the power-up self test found corrupted data in battery backed

system memory. In cases 2 and 3, the IDET value will revert to 0. The IDET? query returns

the current IDET value. The IDET command and query are used by automated test

systems to determine if a particular unit has been replaced or reinitialized since it had its

IDET value set to unique number by that system.

Command syntax IDET integer flagNeed help with this syntax and parameter formatting.

-2,147,483,647 ??integer flag?? +2,147,483,647

Query syntax IDET?

Query response flag

Example

IDET 19980616 // Set IDET to a non-zero value

384 Appendix A Command Reference

IFGU InfoFrame Generator Use

Class InfoFrame Generator (IFG) parameter

Description Updates hardware with current InfoFrame contents.

Command syntax IFGU

Example

IFTG 14

IFGU

Related commands IFTG, IFTR, XGIF, XAVI, XSPD, XAUD, XMPG

Video Test Generator User Guide 385

IFTG InfoFrame Type Gate

Class InfoFrame Generator (IFG) parameter

Description Gates the InfoFrames by type. The mask value is a value ORed with the current setting.

Note: For more information about the InfoFrame structure, see the EIA Standard

EIA/CEA-861-B (Section 6).

Command syntax IFTG mask

mask

A bit mask based on these InfoFrame type values.

Example This example enables AUD (8), SPD (4), and AVI (2) InfoFrames (but not MPG and GIF

InfoFrames). The MPG and GIF InfoFrames are gated off, and loaded with zeros.

IFTG 14

IFGU

Related commands IFGU, IFTR

Type Value

GIF 1

AVI 2

SPD 4

AUD 8

MPG 16

386 Appendix A Command Reference

IFTR InfoFrame Type Repeat Mask

Class InfoFrame Generator (IFG) parameter

Description Specifies if an InfoFrame type is to be sent once (after the IFGU command is executed), or

sent in every vertical blanking period (frame).

Note: For more information about the InfoFrame structure, see the EIA Standard

EIA/CEA-861-B (Section 6).

Command syntax IFTR mask

mask

A bit mask based on these InfoFrame type values.

Example This example specifies that AUD (8) and AVI (2) InfoFrames should be repeated with

every frame, and other InfoFrame types should be sent once.

IFTR 10

IFGU

Related commands IFTG, IFGU

Type Value

GIF 1

AVI 2

SPD 4

AUD 8

MPG 16

Video Test Generator User Guide 387

IMGA IMaGe save As

Class Image memory management

Description Saves the current contents of the image edit buffer using the given name.

Command syntax IMGA name

name

a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)

Example

IMGA MY_IMG // Save with the name "MY_IMG"

388 Appendix A Command Reference

IMGB IMaGe editing Begin

Class Image editor control

Description Marks the beginning of an image editing session.

Command syntax IMGB

Other required

commands Use either an IMGL command to load an existing image or an IMGN command to create a

new image. Use IMGE when ending the editing session.

Example

IMGN // Initialize image edit buffer

IMGB // Start image editing session

// One or more image editing

// commands ...

IMGE // End image editing session

Video Test Generator User Guide 389

IMGE IMaGe editing End

Class Image editor control

Description Marks the end of an image editing session.

Command syntax IMGE

Other required

commands Use IMGB when starting the editing session. Use IMGA or IMGS to save changes.

Example

IMGB // Start image editing session

// One or more image editing commands ...

IMGA MYIMG_02 // Save edited image as "MYIMG_02"

IMGE // End image editing session

390 Appendix A Command Reference

IMGK IMaGe Kill

Class Image memory management

Description Deletes an image by name. The query returns a 1 if the named image can be deleted. If

the image is read-only or nonexistent, the query returns a 0.

Command syntax IMGK name

name

a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)

Query syntax IMGK? name

name

a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)

Query response 0 or 1

Example

IMGK MY_IMG // Delete dir called "MY_IMG"

Video Test Generator User Guide 391

IMGL IMaGe Load

Class Image memory management

Description Assigns an image to the current step of a sequence while between a set of SEQB and

SEQE commands. The IMGL command is context sensitive. The IMGL? query returns the

name of the image currently assigned to the step.

Outside of the sequence editor, the IMGL command copies the image having a name

equal to name from image memory into the image edit buffer. The query returns a one (1)

if the named image can be loaded, otherwise a zero (0) is returned.

Command syntax IMGL name

name

a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)

Query syntax IMGL? name

name

a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)

Query response 0 or 1

Other required

commands An ALLU or IMGU command must be executed after the IMGL command to cause the

image in the edit to draw on the unit under test.

Example

IMGL MY_IMG // Load "MY_IMG" dir in edit buffer

IMGU // Draw contents of buffer

392 Appendix A Command Reference

IMGN IMaGe New

Class Image editor control

Description Initializes the image edit buffer. The name name is assigned as the image's name. The

query will return the name that has been assigned as the image's name.

Command syntax IMGN name

name

optional valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)

Query syntax IMGN?

Query response name

Example

IMGN // Init edit buffer without assigning a new name

IMGN MY_IMG // Init edit buffer with name of "MY_IMG"

Video Test Generator User Guide 393

IMGP IMaGe Path

Class Image memory management

Description Sets the current image path name to a given directory. The query will return the current

image path name.

Command syntax IMGP name

name

a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)

Query syntax IMGP? name

name

a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)

Query response name

Example

IMGP FINAL // Sets image pathname to a directory called "FINAL".

394 Appendix A Command Reference

IMGQ? IMaGe Query pointer

Class Image memory management

Description Returns number image names from the list of all the images stored in image memory

beginning at index. The images are kept in alphanumeric order.

Query syntax IMGQ? index number

index

positive integer number

number

positive integer number

Query response List of specified image names

Example

IMGQ? 1 5 // List the first five images in memory

IMGQ? 1 9999 // List all images in memory

Video Test Generator User Guide 395

IMGR IMaGe Read image from image memory location

Class Image memory management

Description Copies the image residing in the image memory with location location into the image

buffer. The IMGR command does not cause the selected image to be drawn. See the

IMGU command for actually drawing the image. Using the IMGL command to load images

by name is the preferred method of selecting images.

Command syntax IMGR location

location

-1 through -26 (EPROM)

Other required

commands The IMGU command draws the image. The ALLU command updates hardware to the new

setting and redraws the test image.

Example

IMGR 1 // Select first custom image in memory

IMGU // Draw the image

396 Appendix A Command Reference

IMGS IMaGe Save

Class Image memory management

Description Saves the current contents of the generator's custom image edit buffer back to the

memory location from which it was originally read.

Command syntax IMGS

Video Test Generator User Guide 397

IMGU IMaGe Use

Class Image memory management

Description Draws an image based on the current contents of the image. The IMGU? query returns

the image memory location location from which the current contents of the image were

read. See the IMGR command for setting the contents of the image.

Command syntax IMGU

Query syntax IMGU?

Query response location

location

-1 through -26 (EPROM)

Example

IMGL BriteBox // Select the BriteBox test image

IMGU // Draw the selected test image

398 Appendix A Command Reference

INIT INITialize to factory default settings

Class Direct processor control

Description Restores the contents of all of the generator's RAM storage locations to factory-default

conditions. The generator then goes through a complete self-test and self-calibration

procedure.

Important: The INIT command permanently and irreversibly removes all user-created

formats, custom images, test sequences, and directories from memory.

Command syntax INIT

Video Test Generator User Guide 399

ISTP? Image STep

Class Image editor control

Description Allows the contents of user created custom images to be copied out of a generator. The

contents of the firmware-based, built-in test images cannot be read out since they are not

created as a set of primitives.

Query syntax ISTP? returns the number of steps in the custom image in the edit buffer.

ISTP? step_number returns the contents of the given step in the custom image in the edit

buffer as a space delimited text string.

Other required

commands A custom image must have been loaded with the IMGL command and editing must have

been started with the IMGB command

400 Appendix A Command Reference

ISUB Image Step Button

Class System parameter settings

Description Determines if the Image Step key is on or off to allow activation of alternate versions of

test images that have alternate versions.

The ISUB? query returns the current setting of ISUB.

Command syntax ISUB mode

mode

0 = OFF

1 = ON

Query syntax ISUB?

Query response 0 or 1

Example

IMGL SlideBox // Load image

ISUB 1 // Enable alternate versions

IVER 1 // Load version 1

IMGU // Update display

Video Test Generator User Guide 401

IVER Image VERsion

Class System parameter settings

Description Determines which version of an image is used for the current step of a sequence while

between a set of SEQB and SEQE commands. The IVER command is context sensitive.

The IVER? query returns the version currently assigned to the step.

Outside of the sequence editor, the IVER command selects which version of the current

image is drawn when either an ALLU or IMGU command is executed. The IVER? query

returns the current setting of IVER.

Command syntax IVER mode

mode

0 = Normal

1 = Invert or display alternate version

Query syntax IVER?

Query response 0 or 1

Other required

commands The IMGU command redraws an image using the new setting. The ALLU command

updates hardware and redraws the test image with the new setting.

Example

IMGL Text_9 // Select image with white text on black

IVER 1 // Select inverted with black on white

IMGU // Draw the image as selected

402 Appendix A Command Reference

JDVI Justify pixel clock rate for DVI formats

Class Format editor control

Description Scales the horizontal timing parameters of the format currently in the edit buffer. The

parameters are scaled to produce the given pixel rate while keeping the horizontal scan

rate as close as possible to its original value. The following parameters are scaled:

horizontal total pixels, horizontal active pixels, horizontal sync delay in pixels, and

horizontal sync pulse width in pixels. The parameters are scaled so that their periods, in

microseconds, are as close as possible to their original values.

Command syntax JDVI pixel_rate

pixel_rate

floating point number equal to the desired pixel in MHz

Query syntax JDVI?

Query response pixel_rate

Other required

commands The ALLU command updates hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.

Video Test Generator User Guide 403

JLDI Justify pixel clock rate for LDI formats

Class Format editor control

Description Scales the horizontal timing parameters of the format currently in the edit buffer. (For the

801LD used in digital mode, the default is set at 224 MHz.) The parameters are scaled to

produce the given pixel rate while keeping the horizontal scan rate as close as possible to

its original value. The following parameters are scaled: horizontal total pixels, horizontal

active pixels, horizontal sync delay in pixels, and horizontal sync pulse width in pixels. The

parameters are scaled so that their periods, in microseconds, are as close as possible to

their original values.

Command syntax JLDI pixel_rate

pixel_rate

floating point number equal to the desired pixel in MHz

Query syntax JLDI?

Query response pixel_rate

Other required

commands The ALLU command updates hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.

404 Appendix A Command Reference

JRAT Justify pixel clock RATe

Class Format editor control

Description Scales the horizontal timing parameters of the format currently in the edit buffer. The

parameters are scaled to produce the given pixel rate while keeping the horizontal scan

rate as close as possible to its original value. The following parameters are scaled:

horizontal total pixels, horizontal active pixels, horizontal sync delay in pixels, and

horizontal sync pulse width in pixels. The parameters are scaled so that their periods, in

microseconds, are as close as possible to their original values.

Command syntax JRAT pixel_rate

pixel_rate

floating point number equal to the desired pixel in MHz

Other required

commands The ALLU command updates hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.

Example

JRAT 202.000E6 // Adjust timing to a 202.000 MHz clock

FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

Video Test Generator User Guide 405

KEYY

KEY toggle

Class System parameter settings

Description Toggles the status of the following items: image version of the currently displayed image,

red, green and blue video gating, ACS, DCS, and DSS sync gating, and outputs gating.

The order of the keys matches the order of the keys found on the front panel of the

generator. The current status of the keys can be checked using the LEDS?? query.

Command syntax KEYY key

key

1 = image (step) version

2 = red gating

3 = green gating

4 = blue gating

5 = ACS gating

6 = DCS gating

7 = DSS gating

8 = outputs gating

Example

KEYY 8 // Toggle current status of output gates

406 Appendix A Command Reference

KNOB rotate KNOB

Class System parameter settings

Description Mimics turning the Format or Image knob on the generator.

When a sequence is running, the Format knob loads sequences from the directory

selected by the SEQP command. Clockwise rotation increases the index pointer for the

directory. The Image knob is used to go back and forth through the sequence steps.

Clockwise rotation selects higher step numbers.

Command syntax KNOB number clicks

number

1 = upper Format knob

2 = lower Image knob

clicks

An integer representing the number of knob increments from the current active format

or image. A positive integer indicates a clockwise move to a higher index number. A

negative integer indicates a counterclockwise move to a lower index number.

Example

KNOB 2 1 // Move Image knob 1 click CW

KNOB 1 -10 // Move the Format knob 10 clicks CCW

Video Test Generator User Guide 407

LCDS? LCD Status

Class System parameter settings

Description Returns text displayed on LCD of the generator.

Query syntax LCDS?

Example

LCDS? // Return text similar to text below

// H32 15=VGA_m3 crlf

// V60 51=SMPTE133

408 Appendix A Command Reference

LEDS?

LED Status

Class System parameter settings

Description Returns the current status of the generator's signal generating hardware as a single

decimal number. The number corresponds to the status of the lighted key on the generator

in normal operation. The easiest way to interpret the number is to first convert it to an

8-digit binary number. A 1 in a given position, from MSB to LSB, corresponds to the

following hardware settings:

Master output control gated ON (MSB)

Digital Separate (HS&VS) Sync selected

Digital Composite Sync selected

Analog Composite Sync selected

Blue video enabled

Green video enabled

Red video enabled

Alternate image version selected (LSB)

Query syntax LEDS?

Query response decimal number from 0 to 255

Example

LEDS?

// Returns the following number when the outputs are gated ON, separate

// HS & VS is selected, the red, green and blue video channels are

// enabled and the primary version of an image is selected.

206 // Binary equivalent = 11001110

Video Test Generator User Guide 409

LIMI draw video LIMIts markers

Class Custom image primitive

Description Places nine markers that define the active video area. An L-shaped marker is placed at

each corner. T-shaped markers are centered along each edge of video, and a small cross

is placed at the center of video. The primitive uses a single parameter: color.

Command syntax LIMI color

color

available colors

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU command

updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.

Example

LIMI white // Place white markers that define active video area

ALLU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

410 Appendix A Command Reference

LINE draw a LINE

Class Custom image primitive

Description Draws a line between any two points. The line is 1 pixel thick. The primitive uses five

parameters: the color and x,y coordinates for both endpoints.

Command syntax LINE color x_start y_start x_end y_end

color

available colors

x_start, y_start, x_ end, y_end

positive integer number

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU command

updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.

Example

LINE yellow 20 5 320 240

// Draw yellow line from X=20, Y=5 to X=320, Y=240

ALLU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

Video Test Generator User Guide 411

LLOS Local Lock Out State

Class System Control

Description Enables the use of the front panel keys and knobs (local operation) on the generator that

may have been previously disabled with the GTLS command. The LLOS? query returns

the current local lockout state.

Command syntax LLOS

Query syntax LLOS?

Query response status

0 = local lockout disabled

1 = local lockout enabled

Example

LLOS // Disable the use of front panel controls

412 Appendix A Command Reference

LMAX

Lut MAXimum level (Analog)

Class Lookup Table memory management

Description Establishes the maximum integer lookup table level representing full white.

Command syntax LMAX level

level integer

min = 0

max = 65,535

Query syntax LMAX?

Example

LMAX 1024

Video Test Generator User Guide 413

LMAX Digital Video Maximum quantizing Level

Class Format parameter setting - Digital video signal

Description Sets the maximum quantizing level of the component video signal for white. The default

varies depending on the number of bits per color component. Some applications may

require that the maximum level be set lower than the maximum permissible. The query

reads the current setting for the maximum level.

Command syntax LMAX video_level

video_level

unsigned integer from 59 to 63 when NBPC is 6 gamuts; 235 to 255 when NBPC is 8

gamuts; 940 to 1023 when NBPC is 10 gamuts; 3760 to 4095 when NBPC is 12

gamuts.

Query syntax LMAX?

Example LMAX 254 // To set the maximum digital quantizing level to 254

Related commands LMIN, NBPC, DVQM

414 Appendix A Command Reference

LMIN Digital Video Minimum quantizing Level

Class Format parameter setting - Digital video signal

Description Sets the minimum quantizing level of the component video signal for black. The default is

0 for black; however, some applications may require that the minimum level be set higher.

The query reads the current setting for the minimum level.

Command syntax LMIN video_level

video_level

unsigned integer from 0 to 4 when NBPC is 6 gamuts; 0 to 16 when NBPC is 8

gamuts; 0 to 64 when NBPC is 10 gamuts; 0 to 256 when NBPC is 12 gamuts

Query syntax LMIN?

Example LMIN 16 // To set the minimum digital quantizing level to 16

Related commands LMAX, NBPC, DVQM

Video Test Generator User Guide 415

LSPG Line Sync Pulse Gate

Class Format parameter settings

Description Enables and disables the digital horizontal sync output. The LSPG? query returns the

current LSPG mode.

Command syntax LSPG mode

mode integer

0 = OFF

1 = ON

Query syntax LSPG?

Query response 0 or 1

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings. The ALLU command

updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.

Example

LSPG 1 // Enable Line Sync

FMTU // Update hardware to new settings

416 Appendix A Command Reference

LSPP Line Sync Pulse Polarity

Class Format parameter setting - Synchronization

Description Establishes the logic sense of the digital line sync output. Setting polarity to 1 causes the

leading edge of line sync to be a low-to-high transition. Setting polarity to 0 causes the

leading edge of line sync to be a high-to-low transition. The LSPP? query returns the

current polarity of LSPP.

Command syntax LSPP polarity

polarity

0 = active-low (negative going pulse)

1 = active-high (positive going pulse)

Query syntax FSPP?

Query response 0 or 1

Other required

commands In order to get a pulse, line sync must first be enabled with the LSPG command. The

FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings. The ALLU command

updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.

Example

LSPG 1 // Enable Line Sync

LSPP 1 // Set for positive going pulse

LSPW 20 // Make the pulse 20 pixels wide

LSPG 300 // Pulse to occur 300 lines after

// the last line of active video

FMTU // Update hardware to new settings

Video Test Generator User Guide 417

LUTA

LUT save As

Class Lookup Table memory management

Description Saves the current contents of the lookup table edit buffer using the given name.

Command syntax LUTA name

name

a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)

Example

LUTA MY_LUT // Save with the name "MY_LUT"

418 Appendix A Command Reference

LUTB

LUT editing Begin

Class Lookup Table memory management

Description Marks the beginning of a lookup table editing session.

Command syntax LUTB

Other required

commands Use either an LUTL command to load an existing lookup table or an LUTN command to

create a new lookup table. Use LUTE when ending the editing session.

Example

LUTN // Initialize lookup table edit buffer

LUTB // Start lookup table editing session

// One or more lookup table editing commands

// ...

LUTE // End lookup table editing session

Video Test Generator User Guide 419

LUTE

LUT editing End

Class Lookup table editor control

Description Marks the end of a lookup table editing session.

Command syntax LUTE

Other required

commands Use LUTB when starting the editing session. Use LUTA or LUTS to save changes.

Example

LUTB // Start lookup table editing session

// One or more lookup table editing commands

// ...

LUTA My_LUT1 // Save edited lookup table as My_LUT1

LUTE // End lookup table editing session

420 Appendix A Command Reference

LUTK

LUT Kill

Class Lookup table memory management

Description Erases the named lookup table from memory. The LUTK? query checks to see if the

named lookup table can be erased. The RAM location number is returned if it can be

erased. Otherwise, a zero is returned.

Command syntax LUTK name

name

a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)

Query syntax LUTK? name

name

a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)

Query response 0 or location

Example

LUTK my_LUT1 // Erase lookup table called my_LUT1 LUTL

Video Test Generator User Guide 421

LUTL

LUT Load

Class Lookup table memory management

Description Reads the lookup table having a name equal to name name from lookup table memory (or

EPROM) into the lookup table. LUTL does not re-configure the signal generating

hardware. This feature allows you to work on the contents of any lookup table memory

location, while continuing to output a signal based on a previously-used lookup table (see

LUTU command). The LUTL? query returns the location location in which a lookup table

having a name equal to name is found. If multiple lookup tables exist having name name,

then the lowest numbered location containing a lookup table with a matching name name

is returned. The lookup table memory (RAM) is always searched first. If a lookup table with

name name cannot be found anywhere in the lookup table memory, then the

industry-standard lookup tables located in EPROM (negative locations) are searched next.

LUTL? returns 0 if a lookup table with a name equal to name name cannot be found in

either lookup table space.

Command syntax LUTL name

name

a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)

Query syntax LUTL? name

Query response location (returns 0 if not found)

Other required

commands The LUTU command updates the hardware to the new settings.

Example

LUTL my_lut // Load lookup table called my_lut

422 Appendix A Command Reference

LUTN

LUT New

Class Lookup table editor control

Description Initializes the lookup table editing buffer and optionally sets the filename.

Command syntax LUTN name

name

(optional) valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)

Other required

commands The LUTB command must be used to enable editing of the initialized buffer.

Example

LUTN my_lut2 // Create new edit buffer for my_lut2

LUTB // Begin editing

Video Test Generator User Guide 423

LUTQ?

LUT Query pointer

Class Lookup table memory management

Description Returns number lookup table names from the list of all the lookup tables stored in lookup

table memory beginning at index. The lookup tables are kept in alphanumeric order.

Query syntax LUTQ? index number

index

positive integer number

number

positive integer number

Query response List of specified lookup table names.

Examples:

LUTQ? 1 5 // List the first five lookup tables in memory

LUTQ? 1 9999 // List all lookup tables in memory

424 Appendix A Command Reference

LUTS

LUT Save

Class Lookup table memory management

Description Saves the current lookup table edit buffer contents into lookup table memory using the

current name of the lookup table in the edit buffer.

Command syntax LUTS

Video Test Generator User Guide 425

LUTU

LUT Use

Class Lookup table memory management

Description Loads the lookup table hardware in accordance with the buffer contents.

The LUTU? query returns either a lookup table memory location location or 0. If the lookup

table currently in the hardware matches that originally loaded (using the LUTL command)

from a lookup table memory location, then the matching lookup table memory location

location is returned. Otherwise, if the hardware contents have changed since either an

LUTR or LUTL command has been issued, then LUTU? query returns 0.

Command syntax LUTU

Query syntax LUTU?

Query response location or 0

Example

LUTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

426 Appendix A Command Reference

MAPA

bitMAP save As

Class Bitmap memory management

Description Saves the current contents of the bitmap edit buffer using the given name.

Command syntax MAPA name

name

a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)

Example

MAPA MY_MAP // Save with the name "MY_MAP"

Video Test Generator User Guide 427

MAPB

bitMAP editing Begin

Class Bitmap editor control

Description Marks the beginning of a bitmap editing session.

Command syntax MAPB

Other required

commands Use either an MAPL command to load an existing image or an MAPN command to create

a new bitmap. Use MAPE when ending the editing session.

Example

MAPN // Initialize bitmap edit buffer

MAPB // Start bitmap editing session

// One or more bitmap editing commands ...

MAPE // End bitmap editing session

428 Appendix A Command Reference

MAPE

bitMAP editing End

Class Bitmap editor control

Description Marks the end of a bitmap editing session.

Command syntax MAPE

Other required

commands Use MAPB when starting the editing session. Use MAPA or MAPS to save changes.

Example

MAPB // Start bitmap editing session

// One or more bitmap editing commands ...

MAPA My_map1 // Save edited bitmap as My_map1

MAPE // End bitmap editing session

Video Test Generator User Guide 429

MAPK

bitMAP Kill from memory by name

Class Bitmap memory management

Description Erases the named bitmap from memory. The MAPK? query checks to see if the named

bitmap can be erased. The RAM location number is returned if it can be erased;

otherwise, a 0 is returned.

Command syntax MAPK name

name

a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)

Query syntax MAPK? name

name

a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)

Query response 0 or location

Example

MAPK my_map1 // Erase bitmap called my_map1

430 Appendix A Command Reference

MAPL

bitMAP Load from memory by name

Class Bitmap memory management

Description Reads the bitmap having a name equal to name from bitmap memory into the bitmap

buffer. MAPL does not change what is being displayed from the video memory. The

MAPL? query returns the location location in which a bitmap having a name equal to name

is found. If multiple bitmaps exist having name name, then the lowest numbered location

containing a bitmap with a matching name name is returned. MAPL? returns 0 if a bitmap

with a name equal to name cannot be found.

Command syntax MAPL name

name

a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)

Query syntax MAPL? name

Query response location (returns 0 if not found)

Example

MAPL SHAPE01 // Load bitmap called SHAPE01 into the buffer

Video Test Generator User Guide 431

MAPN

bitMAP New

Class Bitmap editor control

Description Initializes the bitmap editing buffer.

Command syntax MAPN name

name

a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)

Example

MAPN // Intialize bit-map buffer

MAPN Cool // Initialize format buffer and name the format "Cool".

432 Appendix A Command Reference

MAPQ?

bitMAP Query pointer

Class Bitmap memory management

Description Returns bitmap names from the list of all the bitmaps stored in bitmap memory beginning

at index. The bitmaps are kept in alphanumeric order. The generator maintains internal

variables for the current index and number values. The value of index is automatically

incremented by number after the query is executed. Sending the query with just an index

parameter returns the same number of names as the last time, starting at the given index.

Sending the query with no parameters returns the next set of names.

Query syntax MAPQ? index number

index

positive integer number

number

positive integer number

Query response List of specified bitmap names.

Example

MAPQ? 1 9999 // List all bitmaps in memory

MAPQ? 1 10 // List the first ten bitmaps in memory

MAPQ? 21 // List the 21st through the 30th MAPes in memory

MAPQ? // List the 31st through the 40th MAPes in memory

Video Test Generator User Guide 433

MAPS

bitMAP Save

Class Bitmap memory management

Description Saves the current bitmap edit buffer contents into bitmap memory using the current name

of the bitmap in the edit buffer.

Command syntax MAPS

434 Appendix A Command Reference

MEMC

MEMory Compact

Class MEM

Description Consolidates free memory into contiguous blocks.

Command syntax MEMC?Is this a command or query. If query, what is the response?

Example

MEMC // Compact the system memory

Related commands MEMF?, MEML?

Video Test Generator User Guide 435

MEMF?

MEMory Free

Class MEM

Description Returns the number of free blocks in managed memory.

Query syntax MEMF?

Example

MEML? // to determine the amount of free memory block

818088 // lists the number of contiguous free memory blocks

Related commands MEMC, MEML?

436 Appendix A Command Reference

MEML?

MEMory Largest free

Class MEM

Description Returns the largest free contiguous block in managed memory.

Query syntax MEML?

Example

MEML? // to determine the largest contiguous block of free memory

816568 // lists the amount of contiguous free memory

Related commands MEMC, MEMF?

Video Test Generator User Guide 437

MEMT

MEMory Test

Class MEM

Description Runs a memory manager test to detect corruption or inconsistencies. The MEMT? query

returns the results of the most recent run of the memory manager test command.

Command syntax MEMT

Query syntax MEMT?

Query response 0 or 1

0 = no memory corruptions or inconsistencies were discovered

1 = a memory corruption or inconsistency was found

Example

MEMT // to run the memory manager test

MEML? // to view the results of the memory manager test

Related commands MEMC, MEMF?

438 Appendix A Command Reference

MMAP

Move a rectangular bitMAP area

Class Video Frame Buffer manipulation

Description Copies a rectangular area of pixels from one location of the video frame buffer to another.

The size of the area, in pixels, is defined by the width and height parameters. The top left

corner of the source location is specified by xs, ys pixel coordinates. The top left corner of

the destination location is specified by the xd, yd pixel coordinates.

Command syntax MMAP width height xs ys xd yd

width, height

size of the area, in pixels

xs, ys

top left corner of the source location

xd, yd

top left corner of the destination location

Query syntax MMAP?

Example

MMAP 40 30 0 0 50 50 // Copies a 40 pixel wide by 30 pixel high area

// in the top left corner of active video to an

// area 50 pixel below and to the right of the top

// left corner.

Video Test Generator User Guide 439

MODE communications MODE

Class System parameter settings

Description Sets the serial port communications parameters of a stand-alone model generator. The

changes take effect as soon as the command is entered. The factory default settings are

2400 baud, no parity, 8 data bits, no stop bits, no handshake, and no protocol.

Command syntax MODE baud parity data stop handshake protocol

baud rate

300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200 bits/sec

parity

N = None, E = Even or O = Odd

data

number of data bits: 7 or 8

stop

number of stop bits: 1 or 2

handshake

N = None

H = Hardware (CTS/RTS)

protocol

N = None

Y=Y-Modem

Example

MODE 9600 N 8 1 H N // Set a stand alone generator to

// communicate at 9600 Baud, No parity, 8 data bits,

// 1 stop bit, RTS//CTS handshaking and No protocol

MODE 2400 // Change only the baud rate

440 Appendix A Command Reference

MSIZ light Meter SIZe

Class System parameter settings

Description Establishes the physical size of the light meter boxes displayed in the BriteBox test image.

The unit of measure used is based on the current setting of the system level USIZ

command. It also affects the size of the cursor boxes in the Persist image. Changing the

size will not change the currently displayed image. The MSIZ? query returns the current

settings of MSIZ based on the current setting of the system level USIZ command.

Command syntax MSIZ width height

MSIZ common_size

size

positive floating point number

common_size

square box

Query syntax MSIZ?

Query response width, height

Other required

commands The correct unit of measure should be selected with the USIZ command prior to setting

the size.

Example

USIZ 1 // Select inches for units

MSIZ 2.0 // Set size to 2.0 inches

IMGL BriteBox // Select BriteBox image

IMGU // Draw selected image using new size

Video Test Generator User Guide 441

MUTE Audio/Video Mute

Class Sonic data generator

Description Enables and disables the HDMI Audio/Video Mute (AVMUTE) feature. When enabled,

audio and video are muted by the generator.

Command syntax MUTE flag

flag

0 = disable (AVMUTE_clear_flag sent repeatedly)

1 = enable (AVMUTE_set_flag sent repeatedly)

Query syntax MUTE?

Query response 0 or 1

Related commands

Example To enable AVMUTE:

MUTE 1

MUTE?

Use the MUTE? to continuously check until the AVMUTE state is changed (may not take

place right away).

442 Appendix A Command Reference

NAMF? NAMe Find

Class Directory editor control

Description Returns the index number of the entry with name name in the directory edit buffer. The first

name in the buffer has an index value of 1. If name is not found, a value of 0 is returned.

Query syntax NAMF? name

name

a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)

Query response index

Example

NAMF? VGA_m4 // Return position of VGA_m4 in directory

Video Test Generator User Guide 443

NAMI NAMe Insert

Class Directory editor control

Description Moves all the names with index values equal to or greater than index to the next higher

index value in the directory edit buffer, and then inserts the name name in the directory

edit buffer at position index. A negative number or a 0 used for index will put name at

index position 1. Using a number for index beyond the last name in the buffer will add

name to the index position just beyond the last name. The command does not check if a

file called name is stored in the generator.

Command syntax NAMI index name

name

a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)

Example 1 This example inserts the DMT0660A format on the knob list at location 1:

DIRL FMT

DIRB

NAMI 1 DMT0660A

DIRE

DIRS

Example 2

NAMI 5 FOCUS1 // Put FOCUS1 in fifth position

Example 3

NAMI -6 BARS // Put BARS at beginning of dir

Example 4

NAMI 999999 HATCH // Put HATCH at end of dir

444 Appendix A Command Reference

NAMK NAMe Kill

Class Directory editor control

Description Deletes the given name from the directory edit buffer. All names with index values greater

than the index of the deleted name are moved to the next lower index value in the buffer.

Nothing happens if name is not found in the buffer.

Command syntax NAMK name

name

a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)

Example

NAMK VGA_m4 // Remove VGA_m4 from dir

Video Test Generator User Guide 445

NAMQ? NAMe Query

Class Directory editor control

Description Returns number names from the list of names in the directory edit buffer beginning at

index. The generator maintains internal variables for the current index and number values.

The value of index is automatically incremented by number after the query is executed.

Sending the query with just an index parameter, will return the same number of names as

the last time, starting at the given index. Sending the query with no parameters will return

the next set of names in the directory buffer.

Query syntax NAMQ? index number

index

positive integer number

number

positive integer number

Query response List of specified entry names from directory edit buffer.

Example 1

NAMQ? 1 9999 // List the entire buffer

Example 2

NAMQ? 1 10 // List the first ten names in the buffer

NAMQ? 21 // List the 21st through the 30th names in the buffer

NAMQ? // List the 31st through the 40th names in the buffer

446 Appendix A Command Reference

NAMY NAMe Yank

Class Directory editor control

Description Deletes the name at the given index number from the directory edit buffer. All names with

index values greater than the index of the deleted name are moved to the next lower index

value in the buffer. Nothing happens if index is beyond the index number of last name in

the buffer.

Command syntax NAMY index

Example

NAMY 2 // Remove second item from dir

Video Test Generator User Guide 447

NBPA Number Bits Per Audio sample

Class Format parameter setting - Audio signal

Description Sets the number of bits per audio sample for an audio signal. This sets the SS parameter

of the Audio InfoFrame (as specified in EIA/CEA-861-B, table 20).

Command syntax NBPA bits

bits

0 (let incoming external audio stream determine the number of bits per sample)

Example

NBPA 16

IFGU

Related commands XAUD (SS parameter), SAMP

448 Appendix A Command Reference

NBPC Number Bits Per Component

Class Format parameter setting - Digital video signal

Description Sets the number of bits per color component (color depth).

Command syntax NBPC bits

bits

6, 8, 10, or 12 depending on output.

Example

NBPC 10

FMTU

Related commands DVSM, DVQM

Output NBPC

DVI 8

TV 12

LVDS 6 (18-bit encoding) or 8 (24-bit

encoding)

HDMI Digital RGB or YCbCr 4:4:4 output 8

HDMI YCbCr 4:2:2 output 8, 10, or 12.

Video Test Generator User Guide 449

NCPP Number Clocks Per Pixel

Class Format parameter setting - Digital video signal

Description Specifies the number of clocks per pixel (double-clocking factor for whole line). Some

industry standard formats (e.g. 480i) have pixel rates that are below the minimum pixel

rate restriction (of 25 MHz) required by the TMDS interface. In these cases, a feature

known as “double-clocking” is used to raise the TMDS clock rate to an acceptable

frequency.

Double-clocking is controlled by the NCPP format parameter. When NCPP is set to 1

(normal single-clocked), each pixel, output by the generator, is paired with one clock

pulse. In this case, the pixel rate is equal to the TMDS clock rate. By setting NCPP to 2

(double-clocked), two clocks are send during each pixel period and the TMDS clock rate is

raised to 2 times the pixel rate.

Note that double clocking with NCPP and pixel repetition (NPPP) cannot be applied at the

same time.

Command syntax NCPP factor

factor

1 or 2

Related commands NBPA, NPPP

Example

NCPP 2

FMTU

450 Appendix A Command Reference

NDAC Number Digital Audio Channels

Class Format parameter setting - Audio signal

Description Sets the number of digital audio channels for an audio signal. This sets the CC parameter

of the Audio InfoFrame (as specified in EIA/CEA-861-B, table 20).

Note: Currently, only two audio channels are supported.

Command syntax NDAC channels

channels

Example

NDAC 2

IFGU

Related Commands XAUD (CC parameter)

Video Test Generator User Guide 451

NDAS Number Digital Audio Streams

Class Format parameter setting - Audio signal

Description Sets the number of digital audio streams.

Note: Currently, only one audio stream is supported.

Command syntax NDAS streams

streams

1 (default)

Example

NDAS 1

IFGU

452 Appendix A Command Reference

NERR? Number of ERRors in queue

Class System memory management

Description Returns the number of errors waiting to be reported in the error queue.

Query syntax NERR?

Query response number of errors

Video Test Generator User Guide 453

NLNK Number of digital LiNKs

Class Format parameter setting - Digital video signal

Description Determines the number of links used by the LVDI digital outputs on generators that

support LVDI outputs. The NLNK? query returns the current setting of NLNK.

Command syntax NLNK links

links integer

0 = Default, let the generator decide

1 = Single link

2 = Dual link

Query syntax NLNK?

Query response links

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU command

updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.

Example

NLNK 2; FMTU

454 Appendix A Command Reference

NOGA use NO GAmma correction

Class Custom image primitive

Description Temporarily disables any gamma correction that may be selected in a format. All color

intensity levels in all parts of the custom image are output without gamma correction.

Gamma correction is disabled only for as long as the image is displayed.

Command syntax NOGA

Video Test Generator User Guide 455

NOTU NOT Until communication is complete

Class System Level

Description Temporarily holds-off any ongoing command execution until communication is complete

and ALLU is invoked.

Command syntax NOTU

Query syntax NOTU?

Query response 0 if not enabled

non-zero when enabled

Other required

commands Disabled by ALLU.

456 Appendix A Command Reference

NPPP Number Pixels Per Pixel

Class Format parameter setting - Digital video signal

Description Specifies repetition factor for active portion of line.

Command syntax NPPP factor

factor

0 to disable repetition mode (removes extra left and right repetition bars)

1 to 10 enables pixel repetition mode (inserts extra left and right repetition bars)

Related commands NCPP

Example

NPPP 4; FMTU

Video Test Generator User Guide 457

NSTP? Number of STePs in sequence

Class Sequence editor control

Description Returns the number of steps in a sequence in the buffer.

Query syntax NSTP?

Query response steps

458 Appendix A Command Reference

OERR? ERRor queue Overflow

Class System memory management

Description Checks for overflow in the error queue. Overflow occurs when an attempt is made to add

more errors to the queue than it can hold.

Query syntax OERR?

Query response overflow status

0 = No Overflow

1 = Overflow

Video Test Generator User Guide 459

OFFX image OFFset X

Class Image editor control

Description Sets the horizontal offset used for the large patch in the Regulate test image. It may also

control other images. The OFFX? query returns the current OFFX setting.

Command syntax OFFX x_offset

x_offset integer

number of pixels

Query syntax OFFX?

Query response X offset

Example

OFFX 20

460 Appendix A Command Reference

OFFY image OFFsetY

Class Image editor control

Description Sets the vertical offset used for the large patch in the Regulate test image. It may also

control other images. The OFFY? query returns the current OFFY setting.

Command syntax OFFY y_offset

y_offset integer

number of pixels

Query syntax OFFY?

Query response Y offset

Example

OFFY 20

Video Test Generator User Guide 461

OUTG OUTputs Gate

Class System parameter settings

Description Gates all video and sync outputs of the generator ON and OFF. Gating the outputs OFF

forces all outputs to be turned off. Gating the outputs ON turns on all outputs whose

individual gating settings are turned ON. The OUTG? query returns the current status of

the outputs of the generator.

Command syntax OUTG mode

mode

0 = OFF

1 = ON

Query syntax OUTG?

Query response mode

Example

OUTG 0

ALLU

462 Appendix A Command Reference

OVAL draw an OVAL

Class Custom image primitive

Description Draws an oval whose axes are parallel to the vertical and horizontal axes of displayed

video. The size and position of the oval are defined by its framing rectangle. The framing

rectangle is a rectangle whose sides are both tangent to the oval at four points and are

parallel to the vertical and horizontal axis of video. It is not drawn as part of the primitive.

The figure below shows the relationship of an oval to its framing rectangle.

OVAL uses six parameters. The first is color. The next two are the pixel width and height of

the framing rectangle in pixels. The fourth and fifth parameters are the x, y coordinates for

the top left corner of the framing rectangle. The last parameter is the fill.

Command syntax OVAL color width height x y fill

color

available colors

width

total number of horizontal pixels

height

total number of lines

x, y

positive integer numbers

fill

available fill patterns

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU command

updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.

Example

OVAL red 240 150 20 10 GrayPat0 // Draw a red oval 240 pixels wide

// by 150 pixels high. Start framing

// rectangle at X=20, Y=10.

// Fill = none

width

height

left, top

Video Test Generator User Guide 463

PAGE draw PAGE of repeating characters

Class Custom image primitive

Description Fills a rectangular area (page or block) with a character that repeats horizontally and

vertically. The color parameter sets the color used to draw the character. The width and

height parameters determine the size of the block to be filled. The x and y parameters

determine the top left corner of the block. The font parameter selects which font is used to

draw the character. The character parameter selects a specific character (by number). For

full alphanumeric fonts, the character number is the same as the character's ASCII code

number. The spacing between the characters is fixed by the character block size in the

font and cannot be changed. Partial characters are not drawn to completely fill the

rectangular area; rather, the largest possible block of full characters is centered in the

rectangular area.

Command syntax PAGE color width height x y font character

color

available colors

width

width of page in pixels

height

height of page in lines

position of left edge of page in pixels

position of top edge of page in pixels

font

available fonts

character

min = 0

max = 255

Example

PAGE blue 40 30 10 10 opix9 69

// Draw a small block of blue E characters in the upper left corner

464 Appendix A Command Reference

PCPG Pixel Clock Pulse Gate

Class Format parameter settings

Description Enables and disables the pixel clock pulse output on generators that have a pixel clock

output available. The PCPG? query returns the current setting of PCPG.

Command syntax PCPG mode

mode

0 = OFF

1 = ON

Query syntax PCPG?

Query response mode

Other required

commands FMTU or ALLU

Example

PCPG 1 // Enable pixel clk output in buffer

FMTU // Update hardware with format data

Video Test Generator User Guide 465

PDAU

Pixel Data Analyzer Use

Class Signal analyzer - Pixel data

Description Loads the hardware required and copies the patch (static image) from the DVI source to

memory. This command is used for the Delta Error Patch test.

Command syntax PDAU

Example

PDAU //copies patch from external source to generator memory

Related commands GPEL?

466 Appendix A Command Reference

PDSH

Pixel Data Signal Height

Class Signal analyzer - Pixel data

Description Sets the height of the patch of pixel data to be analyzed.

Note: The maximum area (width multiplied by height) of the patch is 1024 pixels.

Command syntax PDSH height

height

pixel height of patch

Query syntax PDSH?

Query response pixel height of patch

Example

PDSX 128 //sets patch starting at x-pixel 128

PDSY 256 //sets patch starting at y-pixel 256

PDSH 64 //sets patch height at 64 pixels

PDSW 96 //sets patch width at 90 pixels

PDAU //captures patch of image

GPEL? 128 256 //read RGB color components at pixel address 128,256

0,255,0

Related commands PDSW, PDSX, PDSY, PDAU

Video Test Generator User Guide 467

PDSW

Pixel Data Signal Width

Class Signal analyzer - Pixel data

Description Sets the width of the patch of pixel data to be analyzed.

Note: The maximum area (width multiplied by height) of the patch is 1024 pixels.

Command syntax PDSW width

width

pixel width of patch

Query syntax PDSW?

Query response pixel width of patch

Example

PDSX 128 //sets patch starting at x-pixel 128

PDSY 256 //sets patch starting at y-pixel 256

PDSH 64 //sets patch height at 64 pixels

PDSW 96 //sets patch width at 90 pixels

PDAU //captures patch of image

GPEL? 128 256 //read RGB color components at pixel address 128,256

0,255,0

Related commands PDSH, PDSX, PDSY, PDAU

468 Appendix A Command Reference

PDSX

Pixel Data Signal X Location

Class Signal analyzer - Pixel data

Description Controls the x location of the patch data to be analyzed.

Command syntax PDSX x

x-coordinate number for patch

Query syntax PDSX?

Query response x-coordinate number

Example

PDSX 128 //sets patch starting at x-pixel 128

PDSY 256 //sets patch starting at y-pixel 256

PDSH 64 //sets patch height at 64 pixels

PDSW 96 //sets patch width at 90 pixels

PDAU //captures patch of image

GPEL? 128 256 //read RGB color components at pixel address 128,256

0,255,0

Related commands PDSY, PDSW, PDSH, PDAU

Video Test Generator User Guide 469

PDSY

Pixel Data Signal Y Location

Class Signal analyzer - Pixel data

Description Controls the y location of the patch data to be analyzed.

Command syntax PDSY y

y-coordinate number for patch

Query syntax PDSY?

Query response y-coordinate number

Example

PDSX 128 //sets patch starting at x-pixel 128

PDSY 256 //sets patch starting at y-pixel 256

PDSH 64 //sets patch height at 64 pixels

PDSW 96 //sets patch width at 90 pixels

PDAU //captures patch of image

GPEL? 128 256 //read RGB color components at pixel address 128,256

0,255,0

Related commands PDSX, PDSW, PDSH, PDAU

470 Appendix A Command Reference

PELD PixEL Depth

Class Format parameter settings

Description Establishes the number of data bits that represent each active pixel in video memory

(frame buffer). The PELD? query returns the current setting of PELD.

Command syntax PELD depth

depth integer

0 = use generator default

4 = 4 bits-per-pixel (16 colors)

8 = 8 bits-per-pixel (256 colors)

32 = 24 bits-per-pixel (16,777,216 colors)

Query syntax PELD?

Query response depth

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU command

updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.

Example

PELD 8 // Select 8 bits-per pixel

ALLU // Configure hardware and redraw image

Video Test Generator User Guide 471

PENH PEN Height

Class Image editor control

Description Sets a variable used establish line thicknesses to draw EeRise, NAWC, and Slider test

images.

Command syntax PENH height

height integer

Query syntax PENH?

Query response height

Example

PENH 4

472 Appendix A Command Reference

PENW PEN Width

Class Image editor control

Description Sets a variable used to establish line thicknesses to draw EeRise, NAWC and Slider test

images.

Command syntax PENW width

width integer

Query syntax PENW?

Query response width

Example

PENW 4

Video Test Generator User Guide 473

PKUP PacKUP operation related to DMA

Class System Level

Description Prepares files for transmission when using the YMDO archiving command

Command syntax PKUP

474 Appendix A Command Reference

PNAU

Measure Pseudo Noise

Class Signal Analyzer - Pseudo-random noise

Description Loads the hardware required to generate the pseudo noise and measures all the related

required parameters.

Command syntax PNAU

Example

PNSF 0 //Pseudo-random noise signal format set to CURRENT (internal)

PNST 1 //Pseudo-random noise signal type set to QDI-BCM

PNSA 1 //Pseudo-random noise signal advance set to ACTIVE PIXELS

PNSM 0 //Pseudo-random noise signal mode set to AUTO

PNSP 0 //Pseudo-random noise signal procedure set to CONTINUOUS

PNAU //Pseudo-random noise generated

CR //Stop pseudo-random noise

GPER? //Returns the pixel error rate (in errors per billion)

0.88

GNPT? //Returns the number of pixels measured (in billions)

4.255

GCET? //Returns the total number of errors detected on the red, green,

and blue components along with the total number of bad pixels

0,21,0,21

GFED? //Returns data related to any error (first error only)

40018C,FFFFFF

Related commands GPER?, GNPT?, GCET?, GFED?

Video Test Generator User Guide 475

PNGU

Pseudo Noise Generator Use

Class Signal Analyzer - Pseudo-random noise

Description Loads the hardware required to generate pseudo-random noise (per the latest

pseudo-random noise signal settings).

Command syntax PNGU

Example 1

PNSF 1 //Pseudo-random noise signal format set to CURRENT (internal)

PNST 1 //Pseudo-random noise signal type set to QDI-BCM

PNSA 1 //Pseudo-random noise signal advance set to ACTIVE PIXELS

PNSM 0 //Pseudo-random noise signal mode set to AUTO

PNSP 0 //Pseudo-random noise signal procedure set to CONTINUOUS

PNSG 1 //Pseudo-random noise signal gate set to ON

PNGU //Output Pseudo-random noise using latest parameters

Example 2 To stop pseudo-random noise output:

PNSG 0 //Pseudo-random noise signal gate set to OFF

PNGU

Related commands PNSG

476 Appendix A Command Reference

PNSA

Pseudo Noise Signal Advance

Class Signal Analyzer - Pseudo-random noise

Description Controls how often pseudo-random noise pixels are calculated.

Command syntax PSNA value

value

0 = every pixel clock

1 = every active pixel clock

Query syntax PNSA?

Query response 0 or 1

Example

PNSA 1 //Set calculation to pixel every clock

PNGU

Related commands PNGU

Video Test Generator User Guide 477

PNSF

Pseudo Noise Signal Format

Class Signal Analyzer - Pseudo-random noise

Description Selects the source of timing information used by the various pseudo-random noise

parameters.

Command syntax PNSF source

source

0 = CURRENT (timing parameters are based on the internally-generated DVI signal)

1 = MEASURED (timing parameters are based on a measurement of the DVI signal

received at the DVI Input connector from an external signal source)

Query syntax PNSF?

Query response 0 or 1

Example

PNSF 0 // timing parameters are based on internal DVI signal

PNGU

Related commands PNGU

478 Appendix A Command Reference

PNSG

Pseudo Noise Signal Gate

Class Signal Analyzer - Pseudo-random noise

Description Gates on or off the output of pseudo-random noise.

Command syntax PNSG gate

gate

0 = Pseudo-random noise is not output (the selected image is output)

1 = Pseudo-random noise is output (replacing the selected image output)

Query syntax PNSG?

Query response 0 or 1

Example

PNSG 1 //Output pseudo-random noise from the generator

PNGU

Related commands PNGU

Video Test Generator User Guide 479

PNSL

Pseudo Noise Signal Length

Class Signal Analyzer - Pseudo-random noise

Description Sets the run-length value of the pseudo-random noise sequence.

Command syntax PNSL length

length

hexidecimal number

Query syntax PNSL?

Query response run-length value

Example

PNSL 4AFFF //set the pseudo-random noise sequence run-length

PNGU

Related commands PNSS, PNGU

480 Appendix A Command Reference

PNSM

Pseudo Noise Signal Mode

Class Signal Analyzer - Pseudo-random noise

Description Determines how the pseudo-random noise sequence seed and run-length are determined.

Command syntax PNSM mode

mode

0 = Auto mode. The sequence seed and run-length parameters are set automatically.

The seed is automatically set to 0x08000001. Noise values are advanced according to

the current setting of the PNSA parameter. If PNSA is set to 0 (every pixel), the

sequence length is automatically set to the total number of pixels (per frame) minus

one. Alternately, if PNSA is set to 1, noise is advanced every active pixel, and the

length is set to the size of the HRES*VRES active area (per frame) minus one.

1 = Manual mode. The sequence seed and run-length must be manually set using the

PNSL and the PNSS commands.

Query syntax PNSM?

Query response 0 or 1

Example

PNSM 0 //set pseudo-random noise seed and run-length values automatically

PNGU

Related commands PNGU

Video Test Generator User Guide 481

PNSP

Pseudo Noise Signal Procedure

Class Signal Analyzer - Pseudo-random noise

Description Selects the procedure used when making pseudo-random noise measurements.

PNSP procedure

procedure

0 = CONTINUOUS (stop after key press, knob turn, or any I/O). In this mode, noise

testing continues until either a key-press, a knob-turn, or serial/GPIB/host I/O port

activity is detected. To stop the CONTINUOUS mode remotely via the I/O ports, a “\r”

is recommended.

1 = SINGLE SHOT (stop after one run-length). In this mode, a single run-length is

executed before the pseudo-random noise measurement is stopped.

n = MULTI SHOT (stop after n run-length shots). In this mode, a number of run-lengths

(n) are executed before pseudo-random noise measurement is stopped and results

become available.

Query syntax PNSP?

Query response 0 - 2

Example

PNSP 23 // run 23 sequences of the pseudo-random noise measurement

PNGU

Related commands PNGU

482 Appendix A Command Reference

PNSS

Pseudo-Noise Signal Seed

Class Signal Analyzer - Pseudo-random noise

Description Sets the seed value of the pseudo-random noise sequence. A seed value represents a

specific pseudo-random noise sequence.

Command syntax PNSS seed

seed

hexidecimal number

Query syntax PNSS?

Query response seed value

Example

PNSS 8000001 //set pseudo-random noise seed value

PNGU

Related commands PNSL, PNGU

Video Test Generator User Guide 483

PNST

Pseudo Noise Signal Type

Class Signal Analyzer - Pseudo-random noise

Description Selects the pseudo-random noise algorithm to be used.

Command syntax PNST algorithm

algorithm

0 = T & M algorithm (not supported)

1 = QDI-BCM algorithm

Query syntax PNST?

Query response 0 or 1

Example

PNST 1 //set QDI-BCM algorithm for pseudo-random noise

PNGU

Related commands PNGU

484 Appendix A Command Reference

PRAT? Pixel RATe query

Class Format parameter setting - Video resolution

Description Returns the current pixel rate setting.

Query syntax PRAT?

Query response pixel rate

Example

PRAT?

+25.1752E+06

Related commands TMAU

Video Test Generator User Guide 485

PREG PRE-emphasis Gate

Class Format parameter settings

Description Enables and disables adding pre-emphasis to the Open LVDI digital outputs on generators

that support LVDI outputs. The PREG? query returns the current setting of PREG.

Pre-emphasis is used to add compensation for signal loss in long cables.

Command syntax PREG mode

mode

0 = Pre-emphasis OFF

1 = Pre-emphasis ON

Query syntax PREG?

Query response mode

Other required

commands FMTU or ALLU

486 Appendix A Command Reference

PSHD Probe Sync Pulse Horizontal Delay

Class Special Sync Probe Pulse

Description Sets the delay (in pixels) of the line(s) on which the probe pulse occurs on the special sync

output. The PSHD? query returns the current PSHD value.

Command syntax PSHD width

width integer

0=PSVD(HTOT - PSPW-1)

Query syntax PSHD?

Query response width

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings. The ALLU command

updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.

Related commands PSPG, PSPW, PSPP, PSVD, PSPM

Example

PSPG 1 // Enables probe pulse on special sync

PSPP 1 // Sets probe pulse polarity to positive

PSPW 10 // Sets probe pulse width to 10 pixels

PSHD 200 // Sets probe pulse horizontal delay to 200 pixels

PSVD 300 // Sets probe pulse vertical delay to 300 pixels

ALLU // Applies the settings

Video Test Generator User Guide 487

PSPG Probe Sync Pulse Gate

Class Special Sync Probe Pulse

Description Enables and disables the probe pulse on the special sync output. The PSPG? query

returns the current PSPG mode.

Command syntax PSPD mode

mode integer

0 = OFF

1 = ON

Query syntax PSPG?

Query response 0 or 1

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings. The ALLU command

updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.

Related commands PSPP, PSPW, PSHD, PSVD, PSPM

Example

FSPG 0 // Disables frame sync

PSPG 1 // Enables probe pulse on special sync

ALLU // Applies the settings

488 Appendix A Command Reference

PSPM Probe Sync Pulse Mode

Class Special Sync Probe Pulse

Description Determines what lines in the frame or field the probe pulse occurs on the special sync

output. The PSPM? query returns the current PSPM value.

Command syntax PSPM mode

mode integer

0 = once per frame

1 = every active line in frame

3 = every line in frame

Query syntax PSPM?

Query response 0, 1, or 3

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings. The ALLU command

updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.

Related commands PSPG, PSPP, PSPW, PSHD, PSVD

Example

PSPG 1 // Enables probe pulse on special sync

PSPP 1 // Sets probe pulse polarity to positive

PSPW 10 // Sets probe pulse width to 10 pixels

PSHD 200 // Sets probe pulse horizontal delay to 200 pixels

PSVD 300 // Sets probe pulse vertical delay to 300 pixels

PSPM 1 // Sets probe pulse to occur on each active line in a frame

ALLU // Applies the settings

Video Test Generator User Guide 489

PSPP Probe Sync Pulse Polarity

Class Special Sync Probe Pulse

Description Sets the polarity of the probe pulse on the special sync output. The PSPG? query returns

the current PSPP value.

Command syntax PSPP polarity

polarity integer

0 = negative

1 = positive

Query syntax PSPP?

Query response 0 or 1

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings. The ALLU command

updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.

Related commands PSPG, PSPW, PSHD, PSVD, PSPM

Example

PSPG 1 // Enables probe pulse on special sync

PSPP 1 // Sets probe pulse polarity to positive

ALLU // Applies the settings

490 Appendix A Command Reference

PSPW Probe Sync Pulse Width

Class Special Sync Probe Pulse

Description Sets the width in pixels of the probe pulse on the special sync output. The PSPW? query

returns the current PSPW value.

Command syntax PSPW width

width integer

1 pixel to (HTOT - 1))

Query syntax PSPW?

Query response width

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings. The ALLU command

updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.

Related commands PSPG, PSPP, PSHD, PSVD, PSPM

Example

PSPG 1 // Enables probe pulse on special sync

PSPP 1 // Sets probe pulse polarity to positive

PSPW 100 // Sets probe pulse width to 100 pixels

ALLU // Applies the settings

Video Test Generator User Guide 491

PSVD Probe Sync Pulse Vertical Delay

Class Special Sync Probe Pulse

Description Sets the line in the frame or field that the probe pulse occurs on the special sync output.

The PSVD? query returns the current PSVD value.

Command syntax PSVD line

line integer

0 = PSVD(VTOT-1)

Query syntax PSVD?

Query response line

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new settings. The ALLU command

updates the hardware to the new settings and redraws the test image.

Related commands PSPG, PSPW, PSPP, PSHD, PSPM

Example

PSPG 1 // Enables probe pulse on special sync

PSPP 1 // Sets probe pulse polarity to positive

PSPW 10 // Sets probe pulse width to 10 pixels

PSVD 300 // Sets probe pulse vertical delay to 300 pixels

ALLU // Applies the settings

492 Appendix A Command Reference

PUTA PUT Absolute

Class Direct processor control

Description Writes the specified value value into memory at the specified address address. The two

parameters address and value are interpreted according to the current setting of BASE

(see the BASE command). The number and format of the bits written depend on the

current setting of SIZE (see the SIZE command).

Note: This command is used only with custom applications and command files created by

Quantum Data. Indiscriminate use of this command can cause the generator to stop

operating and the loss of stored data in non-volatile RAM.

Command syntax PUTA address value

address

0 to 4,294,967,295 unsigned decimal (BASE = 10)

-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 (BASE = -10)

0 to FFFFFFFF (BASE = 16)

-80000000 to 7FFFFFFF (BASE = -16)

value

0 to 2^(SIZE)-1

Other required

commands PUTA expects parameters formatted according to the current radix set by the BASE

command.

Video Test Generator User Guide 493

PUTR PUT Relative

Class Direct processor control

Description Writes the specified value value into the location pointed to by the address register (see

the ADDR command). The parameter value is interpreted according to the current setting

of BASE (see the BASE command). The number and format of the bits written depend on

the current setting of SIZE (see the SIZE command). The address register is automatically

incremented by SIZE bits after the current location has been written to.

Note: This command is used only with custom applications and command files created by

Quantum Data. Indiscriminate use of this command can cause the generator to stop

operating and the loss of stored data in non-volatile RAM.

Command syntax PUTR value

value

0 to (2^(SIZE))-1

Other required

commands PUTR expects parameters formatted according to the current radix set by the BASE

command.

494 Appendix A Command Reference

PXAR? Pixel Aspect Ratio Query

Class Format parameter setting - HDMI active video

Description Reads the aspect ratio of pixels in active regions of the raster image.

Query syntax PXAR?

Query response aspect ratio

Related commands NCPP

Example

PXAR?

+1.00000E+00

Video Test Generator User Guide 495

RATC pixel RATe Calibration factor

Class System parameter settings

Description Sets an internal multiplication factor used in setting the pixel clock frequency. The

multiplication factor can be set to compensate for the frequency error of the internal

reference crystal. Having to use a factor outside of the typical range may indicate a failure

of generator's hardware. Reinitializing the generator's memory sets the calibration factor

to a factory-default setting of 1.00000.

Note: The RATC parameter is a system level parameter that will affect the pixel clock

frequency of all formats that are recalled. The RATC value will be retained when the

generator is powered down and back up again. Query the current setting of RATC if you

are experiencing problems with the pixel clock or scan rate being off in frequency.

Command syntax RATC factor

factor

floating point number equal to calibration factor

typical min = 0.99990

typical max = 1.00010

Query syntax RATC?

Query response factor

Example

RATC 1.00007 // Increases pix clk by factor of 1.00007

496 Appendix A Command Reference

RCTL

Reset masked ConTroL bits

Class Format parameter setting - Digital video signal

Description Resets the masked control bits for the Broadcom or Silicon Image chip to low. The bits to

be reset are (one byte mapped as follows):

CTL13 CTL12 CTL11 CTL10 CTL03 CTL02 CTL01 CTL00

To reset a specific control bit, the mask must account for the current setting of the

remaining bits. See example below.

Note: CTL03 is not part of this resetting. It controls the HDCP.

Command syntax RCTL mask

mask

hexidecimal

Example

SCTL 23 // sets CTL00, CTL01, CTL11 to high

RCTL 22 // resets CTL00 bit to low (0)

Related commands SCTL

Video Test Generator User Guide 497

RECT draw a RECTangle

Class Custom image primitive

Description Draws a rectangle whose sides are parallel to the vertical and horizontal axes of displayed

video. It uses six parameters. The first is the color of the line. The next two parameters are

the pixel width and height of the rectangle. The fourth and fifth parameters are the x and y

coordinates for the top left corner of the rectangle. The last parameter is the fill.

Command syntax RECT color width height x y fill

color

available colors

width

total number of horizontal pixels

height

total number of lines

x, y

positive integer numbers

fill

available fill patterns

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU command

updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.

Example

RECT gray50 15 20 50 40 GrayPat50

// Draw a 50% gray rectangle 15 pixels wide and 20 pixels high

// with top left corner at X=50, Y=40 Fill with 50% active pixels

ALLU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

498 Appendix A Command Reference

REDG RED Gate

Class Video Gate

Description Toggles the red video signal gate.

Command syntax REDG mode

mode

0 = disable

1 = enable

Query syntax REDG?

Query response 0 or 1

Other required

commands ALLU to invoke the command.

Related commands BLUG, GRNG

Example

REDG 0; ALLU // disable red video component

Video Test Generator User Guide 499

RFLD Repeat FieLD

Class Format parameter setting - Video resolution

Description Determines if identical video information is output for each field of an interlaced (SCAN =

2) format. The RFLD? query returns the current setting of RFLD.

Command syntax RFLD mode

mode

0 = disabled

1 = enabled

Query syntax RFLD?

Query response 0 or 1

Other required

commands FMTU or ALLU

Example

SCAN 2 // Set Interlaced scanning

RFLD 1 // Enable repeat field buffer

FMTU // Update hardware with format data

500 Appendix A Command Reference

RGBQ?

RGB lut Query

Class LUT Management

Description Returns the current lookup table buffer contents when a lookup table editing session is

active (between LUTB and LUTE) and returns the actual lookup table values in the

hardware LUT when a lookup table editing session is not active (between LUTE and

LUTB).

Query syntax RGBQ? first_slot slots_returned

first_slot

first slot number

slots_returned

number of slots to be returned

Query response slot_number red_level green_level blue_level crlf

Example

LUTB;RGBQ? 0 16

Video Test Generator User Guide 501

RGBW

RGB Write

Class LUT Management

Description Writes RGB levels to the slot location specified within the current lookup table buffer when

a lookup table editing session is active, and writes the levels directly to the LUT hardware

when a lookup table editing session is not active.

Command syntax RGBW slot red_level green_level blue_level

slot integer

0 to 15 when PELD = 4

0 to 255 when PELD = 8

red_level, green_level, blue_level integer

min = 0

max = LMAX setting (255 nominal)

Related commands RGBQ?

Example

LUTE;RGBW 1 255 128 0 // Set slot 1 to an orange color

502 Appendix A Command Reference

RMAP Render MAP

Class Bitmap image control

Description Renders a map (icon) at the user-specified coordinates.

Command syntax RMAP x y map

x, y

starting coordinates, positive integer number

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU command

updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.

Example

RMAP 20 5 MyMap // Renders MyMap at X=20, Y=5

ALLU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

Video Test Generator User Guide 503

ROWI

ROW Insert

Class Bitmap editor function

Description Inserts a row of pixel data into the bitmap that is being edited. The existing pixel data in the

selected row and higher number rows are bumped up one row to make room for the new

pixel data.

Command syntax ROWI row hexstring

row integer

min =

max =

hexstring

hexadecimal number

Other required

commands A bitmap editing session must have been opened with a MAPB command.

Example

ROWI 1 FFDE54F // insert new row 1

504 Appendix A Command Reference

ROWQ?

bitmap row Query pointer

Class Bitmap editor function

Description Returns the pixel data for the given row for the current contents of the bitmap editor buffer.

Query syntax ROWQ? row max

row

positive integer number

max

positive integer number

Query response Hexstring of one or more characters consisting of 0-9 and A-F.

Other required

commands A bitmap editing session must have been opened with a MAPB command.

Example

ROWQ? 1 // Returns pixel data for row 1

Video Test Generator User Guide 505

ROWY ROW Yank

Class Bitmap editor function

Description Deletes a row of pixel data in the bitmap that is being edited. The pixel data in the higher

number rows are bumped down one row to fill in the gap.

Command syntax ROWY row

row

positive integer

Other required

commands A bitmap editing session must have been opened with a MAPB command

Example

ROWY 2 // Delete the pixel data for row 2

506 Appendix A Command Reference

SAMP Digital Audio Sinewave Amplitude

Class Sonic data generator

Description Sets the amplitude in decibels of the audio stream sinewave output by the generator.

Command syntax SAMP amplitude (sets all channels)

amplitude

-96.3 to 0 (if NBPA is 16-bits)

-120.4 to 0.0 (if NBPA is 20-bits)

-144.5 to 0.0 (if NBPA is 24-bits)

Query syntax SAMP?

Query response amplitude

Example

SAMP -60.0 // Sets all channels to -60 amplitude

FMTU

Related commands SRAT, SMIN?, SMAX?

Video Test Generator User Guide 507

SCAL Self CALibrate

Class System calibration setting

Description Causes a generator equipped with self-calibration circuitry to go through its self-calibration

cycle.

Command syntax SCAL

508 Appendix A Command Reference

SCAN SCAN fields per frame

Class Format parameter setting - Video resolution

Description Establishes the number of fields scanned per frame. Set to 1 for progressive

(non-interlaced) scan and 2 for interlaced scan. The SCAN? query returns the current

setting of SCAN.

Command syntax SCAN fields

fields

1 = progressive (non-interlaced)

2 = interlaced

Query syntax SCAN?

Query response fields

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU command

updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.

Example

SCAN // Select interlace in buffer

FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

Video Test Generator User Guide 509

SCTL Set masked ConTroL bits

Class DVI TMDS

Description Sets the masked control bits for the Broadcom or Silicon Image DVI transmitter chip. The

bits to be set are (one byte mapped as follows):

CTL13 CTL12 CTL11 CTL10 CTL03 CTL02 CTL01 CTL00

Note: CTL03 is not part of this setting. It controls the HDCP.

Command syntax RCTL mask

mask

hexidecimal

Example

SCTL 23 // the 23 in hex sets the CTL00, CTL01 and CTL11 to 1's

Related commands RCTL

510 Appendix A Command Reference

SDIR

Sort DIRectory

Class Directory editor control

Description Sorts the names in a directory by alphabetical order.

Command syntax SDIR

Other required

commands Directory editing session must have been opened with a DIRB command.

Video Test Generator User Guide 511

SDLY Sequence step DeLaY

Class Sequence editor control

Description Sets how long a sequence step will pause before advancing to the next step in the auto

run mode. A sequence step will use the last value set by the SDLY command. The SDLY?

query returns the current setting of SDLY.

Command syntax SDLY delay | -frames

delay

Delay time in seconds as a floating point number.

frames

Delay in frames. Type minus (-) character before integer.

min = 0.0 seconds; -1 frame

max = 1.70E38 seconds (infinite)

Query syntax SDLY?

Query response delay

Other required

commands SMOD setting must be equal to 3 in order for the SDLY setting to have any affect on

sequence operation.

Example

SDLY 5.0 // Set delay to five seconds per step

SDLY -3 // Set delay to three frames per step

512 Appendix A Command Reference

SDMG Sonic Data Mixer Gate

Class Sonic data generator

Description Configures the generator to use either an internal or external audio source.

Note: Setting the mask “external” bit to 1 causes the SPDIF audio signal to be passed

through the generator. In this case, the Audio InfoFrame CT, CC, SF, and SS parameters

are set to 0, indicating that the stream header should be used to determine audio coding

type, channel type, sampling frequency, and sample size, respectively. If both “external”

and “sdg” bits are set to 1 simultaneously, then an error is generated as the generator’s

sonic data mixer does not currently support proportional mixing of internal and external

sources.

Important: Restarting the generator does not change this setting.

Command syntax SDMG mask

mask

1 = sdg (internal)

2 = external

Example

SDMG 1

FMTU

Video Test Generator User Guide 513

SEOS Set End Of String

Class GPIB port control

Description Controls how a generator reads strings, when reading multi-line responses. In GPIB

communication both the sender and receiver first have to agree on end-of-string parsing.

The SEOS command enables users to determine if the generator should use line feed for

end-of-string parsing.

Command syntax SEOS integer

integer

0 = Configures the generator to not test end-of-strings, and to send EOI only on the

last character of the entire response. Use this option to receive an entire multi-line

response in a single read operation. Leave the VISA “Enable Termination Character”

option set to FALSE.

1 = Use end-of-string testing (default).

Query syntax SEOS?

514 Appendix A Command Reference

SEQA SEQuence save As

Class Sequence memory management

Description Saves the current contents of the sequence edit buffer using the given name.

Command syntax SEQA name

name

A valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)

Example

SEQA MY_SEQ // Save with the name "MY_SEQ"

Video Test Generator User Guide 515

SEQB SEQuence editing Begin

Class Sequence editor control

Description Marks the beginning of a sequence editing session.

Command syntax SEQB

Other required

commands Use either a SEQL command to load an existing sequence or a SEQN command to create

a new sequence. Use SEQE when ending the editing session.

Example

SEQN // Initialize sequence edit buffer

SEQB // Start sequence editing session

// One or more sequence editing commands ...

SEQE // End sequence editing session

516 Appendix A Command Reference

SEQE SEQuence editing End

Class Sequence editor control

Description Marks the end of a sequence editing session.

Command syntax SEQE

Other required

commands Use SEQB when starting the editing session. Use SEQA or SEQS to save changes.

Example

EQB // Start sequence editing session

// One or more sequence editing commands ...

SEQE // End sequence editing session

SEQA MYSEQ_02 // Save edited sequence as "MYSEQ_02"

Video Test Generator User Guide 517

SEQK SEQuence Kill

Class Sequence memory management

Description Deletes a sequence by name. The query returns a 1 if the named sequence can be

deleted. If sequence is read-only or non-existent, the query returns a 0.

Command syntax SEQK name

name

a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)

Query syntax SEQK? name

name

a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)

Query response 0 or 1

Example

SEQK MY_SEQ // Delete seq called "MY_SEQ"

518 Appendix A Command Reference

SEQL SEQuence Load

Class Sequence memory management

Description Copies the sequence having a name equal to name from sequence memory into the

sequence edit buffer. The query returns a 1 if the named sequence can be loaded;

otherwise, a 0 is returned.

Command syntax SEQL name

name

a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)

Query syntax SEQL? name

name

a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)

Query response 0 or 1

Other required

commands An SEQU command must be executed after the SEQL command to start running the

sequence.

Example

SEQL MY_SEQ // Load "MY_SEQ" dir in edit buffer

SEQU // Start running the sequence in the buffer

Video Test Generator User Guide 519

SEQN SEQuence New

Class Sequence editor control

Description Initializes the sequence edit buffer. The name name is assigned as the sequence's name.

The query will return the name that has been assigned as the sequence's name.

Command syntax SEQN name

name

optional valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)

Query syntax SEQN?

Query response name

Example

SEQN // Init edit buffer without assigning a new name

SEQN MY_SEQ // Init edit buffer with name of "MY_SEQ"

520 Appendix A Command Reference

SEQP SEQuence Path

Class Sequence memory management

Description Sets the current sequence path name to a given directory. The query will return the current

path name.

Command syntax SEQP name

name

a valid MS-DOS filename (8 characters minus any extension)

Query syntax SEQP?

Query response Current sequence path name.

Example

SEQP BURN // Sequences in BURN directory will be listed

Video Test Generator User Guide 521

SEQQ? SEQuence Query pointer

Class Sequence memory management

Description Returns number sequence names from the list of all the sequence names stored in

sequence memory beginning at index. The directories are kept in alphanumeric order. The

generator maintains internal variables for the current index and number values. The value

of index is automatically incremented by number after the query is executed. Sending the

query with just an index parameter, will return the same number of names as the last time,

starting at the given index. Sending the query with no parameters will return the next set of

names in the directory buffer.

Query syntax SEQQ? index number

index

positive integer number

number

positive integer number

Query response List of specified sequence names.

Example 1

SEQQ? 1 9999 // List the names of all sequences stored in memory

Example 2

SEQQ? 1 10 // List names of the first ten sequences stored in memory

SEQQ? 21 // List names of the 21st through the 30th sequences

SEQQ? // List names of the 31st through the 40th sequences

522 Appendix A Command Reference

SEQR

SEQuence Read

Class Sequence memory management

Description Reads a sequence from the sequence memory location into the sequence buffer. The

SEQR command does not run the sequence. The SEQR? query returns the name of the

sequence stored in location location or returns the string EMPTY if the sequence memory

location location is empty.

Command syntax SEQR location

location integer

Query syntax SEQR? location

Query response name

Other required

commands The SEQU command runs the sequence in the buffer.

Example

SEQR 5 // Load sequence from RAM location 5

ALLU // Start using the sequence

Video Test Generator User Guide 523

SEQS SEQuence Save

Class Sequence memory management

Description Saves the current contents of the generator's sequence edit buffer back to the memory

location from which they were originally read.

Command syntax SEQS

524 Appendix A Command Reference

SEQU SEQuence Use

Class Sequence memory management

Description Runs the sequence currently stored in the sequence edit buffer. The SEQU? query returns

the sequence name currently set in the sequence edit buffer.

Command syntax SEQU

Query syntax SEQU?

Query response name

Other required

commands The sequence in the edit buffer must have a non-zero SMOD setting to run.

Example

SEQL MY_SEQ // Load "MY_SEQ" dir in edit buffer

SEQU // Start running the sequence in the buffer

Video Test Generator User Guide 525

SIZE SIZE of bit field

Class Direct processor control

Description Sets the field size (in base 10) used in connection with the GETA, GETR, PUTA, and

PUTR commands. If a negative size is specified, then values given (or returned) are sign

extended to 32 bits. For example, if SIZE = -16 and a 16 bit field containing FFFF hex is

fetched, then the value FFFFFFFF hex is returned. The SIZE? query returns the current

setting of SIZE in base 10. SIZE is preset to 16 each time the generator is powered on.

Note: This command is used only with custom applications and command files created by

Quantum Data.

Command syntax SIZE size

size

-32 to -1 or 1 to 32 bits

Query syntax SIZE?

Query response size

526 Appendix A Command Reference

SLUT

Set Look-Up Table

Class LUT Management

Description Sets up the color look-up-table (LUT) for rendering and displaying selected colors from

defined sets. This command is made available for testing low-level drawing firmware and

is not intended for use by end users.

Command syntax SLUT colorset

colorset integer

Bit mask indicating desired color sets

Example

SLUT 65536 // Setup for HUERGB colorset.

Video Test Generator User Guide 527

SMAX? Digital Audio Sinewave Maximum

Class Sonic data generator

Description Returns the maximum amplitude of the digital audio sinewave output from the generator.

Query syntax SMAX?

Query response maximum amplitude (0 - 65,535)

Related commands SRAT, SAMP, SMIN?

528 Appendix A Command Reference

SMIN? Digital Audio Sinewave Minimum

Class Sonic data generator

Description Returns the minimum amplitude of the digital audio sinewave output from the generator.

Query syntax SMIN?

Query response minimum amplitude (0 - 65,535)

Related commands SRAT, SAMP, SMAX?

Video Test Generator User Guide 529

SMOD Sequence operating MODe

Class Sequence editor control

Description Sets the sequence mode. The SMOD? query returns the current setting of SMOD.

Command syntax SMOD mode

mode

0 = disable

1 = enable manual step mode that stops at last step

2 = enable manual step mode that wraps to first step after last step

3 = enable continuous auto stepping

Query syntax SMOD?

Query response mode

Other required

commands The SEQL command loads the sequence and SEQU starts to run it.

Example

SEQL MY_SEQ // Load "MY_SEQ" in edit buffer

SEQU // Start running the sequence in the buffer

SMOD 3 // Set the sequence mode

530 Appendix A Command Reference

SNUM draw sequence Step NUMber

Class Custom image primitive

Description Displays the sequence step number to an image when drawn as part of a test sequence.

The number, along with the word “Step,” appears in a small box. The SNUM command

uses three parameters. The first is the color used for the text and box border. The next two

parameters are the x and y coordinates for the position of the box.

Command syntax SNUM color x y

color

available colors

x, y

positive integer numbers

Other required

commands The displaying of sequence step numbers must be enabled with the DNUM command,

and the custom image must have been loaded as part of a sequence in order for this

primitive to be drawn.

Example

SNUM white 50 50 // Display seq. num. in box with top left corner at

// X=50, Y=50

Video Test Generator User Guide 531

SPAX slider image SPAcing X

Class Image editor control

Description Sets the horizontal spacing of certain elements in some built-in test images. The SPAX?

query returns the current SPAX setting.

Command syntax SPAX x_spacing

x_spacing integer

number of pixels

Query syntax SPAX?

Query response x_spacing

Example

SPAX 20

532 Appendix A Command Reference

SPAY slider image SPAcing Y

Class Image editor control

Description Sets the vertical spacing of certain elements in some built-in test images. The SPAY?

query returns the current SPAY setting.

Command syntax SPAY y_spacing

y_spacing integer

number of pixels

Query syntax SPAY?

Query response y_spacing

Example

SPAY 20

Video Test Generator User Guide 533

SRAT Digital Audio Sinewave Rate

Class Sonic data generator

Description Sets the frequency of the audio sinewave from the generator.

Command syntax SRAT rate

rate

20.0 to 20.0E3 (Hz)

Query syntax SRAT?

Query response rate

Example

SRAT 10.0E3

FMTU

Related commands SAMP, SMAX?, SMIN?

534 Appendix A Command Reference

SROP Set/Reset OPeration

Class

Description Sets or resets one or multiple power-on special modes (see GenOps image).

Command syntax SROP set_mask reset_mask

set_mask

Value to set.

reset_mask

Value to reset. Use this parameter to establish all bits with one command, or to

individually set, or reset bits without changing others.

The mask value is constructed as follows:

Mask value Description

1 Old format names. Enabling or disabling this mode with re-ini-

tialize the generator.

2 Digital friendly

4 Analog friendly

8 Display status on LCD

16 Reset HDCP Rx (Silicon Image friendly mode)

32 Calibrate

64 Clone

128 Key pad

256 Sony baud rate 9600

512 Programmable key pad

1024 Program mode

2048 Digital YCbCr mode

4096 DCS Priority mode

8192 HDCP Test mode

16384 Use hot-plug special format mode

32768 DVI mode (disables HDMI mode)

65536 Bypass “hot-plug” format special mode (for DVI and HDMI out-

puts).

Video Test Generator User Guide 535

Query syntax SROP?

Query response Returns current SROP mode. If multiple special modes are enabled, the SROP? value is

the sum of the mask values for the enabled modes.

Example 1

R:\SROP 8

R:\SROP 2

R:\SROP?

Example 2

SROP 2 // set digital friendly mode

SROP 4 // set analog mode

Example 3 For generators with HDMI option:

SROP 32768 // Enable DVI mode (disable HDMI mode)

SROP 0 32768 // Enable HDMI mode

536 Appendix A Command Reference

SSST Select Sync Signal Type

Class Format parameter setting - Synchronization

Description Selects the type of sync signal used to synchronize the display. In general, any one of

three different types of sync can be selected to synchronize the display. The availability of

different sync types is specified using the ASCT, DSCT, and DSST commands. Some

displays may not accept one (or more) types of sync. For example, a digital video monitor

cannot accept analog composite sync because analog signal transmission is not used.

Also, a PGA display cannot accept digital separate HS and VS because only one sync

wire is provided in the cabling. In these cases, one (or more) of the sync types (ASCT,

DSCT, or DSST) is set to 0, indicating that they are not supported. If a non-supported sync

type is selected using the SSST command, then the corresponding sync outputs of the

generator will remain disabled. The SSST? query returns the type of sync (if any) that is

currently selected.

Command syntax SSST type

type

0 = no sync

1 = digital separate horizontal and vertical sync ( DHS & DVS )

2 = digital separate composite sync ( DCS )

3 = analog composite sync ( ACS )

4 = analog composite sync ( ACS )

5 = DSS and ACS

6 = DCS and ACS

7 = DSS, DCS, and ACS

8 = DPMS-OFF (DSS)

9 = DPMS-SUSPEND (DSS)

10 = DPMS-STANDBY (DSS)

11 = DCS & DSS

Query syntax SSST?

Query response type

Video Test Generator User Guide 537

Other required

commands The desired sync type selected must not be set to void with the ASCT, DSCT, or DSST

commands. To actually output the selected sync signal, it must be gated on with the

appropriate ASSG, ASBG, ASGG, ASRG, CSPG, HSPG, and VSPG settings.

Example

DSST 1 // Set Amer. H&V in buffer

HSPG 1 // Enable H sync in buffer

VSPG 1 // Enable V sync in buffer

SSST 1 // Select sep H&V sync in buffer

FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

538 Appendix A Command Reference

STRG

STRetchinG SCL Low Signal

Class EDID and DDC control

Description Enables a stretching capability for the receiver of the HDMI analyzer. Each time a host

accesses the I2C receiver bus (for example, to read the EDID), the receiver stretches the

SCL low signal for 5 ms.

Enable stretching for testing purposes only.

Command syntax STRG value

value

0 = deactivate stretching

1 = activate stretching of SCL low signal for 5 ms

Query syntax STRG?

Query response 0 or 1

Example

STRG 1

DIDU

Related commands DIDU

Video Test Generator User Guide 539

STEP sequence STEP number

Class Sequence editor control

Description Selects a step in the sequence edit buffer. It is context sensitive. While editing a sequence

(between SEQB and SEQE commands), the STEP command selects a step to be edited.

Outside of the sequence editor and while running a sequence, the command selects a

step to be executed.

The STEP? query returns the current setting of STEP.

Command syntax STEP step

step

min = 1

max = See description

Query syntax STEP?

Query response step

Other required

commands When running a sequence, the SEQU command must be executed after the STEP

command to load the format and display the image selected in the step.

Example

STEP 5 // Select fifth step in current sequence

SEQU // Load format and draw image in current step

540 Appendix A Command Reference

SVSG Single Video Signal Gating

Class Video Gate

Description Determines which output colors are enabled. The SVSG? query returns the current SVSG

setting.

Command syntax SVSG gate_mask

gate_mask

Query syntax SVSG?

Query response gate_mask

Example

SVSG 7

Gate Mask Red Green Blue

0 Off Off Off

1 Off Off On

2 OffOnOff

3 OffOnOn

4 On Off Off

5 On Off On

6 On On Off

7 On On On

Video Test Generator User Guide 541

SXAR Signal Aspect Ratio

Class Format parameter setting - HDMI active video

Description Sets the natural aspect ratio of the video signal format (or “coded frame”) that transports

images to the display.

Command syntax SXAR aspect_ratio

aspect_ratio

0.75 to ˜2.39

Note: For a listing of established aspect ratios, see the table on page 262 (CXAR

command).

Related commands CXAR, EXAR

Example

SXAR 1.33 // Sets 4:3 video signal aspect ratio for source content

FMTU

542 Appendix A Command Reference

SXCX Signal-From-Content Aperture Map

Class Format parameter setting - HDMI active video

Description Sets the proper parameters to values necessary to fit CXAR-shaped image content to the

SXAR-shaped aperture of the signal interface timing format.

Upon executing this command, the following actions are performed:

1. The EXAR value is set to the CXAR value (EXAR=CXAR).

2. The EXCX value is set to 0 (EXCX=0).

3. The SXEX value is set to value entered for this command (SXEX=SXCX).

Command syntax SXCX code

code

0 to 131071 (in decimal)

Note: For help in determining the proper mapping code, follow the procedure on page 318

(EXCX command).

Related commands SXEX, EXAR, EXCX, CXAR, SXCX, SXAR

Example

SXCX 264 //Use centered shrink w/black bars top & bottom

FMTU

Video Test Generator User Guide 543

SXEX Signal-From-Extended Aperture Map

Class Format parameter setting - HDMI active video

Description Maps EXAR-shaped image content into the SXAR-shaped signal interface.

Command syntax SXEX code

code

0 to 131071 (in decimal)

The mapping code is made up of three binary field codes as follows:

• Bits 0-2 are the Squeeze/Stretch (“S”) field code

• Bits 3-9 are the Letterbox/Pillar (“L”) field code

• Bits 10-16 are the Safe Area (“K”) field code

Note: For help in determining the proper mapping code, follow the procedure on page 318

(EXCX command).

Related commands EXAR, SXAR, EXCX, SXCX

Example

SXEX 264 //Use centered shrink w/black bars top & bottom

FMTU

544 Appendix A Command Reference

TBOX draw information Text BOX

Class Custom Image Primitive

Description Renders an information text box that can be added to custom images. This command

allows color, position, information, and box type to be customized.

Command syntax TBOX color %x %y info type

color

valid color name

0.0 to 1.0 normalized positioning of box center in the x direction

0.0 to 1.0 normalized positioning of box center in the y direction

info

0 = format, image, line-rate, and frame-rate (default =

1 = format

2 = image

3 = sequence

4 = step number

5 = format and image

6 = sequence and step

7 = line-rate and HRES X VRES

8 = pixel-rate and HRES X VRES

9 = format, image, sequence, and step

10 = format, image, HRES X VRES, and pixel rate

11 = line-rate, frame-rate, sequence, and step

12 = pixel-rate, HRES X VRES, sequence, and step

13 = line-rate, frame-rate, pixel-rate, and HRES X VRES

14 = format, image, line-rate, frame-rate, sequence, and step

15 = format, image, HRES X VRES, pixel-rate, sequence and step

Video Test Generator User Guide 545

type

0 = text only

1 = text w/ border

2 = text w/ black background

3 = text w/ border and black background

Query syntax TBOX?

Query response color %x %y info type

Other required

commands TBXG

Example

TBOX white 0.5 0.5 8 3

546 Appendix A Command Reference

TBXG Text BoX Gating

Class

Description Enables and disables the displaying of the text box defined by the TBOX command. The

TBXG? query returns the current TBXG mode.

Command syntax TBXG mode

mode integer

0 = OFF

1 = ON

Query syntax TBXG?

Query response mode

Other required

commands TBOX

Example

TBXG 1

Video Test Generator User Guide 547

TEXT draw TEXT string

Class Custom image primitive

Description Draws a user-defined text string. It uses five parameters. The first is color. The next two

are the x and y coordinates for the upper left corner of the starting position of the string.

The fourth parameter selects the font. The last parameter is the text string. If the string is

longer than one word, it must be contained inside quotation marks.

All of the characters in the text string must have matching characters in the font selected

by font name.

Command syntax Text color x y font "text "

color

available colors

x, y

coordinates of top left corner of page in pixels

font

available fonts

text

approximately 30 characters (must be enclosed by quotes)

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU command

updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.

Example

TEXT red 50 40 opix9 "HELLO WORLD"

// Draw red "HELLO WORLD" at x=50 y=40 in opix9 font

548 Appendix A Command Reference

TMAU

Timing Measurement Analyzer Use

Class DVI signal analyzer

Description Initiates a measurement of the timing received from an external DVI source (via the DVI

Input connector). To do this, the PNSF command must be set to MEASURED. Measured

parameters are written into the format buffer.

Note: If PNSF is set to CURRENT, then the TMAU command leaves the parameters of the

currently selected format in the format buffer.

The timing parameters can be read back via queries using the following commands

Command syntax TMAU

SCAN? Returns the scan type

PRAT? Returns the pixel rate (in Hz)

FRAT? Returns the frame rate (in Hz)

VRAT? Returns the vertical (field) rate (VRAT = FRAT * SCAN)

HTOT? Returns the horizontal total (in pixels)

HRES? Returns the horizontal active (in pixels)

HSPD? Returns the horizontal sync pulse delay (in pixels)

HSPW? Returns the horizontal sync pulse width (in pixels)

HSPP? Returns the horizontal sync pulse polarity

VTOT? Returns the vertical total (in lines)

VRES? Returns the vertical active (in lines)

VSPD? Returns the vertical sync pulse delay (in lines)

VSPW? Returns the vertical sync pulse width (in lines)

VSPP? Returns the vertical sync pulse polarity

HVPD? Returns the pixel delay between the H and V sync pulses.

Video Test Generator User Guide 549

Example

PNSF 1 //Pseudo-random noise signal format set to MEASURED

PNST 1 //Pseudo-random noise signal type set to QDI-BCM

TMAU //Measure external signal’s timing format parameters

HTOT? //Read external signal’s total number of horizontal pixels

800

HRES? //Read external signal’s total number of active horizotan pixels

640

550 Appendix A Command Reference

TOBL set levels relative TO BLanking

Class Custom image primitive

Description Temporarily changes how the signal levels are determined for a given color intensity level.

The default method uses black as the 0% reference level and peak video as the 100%

level. Inserting TOBL moves the 0% reference point to the blanking (blacker than black)

pedestal level. The reference point remains shifted only for as long as the image is

displayed.

Command syntax TOBL

Video Test Generator User Guide 551

TRIA draw a TRIAngle

Class Custom image primitive

Description Draws a triangle defined by its three end points. The primitive uses eight parameters. The

first is line color. The next three pairs of parameters are the x and y coordinates for the

three points. The last parameter is the fill. More complex filled polygons can be built up

using a series of joined filled triangles.

Command syntax TRIA color x1 y1 x2 y2 x3 y3 fill

color

available colors

x1, y1, x2, y2, x3, y3

positive integer number

fill

available fill pattern

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU command

updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.

Example

TRIA red50 10 5 10 25 40 15 GrayPat50

// Draw a red50 triangle at x=10,

// y=5; x=10, y=25; x=40, y=15 with

// 50% active pixel fill

ALLU // Update hardware to current

// buffer contents

552 Appendix A Command Reference

TTLL

Class:

Description Sets the output voltage of the TTL interface on the 802R-PCI generator. The query reads

the current value.

Command syntax TTLL voltage

voltage

3.3

5.0

Query syntax TTLL?

Example

TTLL 5.0 // sets the output voltage to 5V on the TTL interface

Video Test Generator User Guide 553

UIDN User IDeNtification

Class System parameter settings

Description Sets up the text string that is placed in the upper portions of the SMPTE133 and Cubes

images. The command can be used to add a company name or other identification to the

images. The command will not change the text in a currently displayed image; it must be

redrawn to use the new text. The factory default string is “Quantum Data.” The UIDN?

query returns the current text string.

Command syntax UIDN string

string

text string 80 characters in length

Query syntax UIDN?

Query response string

Other required

commands The IMGU command redraws the last selected test image. The ALLU command updates

hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.

Example

UIDN "XYZ Monitor Mfg." // Change text string

IMGL SMPTE133 // Select image that uses the text string

IMGU // Draw the image using new string

554 Appendix A Command Reference

UNPK UnPacK operation related to DMA

Class

Description Unpacks archived data received by the YMDI command and puts it in the proper memory

locations

Command syntax UNPK

Video Test Generator User Guide 555

USIZ Unit of measure used for physical SIZes

Class System control

Description Sets the units of measure assumed by HSIZ and VSIZ commands to establish the

physical size of the image that appears on the CRT (context sensitive; see FMTB and

FMTE). The USIZ? query returns the current setting of USIZ.

Note: Changing the USIZ parameter between inches and millimeters will convert the

current HSIZ and VSIZ values to match the new unit of measure. For example, if USIZ is in

inches and the current HSIZ is 10 (inches), changing USIZ from inches to mm will change

HSIZ to 25.4 (mm). The USIZ command should be sent before specifying physical sizes in

format command files.

Command syntax USIZ units

units

0 = sizes not given (use default)

1 = inches

2 = mm

Query syntax USIZ?

Query response units

Other required

commands The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image,

taking the new units into account.

Example

FMTB // Begin editing session

// One or more format editing commands ...

USIZ 1 // Select inches as unit of measure in buffer

HSIZ 10.4 // Set width to 10.4 in buffer

VSIZ 7.8 // Set height to 7.8 in buffer

ALLU // Test the new settings

// One or more format editing commands ...

FMTE // End editing session

556 Appendix A Command Reference

UNPK UnPacK operation related to DMA

Class

Description Unpacks archived data received by the YMDI command and puts it in the proper memory

locations

Command syntax UNPK

Video Test Generator User Guide 557

UNPK UnPacK operation related to DMA

Class

Description Unpacks archived data received by the YMDI command and puts it in the proper memory

locations

Command syntax UNPK

558 Appendix A Command Reference

VERF? VERsion Firmware

Class Miscellaneous system parameters

Description Returns the firmware version number for the runtime code and the boot code. The digits to

the left of the decimal point represent the major release level. The digits to the right of the

decimal point represent the revision number of the release. A second decimal point

followed by more digits indicates the revision is at a given beta test level.

Query syntax VERF?

Query response version runtime code: version boot code

Example

VERF?

20.0882002,01.03.03

Video Test Generator User Guide 559

VERG? VERsion Gateware

Class Miscellaneous system parameters

Description Returns the gateware version number for the programmable devices. The digits to the left

of the decimal point represent the major release level. The digits to the right of the decimal

point represent the revision number of the release. A second decimal point followed by

more digits indicates the revision is at a given beta test level.

Query syntax VERG?

Query response product code, revision, date code: product code, revsion, date code: product code,

revsion, date code

Example

VERG?

250C,16,8022004:250F,60,10052004:0,0,0

560 Appendix A Command Reference

VERH? VERsion Hardware

Class Miscellaneous system parameters

Description Returns a five-digit hardware version number. The number indicates when a major

modification to the hardware was last implemented. The significance of each digit is

interpreted as follows:

Video Test Generator User Guide 561

VRAT? Vertical RATe Query

Class Format parameter setting - Video resolution

Description Returns the current vertical (field) rate. This is equal to the product of the FRAT (frame

rate) and SCAN (scan type) settings (FRAT * SCAN).

Query syntax VRAT?

Query response vertical field rate

Example

VRAT? //read the product of FRAT and SCAN settings

50.0000

Related commands TMAU

562 Appendix A Command Reference

VRES Vertical RESolution

Class Format parameter setting - Video resolution

Description Establishes the number of active lines per frame. The VRES? query returns the current

setting of VRES.

Command syntax VRES lines

lines

min =

• 1 (when SCAN = 1) or

• 2 (when SCAN = 2)

max = the lesser of

• VTOT-1 (when SCAN = 1) or

• VTOT-3 (when SCAN = 2)

Must be an even number when SCAN = 2.

Query syntax VRES?

Query response lines

Other required

commands The ALLU command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.

Example

VRES 480 // Set 480 active lines in buffer

ALLU // Configure hardware and redraw image

Video Test Generator User Guide 563

VSIZ Vertical SIZe

Class Format parameter setting - Video resolution

Description Establishes the vertical physical size of the image on the display. Units expected (or

returned) vary according to the last mode set with USIZ command. The VSIZ command is

context sensitive and must appear between begin and end commands FMTB and FMTE.

The VSIZ? query returns the current setting of VSIZ.

Note: Make sure that the USIZ parameter is properly set before using the VSIZ command.

Changing the USIZ setting after entering VSIZ will convert the size to match the new unit

of measure.

Command syntax VSIZ size

size

physical size; positive value (floating point accepted)

Query syntax VSIZ?

Query response size

Other required

commands The units of measure must be properly set by USIZ before entering VSIZ. The ALLU

command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image, taking the

new size into account.

Example

FMTB // Begin editing session

// One or more format editing commands ...

USIZ 1 // Select inches as unit of measure in buffer

HSIZ 10.4 // Set width to 10.4 in buffer

VSIZ 7.8 // Set height to 7.8 in buffer

ALLU // Test the new settings

// One or more format editing commands ...

FMTE // End editing session

564 Appendix A Command Reference

VSPD Vertical Sync Pulse Delay

Class Format parameter setting - Synchronization

Description Establishes the delay between leading edge of blanking in the first (or even) field and the

leading edge of the vertical sync pulse. When interlacing, delay between end of video and

leading edge of vertical sync before second (or odd) field is 0.5 line shorter than the

whole-line delay specified. The VSPD? query returns the current setting of the vertical

sync pulse delay.

Command syntax VSPD lines

lines

min =0 (when SCAN = 1) or 1 (when SCAN = 2)

max = VTOT-VRES-VSPW (when SCAN = 1) or [(VTOT-VRES-1) /2]-VSPW (when

SCAN = 2)

Query syntax VSPD?

Query response lines

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU command

updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.

Example

VSPD 11 // Set V sync delay to 11 lines in buffer

FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

Video Test Generator User Guide 565

VSPG Vertical Sync Pulse Gate

Class Format parameter setting - Synchronization

Description Enables and disables the digital vertical sync output. The VSPG? query returns the

current mode of VSPG.

Command syntax VSPG mode

mode

0 = OFF

1 = ON

Query syntax VSPG?

Query response 0 or 1

Other required

commands To use digital vertical sync, digital separate H and V sync must be selected with the SSST

command. The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU

command updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.

Example

VSPG 1 // Enable V sync output in buffer

FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

566 Appendix A Command Reference

VSPP Vertical Sync Pulse Polarity

Class Format parameter setting - Synchronization

Description Establishes the logic sense of the digital vertical sync outputs. Setting polarity to 1 causes

the leading edge of vertical sync to be a low-to-high transition. Setting polarity to 0 causes

the leading edge of vertical sync to be a high-to-low transition. The VSPP? query returns

the current polarity of VSPP.

Command syntax VSPP polarity

polarity

0 = high-to-low transition

1 = low-to-high transition

Query syntax VSPP?

Query response 0 or 1

Other required

commands In order to use digital vertical sync, it must be gated on with the VSPG command and

digital separate H and V sync must be selected with the SSST command. The FMTU

command instructs the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU command updates

hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.

Example

VSPP 1 // Set active hi V sync in buffer

VSPG 1 // Enable V sync output in buffer

SSST 1 // Select H&V sync type in buffer

FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

Video Test Generator User Guide 567

VSPW Vertical Sync Pulse Width

Class Format parameter setting - Synchronization

Description Establishes the width of the vertical sync pulse in lines. If the type specified for the

selected sync signal (see SSST, ASCT, DSCT, or DSST commands) is one of the CCIR

types, then the actual sync pulse width output by the generator will be 1/2 line shorter than

the whole number specified. The VSPW? query returns the current setting of VSPW.

Command syntax VSPW lines

Query syntax VSPW?

Query response lines

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU command

updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.

Example

VSPW 3 // Set V sync width to 3 lines in buffer

FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

568 Appendix A Command Reference

VTOF Vdram transfer To Flash

Class

Description Transfers the current contents (no matter what they are) of the video frame buffer to the

Flash EEPROM (if equipped) used to store the operating system firmware.

EPROM data sent to the generator is normally stored temporarily in video VDRAM. If the

file transfer is successful, a loader code segment will be placed in CMOS SRAM and

jumped to. This code segment will, in turn, transfer the image of the firmware in VDRAM to

flash memory, thereby replacing the entire flash memory contents. Following this, the

generator will reboot and re-initialize using the new firmware.

Important: Improper use of the VTOF command will cause permanent malfunctioning of

the video generator.

The VTOF command should be executed only by the Quantum Data ARCHIVE.EXE utility

as part of a firmware update operation. On stand-alone generators, the ARCHIVE.EXE

utility first copies the new firmware file to the video frame buffer via the serial port. Once

the file has been successfully copied to the buffer, the buffer contents are then used to

update the Flash EEPROM.

Executing the VTOF command when the video frame buffer does not contain a valid

firmware file will cause a permanent malfunctioning of the generator. There is no way to

restore the firmware on stand-alone models via the serial or GPIB ports once this has

occurred. The stand-alone generator must be returned to Quantum Data or a Quantum

Data authorized repair center for reprogramming.

Note: The firmware may be replaced at least 10,000 times. After that, the generator may

require service to replace the flash ROMs.

Important: In the unlikely event the power fails while the loader is transferring data from

VDRAM to flash memory (this process taking approximately 20 seconds to complete), the

generator will appear to be inoperable at the next power-on. To restore operation, the

generator must be removed from the system, opened, connected to a computer having a

special adapter, and reprogrammed from a binary image file using a special executable

program.Is this something the customer can do himself? Or should we advise him to return

the generator to the repair center?

Command syntax VTOF

Other required

commands YMDI, FLSH

Video Test Generator User Guide 569

VTOT Vertical TOTal lines per frame

Class Format parameter setting - Video resolution

Description Establishes the total number of lines per frame. When interlacing (SCAN=2), VTOT must

be odd. The VTOT? query returns the current setting of VTOT.

The frame or picture refresh rate is equal to HRAT divided by VTOT.

The field or vertical rate is equal to the frame rate when SCAN = 1 (non-interlaced

operation).

The field or vertical rate is equal to twice the frame rate when SCAN = 2 (non-interlaced

operation).

Note: The current version of the firmware does not allow you to directly enter a specific

field or frame rate when setting up a format. If your test specifications call for a specific field,

frame or vertical refresh rate, enter suitable values for HRAT, SCAN and VTOT to give you

the desired rate.

Command syntax VTOT lines

lines

must be an odd number when SCAN = 2

min =

• 2 @ SCAN=1

• 5 @ SCAN=2

max =

• 801GC-ISA = 4096 @ SCAN=1; 4097 @ SCAN=2

• 801GF-ISA = 4096 @ SCAN=1; 8191 @ SCAN=2

• 801GP = 2048

• 801GC, GX = 4096 @ SCAN=1; 4097 @ SCAN=2

• 801GF = 4096 @ SCAN=1; 8191 @ SCAN=2

Query syntax VTOT?

Query response lines

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU command

updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.

570 Appendix A Command Reference

Example

VTOT 525 // Set total lines//frame to 525 in buffer

FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

Video Test Generator User Guide 571

XACR Audio Clock Recovery Data

Class Sonic data generator

Description Sets the N value, and optionally sets the CTS value.

The XACR command takes effect (the new N and CTS values are encoded and

transmitted to the receiver) after the packet is gated on (DPTG command) and the

hardware has been updated (DPGU command).

Command syntax XACR n cts

value of audio clock regeneration

cts

Cycle Time Stamp. If not specified, the hardware will calculate the CTS value.

Related Commands DPTG, DPGU

572 Appendix A Command Reference

XAFD AFD Mode Setting

Class Format parameter setting - HDMI active video

Description Sets the SXCX, SXEX, EXAR, EXCX, and CXAR parameters to values necessary to

support a given AFD code.

Command syntax XAFD afd_code

afd_code

0 to 15

The following table provides a listing of AFD codes and corresponding parameter settings.

Note: This command will not change the value of SXAR (which remains fixed by the

current format). Therefore, the range of allowed AFD values are determined by the value

of SXAR in the current format.

AFD Code SXAR CXAR1EXCX1EXAR SXEX1

2 1.33 1.77 0 CXAR 280

1.77 1.77 0 CXAR 16

3 1.33 or 1.77 1.55 0 CXAR 280

4 1.33 or 1.77 > 1.77 0 CXAR 264

8 1.33 1.33 0 CXAR 0

1.77 1.33 0 CXAR 0

9 1.33 1.33 0 CXAR 16

1.77 1.33 0 CXAR 264

10 1.33 1.77 0 CXAR 264

1.77 1.77 0 CXAR 32

11 1.33 1.55 0 CXAR 264

1.77 1.55 0 CXAR 264

13 1.33 1.55 0 CXAR 8

1.77 1.55 8 1.33 264

14 1.33 1.55 8 1.77 264

1.77 1.55 0 CXAR 8

15 1.33 1.33 8 1.77 264

1.77 1.33 0 1.33 8

Video Test Generator User Guide 573

Related Commands SXCX, SXEX, EXAR, EXCX, CXAR

Example

XAFD 11 //set parameters for AFD code 11

FMTU

1. Compound maps involving the EXAR extended aperture and both mapping methods SXEX & EXCX are shown in bold. In

these cases, an EXCX–Lcsp operation is first used to place CXAR-shaped content into the EXAR-shaped extended aperture.

This operation is then followed by a SXEX-Lcbb operation which finally places the EXAR-shaped extended aperture into the

SXAR-shaped output signal aperture.

574 Appendix A Command Reference

XAUD Audio InfoFrame Data

Class InfoFrame Generator (IFG) parameter

Description Writes Audio InfoFrame packet data.

Command syntax

(individual

parameter)

XAUD:audparameter value

Command syntax

(complete packet) For uncompressed audio coding type:

XAUD type version length [CC [1 [SS [SF [CA [LSV [DMI ]]]]]]]

For compressed audio coding types:

XAUD type version length [CC [CT [SS [SF [MBR [CA [LSV [DMI ]]]]]]]]

type

version

length (bytes)

The remaining are Audio Infoframe data parameters (audparameter) as specified in

EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Section 6.3:

VERS (same as Version)

Infoframe version

Channel count (see EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Table 19 for settings)

CC2 CC1 CC0 Audio channel count

0 0 0 Refer to Stream

Header

001 2ch

010 3ch

011 4ch

100 5ch

101 6ch

110 7ch

111 8ch

Video Test Generator User Guide 575

Audio coding type (see EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Table 19 for settings)

Sample size (see EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Table 20 for settings)

Sampling frequency (see EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Table 20 for settings)

MBR

Maximum bit rate (this setting multiplied by 8KHz represents the maximum bit rate of

the audio stream)

Channel assignment code (see EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Table 22 for settings)

Note: Setting the XAUD:CA value will automatically set both DACA and DAXA to

corresponding values. See the table on page 271 to view these settings.

CT3 CT2 CT1 CT0 Audio Coding Type

0 0 0 0 Refer to Stream Header

0 0 0 1 IEC60958 PCM [26, 27]

0010 AC-3

0 0 1 1 MPEG1 (Layers 1 & 2)

0 1 0 0 MP3 (MPEG 1 Layer 3)

0 1 0 1 MPEG2 (multichannel)

0110 AAC

0111 DTS

1000 ATRAC

SS1 SS0 Sample Size

0 0 Refer to Stream Header

01 16 bit

10 20 bit

11 24 bit

SF2 SF1 SF0 Sampling Frequency

0 0 0 Refer to Stream Header

001 32 kHz

0 1 0 44.1 kHz (CD)

011 48 kHz

100 88.2 kHz

101 96 kHz

1 1 0 176.4 kHz

111 192 kHz

CA Channel Number

765432108 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

576 Appendix A Command Reference

LSV

Level shift value (see EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Table 23 for settings)

00000000- - - - - - FR FL

00000001- - - - - LFE FR FL

00000010- - - - FC - FR FL

00000011- - - - FC LFE FR FL

00000100- - - RC - - FR FL

00000101- - - RC - LFE FR FL

00000110- - - RC FC - FR FL

00000111- - - RC FC LFE FR FL

00001000- - RR RL - - FR FL

00001001- - RR RL - LFE FR FL

00001010- - RR RL FC - FR FL

00001011- - RR RL FC LFE FR FL

00001100- RC RR RL - - FR FL

00001101- RC RR RL - LFE FR FL

00001110- RC RR RL FC - FR FL

00001111- RC RR RL FC LFE FR FL

0001 0000RRC RLC RR RL - - FR FL

0001 0001RRC RLC RR RL - LFE FR FL

0001 0010RRC RLC RR RL FC - FR FL

0001 0011RRC RLC RR RL FC LFE FR FL

0001 0100FRC FLC - - - - FR FL

0001 0101FRC FLC - - - LFE FR FL

0001 0110FRC FLC - - FC - FR FL

0001 0111FRC FLC - - FC LFE FR FL

00011000FRC FLC - RC - - FR FL

00011001FRC FLC - RC - LFE FR FL

00011010FRC FLC - RC FC - FR FL

00011011FRC FLC - RC FC LFE FR FL

00011100FRC FLC RR RL - - FR FL

00011101FRC FLC RR RL - LFE FR FL

00011110FRC FLC RR RL FC - FR FL

00011111FRC FLC RR RL FC LFE FR FL

LSV3 LSV2 LSV1 LSV0 Level Shift Value

0000 0dB

0001 1dB

0010 2dB

0011 3dB

0100 4dB

0101 5dB

0110 6dB

0111 7dB

1000 8dB

1001 9dB

1010 10dB

1011 11dB

1100 12dB

1101 13dB

CA Channel Number

Video Test Generator User Guide 577

DMI

Down-mix inhibit (see EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Table 24 for settings)

Query syntax XAUD:audparameter?

Query response value

Example 1 The following example sets the number of audio channels (CC parameter) to 2 in the

Audio Infoframe.

XAUD:CC 2

IFGU

Example 2 The following example sets an Audio InfoFrame with these properties:

• Seven channels (CC parameter)

• MPEG1 coding type (CT parameter)

• 16-bit sample size (SS parameter)

• 88.2KHz frequency (SF parameter)

• 72KHz maximum bit rate (MBR parameter)

• All but channel 3 (LFE) are allocated (CA parameter)

• 10dB attenuation during source device down-mixing (LSV parameter)

• Down-mixing permitted (DMI parameter)

XAUD 4 1 10 6 3 1 4 9 18 10 0;IFGU

Example 3 The following example reports the current setting for the Member Bit Rate parameter in

the Audio Infoframe.

XAUD:MBR?

Related commands IFTR, IFTG, IFGU, DAXA, DACA

1110 14dB

1111 15dB

DM_INH Describes whether the down mixed stereo output is permitted

0 Permitted or no information about any assertion of this

1 Prohibited

LSV3 LSV2 LSV1 LSV0 Level Shift Value

578 Appendix A Command Reference

XAVI Auxiliary Video Information InfoFrame Data

Class InfoFrame Generator (IFG) parameter

Description Writes Auxiliary Video Information (AVI) InfoFrame packet data.

Command syntax

(individual

parameter)

XAVI:aviparameter value

Command syntax

(complete

packet–version 1)

XAVI type version length [S [B [A [Y [R [M [C [SC [ETB [SBB [ELB [SRB ]]]]]]]]]]]]

Command syntax

(complete

packet–version 2)

XAVI type version length [S [B [A [Y [R [M [C [SC [ETB [SBB [ELB [SRB [VIC [PR]]]]]]]]]]]]

type

version

1 = version 1

2 = version 2

length (bytes)

The remaining are AVI Infoframe data parameters (aviparameter) as specified in

EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Section 6.1:

VERS (same as Version)

Infoframe version:

1 = version 1

2 = version 2

Scan information (see EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Table 8 for settings)

0 Scan Information

0 0 No Data

0 1 Overscanned (television)

1 0 Underscanned (com-

puter)

11 Future

Video Test Generator User Guide 579

Bar information (see EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Table 8 for settings)

Active Format Information (AFD) present (see EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Table 8 for

settings)

Video type (see EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Table 8 for settings)

Active Format Aspect Ratio (ADF value) (see EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Table 9 for

settings)

Picture Aspect Ratio (see EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Table 9 for settings)

0 Bar Information

0 0 Bar data not valid

0 1 Vertical Bar info valid

1 0 Horizontal Bar info valid

1 1 Vertical & Horizontal Bar info

valid

0Active Format Information

Present

0 No data

1 Active format information valid

0 RGB or YCbCr

0 0 RGB (default)

0 1 YCbCr 4:2:2

1 0 YCbCr 4:4:4

11 Future

0 Active Format Aspect Ratio

1 0 0 0 Same as picture aspect ratio

1 0 0 1 4:3 (Center)

1 0 1 0 16:9 (Center)

1 0 1 1 14:9 (Center)

other val-

ues Per DVB AFD active_format

field

0Picture Aspect

Ratio

00 No data

01 4:3

1 0 16:9

580 Appendix A Command Reference

Colorimetry (see EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Table 9 for settings)

Non-uniform Picture Scaling (see EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Table 11 for settings)

ETB

Line number of end of top bar representing the last line of a horizontal letterbox bar

area at the top of the picture (0 = no horizontal bar present at top of picture).

SBB

Line number of start of bottom bar representing the first line of a horizontal letterbox

bar area at the bottom of the picture.

ELB

Pixel number of end of left bar representing the last horizontal pixel of a vertical

pillar-bar area at the left side of the picture (0 = no vertical bar present at left of

picture).

SRB

Pixel number of start of right bar representing the first horizontal pixel of a vertical

pillar-bar area at the left side of the picture.

VIC

Video Format Identification Codes (see DVIC for settings).

Pixel repetition for “2x” and “4x” formats (see EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Table 14 for

settings) This field is set automatically based on settings for NCPP and NPPP.

11 Future

0 Colorimetry

00 No data

0 1 SMPTE 170M ITU601

10 ITU709

11 Future

1SC

0 Non-Uniform Picture Scaling

0 0 No known non-uniform scaling

0 1 Picture has been scaled horizontally

1 0 Picture has been scaled vertically

1 1 Picture has been scaled horizontally and vertically

3PR

2PR

1PR

0 Pixel Repetition for Optional (2880)

0 0 0 0 No Repetition (i.e. pixel sent once)

0 0 0 1 Pixel sent 2 times (i.e. repeated

once)

0Picture Aspect

Ratio

Video Test Generator User Guide 581

Query syntax XAVI:aviparameter?

Query response value

Example 1 The following example sets the scan information (S parameter) to overscanned in the AVI

Infoframe.

XAVI:S 1

IFGU

Example 2 The following example sets the AFD flag (A parameter) to not present and the picture

aspect ratio (M parameter) to 4:3 in the AVI Infoframe.

XAVI: A 0; M 1;IFGU

Example 3 The following example sets an Audio InfoFrame (version 2) with these properties:

• Overscanned (S parameter)

• Bar information not valid (B parameter)

• Active format information valid (A parameter)

•YC

bCr video type (Y parameter)

• Active format aspect ratio same as picture format ratio (R parameter)

• 4:3 picture aspect ratio (M parameter)

• SMPTE 170M colorimetry (C parameter)

• No known non-uniform scaling (SC parameter)

• No specified line number for horizontal bar (ETB and SBB parameters)

• No specified pixel number for vertical bar (ELB and SRB parameters)

• 480p59 video format (VIC format)

• No pixel repetition (PR format)

XAVI 2 1 13 1 0 1 2 8 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 2 0;IFGU

0 0 1 0 Pixel sent 3 times

0 0 1 1 Pixel sent 4 times

0 1 0 0 Pixel sent 5 times

0 1 0 1 Pixel sent 6 times

0 1 1 0 Pixel sent 7 times

0 1 1 1 Pixel sent 8 times

1 0 0 0 Pixel sent 9 times

1 0 0 1 Pixel sent 10 times

3PR

2PR

1PR

0 Pixel Repetition for Optional (2880)

582 Appendix A Command Reference

Example 4 The following example reports the current settings for the following AVI Infoframe

parameters:

•Video Type

• Active Format Information present

• Bar information present

• Scan information

• Colorimetry

XAVI:Y?

XAVI:A?

XAVI:B?

XAVI:S?

XAVI:C?

Related commands DVIC, NPPP, IFTR, IFTG, IFGU

Video Test Generator User Guide 583

XBBH Arbitrary Bottom Border Height

Class Format parameter setting - HDMI active video

Description Establishes the first line of a horizontal letterbox bar area at the bottom of the image.

Command syntax XBBH line_number

line_number

0 to 65535 (in decimal)

Related commands XLBW, XRBW, XTBH

Example

XBBH 769

FMTU

584 Appendix A Command Reference

XDID

EDID Data Write

Class EDID and DDC control

Description Writes new EDID structure for DVI Analyzer receiver.

Command syntax XDID offset bytes data

offset (hex)

address offset (in bytes)

bytes

number of bytes

(hex)

data

(hex)

Example 1 To change the first 3 bytes of the EDID structure (after the header):

XDID 8 3 DE33FF

DIDU

Example 2 To write at offset 256 (start of block 2):

XDID 100 8 1122334455667788

XDID 108 8 8899AABBCCDDEEFF

DIDU

Related commands DIDU

Video Test Generator User Guide 585

586 Appendix A Command Reference

XGCP General Control Parameter Data

Class Data island packet generator

Description Enables and disables the HDMI Audio/Video Mute (AVMUTE) feature. When enabled,

audio and video are muted by the generator.

Important: You can set either the AVMUTE set flag (to turn mute on) or the AVMUTE clear

flag (to turn mute off) to 1 (but not both).

Note: The status of the mute is changed only after the packet is gated ON (DPTG), the

repeat mode has been set (DPTR), and the hardware has been updated (DPGU) (see

example below).

Command syntax XGCP AVMUTE_set_flag AVMUTE_clear_flag

AVMUTE_set_flag

0 = off

1 = on

AVMUTE_clear_flag

0 = off

1 = on

Related commands MUTE, DPTG, DPGU

Example 1 To enable AVMUTE:

DPTG 7

DPTR 1

XGCP 1 0

DPGU

Once executed, use the MUTE? to continuously check until the AVMUTE state is changed

(may not take place right away).

Example 2 To disable AVMUTE:

DPTG 7

DPTR 1

XGCP 0 1

DPGU

Again, use the MUTE? command to continuously check until the AVMUTE state is

changed.

Video Test Generator User Guide 587

XGDP Generic Data Packet Data

Class Data island packet generator

Description Writes a generic data packet for sourcing highly-customized arbitrary data.

Command syntax

(individual

parameter)

XGDP:gdpparameter value

Command syntax

(complete packet) XGDP data

data (ASCII)

hexidecimal payload data in the form of ASCII characters (“0” through “F”)—each

representing one 4-bit nibble of data (if less than 60 ASCII characters, which is less

than 30 bytes of data, are specified, then the remaining bytes are set to zero)

The following are data island packet parameters (gdpparameter) as specified in HDMI

specification, Section 5.3.

hb0

Packet type (see HDMI specification, Section 5.3.1 through 5.3.6 for settings)

hb1

Packet-specific data (see HDMI specification, Section 5.3.1 through 5.3.6 for settings)

hb2

Packet-specific data (see HDMI specification, Section 5.3.1 through 5.3.6 for settings)

pb0 – pb27

InfoFrame packet data (see HDMI specification, Section 5.3.5 for settings)

Example

588 Appendix A Command Reference

XGIF Generic InfoFrame Data

Class InfoFrame Generator (IFG) parameter

Description Writes generic InfoFrame packet data. This allows you to emulate any InfoFrame type

(including vendor-specific).

Note: The HDMI specification (section 5.2.3.2) requires that an HDMI packet must be

transmitted at least every two VSYNC periods, or the receiver will drop out of HDMI mode.

A Generic InfoFrame packet can be used for this purpose by enabling its repeat bit (see the

IFTR command).

Command syntax XGIF type version length data

type

0 to 255

version

0 to 255

length (bytes)

0 to 25 (bytes)

data (ASCII)

hexidecimal payload data in the form of ASCII characters—each representing one

4-bit nibble of data (if less than 50 ASCII characters, which is less than 30 bytes of

data, are specified, then the remaining bytes are set to zero)

Example The following example writes 10 bytes of generic InfoFrame data. The remaining bytes

11-25 will be set to zero.

XGIF 6 1 20 1122EE4455BB77FF99AA

Related commands IFTR, IFTG, IFGU

Video Test Generator User Guide 589

XLBW Arbitrary Left Border Width

Class Format parameter setting - HDMI active video

Description Establishes the last horizontal pixel of a vertical pillar-box bar area at the left side of the

image.

Command syntax XLBW pixel_number

pixel_number

0 to 65535 (in decimal)

Related commands XBBH, XRBW, XTBH

Example

XLBW 64

FMTU

590 Appendix A Command Reference

XMPG MPEG InfoFrame Data

Class InfoFrame Generator (IFG) parameter

Description Writes MPEG InfoFrame packet data.

Command syntax

(individual

parameter)

XMPG: mpgparameter value

Command syntax

(complete packet) XMPG type version length [MB [MF [FR]]]

type

version

length (bytes)

The remaining are MPEG Infoframe data parameters (mpgparameter) as specified in

EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Section 6.4:

VERS (same as Version)

Infoframe version

MPEG bit rate (Enter rate in Hertz [Hz]) [In decimal or hex??]

MPEG frame (see EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Table 26 for settings)

Field repeat (see EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Table 26 for settings)

Query syntax XMPG:mpgparameter?

Query response value

Video Test Generator User Guide 591

XRBW Arbitrary Right Border Width

Class Format parameter setting - HDMI active video

Description Establishes the first horizontal pixel of a vertical pillar-bar area at the right side of the

image.

Command syntax XRBW pixel_number

pixel_number

0 to 65535 (in decimal)

Related commands XLBW, XTBH, XBBH

Example

XRBW 961

FMTU

592 Appendix A Command Reference

XRES X axis RESolution for custom images

Class Image editor control

Description Sets the width factor used to scale horizontal size and position parameters in the

primitives of a custom image in the image editor buffer. The XRES? query returns the

current XRES setting.

Command syntax XRES width

width integer

16 to 65,536

Query syntax XRES?

Query response width

Example

XRES 1600 // Set horizontal scaling factor to 1600

YRES 900 // Set vertical scaling factor to 900

Video Test Generator User Guide 593

XSPD Source Product Description InfoFrame Data

Class InfoFrame Generator (IFG) parameter

Description Writes Source Product Description InfoFrame packet data.

Command syntax

(individual

parameter)

XSPD: spdparameter value

Command syntax

(complete packet) XSPD type version length [VNS [PDS [SDI]]]

type

version

length (bytes)

The remaining are Source Product Description Infoframe data parameters (spdparameter)

as specified in EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Section 6.2:

VERS (same as Version)

Infoframe version

VNS

Vendor name string

PDS

Product description string

SDI

Source device information (see EIA/CEA-861-B standard, Table 17 for settings)

Query syntax XSPD:spdparameter?

Query response value

Example The following example sets the vendor name string (VNS parameter) to “QDI” in the

Source Product Description Infoframe.

IFGU

XSPD:VNS QDI

594 Appendix A Command Reference

Example 2 The following example specifies a Source Product Description InfoFrame with these

properties:

• Vendor name is QDI

• Product description is HDMI-Analyzer

• Source device is Digital STB (1)

XSPD 3 1 25 QDI HDMI-Analyzer 1

Example 3 The following example reports the current setting for the Product Description parameter in

the Source Product Description Infoframe.

XSPD:PDS?

Video Test Generator User Guide 595

XTBH Arbitrary Top Border Height

Class AFD control parameter

Description Establishes the last line of a horizontal letterbox bar area at the top of the image.

Command syntax XTBW line_number

line_number

0 to 65535

Related commands XLBW, XRBW, XBBH

Example

XTBH 15

FMTU

596 Appendix A Command Reference

XVSG Video Signal Gating

Class Format parameter settings

Description Determines which video outputs are active when the format is selected. The same

command controls both the analog and digital video outputs.

Command syntax XVSG red_mode, green_mode, blue_mode

red_mode, green_mode, blue_mode

0 = OFF

1 = ON

Other required

commands The FMTU command instructs the generator to use the new setting. The ALLU command

updates hardware to the new setting and redraws the test image.

Example

XVSG 1 1 1 // Enable all color channels

FMTU // Update hardware to current buffer contents

Video Test Generator User Guide 597

YMDI Y MoDem Input

Class System Level

Description Initiates the YMODEM-BATCH file-upload protocol.

Customization data stored in a battery-powered NVRAM should be backed-up on a PC so,

if a battery failure or other problem occurs, recovery will be possible without having to

re-enter data by hand.

Restoration can be accomplished in three ways:

• By sending parameters one-at-a-time

• By host port binary data transfer

• By standard YMODEM-BATCH file-upload protocol.

The YMDI command is used to initiate the YMODEM-BATCH file-upload protocol. The

protocol allows one (or more) data structures to be reinstated in the generator from a

binary file. A file contains all instances of a particular type of data. For example, sending

the FORMAT.MEM file to the generator will restore all user-defined formats. Note that you

should not attempt to restore the system parameters by sending SYSTEM.SYS. The

YMDI command internally executes UNPK after all files have been received, so UNPK

does not need to be sent after YMDI. The YMDI command can also be used to change the

firmware in the generator’s flash EPROM via the serial port. This is accomplished by

sending the FIRMWARE.BIN file to the generator using a YMODEM-BATCH. The

generator temporarily places the FIRMWARE.BIN data in picture memory and, if received

intact, eventually transfers this binary image to flash memory by internally executing the

VTOF function. Note that you do not have to send VTOF after a YMDI firmware upload.

Command syntax YMDI filenamesIs this the correct representation of the syntax? It doesn’t match the

example.

filenames

valid YMODEM-BATCH filenames:

DIR.MEM

PATH.MEM

IMAGE.MEM

SEQUENCE.MEM

FONT.MEM

FORMAT.MEM

FIRMWARE.BIN

598 Appendix A Command Reference

Related commands YMDO, UNPK, PKUP, VTOF, FLSH

Example

YMDI YMODEM-BATCH upload

Video Test Generator User Guide 599

YMDO Y MoDem Output

Class System Level

Description Initiates the YMODEM-BATCH file extraction protocol.

Customization data stored in a battery-powered NVRAM should be backed-up on a PC so

that, if a battery failure or other problem occurs, recovery will be possible without having to

re-enter data by hand.

Backup can be accomplished in three ways:

• By loading and querying parameters one-at-a-time

• Extracting binary data using the host port

• By standard YMODEM-BATCH file-extraction protocol

The YMDO command is used to initiate the YMODEM-BATCH file extraction protocol. The

protocol allows one (or more) data structures to be extracted from the generator as binary

files. Each file contains all instances of a particular type of data. For example, the

FORMAT.MEM file contains all of the user-defined formats stored in the generator. Note

that ALL will cause all files except SYSTEM.SYS and FIRMWARE.BIN to be extracted.

YMDO internally executes PKUP before sending files, so PKUP does not need to be sent

before YMDO.

Command syntax YMDO filename [filename [ … ] ] | ALL YMODEM-BATCH download

filename

Valid filename (listed below) or ALL

DIR.MEM

PATH.MEM

IMAGE.MEM

SEQUENCE.MEM

FONT.MEM

FORMAT.MEM

SYSTEM.SYS

FIRMWARE.BIN

Related commands YMDI, PKUP, UNPK

Example

YMDO ALL YMODEM-BATCH download

600 Appendix A Command Reference

YRES Y axis RESolution for custom images

Class Image editor control

Description Sets the height factor used to scale vertical size and position parameters in the primitives

of a custom image in the image editor buffer. The YRES? query returns the current YRES

setting.

Command syntax YRES height

height integer

16 to 65,536

Query syntax YRES?

Query response height

Example

XRES 1600 // Set horizontal scaling factor to 1600

YRES 900 // Set vertical scaling factor to 900

Example

dirn mydir // create a directory named mymap

dirb // begin directory context

nami 1 smpte133 // insert the name smpte133 at index 1

nami 2 flat // insert the name flat at index 2

nami 3 raster // insert the name raster at index 3

dire // end directory context

dirs // save map named mymap

dirl mydir // load directory mydir into edit buffer

dirb // begin directory context

namq? 1 10 // list mydir names

namy 2 // yank name at index 2

nami 1 colorbar // insert new name at index 1

dire // end directory context

dira newdir // save modified mydir as newdir

dirq? 1 10 // list available directories

// (up to 10 maps starting with the 1st)

Video Test Generator User Guide 601

602 Appendix A Command Reference

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 603

BImage Reference

Topics in this appendix:

•Standard image descriptions

604 Appendix B Image Reference

Standard image descriptions

Acer1

Description Special test image developed per customer specifications. Consists of two sets of color

bars and five blocks of “#” characters on a white crosshatch with a black background.

Acer2

Description Special test image developed per customer specifications. Consists of colorbars, lines of

“#” characters, and a green border.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 605

Acer3, Acer4, Acer5 and Acer6

Description Special test images developed per customer specifications. Consists of large and small

white circles centered on either a yellow (Acer3), magenta (Acer4), cyan (Acer5), or white

(Acer6) crosshatch on a black background. The Acer3 image is shown below.

Acer7 and Acer8

Description Special test image developed per customer specifications. In the primary version, five

blocks of either white “#” (Acer7) or “H” (Acer8) characters on a black background are

displayed. A secondary version displays black characters on a white background. The

Acer7 image is shown below.

606 Appendix B Image Reference

Acer9

Description Special test image developed per customer specifications. In the primary version, a mostly

white field is displayed with two rows of color bars at the bottom. A secondary version

displays a black field with the two rows of color bars at the bottom.

AFDtest

Description Used to test HDMI content mapping using different EIA/CEA-861-B formats. There are 10

different versions of this image. For more information, see “Testing with Active Format

Description (AFD)” on page 162.

Analyzer

Description Used to configure the DVI and HDMI analyzer. For more information, see Chapter 8,

“Analyzing Digital Sources and Cables.”

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 607

AnsiLght

Description The primary version displays a white background with a small black pixel in the center fills

the active video area. A secondary version displays a black background with a small white

pixel in the center.

Apple1

Description Special test image developed per customer specifications. A secondary version shows

reverse (black characters on white background).

608 Appendix B Image Reference

Audio LR, AudioLRf, AudioRAT, Audio_L, Audio_Lf, Audio_R, Audio_Rf

Description Used to configure HDMI audio output signal. The AudioLR is shown below. For more

information, see “Testing HDMI audio” on page 155.

BarBlack

Description Special test image developed per customer specifications.

A secondary version shows reverse (black lines on white background).

BLU_EM, GRN_EM, RED_EM, WHT_EM, MEME1111, MEMESony, MESony_B,

MESony_G, and MESony_R

Description In the primary version, the screen is filled with blue (BLU and B), green (GRN and G), red

(R), or white (WHT, MEME1111, MEMEPlus, and MEMESony) EM character blocks on a

black background. Only the white character has a secondary version. It is drawn with black

characters on a white background.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 609

A bitmap of a single character block is shown here. The BLU_EM image is shown below.

Test Focus

Purpose This pattern is specified by some display manufacturers for checking and adjusting focus

one color at a time.

BLU_EM+, GRN_EM+, RED_EM+, WHT_EM+, MEMEPlus, MEPlus_B,

MEPlus_G, and MEPlus_R

Description In the primary version, the screen is filled with blue (BLU and B), green (GRN and G), red

(R), or white (WHT and Sony) EM character blocks on a black background. Only the white

character has a secondary version. It is drawn with black characters on a white

background.

610 Appendix B Image Reference

A bitmap of a single character block is shown here. The BLU_EM+ image is shown below.

Test Focus

Purpose This pattern is specified by one or more display manufacturers for checking and adjusting

focus one color at a time.

BLU_PIC, GRAY_PIC, GRN_PIC, RED_PIC, WHT_PIC

Description A solid blue (BLU), gray, green (GRN), red, or white (WHT) box fills the active video area.

Only the white fill has a secondary version. It can be changed to a black fill by pressing the

Step key. The BLU_PIC image is shown below.

Test Purity adjustment

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 611

Purpose To produce correct colors in a displayed image, the electron beams from each of the three

(3) guns in the CRT should strike only their matching phosphors. A white image shows

patches of various colors on a monitor with bad purity. The purity adjustment(s) should be

performed before doing any brightness or color tests. In some cases, purity adjustments

involve loosening and repositioning the yoke, in which case purity should be adjusted prior

to doing any geometry tests.

Method The methods used for adjusting purity on a color monitor depend on the type of monitor

and CRT (for example; Delta, In-Line or Single Gun). In most cases, the first step is to

degauss the CRT.

Note: For a Delta Gun CRT, turn on only the red output. A solid uniform field of red should

appear. If the color is not uniform, adjust the yoke and the Purity Tabs assembly.

If purity cannot be corrected to acceptable limits, the monitor may not have been properly

degaussed or there may be a defect in the CRT or purity assembly.

Test Shadow mask warping

Purpose The purity characteristics of your CRT can change over time if you leave it on with a lot of

video being displayed. This may be due to the CRT’s electron beams striking its shadow

mask with enough energy to cause the mask to heat. This internal heating may be enough

to cause the shadow mask to warp and give bad purity.

Method Set the purity image to white and allow the monitor to run for a few minutes. Any mask

warping shows up as a change in purity. You can use a color meter to measure the

change. The BriteBox pattern may also be useful for measuring shadow mask warping.

612 Appendix B Image Reference

Bosch

Description Special test image developed per customer specifications. This image has 6 versions.

Box_50mm, Box_64mm, Box100mm, Box150mm, Box200mm, Box250mm

Description The primary version has a solid white box in the center of the active video. Depending on

the image selected, the box is sized by square millimeters. If there is room, information on

the current format appears below and to the left of the box. This shows the number of

active pixels and lines as well as the horizontal and vertical scan rates. A forward slash (I)

after the number of active lines indicates the format is interlaced.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 613

Note: The box will be the correct size only if the correct physical active video size is set in

the format.

The Box_50mm image is shown below. The secondary version draws a black box and

black text on a white background.

Test Brightness control adjustment

Purpose The wrong brightness setting may cause other tests such as Contrast, Focus, and Beam

Size to be invalid. An accurate brightness setting helps give repeatable measurements

throughout other tests.

Method Center your light meter probe within the center square and adjust the monitor’s brightness

control to obtain the required light meter reading.

614 Appendix B Image Reference

BriteBox

Description The primary version has a single white box in the center of active video. The box size is

controlled by the MSIZ system parameter. The secondary version adds four boxes in the

corners of active video.

Test Brightness control adjustment

Purpose The wrong brightness setting may cause other tests such as Contrast, Focus, and Beam

Size to be invalid. An accurate brightness setting helps give repeatable measurements

throughout other tests.

Method Center your light meter probe within the center square and adjust the monitor’s brightness

control to obtain the required light meter reading.

Test Brightness uniformity

Purpose The light output of most picture tubes varies slightly when measured across the CRT face.

This test can be used to verify that the light output variation is within your specification

limits.

Method Select the inverted version and perform the Brightness Control Adjustment test on the

center box. Then, center the light meter probe in each of the corner squares and note the

reading you get for each square. The deviation between each of the corner readings and

the center reading should be within your specification limits.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 615

Burst (TV formats only)

Description The left side starts with reference white (+100 IRE) and black (+7.5 IRE) levels. This is

followed by six bursts of sine waves. Each burst is at a different frequency, forming vertical

lines of various widths. The frequencies, going from left to right, are 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 3.58, and

4.43 MHz.

Test Frequency response

Method When viewed on a TV screen, the peak intensities of all of the bursts should match the

white reference level. The darkest portions between the peaks should match the black

reference level.

The image can also be used with a TV waveform analyzer to check the frequency

response of a video system. One scan line of the image, as it would appear on a waveform

analyzer, is shown at the top of the next page . High frequency roll-off (loss) would show

up as a decrease in the peak-to-peak swings on the right side of the waveform. Low

frequency roll-off would show up as a decrease in the peak-to-peak swings on the left side

of the waveform.

Some waveform analyzers can be set to detect and display the amplitude of the peaks. A

typical amplitude waveform for a good system is shown at the bottom of the next page.

616 Appendix B Image Reference

BurstTCE

Description Fills screen with a 0.5 MHz frequency. This can be increased in 0.5 MHz increments by

pressing the Step key, and then turning the Image knob.

CardBMP

Description Selecting this image loads the BMP image stored on the PCMCIA card inserted into the

generator. For more information, see “Downloading bitmap images from a PCMCIA card”

on page 78.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 617

Check511

Description Consists of five small boxes in the corners and at the center of the active video. The boxes

are on a black background. Each box consists of alternating black and white pixels that

form a very fine checkerboard. The secondary version inverts the image, creating a white

background. The colors of the individual pixels in the boxes also are inverted.

Test Verify monitor resolution

Purpose The resolution of your monitor should meet or exceed the design specifications.

Method First adjust the brightness, contrast, and focus to their correct settings. You should be able

to see individual and distinct pixels in each of the boxes. Failure to see distinct pixels may

indicate you have a defective video amplifier, focus correction circuit, or picture tube.

Note: If multi-colored areas appear on a mask-type color picture tube, you may have a

problem with convergence or you may be exceeding the resolution of the picture tube.

618 Appendix B Image Reference

CheckBy3

Description The active video area is equally divided into a 3x3 checkerboard of black and white boxes.

The primary version has four white boxes as shown in the image below. The secondary

version has five white boxes (reverse).

Test Contrast ratio

Purpose The pattern is based on a proposed ANSI method of measuring the contrast ratio of video

projection systems.

Method Using a light meter probe, measure and record the light-level reading (in foot lamberts) in

the center of each of the black and white boxes. The contrast ratio is expressed as the

average of all of the white readings divided by the average of all of the black readings.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 619

Check_02

Description Primary version is shown below. The secondary version has reverse (black lines on white

background).

Check_11

Description In the primary version, the active video area is filled with alternating black and white pixels

that form a very fine checkerboard, as shown below. The secondary version inverts the

colors in the image. The inverted image looks almost the same as the non-inverted

version.

Test Verify monitor resolution

620 Appendix B Image Reference

Purpose The resolution of your monitor should meet or exceed the design specifications.

Method Adjust the brightness, contrast, and focus to their correct settings first. You should be able

to see individual and distinct pixels in each of the boxes. Failure to see distinct pixels may

indicate you have a defective video amplifier, focus correction circuit, or picture tube.

Note: If multi-colored areas appear on a mask-type color picture tube, you may have a

problem with convergence, or you may be exceeding the resolution of the picture tube.

CirclesL

Description Special test image developed per customer specifications. In the primary version (shown

below), the image consists of five large white circles on a black background. The circles

are positioned in the center and in the corners of the active video area. The secondary

version inverts the image to black circles on a white background.

Purpose This pattern is specified by some monitor manufacturers for checking and adjusting video

scan size, linearity, and over scanning.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 621

CirclesS

Description Special test image developed per customer specifications. In the primary version (shown

below), the image consists of eight small white circles on a black background. The circles

are positioned in the corners of the active video area and centered on each edge of the

active video area. The secondary version inverts the image to black circles on a white

background.

Purpose This pattern is specified by some monitor manufacturers for checking and adjusting video

scan size, linearity, and over scanning.

ColorBar

Description The primary version (shown below) has 16 full-height vertical color bars. The secondary

version splits the field into a top and bottom half. The bars in the bottom half of the screen

are in reverse order.

622 Appendix B Image Reference

Note: When outputting digital video, 33% Gray changes to 50% Gray, and 67% Gray

becomes either Black or some gray level depending on how the display interprets the video

information.

Test Verify that all video channels are functional

Purpose To verify that none of the video channels are bad or connected incorrectly.

Method Compare the sequence of color bars with the table. Missing bars may indicate a dead or

unconnected channel. The transition between the bars should be sharp and distinct. Each

bar should also be uniform in color and intensity across its entire width. Non-uniformity

may indicate problems with the response of the video amplifiers. If all the bars are present

but in the wrong order, one or more inputs may be swapped.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 623

ComFocus

Description Special test image developed per customer specifications.

Cubes

Description This is an animated image consisting of one small multicolored cube orbiting around a

larger multicolored cube. Each cube also is spinning on its own axis. The default text string

is Quantum Data, which can be changed using commands. The primary version (shown

below) has a black background and a thick green border. The secondary version uses a

white background.

Purpose Can be used for show demonstrations with your own text.

624 Appendix B Image Reference

Custom

Description This image has a white border around the active video, a centered smaller yellow box, and

green diagonals.

Purpose This image is an example of some of the available drawing primitives. It is not intended to

be an image suitable for testing or adjusting a display. Rather, it can be used as a starting

point for developing a custom image of your own.

DeltaErr

Description Use with analyzer to test for flickering pixels in a static image. For more information, see

“Measuring pixel errors” on page 123.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 625

Diamond1

Description Special test image developed per customer specifications.

Dot1606, Dot1610, Dot1612, Dot1615, Dot1812, Dot1815, Dot2016

Description The primary version has white pixel dots on a black background. The secondary version

has black pixel dots on a white background.

The primary version of the Dot2016 image is shown below.

626 Appendix B Image Reference

Dot_10, Dot_12, Dot_24

Description The active video area is filled with multiple rows of white, single pixel dots. The dots define

the corners of what would appear to be square boxes if all connecting pixels were lit. The

number of rows of boxes and the number of boxes per row depends on which version of

the image is selected and the screen aspect ratio of the currently-loaded format. The

number in the image’s name refers to the number of boxes that will be formed along the

minor axis for most aspect ratios. The generator calculates the ratio and then finds the

closest match from the following table.

The primary version has white pixel dots on a black background. A secondary version has

black pixel dots on a white background.

The primary version of the Dot_24 image is shown below.

Purpose To accurately produce an image on a color monitor, the three electron beams in the CRT

must meet (converge) at the same location at the same time. Small dots displayed on a

misconverged monitor appear as a group of multi-colored dots.

Aspect Ratio Dot_10 Dot_12 Dot_24

W : H Decimal Number

of Rows

Boxes per

Row

Number

of Rows

Boxes per

Row

Number

of Rows

Boxes per

Row

16 : 9 1.777 É 10 16 10 16 18 32

5 : 3 1.666 É 10 16 10 16 18 30

4 : 3 1.333 É 10 14 12 16 24 32

1 : 1 1.000 10 10 12 12 24 24

3 : 4 0.750 14 10 16 12 32 24

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 627

Method The convergence adjustments of most color monitors fall into two main categories. The

first set of adjustments, usually called Static Convergence, aligns the three beams in the

center of the display. This method involves turning on all three guns and adjusting the

various magnets on the convergence assembly to produce all white dots in the center of

the display. The convergence assembly is located on the neck of the CRT. Different

monitors and CRT types may each require their own magnet-adjustment sequence.

After the center of the display is properly converged, the outer areas are adjusted by using

the monitor’s Dynamic Convergence controls. The number of controls, the area of the

screen they affect, and their adjustment procedure depends on the monitor under test.

Test Focus adjustments

Purpose An out-of-focus monitor displays fuzzy pixels which, in turn, result in poorly formed and

hard-to-read characters.

Method On monitors with a single (static) focus adjustment, adjust the control for the best average

focus over the entire screen. The focus at certain locations should be within specified

limits.

Some monitors have a static and one or more dynamic focus controls. The sequence for

adjusting them and the areas of the screen they affect depend on the monitor under test.

DV_Swing

Description This image is only available with DVI and HDMI. The DV_Swing image is used to

temporally change the digital video swing (DVSS format parameter) between 90 and 1620

mVp-p of the HDMI and DVI digital output for the active format. This image displays the

current video swing value over a graduated (ramp) background. This image is supported

by HDMI boards (revision F or later), and DVI boards with FPGA F1 or later.

628 Appendix B Image Reference

Note: The DVSC command can be used to set the swing value between 150 and 1500

mVp-p.

Method To adjust the swing in 4 mV increments, press the Step key, then turn the Image knob.

Press the Step key again to reset the digital swing value to the default value, which is 1000

mVp-p for all formats.

Dyna

Description This image has multiple versions that display different sizes of the same pattern. Version 0

is shown below.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 629

EdidData

Description Displays EDID from the display connected with the generator. For more information, see

page 171.

Elbit

Description Special test image developed per customer specifications. This image has 19 versions.

630 Appendix B Image Reference

EMITest1, EMITest2, EMITest3, EMITest4, EMITest5

Description Special test images used for electro-magnetic interference (EMI) testing of displays. The

entire active video area is filled with an “H” character. The primary versions of these

images draw white characters on a black background. The secondary versions draw black

characters on a white background. The EMITest1 image is shown below.

The EMITest2 image is the same as EMITest1, but with the bottom row of characters

constantly drawn left-to-right and then cleared.

The EMITest3 image is the same as EMITest1, but with a larger version of the “H”

character.

The EMITest4 image is the same as EMITest3, but with the bottom row of characters

constantly drawn left-to-right and then cleared.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 631

The EMITest5 image is shown below.

FlashGry

Description This image flashes a flat gray image at a high-frequency rate.

The image flashed on the display is shown below.

FlashRGB

Description This image flashes RGB colors at a high frequency rate.

632 Appendix B Image Reference

The image used as a background on the display is shown below.

Flat, Flat07, Flat13, Flat20, Flat27, Flat33, Flat40, Flat47, Flat53, Flat60, Flat67,

Flat73, Flat80, Flat87, Flat93, FlatGray, Flat_01, Flat_02, Flat_03, Flat_04,

Flat_05, Flat_06, Flat_07, Flat_08, Flat_09, Flat_10, Flat_11, Flat_12, Flat_13,

Flat_14, Flat_15, Flat_16

Description The entire active video area is filled with a shade of gray. Each image displays a different

shade of gray. The FlatGray image is shown below.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 633

Flat_B, Flat_G, Flat_R

Description The screen is filled with blue (B), green (G) or red (R). The Flat_B image is shown below.

Focus20

Description Primary version shown below. The secondary version has black characters on a white

background.

634 Appendix B Image Reference

FocusC14

Description Primary version shown below.The secondary version has black characters on a white

background.

FocusCCx

Description Primary version shown below. The secondary version has black characters on a white

background.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 635

FocusEM

Description Primary version shown below. The secondary version has black characters on a white

background.

FocusEMP

Description Primary version shown below. The secondary version has black characters on a white

background.

636 Appendix B Image Reference

FocusM00 - FocusM15

Description The FocusM00 image is shown below.

Focus_@6, Focus_@7, Focus_@8, Focus_@9

Description In the primary versions, the screen is filled with white “@” characters on a black

background. The secondary versions are drawn with black characters on a white

background. The primary version of the Focus_@6 image is shown below.

Test Focus adjustments

Purpose An out-of-focus monitor displays fuzzy graphic images and poorly formed, hard-to-read

text characters.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 637

Method On monitors with a single (static) focus adjustment, adjust the control for the best average

focus over the entire screen. The focus at certain locations of the screen should be within

specified limits.

Some monitors have a static and one or more dynamic focus controls. The sequence for

adjusting them and the areas of the screen that they affect depend on the monitor under

test.

Focus_Cx

Description In the primary version (shown below), the screen is filled with white Cx characters on a

black background. The secondary version is drawn with black characters on a white

background.

Test Focus adjustments

Purpose An out-of-focus monitor displays fuzzy graphic images and poorly formed, hard-to-read

text characters.

Method On monitors with a single (static) focus adjustment, adjust the control for the best average

focus over the entire screen. The focus at certain locations of the screen should be within

specified limits.

Some monitors have a static and one or more dynamic focus controls. The sequence for

adjusting them and the areas of the screen that they affect depend on the monitor under

test.

638 Appendix B Image Reference

Focus_H

Description In the primary version (shown below), the screen is filled with white H characters on a

black background. The secondary version is drawn with black characters on a white

background.

Test Focus adjustments)

Purpose An out-of-focus monitor displays fuzzy graphic images and poorly formed, hard-to-read

text characters.

Method On monitors with a single (static) focus adjustment, adjust the control for the best average

focus over the entire screen. The focus at certain locations of the screen should be within

specified limits.

Some monitors have a static and one or more dynamic focus controls. The sequence for

adjusting them and the areas of the screen that they affect depend on the monitor under

test.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 639

Focus_MM

Description In the primary version (shown below), the screen is filled with white M characters on a

black background. The secondary version is drawn with black characters on a white

background.

Focus_Oo

Description In the primary version (shown below), the screen is filled with white Oo characters on a

black background. The secondary version is drawn with black characters on a white

background.

Test Focus adjustments

640 Appendix B Image Reference

Purpose An out-of-focus monitor displays fuzzy graphic images and poorly formed, hard-to-read

text characters.

Method On monitors with a single (static) focus adjustment, adjust the control for the best average

focus over the entire screen. The focus at certain locations of the screen should be within

specified limits.

Some monitors have a static and one or more dynamic focus controls. The sequence for

adjusting them and the areas of the screen that they affect depend on the monitor under

test.

Format

Description A listing of the data contained in any format. The primary image lists the settings of the

format driving the display. The secondary image can be used to list the contents of any

stored format (via the Location field).

This pattern works best at display resolutions of at least 640 pixel by 480 lines.

FormatRx

Description Used by analzyer to view timing parameters measured from external signal. For more

information, see “Measuring timing of video signal” on page 114.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 641

GenOps

Description Provides key sequences and status of special operating modes. For more information, see

“Special operating modes” on page 18.

GenStats

Description Provides detailed information about the generator. For more information, see “Displaying

system information” on page 44.

Geom_1 - Geom_5

Description The primary version of the Geom_1 image is shown below. Secondary version is drawn

with black lines on a white background.

642 Appendix B Image Reference

Gray25, Gray40

Description The Gray25 image is shown below.

GrayBar

Description The primary version (shown below) has 16 full-height vertical graybars. The intensity of

the bars is shown below. The secondary version splits the field into a top and bottom half.

The bars in the bottom half of the screen are in reverse order.

Test Video color tracking (color monitors)

Purpose To verify that a color monitor accurately reproduces colors at all intensities.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 643

Method Perform the Brightness Control Adjustment and Brightness Uniformity tests first.

Changes in brightness from bar to bar should be uniform. All of the bars should appear as

an untinted gray at all levels.

Test Video gain linearity (monochrome monitors)

Purpose To check the video linearity (grayscale modulation)

Method Perform the Brightness Control Adjustment and Brightness Uniformity tests first.

Changes in brightness from bar to bar should be visible and uniform.

GrayL1, GrayL3

Description The GrayL1 image is shown below.

Grays5, Grays9, Grays11, Grays16, Grays32, Grays64

Description These images have the designated number of full-height vertical graybars.

644 Appendix B Image Reference

The Grays11 image is shown below.

GraysAll

Description Contains 256 grayscale versions, from 0 (full black) to 255 (full white).

Grill_11, Grill_15, Grill_22, Grill_33, Grill_44

Description The entire active video area is filled with alternating black and white stripes. The stripes

are drawn at different resolutions. Each of the stripes is four (4) pixels wide in the Grill_44

image and three (3) pixels wide in the Grill_33 image. Each of the stripes is two (2) pixels

wide in the Grill_22 image and one (1) pixel wide in the Grill_11 image.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 645

The primary versions draw vertical stripes. The secondary versions draw horizontal

stripes. The primary version of the Grill_44 image is shown below.

Test Verify monitor resolution

Purpose The resolution of your monitor should meet or exceed the design specifications.

Method First adjust the brightness, contrast, and focus to their correct settings. You should be able

to see individual and distinct stripes in all areas of the display at all four resolutions. Failure

to see distinct lines at the highest resolution (Grill_11) may indicate you have a defective

video amplifier or picture tube.

Note: If multi-colored lines appear on a mask-type color picture tube, you may have a

problem with convergence or you may be exceeding the resolution of the picture tube.

646 Appendix B Image Reference

HalfArea

Description Primary version shown below. Secondary version is drawn with black boxes and white

background.

HalfClk

Description

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 647

Hat1606, Hat1610, Hat1612, Hat1615

Description Primary version of Hat1606 is shown below. Secondary version is inversed.

Hat1606A, Hat1610A, Hat1612A, Hat1615A

Description Primary version of Hat1606A is shown below. Secondary version is inversed.

648 Appendix B Image Reference

Hat1812, Hat1815

Description Primary version of Hat1812 is shown below. Secondary version is inversed.

Hat1812A, Hat1815A

Description Primary version of Hat1812A is shown below. Secondary version is inversed.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 649

Hat2016

Description Primary version is shown below. Secondary version is inversed.

Hat2016A

Description Primary version is shown below. Secondary version is inversed.

650 Appendix B Image Reference

Hatch_6, Hatch_10i, Hatch_10o, Hatch_12i, Hatch_12o, Hatch_24i,

Hatch_24o, Hatch_24s, Hatch_G, Hatch_M, GRN_HTCH, and MAGENTA

Description The primary versions consist of a white, green (G and GRN), or magenta (M) crosshatch

drawn on a black background. The lines form square boxes. A single pixel dot is located in

the center of each crosshatch box. The number of boxes formed depends on the version

of the image selected and the screen aspect ratio of the currently loaded format. The

number in the image’s name refers to the number of boxes that are formed along the minor

axis for most aspect ratios. The generator calculates the ratio and then finds the closest

match from the table on the next page. Version names indicate the drawing method, as

follows:

• Versions ending in “i” draw from the inside (center) out. Any partial boxes are placed

around the perimeter of the image.

• Versions ending in “o” draw from the outside in. Any partial boxes are placed along the

centerlines of the image.

• Versions ending in “s” are the “i” version plus a 1-pixel thick border.

The secondary versions invert the images to black lines and dots on a white background.

Hatch_G, Hatch_M, GRN_HTCH and Magenta do not have secondary versions.

The primary version of the Hatch_10i image is shown below.

Aspect Ratio Dot_10 Dot_12 Dot_24

W : H Decimal Boxes

Vertically

Boxes

Horizon-

tally

Boxes

Vertically

Boxes

Horizon-

tally

Boxes

Vertically

Boxes

Horizon-

tally

16 : 9 1.777 É 10 16 10 16 18 32

5 : 3 1.666 É 10 16 10 16 18 30

4 : 3 1.333 É 10 14 12 16 24 32

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 651

Test Convergence adjustment (color monitors only)

Purpose To accurately produce an image on a color monitor, the three electron beams in the CRT

must meet (converge) at the same location at the same time. Lines displayed on a

misconverged monitor appear as several multi-colored lines, and the transitions between

different colored areas contain fringes of other colors.

Method The convergence adjustments of most color monitors fall into two main categories. The

first set of adjustments, usually called Static Convergence, aligns the three beams in the

center of the display. This method involves turning on all three guns and adjusting the

various magnets on the convergence assembly to produce all white dots in the center of

the display. The convergence assembly is located on the neck of the CRT. Different

monitors and CRT types may each require their own magnet adjustment sequence.

After the center of the display is properly converged, the outer areas are adjusted by using

the monitor’s Dynamic Convergence controls. The number of controls, the area of the

screen they affect, and their adjustment procedure depend on the monitor under test.

Hatch_16, Hatch_20

Description The primary version of the Hatch_16 image is shown below. The secondary versions draw

black lines on a white background.

1 : 1 1.000 10 10 12 12 24 24

3 : 4 0.750 14 10 16 12 32 24

Aspect Ratio Dot_10 Dot_12 Dot_24

652 Appendix B Image Reference

Hatch20

Description Primary version...The secondary version draws black lines on a white background.

Hatch4x3, Hatch5x4 and Hatch8x8

Description These are different versions of a crosshatch pattern that may be called for by some display

manufacturers’ test procedures. The primary version consists of white crosshatch and

circles on a black background. The secondary version inverts the image to black lines on a

white background.

The primary version of the Hatch4x3 image is shown below.

Purpose This is a general purpose test image that can be used to check and adjust video scan

linearity and geometry and color convergence.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 653

Hatch64W

Description This is a crosshatch pattern that may be called for by some manufacturers’ test

procedures. The primary version (shown below) consists of an 8x8 white crosshatch on a

black background. A white rectangular patch is added in the center. The secondary

version inverts the image to black lines and box on a white background.

Purpose

Method This is a general purpose test image that can be used to check and adjust video scan

linearity and geometry, and color convergence. The large white rectangle also allows for

checking a display’s high voltage regulation. This is done by observing the vertical lines at

the left and right edges of the image. They should be fairly straight and not pull in the area

of the white rectangle.

HdcpA1B1, HdcpA1B2, HdcpA2B1, HdcpA2B2, HdcpProd

Description Used with HDCP feature. For more information, see Chapter 11, “Testing HDCP.”

654 Appendix B Image Reference

Hitachi1

Description Special test image developed per customer specifications. The image consists of a 2x2

cluster of Microsoft Windows® screen simulations using Japanese characters.

HSVnRGB

Description

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 655

Imex1

Description

InFocus1

Description Special test image developed per customer specifications.

656 Appendix B Image Reference

InFocus2

Description Special test image developed per customer specifications.

KanjiKAN

Description In the primary version (shown below), the screen is filled with white Japanese Kan

characters on a black background. The secondary version is drawn with black characters

on a white background.

Test Focus adjustments

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 657

LGLCDTVB, LGLCDTVG, LGLCDTVR, LGLCDTVW

Description Special test image developed per customer specifications. Each image has three versions.

The primary version of the LGLCDTVB image is shown below.

LGRamp

Description Special test image developed per customer specifications. The image provides a

grayscale of two objects. The secondary version of the LGRamp image is shown below.

658 Appendix B Image Reference

Linearty (Linearity)

Description This image has three parts. The first part consists of six (6) white circles. A large circle is

drawn in the center of the screen. Its diameter equals the lesser of the video height or

width of the display. A smaller circle is drawn at half the diameter and concentric with the

larger circle. A circle also is drawn in each of the corners of the screen. The diameter of

the corner circles equals one-fifth of the display width.

The second part of the image consists of a white crosshatch. The number of boxes in the

crosshatch depends on the physical size of the display.

The last part of the image consists of white tic marks on the horizontal and vertical center

lines of the image. The marks are one pixel thick at every other pixel location. Every fifth

mark is slightly longer. The color of the pattern can be changed with the individual video

output controls.

Test Linearity adjustment

Purpose To present an undistorted display, the horizontal and vertical sweeps of the electron beam

across the face of the CRT should be at uniform speeds. Any non-uniformity in the sweep

causes portions of an image to stretch while other portions are compressed. Non-linearity

in a monitor shows up in several ways. It may be present across the entire screen, in a

large portion of the screen, or localized in a very small area.

Method The circles in the image can be used to do a general adjustment of a monitor’s linearity

controls. Adjust the controls to form perfectly round circles. The crosshatch image can be

used to measure linearity and to make finer control adjustments. All the full boxes in the

crosshatch should be identical in size. Measure them with a ruler or a gauge made for the

monitor under test. Any deviation should be within your specification limits. Use the tic

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 659

marks and a ruler or gauge to measure linearity over a small portion of the display.

Compare the number of tic marks per unit of measure with an adjacent or overlapping

area.

LinFocus

Description This image has several parts. The first part consists of a large circle in the center of the

screen. Its diameter equals the lesser of the video height or width of the display.

The second part is a 10x10 box crosshatch. The crosshatch is drawn in from the outside

edges, with any extra pixels in the boxes placed along the vertical and horizontal axis. The

vertical centerline is two pixels thick if the format has an even number of active pixels per

line. The horizontal centerline is two pixels thick if the format has an even number of active

lines per frame. A smaller box is added at the center of the image. The box is one-half the

height and two-fifths the width of one of the crosshatch boxes. Current format data is

shown in the lower left quadrant of the image. It shows the number of active pixels (H) and

lines (V) as well as the vertical and horizontal scan rates.

The primary version (shown below) consists of a white pattern on a black background. The

secondary version has a black pattern on a white background.

The image also includes blocks of focus-checking characters at various locations. The

blocks are positioned inside the crosshatch boxes and are up to 3x3 characters in size.

The size of the blocks is limited by the number of characters that can fit in one box.

Test Linearity adjustment

Method Please see the Linearity test image on “Linearty (Linearity)” on page 658 for information

on measuring linearity.

Test Focus adjustment

660 Appendix B Image Reference

Purpose An out-of-focus monitor displays fuzzy graphic images and poorly formed, hard-to-read

characters when text is displayed on the screen.

Method On monitors with a single (static) focus adjustment, adjust the control for the best average

focus over the entire screen. The focus at certain locations of the screen should be within

specified limits.

Some monitors have a static and one or more dynamic focus controls. The sequence for

adjusting them and the areas of the screen they affect depend on the monitor under test.

Master

Description

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 661

MoireX, MoireX33, MoireY, MoireY33

Description The MoireX and MoireY images consist of black lines on a white background across the

active video area. MoireX provides vertical lines; MoireY provides horizontal lines. The

MoireX image is shown below.

The primary version of the MoireX33 and MoireY33 images provide a black frame around

the black lines. The secondary version draws a white frame around black lines. The

primary version of the MoireX33 image is shown below.

662 Appendix B Image Reference

Monoscop

Description

MSony7, MSony8

Description Special test image developed per customer specifications. Primary version of the MSony7

image is shown below. The secondary version draws white boxes and characters with a

black background.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 663

MulBurst

Description

Orion

Description This image provides a color bar that rotates (shifts) the bars to the right on an incremental

basis.

The color bars are shifted to the right at 3 second intervals. After pressing the Step key,

turn the Image knob to adjust the interval between 3, 10, 30 and 60 seconds.

Outline0, Outline1, Outline2, Outline3

664 Appendix B Image Reference

Description The primary version of the Outline0 image consists of a rectangular white border on a

black background. The border is one (1) pixel wide and defines the active video area. Two

(2) diagonal lines join the opposite corners. A-full size cross is centered in the image. The

horizontal line of the cross is one (1) pixel thick for formats with an odd number of active

lines and two (2) pixels thick for formats with an even number of active lines. The vertical

line of the cross is one (1) pixel thick for formats with an odd number of active pixels per

line and two (2) pixels thick for formats with an even number of active pixels.

The secondary version of these images draw black lines on a white background.

In the Outline1 version, the two diagonal lines are removed and short marker lines are

added to the border lines near to where the cross lines meet the border lines. The markers

appear at both sides of the cross lines. The distance between the marker lines and the

cross lines is the greater of either two (2) pixels or one (1) millimeter.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 665

In the Outline2 version, the two diagonal lines are removed and short marker lines are

added to the corners, and where cross lines meet and end.

In the Outline3 version, the two diagonal lines are removed, cross lines are shortened, and

short marker lines are added.

Test Yoke tilt correction

Purpose The horizontal axis of a displayed image should line up with the horizontal axis of your

monitor. Any tilt is likely due to the yoke being rotated on the neck of the CRT. A rotated

yoke makes any displayed image appear rotated.

Method Place your monitor on a flat surface so the face of the CRT is perpendicular to the surface.

Use a ruler or gauge to measure the height of each end of the image’s horizontal center

line from the surface. The difference between the two readings should be within

666 Appendix B Image Reference

specification for the monitor. If it is out of specification, the yoke must be adjusted. Loosen

the hardware that clamps the yoke to the neck of the CRT and rotate the yoke until the line

is horizontal. Tighten the yoke-clamp hardware.

Test Yoke winding orthogonality check

Purpose The horizontal and vertical deflection coils on the yoke should have their axes cross at

exactly 90 degrees. Improper orientation of the windings causes displayed rectangles to

look more like nonorthogonal parallelograms. This type of defect is almost impossible to

correct with adjustments. It is usually easier to replace the defective yoke.

Method First, perform the yoke tilt correction described above. The vertical center line of the image

should be perpendicular to the work surface. If the deviation is beyond specification, the

monitor should be rejected and sent back for repair, rather than trying to magnet a

defective yoke.

Test Display size correction

Purpose A too-large active video size adjustment on a monitor may cause information to be lost

around the edges of the screen. A too-small active video size adjustment may make some

displayed information hard to read. The correct size is needed to obtain the correct aspect

ratio. You need the correct aspect ratio to get round circles and square squares.

Method First, determine the correct physical size of the active video area for the display. This

information usually is given in a display’s specification sheet or service manual. The size

should match the sizes in the format you are using. The size setting of the current format

can be checked using the Format test image.

Place a ruler or gauge along the horizontal line of the image and adjust the monitor's

horizontal size control until the distance between the end points matches the specified

value.

Move the ruler or gauge to the vertical line and adjust your monitor's vertical size control

until the distance between the end points matches the specified value.

Test Parallelogram distortion check

Purpose Parallelogram distortion is very difficult to correct with magnets because the correction

often causes barrel distortion. Therefore, you should decide early whether your monitor

meets this specification. The problem usually can be traced to the improper winding of the

yoke coils. If the problem is not too severe, it may be corrected by adding or adjusting

magnets on the yoke. However, if the distortion is excessive, it may be an indication of a

defective yoke which cannot be corrected with magnets.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 667

Method Measure the lengths of the two (2) diagonal lines. Any difference is an indication of

parallelogram distortion. The difference in readings should be within the specifications of

the monitor.

If the difference in the readings is too far beyond specification, the monitor should be

rejected and sent back for repair, rather than trying to magnet a defective yoke.

Test Trapezoid distortion correction

Purpose This image gives you a way to measure trapezoid distortion in your monitor. If the

distortion is not too severe, you may be able to correct it by adding or adjusting magnets

on the yoke.

Method Perform the yoke winding orthogonality check and parallelogram distortion check first to

avoid wasting time on a monitor with a defective yoke.

Measure the width of the image at the top and bottom of the display. Any difference in

readings should be within the specification limits. Measure the height of the image at both

sides of the display. Again, any difference in readings should be within specification limits.

If either of the differences is out of specification, the trapezoid distortion of the monitor is

out of specification.

Add or adjust magnets on the yoke to correct the problem. The pin and barrel distortion

correction should be repeated to make sure that it is still in specification.

Test Pin and barrel distortion correction

Purpose If perfectly linear sweep signals are sent to a perfectly wound deflection yoke mounted on

a perfect CRT, you would not necessarily get a perfectly formed raster. Instead you would

likely get a raster that had its corners stretched away from the center, resembling a pin

cushion. This distortion occurs because the geometry of the deflected electron beam does

not match the geometry of the tube face plate. Also, imperfections in the yoke or CRT may

affect this problem. In some cases one or more corners may be pulled towards the center

of the raster causing it to look like a barrel. Uncorrected raster distortion carries over as

distortion of the displayed image.

Method A slot gauge may be used to determine if the amount of pincushion or barrel distortion is

within limits. A basic slot gauge may consist of a piece of opaque film with at least two (2)

transparent slots in it. One slot is used for top and bottom distortion and the other is used

for the sides. By positioning the correct slot over each portion of the border line, the entire

line should be visible. If this cannot be done at all four sides, the monitor requires

correcting.

668 Appendix B Image Reference

There are two main ways of correcting pincushion distortion. The first involves placing or

adjusting magnets on the yoke. This is a trial-and-error method. However, skilled operators

develop a feel for how strong a magnet to use and how to place it in order to get the

desired correction. If any correction is performed, the trapezoid distortion correction

should be repeated.

The other correction method involves adding correction signals to the deflection signal

driving the yoke. This method is usually found in color monitors, where adding magnets to

the yoke would cause problems with convergence and purity. The type and number of

adjustments depends on the monitor being tested.

Description This image is a 6x6 white crosshatch without a border on a black background.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 669

Description This image is a 4x4 white crosshatch with a border on a black background.

Description This image is a 4x4 white crosshatch with a border and a small, centered white patch on a

black background.

670 Appendix B Image Reference

Description This image is an 8x8 white crosshatch with a border on a black background.

Description This image is an 8x8 white crosshatch with a border and a small, centered white patch on

a black background.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 671

Description 16x12 pixel white crosshatch with a border on a black background.

P6_Sony

Description 6x12 pixel white crosshatch with a border on a black background.

672 Appendix B Image Reference

Description 16x12 white crosshatch with a border and a small, centered white patch on a black

background.

Description This image is an all black active video area. The secondary version draws an all white

video area.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 673

Description This image is an all white active video area. The secondary version draws an all black

video area.

P10

Description Special test image developed per customer specifications. There are four versions of this

image.

After pressing the Step key, turn the Image knob to select up to 4 different versions of this

image.

674 Appendix B Image Reference

PacketRx

Description Displays the InfoFrame data received by HDMI receiver. For more information, see

“Testing HDMI transmit device InfoFrame capability” on page 127.

PacketTx

Description Displays the InfoFrame data transmitted from the HDMI transmitter. For more information,

see “Viewing InfoFrame contents” on page 161.

PdsCrt1

Description Special test image developed per customer specifications.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 675

PdsCrt2

Description Special test image developed per customer specifications.

Persist

Description In the primary version, 15 small white boxes move back and forth between diagonal guide

lines. The lines form 15 side-by-side tracks. The size of each box is scaled to the light

meter box size set by the MSIZ system parameter. The image does the following:

• The box in the center track (marked “1X”) moves one scan line vertically and one pixel

horizontally for each vertical frame of refresh.

• The seven boxes to the right of the center track (marked “2X” through “8X”) move 2, 3,

4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 pixels and lines per frame, respectively.

• The seven boxes to the left of the center track (marked “/2” through “/8”) move one scan

line vertically and one pixel horizontally for every 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 vertical frames

of refresh, respectively. These boxes are at the bottom of the tracks.

In cases where the next move would cause the box to move beyond the end of its track, it

immediately reverses and moves the correct distance in the opposite direction for the next

frame.

A continuously-running counter appears in the upper left corner of the image. The number

shown is the number of vertical frame refreshes that have occurred since the generator

was first powered up.

The secondary version draws a black image on a white background.

676 Appendix B Image Reference

An example of the primary version of the Persist image is shown below:

Test Phosphor persistence

Purpose The phosphors on the face of most CRTs continue to glow for a short period of time after

the electron beam has stopped energizing them. This phenomenon is called persistence.

A certain amount of persistence is desirable in most applications. It prevents a flickering of

a displayed image that most users would find objectionable. On the other hand, a CRT

with an overly long persistence time causes moving objects to leave a blurred trail.

Method A flickering in the slower moving boxes indicates that the combination of refresh rate and

phosphor persistence is not suitable for long-term viewing.

A fading tail left behind by the faster moving boxes indicates that the display may not be

suitable for viewing animated images.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 677

PgBar64H, PgBar64V

Description Special test image developed per customer specifications. The PgBar64H image is shown

below.

PgCB, PgCG, PgCR, PgCW, PgCWrgb

Description Special test image developed per customer specifications. Primary version of PgCB is

shown below. The secondary versions draw all white over the last bar.

678 Appendix B Image Reference

The PGCWrgb is shown below.

Philips1

Description Special test image developed per customer specifications.

PixelRep

Description Used to test HDMI pixel repetition. There are 10 different versions of this image to support

the different pixel repetition settings. For more information, see “Testing HDMI video pixel

repetition” on page 152.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 679

PRN24bit

Description This image displays pseudo-random noise using 24-bits-per-pixel color depth.

PRN_5, PRN_9

Description Used with analyer to verify the analyzer’s pseudo-random noise analysis capability. The

PRN_5 image introduces 5 pixel errors per color component, while the PRN_9 image

introduces 9 pixel errors per color component. For more information, see “Tes ti ng

accuracy of analyzer” on page 120.

The PRN_5 image is shown below.

‘

PulseBar

Description This image is intended for TV formats, but can be displayed with any format up to 100

MHz. The image looks like two vertical lines followed by a wide vertical bar on a display’s

screen. The first line is a sine-squared modulated pulse that fades from black to red and

680 Appendix B Image Reference

back to black. The pulse is 20 T for PAL and 12.5 T for NTSC formats. The second

narrower line is a 2 T white sine-squared pulse. T = 100 nSec for PAL and 125 nSec for

NTSC formats. The wide bar is white with sine-squared edges.

Test Video system testing

This multi-purpose pattern can be used with other instruments to check television K

factors. The modulated pulse can be used to check chrominance-to-luminance delay and

gain. The narrow white line can be used to measure short term linear distortion (K2T).

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 681

QuartBox

Description The primary version (shown below) has a single white box in the center of active video.

The size of the box is one-half the width and height of the active video area (a quarter of

the entire active video area). The secondary version draws a black box on a white

background.

Test Brightness control adjustment

Purpose The wrong brightness setting on your monitor may cause other tests such as Contrast,

Focus, and Beam Size to be invalid. An accurate brightness setting helps give repeatable

measurements throughout other tests. This version of the brightness box should be used if

the display’s specifications call for the brightness to be set with one-fourth of the screen lit.

Method Place your light meter probe within the center box and adjust the monitor’s brightness

control to obtain the required light meter reading.

Notes The color of the center box is a special color, named foreground. The FRGB command

can be used to change the default color of foreground to any RGB value.

IMGL quartbox: ALLU // loads QuartBox image

FRGB 122 122 122 // sets RGB color of box

After loading a different format, send the FRGB command again to set the box fill color.

If you want to draw your own box, use foreground as the fill color, and then use the FRGB

command to define the color of “foreground.” For example:

IMGL raster; ALLU // clears display

RECT foreground 100 100 100 100 dither100

FRGB 128 128 0

FRGB 192 192 64

682 Appendix B Image Reference

FMTL DMT0660; ALLU

FRGB 192 192 64

Ramp

Description This image provides an active video area starting from full black (+7.5 IRE) at one edge of

the screen to full white (+100 IRE) at opposite end of the screen.

There are 4 versions of this image—one for each edge of the display.

When selected, this image is displayed.

After pressing the Step key, turn the Image knob to change the image starting point to left,

right, top, or bottom.

RampX

Description This image provides a ramp image that continuously sweeps (moves) to the right on an

adjustable time basis.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 683

When selected, this image is displayed.

After pressing the Step key, the image moves to the right. Adjust the speed using the

Image knob (turn clockwise to slow down the image).

Ramp_B, Ramp_G, and Ramp_R

Description The active video area goes from full black (+7.5 IRE) at the left edge of the screen to full

blue (_B), green (_G), or red (_R) at the right edge. The Ramp_B image is shown below.

Test Video gain linearity

Method When viewed on a TV screen, the full range of grays should be visible. There should be no

color shifts visible.

684 Appendix B Image Reference

Raster

Description The primary version shows a totally black display (nothing being displayed). The

secondary version shows a totally white display.

Test Raster centering

Purpose Many monitor applications require that the displayed image or text fit completely within a

bezel that surrounds the CRT. This usually requires that you first center the blank raster on

the face of the CRT, and then center the image within the raster. Use this image for

centering the raster on the CRT.

Method Turn up your monitor’s brightness control until the raster is just visible. Adjust the raster’s

position and size using the size and raster centering controls. The raster centering

adjustment for many monochrome monitors consists of moving magnetic rings on the

deflection yoke.

Regulate

Description The image cycles between two (2) patterns. In the primary version, the first pattern is a

white outline that defines the edges of displayed video. The other pattern has the same

outline plus a solid white rectangle in the center. The size of the solid rectangle equals

95% of the height and width of displayed video. The speed of the cycle cannot be

changed. The secondary version has a thick white frame with a black center for the first

pattern and a solid white active video area for the other pattern.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 685

The first pattern of the primary version is shown below.

Test High voltage regulation

Method The size of the border should not change for each half of the image. The change in border

size between the two images should be within the specification limits of the monitor.

Samsung1, Samsung2

Description Special test images developed per customer specifications. The image consists of three

small simulations of Microsoft Windows® screens on a blue background (Samsung1) or

black background (Samsung2). A border and centered cross are formed with repeating

686 Appendix B Image Reference

groups of the characters “e” and “m”. The repeating characters are also used to form a

rectangular patch in the upper left hand corner and a circular area in the center of the

image. The secondary version of Samsung2 draws a white background.

Samsung3

Description Special test image developed per customer specifications.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 687

Samsung4

Description Special test image developed per customer specifications.

Samsung5

Description Special test image developed per customer specifications.

Samsung6

Description Special test image developed per customer specifications.

688 Appendix B Image Reference

SamsungB

Description Special test image developed per customer specifications.

SamsungT

Description Special test image developed per customer specifications. There are four versions of this

image. When selected, the following image is displayed.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 689

SlideBox

Description This image displays a 16x9 white crosshatch with a large white patch moving across the

screen.

To change the animation speed:

1. Load the SlideBox image.

2. Establish a terminal session with the generator (see page 14).

3. Enter the following commands:

ISUB 1

IVER 1

IMGU

DELX 10;

IMGU

DELX 20;

IMGU

690 Appendix B Image Reference

SlideX

Description This image displays a black background with a large white vertical bar moving across the

screen.

After pressing the Step key, the speed of vertical bar movement can be increased by

turning the Image knob (turn clockwise to speed up image).

To change the animation speed using the command-line interface:

1. Establish a terminal session with the generator (see page 14).

2. Load the SlideX image.

3. Enter the following commands:

ISUB 1

IVER 1

IMGU

DELX 10;

IMGU

DELX 20;IMGU

SMPTE133

Description This image is based on a recommended practice (RP-133) test pattern designed by the

Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (SMPTE). The original application was

used in testing and evaluating medical imaging monochrome displays. The image now is

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 691

used in many different display applications. The image is self-scaling as to the number of

active pixels and active lines used. Some of the image’s elements have minor differences

from the original SMPTE specification.

These differences are noted in descriptions of the individual elements.

• The image is drawn on a reference background having a 50% intensity level. The

background covers the entire active video area.

•Crosshatch – There are 10 boxes vertically. The number of horizontal boxes is based

on the physical aspect ratio determined by the HSIZ and VSIZparameters in the

currently loaded format. The boxes are perfectly square with any fractional spaces

placed around the outside edges of the image. The vertical lines are two (2) pixels thick

while the horizontal lines are two (2) scan lines thick. Small crosses indicate the

intersection of the horizontal and vertical lines when they are covered by other parts of

the image. All parts of the crosshatch are normally drawn using a 70% intensity level.

A 75% level is used in the secondary version.

•Resolution patch – The patch is made up of six (6) smaller boxes that are each about

6.25% of the height of the display. The boxes are made of alternating intensity (0 and

100%) stripes. The stripes run vertically and horizontally. The stripes may be one (1),

two (2) or three (3) pixels wide each. Details of the patch are shown in the lower half of

the following illustration. The patches are located in each corner of the main image and

in the center. They are oriented with the highest resolution and contrast boxes closest

to the outside corners. The 48%-53%, 48%-51% and 50%-51% level patches are

omitted in the secondary version.

•Grayscale boxes – Twelve (12) boxes at eleven (11) intensity levels are clustered

around the center of the main image. They start at 0% and increase in 10% steps to

692 Appendix B Image Reference

100% with two (2) boxes at a 50% level. All of the grayscale boxes are omitted in the

secondary version.

•Gamma check dither box – A small box is drawn inside the right-hand 50% grayscale

box. The box is half the width and height of the larger box. The box consists of a

checkerboard of alternate one-on and one-off pixels. The alternate pixels have levels

of 0 and 100%. This smaller box is not part of the original SMPTE specification and is

omitted in the secondary version.

•Contrast boxes – Two (2) boxes are drawn adjacent to the grayscale boxes. They are

at 0 and 100% levels. There are smaller boxes drawn inside each box at 5 and 95%

levels. The contrast boxes are omitted in the secondary version.

•Black and white windows – Two (2) horizontal bars are located above and below the

grayscale boxes. Their height equals 8% of the display height. There are half-size bars

centered in the larger bars. In the primary version, the dark portion of the windows is

at a 5% level and the bright portion is at a 95% level. Zero and 100% levels are used

in the secondary version.

•Border – A border line is drawn around the image. It is set in from the edges of

displayed video a distance equal to 1% of the displayed height and has a thickness

equal to 0.5% of the displayed height. The intensity level is the same as that of the

crosshatch lines.

•Circle – A large circle is centered in the image. It touches the top and bottom of the

active video area when the aspect ratio is wider than it is high (landscape-type display).

The circle touches the left and right sides of active video when the aspect ratio is taller

than it is wide (portrait-type display). The intensity level is the same as that of the

crosshatch lines. The circle is not part of the original SMPTE specification.

•Resolution data - The number of active pixels per line and the number of active lines

is shown as text below the lower black and white window. The pixel depth also is shown.

The intensity level of the text is the same as that of the crosshatch lines. The displaying

of the data is not part of the original SMPTE specification.

The secondary version adds a row of six (6) color bars above and below the

black-and-white windows. The order of the colors, from left to right, is red, green, blue,

cyan (g+b), magenta (r+b) and yellow (r+g). The top row is drawn at 100% intensity

levels and the bottom row is drawn at 50% intensity levels. Color bars are not part of

the original SMPTE specification.

Test Deflection linearity

Method If the overall height and width of the display’s active video area match the sizes in the

format, the large circle should be perfectly round. Each box in the crosshatch pattern

should be the same size and shape. For more information on testing linearity, refer to the

Linearty test image on page 658.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 693

Test High contrast resolution

Method All the 0 and 100% level stripes in all the resolution patches should be separate and

distinct.

Test Low contrast resolution and noise

Method All the mid-level 2 on - 2 off stripes in all the resolution patches should be visible and

distinct. This is a sensitive test for noise in the display’s video amplifiers.

Test Quick gamma check

Method The average brightness level of the small gamma dither box should match the brightness

of the larger surrounding box. This is a visual check to see if the display’s gamma

correction is producing the correct mid-level response.

Test Video gain linearity and gamma

Method The individual grayscale boxes all should be at their indicated levels. A small aperture

photometer is usually required to get accurate and repeatable readings.

Test Contrast and brightness check

Method On a display with properly adjusted brightness and contrast controls, both the 5% and

95% contrast boxes should be clearly visible inside their larger surrounding 0% and 100%

boxes.

Test Video amplifier stability

Method The two black-and-white windows should show sharp transitions between the smaller box

and the surrounding window. Streaking may be an indication of undershoot or overshoot

while ghost images may indicate a ringing problem.

Test Excessive overscan and off-center alignment

Method The entire border should be clearly visible on the face of the tube and not be hidden by the

edge of the glass or by any bezel.

Test Interlace flicker

694 Appendix B Image Reference

Method The horizontal 1 on - 1 off stripes in the resolution boxes should not have objectionable

flicker when shown with an interlaced format. Excessive flicker indicates that the

combination of the display’s CRT persistence and frame scan rate is below the persistence

time of the human eye.

SMPTEbar

Description This image is based on an engineering guideline (EG1-1990) test signal specified by the

Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (SMPTE). The SMPTE pattern, in turn,

is derived from an EIA standard test pattern (RS-189-A). The image, is set up to be

generated by an 801GX generator as an encoded TV output. It is designed for adjusting

the color settings of a television monitor by eye. It can also be used with a TV waveform

analyzer and vectorscope for testing video signal processors and color decoders. The

image is available on all models as a component RGB signal. Some of the image’s

elements have some differences from the original SMPTE specification.

These differences are given in descriptions of the individual elements.

• The upper 67% of the image consists of a series of color bars. These bars match the

order of the bars in the SMPTE and EIA patterns. They are similar to the 801GX’s

TVBar_75 image without the last black bar.

• The left side of the lower 25% of the image contains isolated -I and Q color difference

signals that match the original EIA and SMPTE patterns. The -I signal appears as a

bluish-gray bar and the Q signal appears as a purple bar on a TV monitor. The bars are

separated by a white (+100 IRE) bar.

• The right side of the lower 25% of the image contains a narrow 12.5 IRE gray bar. Due

to a hardware limitation on the 801GX, this portion of the pattern does not match the

original EIA and SMPTE patterns. The original patterns had +3.5 (blacker than black)

and +11.5 IRE bars separated by a +7.5 IRE (black) bar.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 695

• The remaining central 8% of the image contains a row of chroma set bars. These bars

are part of the SMPTE pattern but are not in the EIA pattern. The order of the

alternating color and black bars matches those in the SMPTE pattern.

Test Color video performance

Purpose This general purpose pattern can be used to check the video handling capabilities of most

parts of a television system.

Method When viewed on a TV screen, all of the upper color bars should be correct and in the order

shown. The hue and intensity of each bar should be uniform over the entire bar.

The image can be used with a TV waveform analyzer to check the performance of a video

system. The upper color bars, as they would appear on a waveform analyzer, are shown

on a previous page.

Test Color decoder performance

Purpose The image can used with a TV vectorscope to check for proper operation of a video color

decoder. Vectorscope signatures of the upper and lower portions of the image using

NTSC encoding can be found on the previous page.

Method The vectorscope signature for the color bars should hit the target test point for each color

on the vectorscope’s graticule. If you are using PAL encoded video, the signature will be

similar to the one shown for the TVBar_75 test image on page page 702.

The three “legs” of the vectorscope signature for the -I and Q color difference signals

should match the Burst, -I and Q reference lines on the vectorscope’s graticule.

The following tests are based on the original SMPTE guideline:

696 Appendix B Image Reference

Test Visual chroma gain adjustment

Method To perform this test, you must have a way of turning off the red and green guns in the

monitor under test. Turning off the red and green video components of the 801GX

generator’s video output will not work for this test.

This test uses the upper and central color bars. Switch off the red and green guns on the

monitor. This will produce four blue bars, separated by black bars. Adjust the chroma gain

so that the brightness of each outer blue bar is uniform over the entire bar. The gain is

correct when the bottom 10% of each bar is the same brightness as the rest of the bar.

Test Visual chroma phase adjustment

Method In order to perform this test, you must have a way of turning off the red and green guns in

the monitor under test. Turning off the red and green video components of the 801GX

generator’s video output will not work for this test.

This test uses the upper and central color bars. Switch off the red and green guns on the

monitor. This will produce four blue bars, separated by black bars. Adjust the chroma

phase so that the brightness of each of the two central blue bars is uniform over the entire

bar. The phase is correct when the bottom 10% of each bar is the same brightness as the

rest of the bar.

Test Visual black level adjustment

Method This test uses the lower right hand portion of the image. Reduce the black level until the

gray bar disappears. Slowly increase the black level until the bar just becomes clearly

visible.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 697

Sony6

Description Special test image developed per customer specifications.

Sony6WLC

Description Special test image developed per customer specifications.

698 Appendix B Image Reference

sRGBflat

Description For testing color response per Microsoft’s WinColorKit standard. This standard was

developed by Microsoft to standardize methods relating to the matching of colors

appearing on various displays (go to

http://www.microsoft.com/whdc/hwdev/tech/color/ColorTest.mspx for more details). There

are 38 different versions of this image to support this feature.

When selected, a flat image appears with a color that is remembered from the last time

the image was set up. The example below shows version 8 (Red1) of the sRGBflat image:

A small label in the upper left corner of the image indicates the Microsoft name for the

color that is currently being displayed (for example, “sRGB-Gray5”). Note that some of the

names that appear conflict with generator color names (for example, “sRGB-Gray5” is not

the same as the generator color “Gray5”).

After pressing the Step key, turn the Image knob to select up to 38 different versions of

this image. Each image displays another WinColorKit color.

Note: For more information of generator support for Microsoft WinColorKit, go to

http://www.quantumdata.com/support/kb/article.asp?kbid=100152.

Staircas, Stairs20

Description The active video area goes from full black at the left edge of the screen to full white at the

right edge. There are six (6) steps (Stairs20) or sixteen (16) steps (Staircas).

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 699

The Stairs20 image is shown below.

Test Video gain linearity

Method When viewed on a monitor’s screen, a black bar plus five (5) gray bars should be visible.

There should be no color shifts, and each of the bars should be uniform in color.

The image also can be used with an oscilloscope or TV waveform analyzer to check the

gain linearity and gamma correction of a video system.

Strokes0, Strokes1

Description This image may cited by some display manufacturers’ test procedures. The Strokes0

version consists of multiple groups of separated red, green and blue horizontal lines drawn

on a black background. The Strokes1 version consists of multiple groups of separated red,

green and blue diagonal lines drawn on a black background.

700 Appendix B Image Reference

The Strokes0 image is shown below.

Purpose These images are special-purpose test patterns used in test and alignment procedures

specified by some display manufacturers.

Text_9, Text_9T, Text_11, Text_12T, Text_16

Description In the primary versions, the screen is filled with random paragraphs of white text on a

black background. The amount of text is determined by the size of the font used and the

horizontal and vertical resolution of the format. The Text_16 image uses a larger font than

the Text_9 image. The secondary versions use black text on a white background.

The primary version of the Text_9 image is shown below.

Test Word processor simulation

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 701

Purpose If your monitor is used in word processor workstations or other applications that call for

large amounts of text to be displayed, you can use this image to simulate actual user

conditions.

Method Select a suitable font size and text color. Adjust your monitor’s brightness and contrast

controls to obtain the best image. The characters in all areas of the display should be well

formed and in focus.

TintAlign

Description

Toshiba

Description Special test image developed per customer specifications. There are two sub images, the

secondary image is depicted below. The top half of the image has three small boxes (red,

green, blue) with the upper left half at 92.7% luminence and the upper right half at 50%

702 Appendix B Image Reference

luminence. There is a series of 11 small boxes of increasing luminence left to right with the

luminence identified in text. The lower left quarter of the image is 28.5% luminence and

the lower right is magenta at 44.3 IRE.

TVBar100 & TVBar_75 (TV formats only)

Description The image consists of seven vertical bars that fill the entire active video area. The color

and order of the bars is shown in the figure below. The TVBar100 image has a peak video

level of 100 IRE and the TVBar_75 image has a peak video level of 75 IRE.

The TVBar100 image is shown below.

Test Color video performance

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 703

Purpose This general purpose pattern can be used to check the video handling capabilities of most

parts of a television system.

Method When viewed on a TV screen, all of the colors should be correct and in the order shown.

The hue and intensity of each bar should be uniform over the entire bar.

The image can be used with a TV waveform analyzer to check the performance of a video

system. Individual scan lines of each image, as they would appear on a waveform

analyzer, are shown on the following page.

The image is quite effective when used with a TV vectorscope to see how a video system

handles an encoded color signal.The image consists of a white crosshatch on a black

background. The lines form square boxes when the display’s active video area has a 4:3

aspect ratio. The vertical lines are made using sine-squared (2 T) pulses (T = 125 nSec for

NTSC and T = 100 nSec for PAL).

Test Convergence adjustment

Purpose To accurately produce an image on a color monitor, the three electron beams in the CRT

must meet (converge) at the same location at the same time. Lines displayed on a

mis-converged monitor will appear as several multi-colored lines, and the transitions

between different colored areas will contain “fringes” of other colors.

Method The convergence adjustments of most color monitors can be divided into two main

categories. The first set of adjustments, usually called “Static Convergence,” calls for

aligning the three beams in the center of the display. This method involves turning on all

three guns and adjusting the various magnets on the convergence assembly to produce

all white lines and dots in the center of the display. The convergence assembly is located

on the neck of the CRT. Different monitors and CRT types may each require their own

magnet adjustment sequence.

704 Appendix B Image Reference

After the center of the display is properly converged, the outer areas can be adjusted by

using the monitor’s “Dynamic Convergence” controls. The number of controls, the area of

the screen that they affect and their adjustment procedure is dependent upon the monitor

under test.

Test Sweep linearity adjustment

Purpose To present an undistorted display, the horizontal and vertical sweeps of the electron beam

across the face of the CRT should be at uniform speeds. Any non-uniformity in the sweep

will cause portions of an image to be stretched while other portions will be compressed.

Non-linearity in a monitor can show up in several ways. It may be present across the entire

screen, a large portion of the screen, or it may be localized in a very small area.

Method Adjust the display’s linearity controls so that all of the boxes in the crosshatch are identical

in size. You can measure the boxes with a ruler or with a gauge made for the monitor

under test. Any deviation should be within your specification limits.

Taffeta

Description

TVoutLin

Description Equivalent to Outline1 image but it uses anti-aliasing for vertical bars and double

horizontal lines, which reduces flickering.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 705

TVSplBar

Description Special test image developed per customer specifications.

706 Appendix B Image Reference

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 707

CError Messages

Topics in this appendix:

•System errors

•Format errors

•Error code descriptions

708 Appendix C Error Messages

System errors

This section discusses system error messages that may be displayed by the generator

from time to time.

Power-on self test messages

The integrity of the data stored in non-volatile memory is checked every time the generator

is turned on. The following tests are performed:

1. The system configuration memory is checked. The memory remembers what the

generator was doing when it was last powered down. The memory also stores all

system wide parameters such as calibration factors and the light meter size. It is also

checked to see if it is compatible with the current version of operating firmware. If

everything is in order, then the generator goes on to step 2.

Otherwise, a “System corrupt!” message is displayed for 2 seconds. This message is

immediately followed by a “Memory blank” message, which is displayed for 2 seconds

while the format memory is re-initialized. Memory initialization involves clearing the

entire non-volatile memory and loading it with factory default data. Any and all data

created or edited by the user will be wiped out. The calibration factors are restored to

the original values used at the factory to test and calibrate the unit. The generator then

continues with step 3.

Note: System corruption is rare, and may be an indication of a bad memory backup

battery or a damaged generator.

Note: If you update the firmware EPROM in your unit, your system will appear to be

corrupt at the next power-on.

2. The remainder of non-volatile memory is checked to see if any data has been corrupted

since the last time the generator was used. This check includes each of the 300 format

storage locations. All user created custom images and test sequences are also

checked. If no problems are found, the generator goes on to step 3.

If one (or more) items have been corrupted, a message containing a tally of the

defective items is displayed for 2 seconds. A message for two corrupted items is shown

here. Please note that the checking routine does not identify the types of items (format,

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 709

custom image or test sequence) that are corrupted. It is up to the user to check the

contents of the individual items. Attempting to load a corrupted item will report and error

for that item.

A corrupted format can be repaired be either editing it or by downloading a new set of

data from a computer.

In most cases, a corrupted custom image or test sequence can not be repaired. This is

due to the variable data structure used. You will need to recreate and save the data

back into memory.

Repeated corruption of the data in non-volatile memory usually indicates a weak

battery. Battery replacement information can be found in the chapter on Maintenance.

3. A power-on message, indicating the current firmware and hardware revision levels, will

appear for 2 seconds at the end of the self test procedure.

If an animated image is displayed at power on, this message will not disappear until a

button is pushed or a knob is turned.

Power fail message

Whenever the AC power line voltage dips below the minimum specified, this message is

displayed and the generator’s microprocessor is halted.

If you see this message during normal operation, it probably indicates that a power sag or

short duration drop-out has occurred. To clear this condition, cycle the power going to the

generator. If the power is good, the generator should resume normal operation. If you still

have a problem, you may also want to check to see that the line voltage selector (next to

the power inlet) is set correctly for the power being fed into the generator.

710 Appendix C Error Messages

Format errors

Under normal operating conditions, a properly programmed model 801GX generator

should never report any Format error messages. If you do get an error message while

loading a format it is for one of two reasons. The generator distinguishes between invalid

data, entered in one of the programming modes, and corrupted data caused by a memory

failure. In either case, the generator will shut all of its outputs off. The outputs remain off

until a valid format is loaded.

Invalid data error messages

The example on the left shows a typical invalid data error message. The top line of the

display shows the format’s storage location number and name. The bottom line shows the

error number. Error numbers will be in the range of 2000 through 2999. Different numbers

indicate what type invalid data or combination of data is causing the error.

The following pages explain the cause of each of the error numbers and offers

suggestions on how to correct the problem.

Corrupt data error messages

The example on the left shows a corrupted data error message. The top line of the display

shows the format’s storage location number and name. The bottom line shows the error

number. Error number 9450 identifies the cause of the error as corrupted data. This type

of error either indicates the signs of a failing memory backup battery or a more serious

hardware failure in the generator.

Corrupted formats can corrected by either editing them or by downloading a clean copy of

the format from a computer. The “Programming” chapter explains both methods in detail.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 711

Error code descriptions

2000-2999 Format errors

2030 Number of fields per frame less than 1

A valid video format must have at least one (1) vertical filed of video per frame.

2040 Number of fields per frame greater than 2

The generator hardware configuration does not support interlaced video formats having

more than two (2) vertical fields per frame.

2041 Can not repeat field if progressive

Repeat field operation is only supported in interlaced video formats.

2050 Horizontal total too small

The video format’s total (active + blanked) number of pixel clock cycles per horizontal scan

line is below the minimum number supported by the generator hardware configuration.

2060 Horizontal total too large

The video format’s total (active + blanked) number of pixel clock cycles per horizontal scan

line is greater than the maximum number supported by the generator hardware

configuration.

2071 Pixel rate too high

The video format’s total (active + blanked) number of pixel clock cycles per horizontal scan

line multiplied by the horizontal scan rate exceeds the maximum pixel clock frequency

supported by the generator hardware configuration for the format’s video type.

2072 Pixel clock rate too high for pixel depth

The video format’s pixel depth combined with the total (active + blanked) number of pixel

clock cycles per horizontal scan line and horizontal scan rate exceeds the maximum

internal video data bit rate supported by the generator hardware configuration. The pixel

depth and/or total number of pixels per line need to be reduced in order to keep the current

horizontal scan rate.

2073 Pixel rate justification too high

The target pixel clock rate selected for justification of the video format exceeds the

generator hardware configuration.

2074 Pixel depth not supported

The video format’s pixel depth is not supported by the generator hardware configuration.

712 Appendix C Error Messages

2075 Analog composite sync type not supported

The video format’s analog video composite sync type selection is not supported by the

generator hardware configuration.

2076 Digital sync composite type not supported

The video format’s digital composite sync type selection is not supported by the generator

hardware configuration.

2077 Number of digital links not allowed

The number of serial digital video data links in the video format exceeds the number of

links supported by the current firmware.

2078 Digital sync separate type not allowed for HDTV formats

The generator hardware configuration does not support digital separate sync for the

specific video type selection in the video format

2079 Number of links not supported

The number of serial digital video data links in the video format exceeds the number of

links supported by the generator hardware configuration.

2080 Pixel rate too low

The video format’s total (active + blanked) number of pixel clock cycles per horizontal scan

line multiplied by the horizontal scan rate is less than the minimum pixel clock frequency

supported by the generator hardware configuration for the format video type.

2082 Number of bits not allowed

The generator hardware configuration does not support the number of data bits per color

for the serial digital video type selected in the video format.

2083 Invalid quantizing mode

An invalid value has been specified for the DVQM parameter.

2084 Invalid Pixel Repetition

In digital mode, double clocking is not supported for this specific hardware. This error may

be the result of an older FPGA or hardware.

2085 Invalid Sampling Mode

The value specified for DVSM is not valid and is inconsistent with the setting of DVST.

2090 Horizontal total not even

The generator hardware configuration does not support interlaced video formats with a

total (active + blanked) number of pixel clock cycles per horizontal scan line that is not

evenly divisible by 2.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 713

-OR-

The generator hardware configuration does not support a video format with a total (active

+ blanked) number of pixel clock cycles per horizontal scan line that is not evenly divisible

by 2 for the selected analog or digital composite sync type.

2091 Horizontal total not a multiple of 4

The generator hardware configuration does not support a video format with a total (active

+ blanked) number of pixel clock cycles per horizontal scan line that is not evenly divisible

by 4. Mostly applies to video formats using serial digital video.

2092 Horizontal resolution not even

Number of active pixels per line must be evenly divisible by 2 for the given video format

type and generator hardware configuration.

2093 Horizontal sync pulse width not even

Number of pixel clock cycles in the horizontal sync pulse width must be evenly divisible by

2 for the given video format type and generator hardware configuration.

2094 Horizontal sync pulse delay not even

The number of pixel clock cycles in the horizontal sync pulse delay must be evenly

divisible by 2 for the given video format type and generator hardware configuration.

2096 Horizontal resolution not a multiple of 4

The generator hardware configuration does not support a video format with a number of

active pixels per horizontal scan line that is not evenly divisible by 4. Mostly applies to

video formats using serial digital video.

2097 Horizontal sync pulse width not a multiple of 4

The generator hardware configuration does not support a video format with the number of

pixel clock cycles in the horizontal sync pulse width not evenly divisible by 4. Mostly

applies to video formats using serial digital video.

2098 Horizontal sync pulse delay not a multiple of 4

The generator hardware configuration does not support a video format with the number of

pixel clock cycles in the horizontal sync pulse delay not evenly divisible by 4. Mostly

applies to video formats using serial digital video.

2099 JRAT greater than 200MHz not allowed

The 802BT generator does not support a setting of JRAT greater than 200MHz.

714 Appendix C Error Messages

2130 Horizontal active too small

The number of active pixels per horizontal scan line is less than the minimum supported

by the generator hardware configuration.

2140 Horizontal blanking too small

The video format’s horizontal blanking period expressed in microseconds and/or number

of pixel clock cycles is not supported by the generator hardware configuration.

2141 Horizontal blanking too small

Same as Error number 2140. Found in some firmware releases for different generator

hardware configurations.

2150 Horizontal blanking too small

Same as Error number 2140. Found in some firmware releases for different generator

hardware configurations.

2151 Horizontal total less than horizontal resolution

The video format’s total (active + blanked) number of pixel clock cycles per horizontal scan

line can not be less than the number of active pixels per scan line.

2152 Horizontal resolution too large or Horizontal blanking too small

Same as Error number 2140. Found in some firmware releases for different generator

hardware configurations.

2155 Horizontal blanking too small

Same as Error number 2140. Found in some firmware releases for different generator

hardware configurations.

2180 Horizontal pulse width too small

The generator hardware configuration does not support video formats having horizontal

sync pulse widths less than one pixel clock cycle long.

2181 Horizontal sync pulse width not even

Number of pixel clock cycles in the horizontal sync pulse width must be evenly divisible by

2 at the current pixel clock rate for the video format and generator hardware configuration.

2190 HSPW too small for HDTV sync

The generator hardware configuration does not support video formats having horizontal

sync pulse widths less than two pixel clock cycles long for the current video and HDTV

sync type selections.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 715

2191 HSPW must be even for HDTV sync

The number of pixel clock cycles in the horizontal sync pulse width must be evenly

divisible by 2 for the current video and HDTV sync type selections.

2200 Horizontal pulse width too large

The generator hardware configuration does not support a horizontal sync pulse width that

is greater than the horizontal blanking period.

2201 Horizontal pulse delay not even.

The number of pixel clock cycles in the horizontal sync pulse delay must be evenly

divisible by 2 at the current pixel clock rate for the video format and generator hardware

configuration.

2205 Frame sync pulse width too small

The generator hardware configuration does not support a Frame Sync pulse width less

than horizontal scan period.

2206 Frame sync pulse width too large

The Frame Sync pulse width can not be greater than the total (active + blanked) number of

horizontal scan lines in one frame of video.

2207 Probe sync pulse width too small

The probe sync pulse width is less than minimum supported by the generator hardware

configuration.

2208 Probe sync pulse width too large

The probe sync pulse width is greater than maximum supported by the generator

hardware configuration.

2230 Horizontal pulse delay extends sync beyond blanking

The generator hardware configuration does not support the video format’s combination of

horizontal sync pulse delay and pulse width that places any portion of the horizontal sync

pulse outside of the horizontal blanking period.

2231 Vertical serration adjustment too big

The video format’s HVSA setting beyond the maximum limit for the video type selected

and generator hardware configuration.

2240 Vertical total too small

The total (active + Blanked) number of horizontal scan lines per frame a progressive scan

(non-interlaced) video format is lees than the minimum supported by the generator

hardware configuration.

716 Appendix C Error Messages

2250 Vertical total too small for interlaced format

The total (active + blanked) number of horizontal scan lines per frame is less than the

minimum number supported by the generator hardware configuration.

2270 Vertical total is even

The generator hardware configuration does not support interlaced scan video formats

having an even total (active + blanked) number of horizontal scan lines per frame.

2280 Vertical total too large

The total (active + blanked) number of horizontal scan lines per frame exceeds the

maximum limit for the generator hardware configuration.

2300 Vertical active too small

The active number of horizontal scan lines per frame of a progressive scan

(non-interlaced) video format is less than the minimum supported by the generator

hardware configuration.

2310 Vertical blanking too small

The number of blanked horizontal scan lines per frame for a progressive scan

(non-interlaced) video format is less than the minimum supported by the generator

hardware configuration.

2320 Vertical active too small for interlaced format

The active number of horizontal scan lines per frame of an interlaced video format is less

than the minimum supported by the generator hardware configuration.

2321 Vertical active not even

The generator hardware configuration does not support interlaced scan video formats

having an odd active number of horizontal scan lines per frame.

2330 Vertical blanking too small for interlaced format

The number of blanked horizontal scan lines per frame for an -interlaced video format is

less than the minimum supported by the generator hardware configuration.

2350 Vertical pulse too small

The vertical sync pulse width is less than the minimum supported by the generator

hardware configuration.

2370 Vertical pulse too large

The vertical sync pulse width is greater than the maximum supported by the generator

hardware configuration.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 717

2390 Vertical pulse too large for interlaced format

The vertical sync pulse width combined with the number of pre and post-equalization

pulses for an interlaced format is greater than the maximum supported by the generator

hardware configuration.

2391 Incompatible analog composite sync & digital composite sync types

The generator hardware configuration does not support the video format outputting both

analog composite sync and digital composite sync type selections at the same time.

2392 Incompatible analog composite sync & digital separate sync types

The generator hardware configuration does not support the video format outputting both

analog composite sync and digital separate sync type selections at the same time.

2393 Analog composite sync type not compatible with analog video type

The generator hardware configuration does not support the video format’s analog

composite sync type being added to the current analog video type.

2394 ACS available on green only

The generator hardware configuration supports adding analog composite sync to only the

green analog video output

2395 Sync type selection incompatible with analog video type selection

The video format’s analog video type selection requires the use of analog composite sync.

2396 Invalid analog composite sync type

The current firmware does not support the format’s analog composite sync type parameter

value (ASCT setting) or the generator hardware configuration does not support a video

format’s analog composite sync type for non-interlaced operation.

2397 Invalid digital composite sync type

The current firmware does not support the format’s digital composite sync type parameter

value (DSCT setting) or the generator hardware configuration does not support a video

format’s digital composite sync type for non-interlaced operation.

2398 Invalid digital separate sync type

The current firmware or generator hardware configuration does not support the format’s

digital separate sync type parameter value (DSST setting)

2399 Invalid sync type selection

The current firmware does not support the format’s active sync type selection (SSST

setting).

718 Appendix C Error Messages

2400 Analog composite sync type and digital separate sync type incompatible

The generator hardware configuration does not support analog composite sync and digital

separate sync being active at he same time for the given analog composite sync type

parameter value (ASCT setting) and digital separate sync type parameter value (DSST

setting).

2401 Invalid horizontal sync pulse delay

The generator hardware configuration does not support the format’s current horizontal

sync pulse delay setting

2405 Frame sync pulse delay negative

The video format’s frame sync pulse delay setting must be zero or a positive number.

2406 Frame sync pulse delay too large

The video format’s frame sync pulse delay setting exceeds the maximum limit supported

by the generator hardware configuration.

2407 Negative probe sync pulse vertical delay

The video format’s probe pulse vertical delay setting must be zero or a positive number.

2408 Probe sync pulse vertical delay too large

The video format’s probe pulse vertical delay setting exceeds the maximum limit

supported by the generator hardware configuration.

2409 Negative probe sync pulse horizontal delay

The video format’s probe pulse horizontal delay setting must be zero or a positive number.

2410 Probe sync pulse horizontal delay too large

The video format’s probe pulse horizontal delay setting exceeds the maximum limit

supported by the generator hardware configuration.

2425 Sync type selection not supported

The current firmware does not support the video format’s active sync type selection (SSST

setting) or the active sync type selection is not supported by the current analog video type

selection (AVST setting).

2430 Vertical pulse delay extends sync beyond blanking

The generator hardware configuration does not support non-interlaced video formats

having a vertical sync pulse period greater that the vertical blanking period

2450 Vertical pulse delay extends sync beyond blanking

The generator hardware configuration does not support interlaced video formats having a

vertical sync pulse period greater that the individual blanking periods between the fields.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 719

2465 Pixel clock pulse gate = 1 and pixel depth = 8

The generator hardware configuration does not support outputting a pixel clock output

when the video format’s pixel depth is eight bits-per-pixel.

2466 Pixel clock pulse gate = 1 not allowed

The generator hardware configuration does not support a pixel clock output.

2490 EQ before too large

The video format’s number of lines of pre-equalization for analog or digital composite sync

must not exceed the number of lines of vertical sync pulse delay.

2495 EQ after too large for interlaced format

The interlaced video format’s number of lines of post-equalization for analog or digital

composite sync must not exceed the number of scan lines from the end of the vertical

sync pulse to the start of video for either field.

2496 EQ after too large

The non-interlaced video format’s number of lines of post-equalization for analog or digital

composite sync must not exceed the number of scan lines from the end of the vertical

sync pulse to the start of video.

2550 Not enough video memory

The generator hardware configuration does not have enough video memory to support the

video format’s combination of active pixels per line (HRES setting) and active lines per

frame (VRES setting).

2551 Insufficient memory

Not implemented at the time this document was created.

2553 No PCMCIA card found in drive

When attempting to download a bitmap no PCMCIA card was detected in the generator’s

PCM slot.

2554 PCMCIA card is write-protected

When attempting to download a bitmap to a PCMCIA card, the PCM card was

write-protected.

2555 PCMCIA card is bad

When attempting to download a bitmap to a PCMCIA card, the PCM card was found to be

bad.

720 Appendix C Error Messages

2704 Invalid horizontal physical size

The video format’s horizontal physical size value can not be negative.

2705 Invalid physical size units

The current firmware does not support the type number used for the video format’s units of

measure for physical size (USIZ setting).

2706 Invalid vertical physical size

The video format’s vertical physical size value can not be negative.

2714 Pedestal swing out of range

The video format’s blanking pedestal level (AVPS setting) can not be less that 0.0% of the

peak video level or more than 100.0% of the peak video level.

2715 Gamma correction out of range

The current firmware does not support a video format’s gamma correction factor (GAMA

setting) of less than 0.1 or greater than 10.

2716 Analog video swing out of range

The generator hardware configuration does not support the video format’s analog video

swing value (AVSS setting) for the given analog video type selection.

2717 Sync swing out of range

The generator hardware configuration does not support the video format’s analog video

composite sync swing value (ASSS setting) for the given analog video type selection.

2719 Video swing calibration out of range

The generator hardware configuration does not support the current user defined analog

video swing calibration factors (AVSC settings) for one or more of the red, green or blue

channels. The valid factory default setting is 1.00 for all three channels.

2720 Sync swing calibration out of range

The generator hardware configuration does not support the current user defined analog

video composite sync swing calibration factors (ASSC settings) for one or more of the red,

green or blue channels. The valid factory default setting is 1.00 for all three channels.

2721 NTSC TV signals require blanking pedestal

The generator hardware configuration does not support producing NTSC TV video outputs

that do not use a blanking pedestal (AVPG setting of 0) as required by the NTSC

specifications.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 721

2722 Blanking pedestal out of range for NTSC TV signal

The generator hardware configuration does not support producing NTSC TV video outputs

that do not use a nominal blanking pedestal level (AVPS setting) of 7.5 IRE as required by

the NTSC specifications.

2741 Digital video signal type not supported

The generator hardware configuration does not support any type of digital video outputs.

2742 Invalid digital video signal type

The current firmware does not support the format’s digital video type selection (DVST

setting).

2743 Digital video polarity not positive

The generator hardware configuration and/or the firmware does not support digital video

formats having a logic low level for the active (lit) pixels.

2745 Can not have analog AND digital video

The generator hardware configuration does not support the simultaneous generation of

analog and digital video signals.

2747 Invalid analog video signal type

The current firmware for a given model generator does not support the video format’s

analog video type selection.

2748 Analog video signal type not supported

The generator hardware configuration does not support the video format’s analog video

type selection.

2760 Digital video not supported

The generator hardware configuration does not support the video format’s digital video

type selection.

2761 Digital video signal swing out of range

The value specified for the digital video signal swing is out of range.

2762 Digital video swing calibration out of range

The value specified for the digital video swing calibration is out of range.

2800 Pseudo-random noise seed value exceeds limit

The seed value for the pseudo-random noise analysis exceeds its maximum value.

722 Appendix C Error Messages

2801 Pseudo-random noise sequence exceeds limit

The length of the pseudo-random noise sequence exeeds maximum value.

2802 Pseudo-random noise type is not supported

The pseudo-random noise type is not supported.

2803 No signal input to analyzer

There is no signal input to the receive interface of the analyzer.

2804 X coordinate for delta patch out-of-range

The value specified for the X coordinate of the delta patch test is out-of-range.

2805 Y coordinate for delta patch out-of-range

The value specified for the Y coordinate of the delta patch test is out-of-range.

2806 Patch height must be greater than one

The patch height specified for a delta error test must be greater than one.

3000-3999 Image errors

3000 Invalid color name

The current firmware does not support a named color used by one or more primitives in

the user defined custom image

3001 Invalid pattern name

The current firmware does not support a named fill patterns used by one or more

primitives in the user defined custom image

3002 No image memory

There is not enough unused edit buffer memory space available to start a new custom

image editing session.

3004 Invalid font name

The current firmware does not support a named font used by one or more primitives in the

user defined custom image

3005 Image editor running

The current firmware does not allow a new custom image editing session to be started

while the current custom image editing session is still running.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 723

3006 Nothing to save

An attempt was made to save the contents of a custom image editing buffer when there

was no open custom image editing session to save.

3007 Overwrite ROM Image

A user defined test image can not be saved using the same name as that of a built-in test

image (case insensitive).

3008 Image save failed

Saving the contents of the custom image editing buffer failed for a reason other than those

reported by error codes 3005 or 3006.

3010 R, G or B 8-Bit video DAC setting out of range

A combination of system calibration factors, user calibration multiplier settings and video

output level settings have resulted in one or more calculated input values to go below zero

or above the analog video Digital-to-Analog Converter’s maximum limit of 255.

3011 R, G or B 6-Bit video DAC setting out of range

A combination of system calibration factors, user calibration multiplier settings and video

output level settings have resulted in one or more calculated input values to go below zero

or above the analog video Digital-to-Analog Converter’s maximum limit of 63.

3015 R, G or B 10-Bit video DAC setting out of range

A combination of system calibration factors, user calibration multiplier settings and video

output level settings have resulted in one or more calculated input values to go below zero

or above the analog video Digital-to-Analog Converter’s maximum limit of 1023.

3020 Kill EPROM image

Built in test images can not be removed from the firmware.

3025 Image not found

A test image of a given name could not be found as either a built-in test image in the

firmware or as a user defined custom image.

3050 Grayscale video DAC setting out of range

One or more internal calculations have resulted in an analog video DAC input grayscale

setting below zero or greater than 100% video level.

724 Appendix C Error Messages

4000-4999 Test sequence errors

4000 Invalid format name

The test sequence contains one or more steps that have an invalid format name

parameter.

4001 Invalid image name

The test sequence contains one or more steps that have an invalid image name

parameter.

4002 No sequence memory

There is not enough unused edit buffer memory space available to start a new test

sequence editing session.

4003 Sequence memory full

There is not enough free battery backed user storage memory to save the sequence that

is in the edit buffer.

4004 Sequence not found

A test sequence of the given name could not be found in the user storage memory area.

4005 Sequence editor running

The current firmware does not allow a new test sequence editing session to be started

while the current test sequence editing session is still running.

4006 No sequence to save

An attempt was made to save the contents of a test sequence editing buffer when there

was no open test sequence editing session to save.

4007 Sequence buffer full

No more steps can be added to the current sequence being edited because no more edit

buffer space is available.

4008 Invalid delay setting in sequence

The test sequence contains one or more steps that have a negative number for the step

delay time.

4010 Font index out of range

An attempt was made to use a font at an index location that is less than zero (0) or greater

than the highest index number in use.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 725

4020 No font present at given index

Attempt to access a font at a valid index but the specified index is empty because of a

previous delete.

4030 Invalid font location

Can not install a font that has not first been transferred to memory.

4040 Sequence is running

A sequence editing session can not be started while a sequence is running.

4045 No sequence buffer

An attempt was made to change a parameter in a sequence step when there were no

sequence steps in the current sequence being edited.

4100 Pattern index out of range

The selected index number for a drawing primitive’s fill pattern is less than zero or greater

than the highest number used by the current firmware.

4576 Can not convert to inches, not valid units

The format’s current physical units of measure (inches or millimeters) is unknown and the

firmware is unable to convert a dimension to inches.

4579 Can not convert to mm, not valid units

The format’s current physical units of measure (inches or millimeters) is unknown and the

firmware is unable to convert a dimension to millimeters.

5000-5999 Directory errors

5002 No directory memory

The DIRN or NAMI command failed because there is an insufficient amount of managed

memory for the buffer request.

5003 Directory memory full

The DIRA or DIRS command failed because there is insufficient room in the directory

memory pool for the requested save.

5006 No directory to save

An attempt was made to save the contents of a directory editing buffer when there was no

open directory editing session to save.

726 Appendix C Error Messages

5009 Directory list full

This occurs during DIRA and DIRS commands when attempting to save more directories

than supported by the current firmware.

5010 Invalid name index

The value of the <index> parameter used for a NAMQ? query is can not be zero(0).

6000-6999 Bitmap errors

6006 No map to save

An attempt was made to save the contents of a bit map editing buffer when there was no

open bit map editing session to save.

6020 Map not found

An attempt was made to access a bit map whose name can not be found in the

generator’s list of currently stored bitmaps

6030 Invalid map dimensions

A bit map can not have a horizontal or vertical dimension of less than one (1) pixel.

6035 Invalid map depth

The current firmware and/or generator hardware configuration does not support pixel

depth setting of the selected bit map.

6036 Map data index

An attempt was made to recall a bit map at an index location that is less than zero (0) or

greater than the highest index number in use for bit maps.

7000-7999 LUT errors

7006 No LUT to save

An attempt was made to save the contents of a color lookup table editing buffer when

there was no open color lookup table editing session to save.

7010 No LUT buffer

An attempt was made to modify the contents of a color lookup table editing buffer when

there was no open color lookup table buffer available.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 727

7011 Invalid LUT Index

An attempt was made to recall a color lookup table at an index location that is less than

zero (0) or greater than the highest index number in use for color lookup tables.

7020 LUT not found

8000-8999 Font errors

8450 Cannot remove font. Font not found.

Attempt to use FNTK command to delete a nonexistent font by name.

8455 Cannot remove built-in font

Attempt to use FNTK command to delete a built-in font.

8460 Font already exists in memory

Attempt made to transmit a font to the generator which already contained a font with the

same name.

9000-9999 System errors

9450 Corrupted format

Checksum error in data for a particular video format

9451 Bad location for format, failed verify

This occurs during FMTV command and FMTV? query when you attempt to verify data

integrity at an invalid location.

9452 Bad location for format verify

This occurs during a FMTZ? query when you try to determine if an invalid location has

been erased.

9453 Kill EPROM format

Can not delete factory default formats stored in EPROM

9453 Can not change EPROM contents

This occurs during FMTW or FMTZ commands when you try to overwrite or zero out an

EPROM format.

728 Appendix C Error Messages

9454 Bad location for format erase

This occurs during FMTE command when you try to access an invalid format memory

location.

9456 Bad location for format read/write

This occurs during FMTR or FMTW commands when you try to read or write to an invalid

format memory location.

9457 Bad location for format name read

This occurs during FMTR? query when you try to read or write to an invalid format

memory location.

9458 Bad location for format copy

This occurs during FMTD command when you try during copying to access an invalid

format memory location.

9459 Can not change EPROM contents

This occurs during FMTD command when you try during copying to overwrite an EPROM

format.

9460 Bad location for format duplicate

This occurs during FMTD and FMTI commands when you try to use one or more invalid

format memory locations as the command arguments.

9467 Bad location for format erase

This occurs during FMTZ command when you try to make one or more invalid format

memory locations as the command arguments.

9470 Can not change EPROM contents

An attempt was made to insert a format using the FMTI command into an EPROM format

memory location.

9471 Bad location for format yank

This occurs when you try to remove (yank) one or more formats from invalid format

memory locations using the FMTY command.

9472 Can not change EPROM contents

This occurs when you try to remove (yank) one or more formats from EPROM format

memory locations using the FMTY command.

9475 Can not change EPROM contents

One or more EPROM format locations was given as the destination location for the FMTD

command.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 729

9477 Error duplicating formats

The <first> memory location parameter used with the FMTD command is greater than the

<last> memory location parameter.

9480 Format not found / Format data missing

The FMTR command tried to read a format from an empty format storage location.

9490 DDC mod not present

The generator hardware configuration does not support DDC communications.

9491 DDC not available

The generator hardware configuration does not support DDC communications.

9492 DDC2B no ACK from receiver

Low level DDC communications failed with Unit Under Test (UUT). No DDC

acknowledgment bit was received from the UUT.

9493 DDC2B arbitration lost

Low level DDC communications failed with Unit Under Test (UUT). DDC bus arbitration

lost with the UUT.

9494 DDC2B timeout on bus

Low level DDC communications failed with Unit Under Test (UUT). DDC communications

timed out with the UUT.

9496 EDID header not found

A valid block of header data could not be found in the EDID data read back from Unit

Under Test (UUT).

9497 DDC old monitor

A DDC compliant Unit Under Test (UUT) could not be found connected to the generator.

9498 I2C address missing

There was a communications error within the generator hardware architecture because

the device address was missing.

9499 I2C count missing

There was a communications error within the generator hardware architecture because

the data count was missing.

730 Appendix C Error Messages

9500 I2C stream too big

There was a communications error within the generator hardware architecture because

the data stream size exceeded the size supported by the device.

9500 Sequence data not found

An attempt was made to use the SEQR command to read a sequence from an empty

sequence storage location.

9501 I2C data missing

There was a communications error within the generator hardware architecture because

the device data stream was missing.

9502 I2C register missing

There was a communications error within the generator hardware architecture.

9503 I2C data byte missing

There was a communications error within the generator hardware architecture because

the device data stream had missing data.

9504 Serial digital video PLL not locked

There is an internal problem with the generator’s serial digital video hardware’s Phase

Lock Loop circuit.

9505 TV output hardware not ready

The generator’s serial digital video generating hardware is not yet ready to output video

9506 Serial digital video hardware not ready

The generator’s TV signal generating hardware reports it is not yet ready to output valid

video

9507 I2C offset missing

There was a communications error within the generator hardware architecture

9508 Invalid HDCP receiver KSV

The HDCP Key Selection Vector returned from the HDCP receiver in the Unit Under Test

(UUT) is not valid.

9520 HDCP key combination not supported

The HDCP key combination between the Tx and the Rx is invalid. The Tx may have

production keys and the Rx public keys.

9521 HDCP failed after a while

The HDCP authentication started but failed after a while.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 731

9522 HDCP key combination not supported

The HDCP authentication did not start.

9523 HDCP production keys not supported

HDCP test initiated and specified production keys where are not supported in generator

option.

9524 Invalid transmitter KSV

HDCP video transmitter KSV sent by the generator is invalid.

9525 HDCP Ri value not ready

HDCP authentication cannot start because HDCP Ri value (link verification response) at

the transmitter is not ready.

9527 HDCP Ri do not match

HDCP authentication cannot start because HDCP Ri (link verification response) values at

the transmitter and receiver do not match.

9528 HDCP was interrupted

HDCP authentication was interrupted possibly by disconnecting the cable.

9529 HDCP receiver not detected

HDCP authentication failed to start because the hot plug was not detected.

9530 HDCP invalid for animation

HDCP test will not run when an animated image is loaded.

9531 I2C segment number missing

The segment number of the enhanced DDC bus is missing.

9532 I2C address 1 missing

The first address of the enhanced DDC bus is missing.

9533 I2C address 2 missing

The second address of the enhanced DDC bus is missing.

9600 Can not save format to EPROM

An attempt was made to save a format edit buffer’s contents to a location in the firmware

EPROM.

732 Appendix C Error Messages

10000-10999 System errors

10000 Out of memory

There is not enough unused battery backed user memory space to store the contents of

the given edit buffer

10010 Invalid file check sum

The data object file that has been recalled from the generator’s memory contains an

invalid checksum. Data may be corrupted.

10020 Invalid file version

The data object file that has been recalled from memory contains a file version number

that does not match the current firmware. Data may not be properly interpreted by the

firmware

10025 File type

The data object file that has been recalled from memory contains a file type identification

that is not supported by the current firmware.

10026 File size

The size of the data object file that has been recalled from memory does not match the

size information stored in the file’s header data.

10030 Feature not implemented

The generator hardware configuration does not support one or more settings in the video

format

10035 Video board not detected

An attempt was made to reprogram the firmware Flash EPROMs in a Model 822 series

generator without a video board installed. The video board’s memory is used as a buffer

for the initial uploading of the firmware data.

10100 Filename alias not found

An attempt was made to delete a filename alias that does not exist.

10200 Font not overwriteable

An attempt was made to save the contents of a font editing buffer to a location in the

firmware EPROM.

10205 Font save failed

There is not enough unused battery backed user memory space to store the contents of

the font editing buffer.

802BT/802R Video Test Generator User Guide 733

10210 Font table range

The recalled font data object contains a reference to a nonexistent table in the data object.

10215 Font table Index range

The recalled font data object contains a reference to a nonexistent location in one of the

tables in the data object.

10220 Font not found

An attempt was made to recall a font by name that is not stored in the generator.

10225 Can not delete font in EPROM

Ann attempt was made to delete a font stored in the firmware EPROM.

10230 Invalid font check mode

The current firmware does not support the selected test method on the contents of the font

edit buffer.

10235 No font definition

The recalled font does not contain valid font definition data need to determine the size

needed by the edit buffer.

10240 Font character high range

The character height setting of the font in the edit buffer is less than one or greater than

the maximum supported by the current firmware.

10241 Font ascent descent sum

The character height setting of the font in the edit buffer is does not match the sum of the

character ascent and descent settings

10242 Invalid font character range

The first or last character number setting of the font in the edit buffer is greater than the

maximum supported by the current firmware or the number of the first character is greater

than the number of the first character.

734 Appendix C Error Messages

Quantum Data 802Bt Users Manual Ug

802BT to the manual f5df4673-df5d-48e7-8517-1bfea67e2818

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation